Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

the+great+king

  • 41 Kittakima

    great king; (the word sakima, of which this is a compound, is no longer used. A.)

    Lenape - English dictionary > Kittakima

  • 42 महा _mahā

    1
    महा A cow.
    2
    महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note: The number of compounds of which महा is the first mem- ber is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.)
    -Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives.
    -अङ्ग a. huge, bulky.
    -(ङ्गः) 1 a camel.
    -2 a kind of rat.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -अञ्जनः N. of a mountain.
    -अत्ययः a great danger or calamity.
    -अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead.
    -अध्वरः a great sacrifice.
    -अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage.
    -2 cooking utensils. (
    -सी) a kitchen-maid. (
    -सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2.
    -अनिलः a whirl- wind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59.
    -अनुभाव a.
    1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3.
    -2 virtuous, righteous, just.
    (-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person.
    -2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century.
    -अन्तकः 1 death.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness.
    -2 gross (spiritual) ignorance.
    -अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country.
    -अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (
    -यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent.
    -अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma.
    -अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king).
    -अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva.
    -अम्बुजम् a billion.
    -अम्ल a. very sour. (
    -म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest.
    -अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (
    -र्घः) a kind of quail.
    -अर्घ्य a.
    1 valuable, precious.
    -2 invaluable; ines- timable; see महार्ह below.
    -अर्चिस् a. flaming high.
    -अर्णवः 1 the great ocean.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -अर्थ a.
    1 rich.
    -2 great, noble, dignified.
    -3 important, weighty.
    -4 significant.
    -अर्बुदम् one thousand millions.
    -अर्ह a.
    1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12.
    -2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (
    -र्हम्) white sandal-wood.
    -अवरोहः the fig-tree.
    -अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56.
    - अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4.
    -अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby.
    -अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता......
    -असिः a large sword.
    -असुरी N. of Durgā.
    -अह्नः the afternoon.
    -आकार a. extensive, large, great.
    -आचार्यः 1 a great teacher.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (
    -ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree.
    -आत्मन् a.
    1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4.
    -3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.)
    1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54.
    -2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्).
    -आनकः a kind of large drum.
    -आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss.
    -2 espe- cially, the great bliss of final beatitude.
    (-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha.
    -आपगा a great river.
    -आयुधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (
    -म्भः) any great enterprize.
    -आलयः 1 a temple in general.
    -2 a sanctuary, an asylum.
    -3 a great dwelling.
    -4 a place of pilgrimage.
    -5 the world of Brahman.
    -6 the Supreme Spirit.
    -7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity.
    -8 N. of a particular dark fortnight.
    -9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādra- pada. (
    -या) N. of a particular deity.
    - आशय a. high- souled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्.
    (-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7.
    -2 the ocean.
    -आस्पद a.
    1 occupying a great position.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -आहवः a great or tumultuous fight.
    -इच्छ a.
    1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33.
    -2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37.
    -इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7.
    -2 a chief or leader in general.
    -3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52.
    -इभ्य a. very rich.
    -इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16.
    -इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4.
    -ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree.
    -ईशानी N. of Pārvatī.
    -ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 a god (opp. प्रकृति).
    -5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55.
    (-री) 1 N. of Durgā.
    -2 a kind of bell-metal.
    -उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63.
    -उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (
    -लः) the Sārasa bird.
    -उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36.
    -2 the god of love.
    -उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं...... Mb.3.91.2.
    (-हः) 1 perseverance.
    -2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38.
    -उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17.
    -2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conch- shell, shell.
    - उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity.
    (-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence.
    -2 final beatitude.
    -3 a lord, master.
    -4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App.
    -5 N. of the capital of Kanouja.
    -6 sour milk mixed with honey.
    -7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या).
    - उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent.
    -(रम्) 1 a big belly.
    -2 dropsy.
    -उदार a.
    1 very generous or magnanimous.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते.
    -उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hard- working.
    -उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs).
    -उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (
    -तः) the palmyra tree.
    -उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank.
    -उपकारः a great obligation.
    -उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher.
    -उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98.
    -उरस्क a. broad-chested. (
    -स्कः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17.
    -उल्का 1 a great meteor.
    -2 a great fire-brand.
    -ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacri- ficial priests.
    -ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence.
    -ऋषभः a great bull.
    -ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage').
    -2 N. of Sacute;iva.
    -3 of Buddha.
    -ओघ a. having a strong current.
    -घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37.
    -ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (
    -ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour.
    -ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (
    -सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी).
    -ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी).
    -ओषधिः f.
    1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug.
    -2 the Dūrvā grass.
    -3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं....
    -औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea.
    -2 ginger.
    -3 garlic.
    -4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ).
    -कच्छः 1 the sea.
    -2 N. of Varuṇa.
    -3 a mountain.
    -कन्दः garlic.
    -कपर्दः a kind of shell.
    -कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree.
    -2 red garlic.
    -कम्बु a. stark naked. (
    -म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर a.
    1 large-handed.
    -2 having a large revenue.
    -कर्णः an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कला the night of the new moon.
    -कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69.
    -कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c.
    -2 an epithet of Śukra.
    -कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ).
    -कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (
    -ता) the earth.
    -काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky.
    (-यः) 1 an elephant.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि).
    -कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate.
    -कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika.
    -कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram.
    -2 N. of a cele- brated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -4 N. of a kind of gourd.
    -5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29.
    -काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form.
    -काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-- रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas).
    -कीर्तनम् a house.
    -कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent.
    -कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (
    -लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent.
    -कुहः a species of parasitical worm.
    -कृच्छ्रम् a great penance.
    -केतुः N. of Śiva.
    -केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 a large sheath.
    -क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46.
    -क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -क्षत्रपः a great satrap.
    -क्षीरः sugar-cane.
    -क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara.
    -खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?).
    -गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्.
    -गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa.
    -गदः fever.
    -गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (
    -न्धः) a kind of cane. (
    -न्धम्) a kind of sandal- wood. (
    -न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva.
    -गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी.
    -गल a. longnecked.
    -गवः Bos gavaeus.
    -गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (
    -णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue.
    -गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः).
    -गुल्मा the Soma plant.
    -गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump.
    -ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu.
    -2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6.
    -ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama.
    -ग्रीवः 1 a camel.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -ग्रीविन् m. a camel.
    -घूर्णा spirituous liquor.
    -घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes).
    -घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (
    -षम्) a market, fair. (
    -षः) a loud noise, clamour.
    -चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial.
    -चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch.
    -चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -चपला a kind of metre.
    -चमूः f. a large army.
    -छायः the fig-tree.
    -जङ्घः a camel.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा 1 a great braid of hair.
    -2 the matted hair of Śiva.
    -जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (
    -त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25.
    -2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7.
    -3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6.
    -4 the chief of a caste or trade.
    -5 a merchant, tradesman.
    -जवः an antelope.
    -जातीय a.
    1 rather large.
    -2 of an excellent kind.
    -जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी)
    -जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्ञानिन् m.
    1 a very learned man.
    -2 a great sage.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63.
    -ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्वरः great affliction.
    -ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a sacrificial fire.
    -डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.).
    -तपस् m.
    1 a great ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल.
    -तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess.
    -तिक्तः the Nimba tree.
    -तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation.
    -तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (
    -क्ष्णा) the marking- nut plant.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 possessed of great lustre or splendour.
    -2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.)
    1 a hero, warrior.
    -2 fire.
    -3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver.
    -त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva.
    -दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger.
    -दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -दण्डः 1 a long arm.
    -2 a severe punishment.
    -दम्भः an epithet of Śiva.
    -दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet.
    -दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्.
    -दारु n. the devadāru tree.
    -दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt.
    -दूषकः a kind of grain.
    -देवः N. of Śiva.
    (-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī.
    -2 the chief queen.
    -द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree.
    -द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple.
    -धन a.
    1 rich.
    -2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13.
    (-नम्) 1 gold.
    -2 incense.
    -3 a costly or rich dress.
    -4 agriculture, husbandry.
    -5 anything costly or precious.
    -6 great booty.
    -7 a great battle (Ved.).
    -धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -धातुः 1 gold.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 lymph.
    -4 N. of Meru.
    -धी a. having a great understanding.
    -धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox.
    -ध्वजः a camel.
    -ध्वनिक a. dead.
    -नग्नः an athlete; Buddh.
    -नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु...... तनोति...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās.
    -नदः a great river.
    -नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1.
    -2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal.
    -नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 N. of a river.
    -3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता....
    -नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells.
    -नलः a kind of reed.
    -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता.
    -नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D.:-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥
    -नाडी sinew, tendon.
    -नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar.
    -2 a great drum.
    -3 a thunder-cloud.
    -4 a shell.
    -5 an elephant.
    -6 a lion.
    -7 the ear.
    -8 a camel.
    -9 an epithet of Śiva. (
    -दम्) a musical instrument.
    -नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda.
    -2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा.
    -नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls.
    -2 a great head or chief.
    -नासः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निद्र a. fast asleep. (
    -द्रा) 'the great sleep', death.
    -निम्नम् intestines, abdomen.
    -नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists).
    -निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम्
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -नीचः a washerman.
    -नील a. dark-blue. (
    -लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire.
    -नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva.
    -नेमिः a crow.
    -न्यायः the chief rule.
    -पक्ष a.
    1 having many adherents.
    -2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179.
    (-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -2 a kind of duck. (
    -क्षी) an owl.
    -पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre.
    -पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥
    -पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥
    -पटः the skin.
    -पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3.
    -2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death.
    -3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven.
    -4 an epithet of Śiva.
    -5 the long pilgrimage to mount Ke- dāra.
    -6 the way to heaven.
    -7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra.
    -पथिक a.
    1 undertaking great journeys.
    -2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः)
    -पद्मः 1 a particular high number.
    -2 N. of Nārada.
    -3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera.
    -4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world.
    -5 an epithet of Nanda.
    -6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera.
    (-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus.
    -2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda.
    -पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch.
    -पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon.
    -पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324.
    -पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58.
    -पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154.
    -2 any great sin or transgression.
    -पात्रः a prime minister.
    -पादः an epithet of Śiva.
    -पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked.
    -पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P.
    -पुंसः a great man.
    -पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7.
    -2 the Supreme Spirit.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1.
    -पुष्पः a kind of worm.
    -पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions.
    -पृष्ठः a camel.
    -पोटगलः a kind of large reed.
    -प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper.
    -प्रपञ्चः the great universe.
    -प्रभ a. of great lustre. (
    -भः) the light of a lamp.
    -प्रभुः 1 a great lord.
    -2 a king, sovereign.
    -3 a chief.
    -4 an epithet of Indra.
    -5 of Śiva
    -6 of Viṣṇu.
    -7 a great saint or holy man.
    -प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inha- bitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत...... Ve.3.4.
    -प्रश्नः a knotty question.
    -प्रसादः 1 a great favour.
    -2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः
    -प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death.
    -2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365.
    -प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates.
    -2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-- ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्.
    -3 a raven.
    -प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K.
    -प्रेतः a noble departed spirit.
    -प्लवः a great flood, deluge;... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71.
    -फल a.
    1 bearing much fruit.
    -2 bringing much reward.
    (-ला) 1 a bitter gourd.
    -2 a kind of spear.
    (-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward.
    -2 a testicle.
    -फेना the cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet.
    -बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes.
    -बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām
    (-लः) 1 wind, storm.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -3 a solid bamboo.
    -4 a palm.
    -5 a crocodile.
    -बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (
    -लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara.
    -बाध a. causing great pain or damage.
    -बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (
    -हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere.
    -2 the heart.
    -3 a water-jar, pitcher.
    -4 a hole, cave.
    -बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas.
    -बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva.
    -बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum.
    -बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain).
    -बुशः barley.
    -बृहती a kind of metre.
    -बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit.
    -ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa.
    -भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg.
    -भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā.
    -भाग a.
    1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, glo- rious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192.
    -3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16.
    -भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity.
    -2 great excel- lence or merit.
    -भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (
    -तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu.
    -भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous.
    -भाण्डम् a chief treasury.
    -भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते
    -भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary.
    -2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.
    -भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni.
    -भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू).
    -भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu.
    -भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly.
    -भुज a. long-armed, powerful.
    -भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6.
    (-तः) 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 a great creature.
    -भोगः 1 a great enjoyment.
    -2 a great coil or hood; great winding.
    -3 a serpent. (
    -गा) an epi- thet of Durgā.
    -मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -मति a.
    1 high-minded.
    -2 clever. (
    -तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter.
    -मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster.
    -मद a. greatly intoxicated. (
    -दः) an elephant in rut.
    -मनस्, -मनस्क a.
    1 high-minded, noble- minded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7.
    -2 liberal.
    -3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v.
    -मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas.
    -2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell.
    -मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier.
    -मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess.
    -मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi.
    -महः a great festive procession; Sinhās.
    -महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky).
    -महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor.
    -2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c.
    -मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.).
    -माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha.
    -मात्र a.
    1 great in measure, very great or large.
    -2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37.
    (-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high state- official, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1.
    -2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161.
    -3 a superintendent of elephants.
    (-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister.
    -2 the wife of a spiritual teacher.
    -मानसी N. of a Jain goddess.
    -मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6.
    -मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent.
    -2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya.
    -मायूरम् a particular drug. (
    -री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh.
    -मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads.
    -मालः N. of Śiva.
    -माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva.
    -मुखः a crocodile.
    -मुद्रा a parti- cular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga).
    -मुनिः 1 a great sage.
    -2 N. of Vyāsa.
    -3 an epithet of Buddha.
    -4 of Agastya.
    -5 the coriander plant. (
    -नि n.)
    1 coriander seed.
    -2 any medicinal herb or drug.
    -मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -मूलम् a large radish. (
    -लः) a kind of onion.
    -मूल्य a. very costly. (
    -ल्यः) a ruby.
    -मृगः 1 any large animal.
    -2 an elephant,
    -3 the fabulous animal called शरभ.
    -मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva.
    -मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug.
    -मृधम् a great battle.
    -मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P.
    -मेधा an epithet of Durgā.
    -मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (
    -हा) an epithet of Durgā.
    -यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.).
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19.
    -यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated.
    -यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares.
    -यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promul- gated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान).
    -याम्यः an epi- thet of Viṣṇu.
    -युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men.
    -योगिन् m.
    1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -3 a cock.
    -योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ.
    -रक्तम् coral.
    -रङ्गः a large stage.
    -रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28.
    -2 the thorn-apple.
    -रजनम् 1 safflower.
    -2 gold.
    -3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6.
    -रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56.
    -रथः 1 a great chariot.
    -2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥).
    -3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ.
    -रवः a frog.
    -रस a. very savoury.
    (-सः) 1 a sugar- cane.
    -2 quicksilver.
    -3 a precious mineral.
    -4 the fruit of the date tree.
    -5 any one of the eight substan- ces given below:-- दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (
    -सम्) sour ricewater.
    -राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184.
    -2 a respect- ful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb.
    -3 a deified Jaina teacher.
    -4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, para- mount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree.
    -राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.).
    -राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign.
    -राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king.
    -2 N. of Durgā.
    -रात्रम् midnight, dead of night.
    -रात्रिः, -त्री f.
    1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः.
    -2 midnight.
    -3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina.
    -राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās.
    -2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (
    -ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-- महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34.
    -रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains.
    -रुज्, -ज a. very painful.
    -रुद्रः a form of Śiva.
    -रुरुः a species of antelope.
    -रूप a. mighty in form.
    (-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 resin.
    -रूपकम् a kind of drama.
    -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight:-- उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥).
    -रौद्र a. very dreadful. (
    -द्री) an epithet of Durgā.
    -रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9.
    -लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्.
    -2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival.
    -लयः 1 a great world destruction.
    -2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्).
    -लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (
    -ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -लोलः a crow.
    -लोहम् a magnet.
    -वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century).
    -वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva.
    -वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana.
    -वरा Dūrvā grass.
    -वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation.
    -वर्तनम् high wages;
    -वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper.
    -2 a large creeping plant.
    -वसः the porpoise.
    -वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence.
    -2 any continuous composition or literary work.
    -3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c.
    -4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25.
    -वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावाता<?>तैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22.
    -वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant.
    -वायुः 1 air (as an element).
    -2 stormy wind, hur- ricane, tempest.
    -वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras.
    -विडम् a kind of factitious salt.
    -विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy.
    -विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः... ॥
    -विपुला a kind of metre.
    -विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः.
    -विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva.
    -विषः a serpent having two mouths.
    -विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries).
    -विस्तर a. very extensive or copious.
    -वीचिः N. of a hell.
    -वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior.
    -2 a lion.
    -3 the thunderbolt of Indra.
    -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -5 of Garuḍa.
    -6 of Hanumat.
    -7 a cuckoo.
    -8 a white horse.
    -9 a sacrificial fire.
    -1 a sacrificial vessel.
    -11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti.
    -वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful.
    (-र्यः) 1 N. of Brah- man.
    -2 the Supreme Being. (
    -र्या) the wild cotton shrub.
    -2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun.
    -वृषः a great bull.
    -वेग a.
    1 very swift or fleet.
    (-गः) 1 great speed, excessive velocity.
    -2 an ape.
    -3 the bird Garuḍa.
    -वेघः a particular position of hands or feet (in the practice of Yoga).
    -वेल a. billowy.
    -व्याधिः f.
    1 a great disease.
    -2 a very bad kind of leprosy (black leprosy).
    -व्याहृतिः f. a great mystical word, i. e. भूर्, भुवस् and स्वर्.
    -व्रत a. very devotional, rigidly observing vows.
    (-तम्) 1 a great vow, a great reli- gious observance; a vow for not taking even water for a month; महाव्रतं चरेद्यस्तु Mb.12.35.22 (com. महाव्रतं मासमात्रं जलस्यापि त्यागः).
    -2 any great or funda- mental duty; प्राणैरपि हिता वृत्तिरद्रोहो व्याजवर्जनम् । आत्मनीव प्रियाधानमेतन्मैत्रीमहाव्रतम् Mv.5.59; क्रतौ महाव्रते पश्यन् ब्रह्मचारी- त्वरीरतम् N.17.23.
    -व्रतिन् m.
    1 a devotee, an ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -शक्तिः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Kārtikeya.
    -शङ्कुः the sine of the sun's eleva- tion.
    -शङ्खः 1 a great conch-shell; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं Bg.1.15; महाशङ्खमयी माला ताराविद्याजपे प्रिया Tantra.
    -2 the temporal bone, forehead.
    -3 a human bone.
    -4 a particular high number.
    -5 one of Kubera's treasures.
    -शठः a kind of thorn-apple.
    -शब्द a. making a loud sound, very noisy, boisterous.
    -शल्कः a kind of sea- crab or prawn; Ms.3.272.
    -शालः a great householder.
    -शालिः a kind of large and sweetsmelling rice.
    -शाल्वणम् ('great fomentation') N. of a remedy; Suśr.
    -शासन a.
    1 exercising great power.
    -2 whose commands are great; त्रैलोक्यघिपतित्वमेव विरसं यस्मिन् महा- शासने Bh.3.8.
    (-नम्) 1 the knowledge of Brahma as expounded in the Upaniṣadas.
    -2 great order of government.
    -शिरस् m. a kind of serpent.
    -शिवरात्रिः N. of a festival on the 14th day of the dark half of Māgha,
    -शुक्तिः f. a pearl-shell.
    -शुक्ला an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -शुभ्रम् silver.
    -शूद्रः (-द्री f.)
    1 a Sūdra in a high position.
    -2 a cowherd.
    -3 an upper servant. (
    -द्री) a female cow-keeper. (
    -द्रा) a Śudra woman in a high position.
    -शून्यम् a particular mental condi- tion of a Yogin.
    -शृङ्गः 1 a species of stag.
    -2 the शरभ animal.
    -श्मशानम् an epithet of Benares.
    -श्यामा the Sissoo tree. (Mar. शिसवी).
    -श्रमणः 1 an epithet of Buddha.
    -2 a Jain monk.
    -श्लक्ष्णा sand.
    -श्वासः a kind of asthma.
    -श्वेता 1 an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -2 of Durgā.
    -3 white sugar.
    -संहिता great combi- nation.
    -संक्रान्तिः f. the winter solstice.
    -सती a very chaste woman.
    -सत्ता absolute existence.
    -सत्यः an epithet of Yama.
    -सत्त्व a.
    1 noble.
    -2 very strong or powerful.
    -3 just, righteous.
    (-त्त्वः) 1 a large animal.
    -2 N. of Sākyamuni.
    -3 an epithet of Kubera.
    -संधिविग्रहः the office of the minister of peace and war.
    -सन्नः an epithet of Kubera.
    -सन्निः m. (in music) a kind of measure.
    -समुद्रः the great ocean.
    -सर्गः a great or completely new creation (after a complete destruction of the world).
    -सर्जः the bread- fruit or jack-tree.
    -साधनभागः a great executive officer.
    -सांतपनः a kind of very rigid penance; see Ms.11. 218.
    -सांधिविग्रहिकः a minister of peace and war.
    -सामन्तः a great vassal.
    -सामान्यम् the widest genera- lity.
    -सारः a kind of Khadira tree.
    -सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa.
    -साहसम् great violence or outrage, great audacity.
    -साहसिकः a dacoit, highwayman, a daring robber.
    -सिंहः the fabulous animal called Śarabha.
    -सिद्धिः f. a kind of magical power.
    -सुखम् 1 great pleasure.
    -2 copulation. (
    -खः) a Buddha.
    -सुगन्धम् a fragrant unguent.
    -सुगन्धिः a kind of antidote.
    -सुधा silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -सुभिक्षम् good times.
    -सूक्तः the composer of the great Sūktas or hymns of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda.
    -सूक्ष्मा sand.
    -सूतः a mili- tary drum.
    -सेनः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya; महासेन- प्रसूतिं तद्ययौ शरवणं महत् Rām.7.16.1.
    -2 the commander of a large army. (
    -ना) a great army.
    -स्कन्धः a camel.
    -स्थली the earth.
    -स्थानम् a great position.
    -स्नेहः a combination of the 4 kinds of fat.
    -स्मृतिः the Ṣaḍaṅgas and Smṛitis; महास्मृतिं पठेद्यस्तु तथैवानुस्मृतिं शुभाम् Mb.12.2.3.
    -स्रोतस् n. the bowels.
    -स्रग्विन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वनः a kind of drum.
    -हंसः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -हविस् n. clarified butter.
    -हस्तः an epithet of Śiva.
    -हासः a loud or boisterous laughter, cachinnation.
    -हिमवत् m. N. of a mountain.
    -ह्रस्वा N. of a plant (Mar. कुहिली).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > महा _mahā

  • 43 AT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    1.
    and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.
    Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.
    WITH DAT.
    A. LOC.
    I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:
    1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.
    2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.
    3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)
    4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.
    5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.
    β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.
    6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.
    β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.
    γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.
    7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.
    β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.
    8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.
    β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.
    II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.
    2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.
    3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:
    α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.
    β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.
    γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.
    4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.
    5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.
    6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.
    β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.
    γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.
    7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.
    B. TEMP.
    I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.
    II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.
    β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.
    III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:
    1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,
    2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.
    IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:
    1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.
    2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.
    3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.
    V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.
    2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.
    C. METAPH. and in various cases:
    I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:
    α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.
    β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.
    II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.
    2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.
    III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.
    IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.
    2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)
    3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.
    4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.
    5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.
    6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.
    β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.
    V. denoting the source of a thing:
    1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.
    2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.
    VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.
    VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.
    VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.
    β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.
    IX. following many words:
    1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.
    β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …
    γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.
    δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.
    2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.
    3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.
    WITH ACC.
    TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.
    ☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.
    2.
    and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.
    I. it is used either,
    1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,
    2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.
    β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).
    3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.
    II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:
    α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.
    β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.
    γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.
    δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.
    ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.
    ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.
    η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.
    θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.
    3.
    and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.
    I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.
    II. it is used,
    1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.
    2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.
    β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.
    γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.
    III. used in connection with conjunctions,
    1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.
    α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.
    β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.
    γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.
    2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.
    IV. as a relat. conj.:
    1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.
    2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.
    V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.
    4.
    and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.
    5.
    n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.
    β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.
    6.
    the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

  • 44 सु _su

    1
    सु I. 1 U. (सुवति-ते) To go, move. -II. 1, 2 P. (सवति, सौति) To possess power or supremacy. -III. 5. U. (सुनोति, सुनुते; सुत; the स् of सु is changed to ष् after any preposition ending in इ or उ)
    1 To press out or extract juice.
    -2 To distil.
    -3 To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation.
    -4 To perform a sacrifice especially the Soma (sacrifice).
    -5 To bathe.
    -6 To churn. -Desid. (सुषूषति-ते) -- With उद् to excite, agitate. -प्र to produce, beget.
    2
    सु ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhī compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the following senses:--
    1 Well, good, excellent; as in सुगन्धि.
    -2 Beautiful, handsome; as in सुमध्यमा, सुकेशी &c.
    -3 Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; सुजीर्णमन्नं सुविचक्षणः सुतः सुशासिता स्त्री नृपतिः सुसेवितः......सुदीर्घकाले$पि न याति विक्रियाम् H.1.22.
    -4 Easily, readily, as in सुकर or सुलभ q. v.
    -5 Much, very much, exceedingly; सुदारुण, सुदीर्घ &c.
    -6 Worthy of respect or reverence.
    -7 It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and distress.
    -Comp. -अक्ष a.
    1 having good eyes.
    -2 having keen organs, acute.
    -अङ्ग a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely.
    -अच्छ a. see s. v.
    -अन्त a. having happy end, ending well.
    -अल्प, -अल्पक a. see s. v.
    -अस्ति, -अस्तिक see s. v.
    -आकार, -आकृति a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful.
    - आगत see s. v.
    -आदानम् taking justly or properly; स्वादानाद्वर्णसंसर्गात्त्वबलानां च रक्षणात् । बलं संजायते राज्ञः स प्रेत्येह च वर्धते ॥ Ms.8.172.
    -आभास a. very splendid or illustrious; सारतो न विरोधी नः स्वाभासो भरवानुत Ki.15. 22.
    -इष्ट a. properly sacrificed; स्विष्टं यजुर्भिः प्रणतो$स्मि यज्ञम् Bhāg.4.7.41. ˚कृत् m. a form of fire; धर्मादिभ्यो यथान्यायं मन्त्रैः स्विष्टकृतं बुधः Bhāg.11.27.41.
    -उक्त a. well-spoken, well-said; अथवा सूक्तं खलु केनापि Ve.3. (
    -क्ता) a kind of bird (सारिका).
    (-क्तम्) 1 a good or wise saying; नेतुं वाञ्छति यः खलान् पथि सतां सूक्तैः सुधा- स्यन्दिभिः Bh.2.6; R.15.97.
    -2 a Vedic hymn, as in पुरुषसूक्त &c. ˚दर्शिन् m. a hymn-seer, Vedic sage. ˚वाकन्यायः A rule of interpretation according to which some thing that is declared as being subordinate to some- thing else should be understood to signify a part or whole on the basis of expediency or utility. This is discussed by जैमिनि and शबर at MS.3.2.15-18. ˚वाच् f.
    1 a hymn.
    -2 praise, a word of praise.
    -उक्तिः f.
    1 a good or friendly speech.
    -2 a good or clever saying.
    -3 a correct sentence.
    -उत्तर a.
    1 very superior.
    -2 well towards the north.
    -उत्थान a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. (
    -नम्) vigorous effort or exertion.
    -उन्मद, -उन्माद a. quite mad or frantic.
    - उपसदन a. easy to be approached.
    -उपस्कर a. furnished with good instruments.
    -कण्टका the aloe plant.
    -कण्ठ a. sweet- voiced. (
    -ण्ठी) the female cuckoo.
    -कण्डुः itch.
    -कन्दः 1 an onion.
    -2 a yam.
    -3 a sort of grass.
    -कन्दकः onion.
    -कर a. (
    -रा or
    -री f.)
    1 easy to be done, practi- cable, feasible; वक्तुं सुकरं कर्तुं (अध्यवसातुं) दुष्करम् Ve.3 'sooner said than done'.
    -2 easy to be managed. (
    -रः) a good-natured horse. (
    -रा) a tractable cow. (
    -रम्) charity, benevolence.
    -कर्मन् a.
    1 one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good.
    -2 active, diligent. (-m.) N. of Visvakarman.
    -कल a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in giving and using (money &c,)
    -कलिल a. well filled with.
    -कल्प a. very qualified or skilled; कालेन यैर्वा विमिताः सुकल्पैर्भूपांसवः खे मिहिका द्युभासः Bhāg.1.14.7.
    -कल्पित a. well equip- ped or armed.
    -कल्य a. perfectly sound.
    -काण्डः the Kāravella plant.
    -काण्डिका the Kāṇḍīra creeper.
    -काण्डिन् a.
    1 having beautiful stems.
    -2 beautifully joined. (-m.) a bee.
    -काष्ठम् fire-wood.
    -कुन्दकः an onion.
    -कुमार a.
    1 very delicate or soft, smooth.
    -2 beautifully young or youthful.
    (-रः) 1 a beautiful youth.
    -2 a kind of sugar-cane.
    -3 a kind of grain (श्यामाक).
    -4 a kind of mustard.
    -5 the wild Cham- paka.
    (-रा) 1 the double jasmine.
    -2 the plantain.
    -3 the great-flowered jasmine.
    -कुमारकः 1 a beauti- ful youth.
    -2 rice (शालि).
    (-कम्) 1 the Tamāla- patra.
    -2 a particutar part of the ear.
    -कुमारी the Navamallikā jasmine.
    -कृत् a.
    1 doing good, benevolent.
    -2 pious, virtuous, righteous.
    -3 wise, learned.
    -4 for- tunate, lucky.
    -5 making good sacrifices or offerings. (-m.)
    1 a skilful worker.
    -2 N. of Tvaṣṭri.
    -कृत a.
    1 done well or properly.
    -2 thoroughly done; कच्चिन्नु सुकृतान्येव कृतरूपाणि वा पुनः । विदुस्ते सर्वकार्याणि Rām.2.1.2.
    -3 well made or constructed.
    -4 treated with kindness, assisted, befriended.
    -5 virtuous, righteous, pious.
    -6 lucky, fortunate.
    (-तम्) 1 any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service; नादत्ते कस्यचित् पापं न चैव सुकृतं विभुः Bg.5.15; Me.17.
    -2 virtue, moral or religious merit; स्वर्गाभिसंधिसुकृतं वञ्चनामिव मेनिरे Ku.6.47; तच्चिन्त्यमानं सुकृतं तवेति R.14.16.
    -3 fortune, auspiciousness.
    -4 recompense, reward.
    -5 Penance; तदभूरिवासरकृतं सुकृतैरुप- लभ्य वैभवमनन्यभवम् Ki.6.29.
    -कृतिः f.
    1 well-doing, a good act.
    -2 kindness, virtue.
    -3 practice of penance.
    -4 auspiciousness.
    -कृतिन् a.
    1 acting well or kindly.
    -2 virtuous, pious, good, righteous; सन्तः सन्तु निरापदः सुकृतिनां कीर्तिश्चिरं वर्धताम् H.4.132; चतुर्विधा भजन्ते मां जनाः सुकृतिनो$र्जुन Bg.7.16.
    -3 wise, learned.
    -4 benevolent.
    -5 fortunate, lucky.
    -कृत्यम् a good action; सुकृत्यं विष्णु- गुप्तस्य मित्राप्तिर्भार्गवस्य च Pt.2.45.
    -केश(स)रः the citron tree.
    -क्रतुः 1 N. of Agni.
    -2 of Śiva.
    -3 of Indra.
    -4 of Mitra and Varuṇa.
    -5 of the sun.
    -6 of Soma.
    -क्रयः a fair bargain.
    -क्षेत्र a. sprung from a good womb.
    -खल्लिका luxurious life.
    -ग a.
    1 going gracefully or well.
    -2 graceful, elegant.
    -3 easy of access; अकृत्यं मन्यते कृत्यमगम्यं मन्यते सुगम् । अभक्ष्यं मन्यते भक्ष्यं स्त्रीवाक्यप्रेरितो नरः ॥ Pt.2.148.
    -4 intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. दुर्ग). (
    -गः) a Gandharva; गीतैः सुगा वाद्यधराश्च वाद्यकैः Bhāg.1.12.34.
    (-गम्) 1 ordure, feces.
    -2 happiness.
    -गण् m. a good calculator; L. D. B. -a. counting well.
    -गणकः a good calculator or astronomer.
    -गत a.
    1 well-gone or passed.
    -2 well-bestowed. (
    -तः) an epithet of Buddha.
    -गतिः 1 Welfare, hap- piness.
    -2 a secure refuge.
    -गन्धः 1 fragrance, odour, perfume.
    -2 sulphur.
    -3 a trader.
    (-न्धम्) 1 sandal.
    -2 small cumin seed.
    -3 a blue lotus.
    -4 a kind of fragrant grass. (
    -न्धा) sacred basil.
    -गन्धकः 1 sulphur.
    -2 the red Tulasee.
    -3 the orange.
    -4 a kind of gourd,
    -गन्धमूला a land-growing lotus-plant; L. D. B.
    -गन्धारः an epithet of Śiva.
    -गन्धि a.
    1 sweet-smelling, fra- grant, redolent with perfumes.
    -2 virtuous, pious.
    (-न्धिः) 1 perfume, fragrance.
    -2 the Supreme Being.
    -3 a kind of sweet-smelling mango. (
    -न्धि n.)
    1 the root of long pepper.
    -2 a kind of fragrant grass.
    -3 cori- ander seed. ˚त्रिफला
    1 nutmeg.
    -2 areca nut.
    -3 cloves. ˚मूलम् the root Uśīra. ˚मूषिका the musk-rat.
    -गन्धिकः 1 incense.
    -2 sulphur.
    -3 a kind of rice. (
    -कम्) the white lotus.
    -गम a.
    1 easy of access, accessible.
    -2 easy.
    -3 plain, intelligible.
    -गरम् cinnabar.
    -गहना an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane access. ˚वृत्तिः f. the same as above.
    -गात्री a beautiful woman.
    -गृद्ध a. intensely longing for.
    -गृह a. (
    -ही f.) having a beautiful house or abode, well-lodged; सुगृही निर्गृहीकृता Pt.1.39.
    -गृहीत a.
    1 held well or firmly, grasped.
    -2 used or applied properly or auspiciously. ˚नामन् a.
    1 one whose name is auspiciously invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhi- ṣṭhira), a term used as a respectful mode of speaking; सुगृहीतनाम्नः भट्टगोपालस्य पौत्रः Māl.1.
    -ग्रासः a dainty mor- sel.
    -ग्रीव a. having a beautiful neck.
    (-वः) 1 a hero.
    -2 a swan.
    -3 a kind of weapon.
    -4 N. of one of the four horses of Kṛiṣṇa.
    -5 of Śiva.
    -6 of Indra.
    -7 N. of a monkey-chief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha, Rāma went to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therfore, killed vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.] ˚ईशः N. of Rāma; सुग्रीवेशः कटी पातु Rāma-rakṣā.8.
    -ग्ल a. very weary or fatigued.
    -घोष a. having a pleasant sound. (
    -षः) N. of the conch of Nakula; नकुलः सहदेवश्च सुघोषमणपुष्पकौ Bg.1.16.
    -चक्षुस् a. having good eyes, seeing well. (-m.)
    1 discerning or wise man, learned man.
    -2 The glomerous fig-tree.
    -चरित, -चरित्र a.
    1 well-conducted, well-behaved; वृषभैकादशा गाश्च दद्यात् सुचरितव्रतः Ms.11.116.
    -2 moral, virtuous; तान् विदित्वा सुचरितैर्गूढैस्तत्कर्मकारिभिः Ms.9.261. (
    -तम्, -त्रम्) 1 good conduct, virtuous deeds.
    -2 merit; तव सुचरितमङ्गुलीय नूनं प्रतनु Ś.6.1. (
    -ता, -त्रा) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife.
    -चर्मन् m. the Bhūrja tree.
    -चित्रकः 1 a king fisher.
    -2 a kind of speckled snake.
    -चित्रा a kind of gourd.
    -चिन्ता, -चिन्तनम् deep thought, deep reflection or consideration.
    -चिरम् ind. for a very long time, very long.
    -चिरायुस् m. a god, deity.
    -चुटी a pair of nippers or tongs.
    -चेतस् a.
    1 well-minded.
    -2 wise.
    -चेतीकृत a. with the heart satiated; well- disposed; ततः सुचेतीकृतपौरभृत्यः Bk.3.2.
    -चेलकः a fine cloth.
    -च्छद a. having beautiful leaves.
    -छत्रः N. of Śiva. (
    -त्रा) the river Sutlej.
    -जन a.
    1 good, virtuous, respectable.
    -2 kind, benevolent.
    (-नः) 1 a good or virtuous man, benevolent man.
    -2 a gentleman.
    -3 N. of Indra's charioteer.
    -जनता 1 goodness, kind- ness, benevolence, virtue; ऐश्वर्यस्य विभूषणं सुजनता Bh.2. 82.
    -2 a number of good men.
    -3 bravery.
    -जन्मन् a.
    1 of noble or respectable birth; या कौमुदी नयनयोर्भवतः सुजन्मा Māl.1.34.
    -2 legitimate, lawfully born.
    -जलम् a lotus.
    -जल्पः 1 a good speech.
    -2 a kind of speech thus described by Ujjvalamaṇi; यत्रार्जवात् सगाम्भीर्यं सदैन्यं सहचापलम् । सोत्कण्ठं च हरिः स्पृष्टः स सुजल्पो निगद्यते ॥
    -जात a.
    1 well-grown, tall.
    -2 well made or produced.
    -3 of high birth.
    -4 beautiful, lovely; सुजातं कल्याणी भवतु कृत- कृत्यः स च युवा Māl.1.16; R.3.8.
    -5 very delicate; खिद्यत् सुजाताङ्घ्रितलामुन्निन्ये प्रेयसीं प्रियः Bhāg.1.3.31.
    -डीनकम् a kind of flight of birds; Mb.8.41.27 (com. पश्चाद् गतिः पराडीनं स्वर्गगं सुडीनकम्).
    -तनु a.
    1 having a beautiful body.
    -2 extremely delicate or slender, very thin.
    -3 emaciated. (
    -नुः, -नूः f.) a lovely lady; एताः सुतनु मुखं ते सख्यः पश्यन्ति हेमकूटगताः V.1.1; Ś.7.24.
    -तन्त्री a.
    1 well-stringed.
    -2 (hence) melodious.
    -तपस् a.
    1 one who practises austere penance; a वानप्रस्थ; स्विष्टिः स्वधीतिः सुतपा लोकाञ्जयति यावतः Mb.12.71.3.
    -2 having great heat. (-m.)
    1 an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite.
    -2 the sun. (-n.) an austere penance.
    -तप्त a.
    1 greatly harassed, afflicted.
    -2 very severe (as a penance); तपसैव सुतप्तेन मुच्यन्ते किल्बिषात्ततः Ms.11.239.
    -तमाम् ind. most excellently, best.
    -तराम् ind.
    1 bet- ter, more excellently.
    -2 exceedingly, very, very much, excessively; तया दुहित्रा सुतरां सवित्री स्फुरत्प्रभामण्डलया चकाशे Ku.1.24; सुतरां दयालुः R.2.53;7.21;14.9;18.24.
    -3 more so, much more so; मय्यप्यास्था न ते चेत्त्वयि मम सुतरा- मेष राजन् गतो$ स्मि Bh.3.3.
    -4 consequently.
    -तर्दनः the (Indian) cuckco.
    -तर्मन् a. good for crossing over; सुतर्माणमधिनावं रुहेम Ait. Br.1.13; (cf. also यज्ञो वै सुतर्मा).
    -तलम् 1 'immense depth', N. of one of the seven regi- ons below the earth; see पाताल; (याहि) सुतलं स्वर्गीभिः प्रार्थ्यं ज्ञातिभिः परिवारितः Bhāg.8.22.33.
    -2 the foundation of a large building.
    -तान a. melodious.
    -तार a.
    1 very bright.
    -2 very loud; सुतारैः फूत्कारैः शिव शिव शिवेति प्रतनुमः Bh.3.2.
    -3 having a beautiful pupil (as an eye). (
    -रः) a kind of perfume. (
    -रा) (in Sāṁkhya) one of the nine kinds of acquiescence.
    -तिक्तकः the coral tree.
    -तीक्ष्ण a.
    1 very sharp.
    -2 very pungent.
    -3 acutely painful.
    (-क्ष्णः) 1 the Śigru tree.
    -2 N. of a sage; नाम्ना सुतीक्ष्णश्चरितेन दान्तः R.13.41. ˚दशनः an epithet of Śiva.
    -तीर्थः 1 a good preceptor.
    -2 N. of Śiva. -a. easily crossed or traversed.
    -तुङ्ग a. very lofty or tall.
    (-ङ्गः) 1 the cocoa-nut tree.
    -2 the culminating point of a planet.
    -तुमुल a. very loud.
    -तेजन a. well-pointed, sharpened. (
    -नः) a well-pointed arrow.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 very sharp.
    -2 very bright, or splendid.
    -3 very mighty. (-m.) a worshipper of the sun.
    -दक्षिण a.
    1 very sincere or upright.
    -2 liberal or rich in sacrificial gifts; यज्ञैर्भूरिसुदक्षिणैः सुविहितैः संप्राप्यते यत् फलम् Pt.1. 31.
    -3 very skilful.
    -4 very polite. (
    -णा) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; तस्य दाक्षिण्यरूढेन नाम्ना मगधवंशजा पत्नी सुदक्षिणेत्यासीत् R.1.31;3.1.
    -दण्डः a cane, ratan.
    -दत् a. (
    -ती f.) having handsome teeth; जगाद भूयः सुदतीं सुनन्दा R.6.37.
    -दन्तः 1 a good tooth.
    -2 an actor; a dancer. (
    -न्ती) the female elephant of the north-west quarter.
    -दर्श a. lovely, gracious looking; सुदर्शः स्थूललक्षयश्च न भ्रश्येत सदा श्रियः Mb.12.56.19 (com. सुदर्शः प्रसन्नवक्त्रः).
    -दर्शन a. (
    -ना or
    -नी f.)
    1 good-looking, beautiful, handsome.
    -2 easily seen. (
    -नः) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in कृष्णो$प्यसु- दर्शनः K.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of mount Meru.
    -4 a vul- ture. (
    -नी, -नम्) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra's capital. (
    -नम्) N. of Jambudvīpa.
    -दर्शना 1 a handsome wo- man.
    -2 a woman.
    -3 an order, a command.
    -4 a kind of drug.
    -दास् a. very bountiful.
    -दान्तः a Buddhist.
    -दामन् a. one who gives liberally. (-m.)
    1 a cloud.
    -2 a moun- tain.
    -3 the sea.
    -4 N. of Indra's elephant.
    -5 N. of a very poor Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvārakā with only a small quantity of parched rice as a present to his friend Kṛiṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and glory.
    -दायः 1 a good or auspicious gift.
    -2 a special gift given on particular solemn occasions.
    -3 one who offers such a gift.
    -दिनम् 1 a happy or auspicious day.
    -2 a fine day or weather (opp दुर्दिनम्); so सुदिनाहम् in the same sense.
    -दिह् a. well-polished, bright.
    -दीर्घ a. very long or extended. (
    -र्घा) a kind of cucumber.
    -दुराधर्ष a.
    1 very hard to get.
    -2 quite intolerable.
    -दुरावर्त a. a very hard to be convinced.
    -दुरासद a. unapproachable.
    -दुर्जर a. very difficult to be digested.
    -दुर्मनस् a. very troubled in mind.
    -दुर्मर्ष a. quite in- tolerable.
    -दुर्लभ a. very scarce or rare.
    -दुश्चर a.
    1 inaccessible.
    -2 very painful.
    -दुश्चिकित्स a. very difficult to be cured.
    -दुष्प्रभः a chameleon.
    -दूर a. very distant or remote. (
    -सुदूरम् means
    1 to a great distance.
    -2 to a very high degree, very much; सुदूरं पीडयेत् कामः शरद्गुणनिरन्तरः Rām.4.3.12.
    -सुदूरात् 'from afar, from a distance').
    -दृढ a. very firm or hard, compact.
    -दृश् a. having beautiful eyes. (-f.) a pretty woman.
    -देशिकः a good guide.
    -धन्वन् a. having an excellent bow. (-m.)
    1 a good archer or bowman.
    -2 Ananta, the great serpent.
    -3 N. of Viśvakarman. ˚आचार्यः a mixed caste; वैश्यात्तु जायते व्रात्यात् सुधन्वाचार्य एव च Ms.1.23.
    -धर्मन् a. attentive to duties. (-f.) the council or assembly of gods. (-m.)
    1 the hall or palace of Indra.
    -2 one diligent in properly maintaining his family.
    -धर्मा, -र्मी 1 the council or assembly of gods (देवसभा); ययावुदीरितालोकः सुधर्मानवमां सभाम् R.17.27.
    -2 (सुधर्मा) N. of Dvārakā; दिवि भुव्यन्तरिक्षे च महोत्पातान् समु- त्थितान् । दृष्ट्वासीनान् सुधर्मायां कृष्णः प्राह यदूनिदम् ॥ Bhāg.11.3. 4;1.14.34.
    -धात a. well cleaned.
    -धार a. well-pointed (as an arrow).
    -धित a. Ved.
    1 perfect, secure.
    -2 kind, good.
    -3 happy, prosperous.
    -4 well-aimed or directed (as a weapon).
    -धी a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. (
    -धीः) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (-f.) a good under- standing, good sense, intelligence. ˚उपास्यः
    1 a particu- lar kind of royal palace.
    -2 N. of an attendant on Kṛiṣṇa. (
    -स्यम्) the club of Balarāma. ˚उपास्या
    1 a woman.
    -2 N. of Umā, or of one of her female com- panions.
    -3 a sort of pigment.
    -ध्रूम्रवर्णा one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -नन्दम् N. of Balarāma's club; प्रतिजग्राह बलवान् सुनन्देनाहनच्च तम् Bhāg.1.67.18.
    -नन्दः a kind of royal palace.
    -नन्दा 1 N. of a woman.
    -2 N. of Pārvatī; L. D. B.
    -3 yellow pigment; L. D. B.
    -नयः 1 good conduct.
    -2 good policy.
    - नयन a. having beau- tiful eyes. (
    -नः) a deer.
    (-ना) 1 a woman having beautiful eyes.
    -2 a woman in general.
    -नाभ a.
    1 having a beautiful navel.
    -2 having a good nave or cen- tre.
    (-भः) 1 a mountain.
    -2 the Maināka mountain, q. v. (
    -भम्) a wheel, discus (सुदर्शन); ये संयुगे$चक्षत तार्क्ष्यपुत्रमंसे सुनाभायुधमापतन्तम् Bhāg.3.2.24.
    -नालम् a red water-lily.
    -निःष्ठित a. quite ready.
    -निर्भृत a. very lonely or private. (
    -तम्) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately.
    -निरूढ a. well-purged by an injection; Charaka.
    -निरूहणम् a good purgative.
    -निर्णिक्त a. well polished.
    -निश्चलः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निषण्णः (-कः) the herb Marsilea Quadrifolia (Mar. कुऱडू).
    -निहित a. well-established.
    -नीत a.
    1 well-con- ducted, well-behaved.
    -2 polite, civil.
    (-तनि) 1 good conduct or behaviour.
    -2 good policy or prodence.
    -नीतिः f.
    1 good conduct, good manners, propriety.
    -2 good policy.
    -3 N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v.
    -नीथ a. well-disposed, well conducted, righteous, vir- tuous, good.
    (-थः) 1 a Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 N. of Śiśupāla, q. v.; तस्मिन्नभ्यर्चिते कृष्णे सुनीथः शत्रुकर्षणः Mb.1.39.11.
    -3 Ved. a good leader.
    -नील a. very black or blue. (
    -लः) the pomegranate tree. (
    -ला) common flax.
    (-लम्), -नीलकः a blue gem.
    -नु n. water.
    -नेत्र a. having good or beautiful eyes.
    -पक्व a.
    1 well-cooked.
    -2 thoroughly matured or ripe. (
    -क्वः) a sort of fra- grant mango.
    -पठ a. legible.
    -पत्नी a woman having a good husband.
    -पत्र a.
    1 having beautiful wings.
    -2 well-feathered (an arrow).
    -पथः 1 a good road.
    -2 a good course.
    -3 good conduct.
    -पथिन् m. (nom. sing. सुपन्थाः) a good road.
    -पद्मा orris root.
    -परीक्षित a. well-examined.
    -पर्ण a. (
    -र्णा or
    -र्णी f.)
    1 well-winged; तं भूतनिलयं देवं सुपर्णमुपधावत Bhāg.8.1.11.
    -2 having good or beautiful leaves.
    (-र्णः) 1 a ray of the sun.
    -2 a class of bird-like beings of a semi-divine charac- ter.
    -3 any supernatural bird.
    -4 an epithet of Garuḍa; ततः सुपर्णव्रजपक्षजन्मा नानागतिर्मण्डलयन् जवेन Ki.16.44.
    -5 a cock.
    -6 the knowing (ज्ञानरूप); देहस्त्वचित्पुरुषो$यं सुपर्णः क्रुध्येत कस्मै नहि कर्ममूलम् Bhāg.11.23.55.
    -7 Any bird; द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा सखाया समानं वृक्षं परिषस्वजाते Muṇd. 3.1.1. ˚केतुः N. of Viṣṇu; तमकुण्ठमुखाः सुपर्णकेतोरिषवः क्षिप्तमिषुव्रजं परेण Śi.2.23.
    -पर्णकः = सुपर्ण.
    -पर्णा, -पर्णी f.
    1 a number of lotuses.
    -2 a pool abounding in lotuses.
    -3 N. of the mother of Garuḍa.
    -पर्यवदात a. very clean.
    -पर्याप्त a.
    1 very spacious; तस्य मध्ये सुपर्याप्तं कारयेद् गृहमात्मनः Ms.7.76.
    -2 well-fitted.
    -पर्वन् a. well- jointed, having many joints or knots. (-m.)
    1 a bam- boo.
    -2 an arrow.
    -3 a god, deity; विहाय या सर्वसुपर्व- नायकम् N.4.9;14.41,76.
    -4 a special lunar day (as the day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight).
    -5 smoke. (-f.) white Dūrvā grass.
    -पलायित a.
    1 completely fled or run away.
    -2 skilfully retreated.
    -पाक्यम् a kind of medicinal salt (Mar. बिडलोण).
    -पात्रम् 1 a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle.
    -2 a fit or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person.
    -पाद् (
    -पाद् or
    -पदी f.) having good or handsome feet.
    -पार्श्वः 1 the waved-leaf fig-tree (प्लक्ष).
    -2 N. of the son of Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu.
    -पालि a. distinguished.
    -पीतम् 1 a carrot.
    -2 yellow sandal. (
    -तः) the fifth Muhūrta.
    -पुंसी a woman having a good husband.
    -पुरम् a strong fortress.
    -पुष्प a. (
    -ष्पा or
    -ष्पी f.) having beautiful flowers.
    (-ष्पः) 1 the coral tree.
    -2 the Śirīṣa tree. (
    -ष्पी) the plantain tree.
    (-ष्पम्) 1 cloves.
    -2 the menstrual excretion.
    -पुष्पित a.
    1 well blossomed, being in full flower.
    -2 having the hair thrilling or bristling.
    -पूर a.
    1 easy to be filled; सुपूरा स्यात् कुनदिका सुपूरो मूषिकाञ्जलिः Pt.1.25.
    -2 well-filling. (
    -रः) a kind of citron (बीजपूर).
    -पूरकः the Baka-puṣpa tree.
    -पेशस् a. beautiful, tender; रत्नानां पद्मरागो$स्मि पद्मकोशः सुपेशसाम् Bhāg.11.16.3. ˚कृत् m. a kind of fly; Bhāg.11.7.34.
    -प्रकाश a.
    1 manifest, apparent; ज्येष्ठे मासि नयेत् सीमां सुप्रकाशेषु सेतुषु Ms.8.245.
    -2 public, notorious.
    -प्रतर्कः a sound judgment.
    -प्रतिभा spirituous liquor.
    -प्रतिष्ठ a.
    1 standing well.
    -2 very celebrated, renowned, glorious, famous.
    (-ष्ठा) 1 good position.
    -2 good reputation, fame, celebrity.
    -3 esta- blishment, erection.
    -4 installation, consecration.
    -प्रतिष्ठित a.
    1 well-established.
    -2 consecrated.
    -3 ce- lebrated. (
    -तः) the Udumbara tree.
    -प्रतिष्णात a.
    1 thoroughly purified.
    -2 well-versed in.
    -3 well-investi- gated, clearly ascertained or determined.
    -प्रतीक a.
    1 having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome; भगवान् भागवतवात्सल्यतया सुप्रतीकः Bhāg.5.3.2.
    -2 having a beau- tiful trunk.
    (-कः) 1 an epithet of Kāmadeva.
    -2 of Śiva.
    -3 of the elephant of the north-east quarter.
    -4 An honest man; स्तेयोपायैर्विरचितकृतिः सुप्रतीको यथास्ते Bhāg.1.8.31.
    -प्रपाणम् a good tank.
    -प्रभ a. very brilliant, glorious. (
    -भा) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -प्रभातम् 1 an auspicious dawn or day-break; दिष्टथा सुप्रभातमद्य यदयं देवो दृष्टः U.6.
    -2 the earliest dawn.
    -प्रभावः omnipotence.
    -प्रमाण a. large-sized.
    -प्रयुक्तशरः a skilful archer.
    -प्रयोगः 1 good management or ap- plication.
    -2 close contact.
    -3 dexterity.
    -प्रलापः good speech, eloquence.
    -प्रसन्नः N. of Kubera.
    -प्रसाद a. very gracious or propitious. (
    -दः) N. of Śiva.
    -प्रातम् a fine morning.
    -प्रिय a. very much liked, agreeable. (
    -यः) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables.
    (-या) 1 a charming woman.
    -2 a beloved mistress.
    -प्रौढा a marriageable girl.
    -फल a.
    1 very fruitful, very productive.
    -2 very fertile.
    (-लः) 1 the pomegranate tree.
    -2 the jujube.
    -3 the Karṇikāra tree.
    -4 a kind of bean.
    (-ला) 1 a pumpkin, gourd.
    -2 the plan- tain tree.
    -3 a variety of brown grape.
    -4 colocynth.
    -फेनः a cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः sesamum.
    -बभ्रु a. dark-brown.
    -बल a. very powerful.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 N. of the father of Śakuni.
    -बान्धवः N. of Śiva.
    -बाल a. very childish.
    -बाहु a.
    1 handsome- armed.
    -2 strong-armed. (
    -हुः) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma. and Lakṣmaṇa; यः सुबाहुरिति राक्षसो$परस्तत्र तत्र विससर्प मायया R.11.29.
    -बीजम् good seed; सुबीजं चैव सुक्षेत्रे जातं संपद्यते तथा Ms.1.69.
    (-जः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 the poppy.
    -बोध a.
    1 easily apprehended or understood. (
    -धः) good information or advice.
    -ब्रह्मण्यः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -2 N. of one of the sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice.
    -भग a.
    1 very fortu- nate or prosperous, happy, blessed, highly favoured.
    -2 lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; न तु ग्रीष्मस्यैवं सुभगमपराद्धं युवतिषु Ś.3.9; Ku.4.34; R.11.8; Māl.9.
    -3 pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; दिवसाः सुभगा- दित्याश्छायासलिलदुर्भगाः Rām.3.16.1; श्रवणसुभग M.3.4; Ś.1.3.
    -4 beloved, liked, amiable, dear; सुमुखि सुभगः पश्यन् स त्वामुपैतु कृतार्थताम् Gīt.5.
    -5 illustrious.
    (-गः) 1 borax.
    -2 the Aśoka tree.
    -3 the Champaka tree.
    -4 red amarnath. (
    -गम्) good fortune. ˚मानिन्, सुभगं- मन्य a.
    1 considering oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; वाचालं मां न खलु सुभगंमन्यभावः करोति Me.96.
    -2 vain, flattering oneself.
    -भगा 1 a woman beloved by her hus- band, a favourite wife.
    -2 an honoured mother.
    -3 a kind of wild jasmine.
    -4 turmeric.
    -5 the Priyaṅgu creeper.
    -6 the holy basil.
    -7 a woman having her husband alive (सौभाग्यवती); जयशब्दैर्द्विजाग्र्याणां सुभगानर्तितै- स्तथा Mb.7.7.9.
    -8 a five-year old girl representing Durgā at festivals.
    -9 musk. ˚सुत the son of a favou- rite wife.
    -भङ्गः the cocoa-nut tree.
    -भटः a great war- rior, champion, soldier.
    -भट्टः a learned man.
    -भद्र a. very happy or fortunate. (
    -द्रः) N. of Viṣṇu; साकं साकम्पमंसे वसति विदधती बासुभद्रं सुभद्रम् Viṣṇupāda S.31. (
    -द्रा) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛiṣṇa, married to Arjuna q. v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu.
    -भद्रकः 1 a car for carrying the image of a god.
    -2 the Bilva tree.
    -भाषित a.
    1 spoken well or eloquent.
    (-तम्) 1 fine speech, eloquence, learning; जीर्णमङ्गे सुभाषितम् Bh.3.2.
    -2ल a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite saying; सुभाषितेन गीतेन युवतीनां च लीलया । मनो न भिद्यते यस्य स वै मुक्तो$थवा पशुः Subhāṣ.
    -3 a good remark; बालादपि सुभाषितम् (ग्राह्यम्).
    -भिक्षम् 1 good alms, successful begging.
    -2 abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c.
    -भीरकः the Palāśa tree.
    -भीरुकम् silver.
    -भूतिः 1 well-being, wel- fare.
    -2 the Tittira bird; Gīrvāṇa.
    -भूतिकः the Bilva tree.
    -भूषणम् a type of pavilion where a ceremony is performed on a wife's perceiving the first signs of con- ception; सुभूषणाख्यं विप्राणां योग्यं पुंसवनार्थकम् Māna.34.354.
    -भृत a.
    1 well-paid.
    -2 heavily laden.
    -भ्रू a. having beautiful eyebrows. (
    -भ्रूः f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this word is strictly सुभ्रूः; but सुभ्रु is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi. Kālidāsa, and Bhavabhūti; हा पितः क्वासि हे सुभ्रु Bk.6.17; so V.3.22; Ku.5.43; Māl.3.8.)
    -मङ्गल a.
    1 very auspicious.
    -2 abounding in sacrifices.
    -मति a. very wise. (
    -तिः f.)
    1 a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence, friendship.
    -2 a favour of the gods.
    -3 a gift, blessing.
    -4 a prayer, hymn.
    -5 a wish or desire.
    -6 N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of 6, sons.
    -मदनः the mango tree.
    -मदात्मजा a celestial damsel.
    -मधुरम् a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words.
    -मध्य, -मध्यम a. slender-waisted.
    -मध्या, -मध्यमा a graceful woman.
    -मन a. very charming, lovely, beautiful.
    (-नः) 1 wheat.
    -2 the thorn-apple. (
    -ना) the great-flowered jasmine.
    -मनस् a.
    1 good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent; शान्तसंकल्पः सुमना यथा स्याद्वीतमन्युर्गौतमो माभिमृत्यो Kaṭh.1.1.
    -2 well-pleased, satisfied; (hence
    -सुमनीभू = to be at ease; जिते नृपारौ समनीभवन्ति शद्बायमानान्यशनैरशङ्कम् Bk.2.54.). (-m.)
    1 a god, divinity.
    -2 a learned man.
    -3 a student of the Vedas.
    -4 wheat.
    -5 the Nimba tree. (-f., n.; said to be pl. only by some) a flower; मुमुचुर्मुनयो देवाः सुमनांसि मुदान्विताः Bhāg.1.3.7; रमणीय एष वः सुमनसां संनिवेशः Māl.1. (where the adjectival; sense in 1 is also intended); किं सेव्यते सुमनसां मनसापि गन्धः कस्तू- रिकाजननशक्तिभृता मृगेण R.G; Śi.6.66. ˚वर्णकम् flowers, unguent or perfume etc. for the body; सा तदाप्रभृति सुमनो- वर्णकं नेच्छति Avimārakam 2. (-f.)
    1 the great-flowered jasmine.
    -2 the Mālatī creeper. ˚फलः the woodapple. ˚फलम् nutmeg.
    -मनस्क a. cheerful, happy.
    -मन्तु a.
    1 advising well.
    -2 very faulty or blameable. (-m.) a good adviser.
    -मन्त्रः N. of the charioteer of Daśāratha.
    -मन्दभाज् a. very unfortunate.
    -मर्दित a. much harassed.
    -मर्षण a. easy to be borne.
    -मित्रा 1 N. of one of the wives of Daśāratha and mother of Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna.
    -मुख a. (
    -खा or
    -खी f.)
    1 having a beautiful face, lovely.
    -2 pleasing.
    -3 disposed to, eager for; सुरसद्मयानसुमुखी जनता Ki.6.42.
    -4 favour- able, kind.
    -5 well-pointed (as an arrow).
    -6 (सुमुखा) having a good entrance.
    (-खः) 1 a learned man.
    -2 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -3 of Gaṇeśa; सुमुखश्चैकदन्तश्च कपिलो गजकर्णकः Maṅgal. S.1.
    -4 of Śiva.
    (-खम्) 1 the scratch of a finger-nail.
    -2 a kind of building.
    (-खा, -खी) 1 a handsome woman.
    -2 a mirror.
    -मूलकम् a carrot.
    -मृत a. stone-dead.
    -मेखलः the Muñja grass.
    -मेधस a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent; इमे अङ्गिरसः सत्रमासते$द्य सुमेधसः Bhāg.9.4.3. (-m.) a wise man. (-f.) heart-pea.
    -मेरुः 1 the sac- red mountain Meru, q. v.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -यन्त्रित a.
    1 well-governed.
    -2 self-controlled.
    -यमाः a parti- cular class of gods; जातो रुचेरजनयत् सुयमान् सुयज्ञ आकूति- सूनुरमरानथ दक्षिणायाम् Bhāg.2.7.2.
    -यवसम् beautiful grass, good pasturage.
    -यामुनः 1 a palace.
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -युक्तः N. of Śiva.
    -योगः 1 a favourable junc- ture.
    -2 good opportunity.
    -योधनः an epithet of Duryodhana q. v.
    -रक्त a.
    1 well coloured.
    -2 im- passioned.
    -3 very lovely.
    -4 sweet-voiced; सुरक्तगोपी- जनगीतनिःस्वने Ki.4.33.
    -रक्तकः 1 a kind of red chalk.
    -2 a kind of mango tree.
    -रङ्गः 1 good colour.
    -2 the orange.
    -3 a hole cut in a house (सुरङ्गा also in this sense).
    (-ङ्गम्) 1 red sanders.
    -2 vermilion. ˚धातुः red chalk. ˚युज् m. a house-breaker.
    -रङ्गिका the Mūrvā plant.
    -रजःफलः the jack-fruit tree.
    -रञ्जनः the betel nut tree.
    -रत a.
    1 much sported.
    -2 playful.
    -3 much enjoyed.
    -4 compassionate, tender.
    (-तम्) 1 great delight or enjoyment.
    -2 copulation, sexual union or intercourse, coition; सुरतमृदिता बालवनिता Bh.2. 44. ˚गुरुः the husband; पर्यच्छे सरसि हृतें$शुके पयोभिर्लोलाक्षे सुरतगुरावपत्रपिष्णोः Śi.8.46. ˚ताण्डवम् vigorous sexual movements; अद्यापि तां सुरतताण्डवसूत्रधारीं (स्मरामि) Bil. Ch. Uttara.28. ˚ताली
    1 a female messenger, a go-between.
    -2 a chaplet, garland for the head. ˚प्रसंगः addiction to amorous pleasures; कालक्रमेणाथ योः प्रवृत्ते स्वरूपयोग्ये सुरत- प्रसंगे Ku.1.19.
    -रतिः f. great enjoyment or satis- faction.
    -रस a. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury.
    -2 sweet.
    -3 elegant (as a composition). (
    -सः, -सा) the plant सिन्धुवार. (
    -सा) N. of Durgā. (
    -सा, -सम्) the sacred basil.
    (-सम्) 1 gum-myrrh.
    -2 fragrant grass.
    -राजन् a. governed by a good king; सुराज्ञि देशे राजन्वान् Ak. (-m.)
    1 a good king.
    -2 a divinity.
    -राजिका a small house-lizard.
    -राष्ट्रम् N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). ˚जम् a kind of poison.
    -2 a sort of black bean (Mar. तूर). ˚ब्रह्मः a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra.
    -रूप a.
    1 well-formed, handsome, love- ly; सुरूपा कन्या.
    -2 wise, learned. (
    -पः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -रूहकः a horse resembling an ass.
    -रेतस् n. mental power (चिच्छक्ति); सुरेतसादः पुनराविश्य चष्टे Bhāg. 5.7.14.
    -रेभ a. fine-voiced; स्यन्दना नो चतुरगाः सुपेभा वाविपत्तयः । स्यन्दना नो च तुरगाः सुरेभा वा विपत्तयः ॥ Ki.15.16. (
    -भम्) tin.
    -लक्षण a.
    1 having auspicious or beautiful marks.
    -2 fortunate.
    (-णम्) 1 observing, examining carefully, determining, ascertaining.
    -2 a good or auspicious mark.
    -लक्षित a. well determined or ascertained; तुलामानं प्रतीमानं सर्वं च स्यात् सुलक्षितम् Ms.8.43.
    -लग्नः, -ग्नम् an auspicious moment.
    -लभ a.
    1 easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable, feasible; न सुलभा सकलेन्दुमुखी च सा V.2.9; इदमसुलभवस्तुप्रार्थनादुर्नि- वारम् 2.6.
    -2 ready for, adapted to, fit, suitable; निष्ठ्यूतश्चरणोपभोगसुलभो लाक्षारसः केनचित् Ś.4.4.
    -3 natural to, proper for; मानुषतासुलभो लघिमा K. ˚कोप a. easily provoked, irascible.
    -लिखित a. well registered.
    -लुलित a.
    1 moving playfully.
    -2 greatly hurt, injured.
    -लोचन a. fine-eyed. (
    -नः) a deer.
    (-ना) 1 a beauti- ful woman.
    -2 N. of the wife of Indrajit.
    -लोहकम् brass.
    -लोहित a. very red. (
    -ता) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -वक्त्रम् 1 a good face or mouth.
    -2 correct utterance. (
    -क्त्रः) N. of Śiva.
    -वचनम्, -वचस् n. eloquence. -a. eloquent.
    -वयस् f. a hermaphrodite.
    -वर्चकः, -वर्चिकः, -का, -वर्चिन् m. natron, alkali.
    -वर्चला 1 N. of the wife of the sun; तं चाहमनुवर्तिष्ये यथा सूर्यं सुवर्चला Rām.2.3.3.
    -2 linseed.
    -वर्चसः N. of Śiva.
    -वर्चस्क a. splendid, brilliant.
    -वर्ण see s. v.
    -वर्तित 1 well rounded.
    -2 well arranged.
    -वर्तुलः a water-melon.
    -वसन्तः 1 an agreeable vernal season.
    -2 the day of full moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of Kāmadeva in that month (also सुवसन्तकः in this sense).
    -वह a.
    1 bearing well, patient.
    -2 patient, enduring.
    -3 easy to be borne-
    (-हा) 1 a lute.
    -2 N. of several plants like रास्ना, निर्गुण्डी &c.; Mātaṅga L.1.1.
    -वासः 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a pleasant dwelling.
    -3 an agreeable perfume or odo- ur.
    -वासकः a water-melon.
    -वासरा cress.
    -वासिनी 1 a woman married or single who resides in her father's house.
    -2 a married woman whose husband is alive.
    -विक्रान्त a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous; सुविक्रान्तस्य नृपतेः सर्वमेव महीतलम् Śiva. B.16.45. (
    -न्तः) a hero. (
    -न्तम्) heroism.
    -विग्रह a. having a beautiful figure.
    -विचक्षण a. very clever, wise.
    -विद् m. a learned man, shrewd person. (-f.) a shrewd or clever woman.
    -विदः 1 an attendant on the women's apartments.
    -2 a king.
    -विदग्ध a. very cunning, astute.
    -विदत् m. a king
    -विदत्रम् 1 a household, family.
    -2 wealth.
    -3 grace, favour.
    -विदल्लः an attendant on the women's apart- ments (wrongly for सौविदल्ल q. v.). (
    -ल्लम्) the wo- men's apartments, harem.
    -विदल्ला a married woman.
    -विध a. of a good kind.
    -विधम् ind. easily.
    -विधिः a good rule, ordinance.
    -विनीत a.
    1 well trained, modest.
    -2 well executed. (
    -ता) a tractable cow.
    -विनेय a. easy to be trained or educated.
    -विभक्त a. well pro- portioned, symmetrical.
    -विरूढ a.
    1 fully grown up or developed.
    -2 well ridden.
    -विविक्त a.
    1 solitary (as a wood).
    -2 well decided (as a question).
    -विहित a.
    1 well-placed, well-deposited.
    -2 well-furnished, well- supplied, well-provided, well-arranged; सुविहितप्रयोगतया आर्यस्य न किमपि परिहास्यते Ś.1; कलहंसमकरन्दप्रेवशावसरे तत् सुविहितम् Māl.1.
    -3 well done or performed.
    -4 well satisfied (by hospitality); अन्नपानैः सुविहितास्तस्मिन् यज्ञे महात्मनः Rām.1.14.16.
    -वी(बी)ज a. having good seed.
    (-जः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 the poppy. (
    -जम्) good seed.
    -वीरकम् 1 a kind of collyrium.
    -2 sour gruel (काञ्जिक); सुवीरकं याच्यमाना मद्रिका कर्षति स्फिचौ Mb.8.4.38.
    -वीराम्लम् sour rice-gruel.
    -वीर्य a.
    1 having great vigour.
    -2 of heroic strength, heroic, chivalrous.
    (-र्यम्) 1 great heroism
    -2 abundance of heroes.
    -3 the fruit of the jujube. (
    -र्या) wild cotton.
    -वृक्तिः f.
    1 a pure offering.
    -2 a hymn of praise.
    -वृत्त a.
    1 well-behaved, virtuous, good; मयि तस्य सुवृत्त वर्तते लघुसंदेशपदा सरस्वती R. 8.77.
    -2 well-rounded, beautifully globular or round; मृदुनातिसुवृत्तेन सुमृष्टेनातिहारिणा । मोदकेनापि किं तेन निष्पत्तिर्यस्य सेवया ॥ or सुमुखो$पि सुवृत्तो$पि सन्मार्गपतितो$पि च । महतां पादलग्नो$पि व्यथयत्येव कष्टकः ॥ (where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). (
    -त्तम्) a good or virtuous conduct; भर्तुश्चिन्तानुवर्तित्वं सुवृत्तं चानुजीविनाम् Pt.1.69. (
    -त्ता) a sort of grape.
    -वेल a.
    1 tranquil, still.
    -2 humble, quiet. (
    -लः) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -व्रत a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly virtuous or religious. (
    -तः) a religious student.
    (-ता) 1 a virtuous wife.
    -2 a tractable cow, one easily milked.
    -शंस a. well spoken of, famous, glorious, commendable.
    -शक a. capable of being easily done.
    -शर्मन् (m., f.) a person desiring intercourse (Uṇ.4. 165].
    -शल्यः the Khadira tree.
    -शाकम् undried ginger.
    -शारदः N. of Śiva.
    -शासित a. kept under control, well-controlled.
    -शिक्षित a. well-taught, trained, well- disciplined.
    -शिखः fire.
    (-खा) 1 a peacock's crest.
    -2 a cock's comb.
    -शीतम् yellow sandal-wood.
    -शीम a. cold, frigid. (
    -मः) coldness
    -शील a. good-tempered, amiable.
    (-ला) 1 N. of the wife of Yama.
    -2 N. of one of the eight favourite wives of Kriṣṇa.
    -शेव a. full of happiness; pleasant to be resorted; एष पन्था उरुगायः मुशेवः Ait. Br.7.13.11.
    -शोण a. dark-red.
    -श्रीका the gum olibanum tree.
    -श्रुत a.
    1 well heard.
    -2 versed in the Vedas.
    -3 gladly heard (also an ex- clamation at a श्राद्ध); पित्रे स्वदितमित्येव वाच्यं गोष्ठे तु सुश्रुतम् Ms.3.254. (
    -तः) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work, together with that of Charaka, is regardad as the oldest medical authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day.
    -श्लिष्ट a.
    1 well-arranged or united.
    -2 well-fitted; Māl.1.
    -श्लेषः close union or embrace.
    -श्लोक्य a. very famous; तेजीयसामपि ह्येतन्न सुश्लोक्यं जगद्गुरो Bhāg.3.12.31.
    -संवीत a.
    1 well-girt; स ददर्श ततः श्रीमान् सुग्रीवं हेमपिङ्गलम् । सुसंवीतम्... Rām.4.16.15.
    -2 well dressed.
    -संवृतिः good concealment. a. well-concealed; परितप्तो$प्यपरः सुसंवृतिः Śi.16.23.
    -संस्कृत a.
    1 well cooked or prepared.
    -2 kept in good order; सुसंस्कृतोपस्करया व्यये चामुक्तहस्तया Ms.5.15.
    -संगृहीत a.
    1 well controlled or governed; सुसंगृहीतराष्ट्रो हि पार्थिवः सुखमेधते Ms.7.113.
    -2 well received.
    -3 well kept.
    -4 well abridged.
    -संध a. true to a promise.
    -संनत a. well-directed (as an arrow).
    -सत्या N. of the wife of Janaka.
    -सदृश् a. agreeable to look at.
    -समाहित a.
    1 well arranged, beautifully adorned; very beautiful; ऋतुकालं प्रतीक्षन्ते नार्थिनः सुसमाहिते । संगमं त्वहमिच्छामि त्वया सह सुमध्यमे ॥ Rām.1.48.18.
    -2 completely loaded; तद्यथानः सुसमा- हितमुत्सर्जद्यायात् Bṛi. Up.4.3.35.
    -3 Very intent, attentive.
    -समीहित a. much desired.
    - सरण N. of Śiva.
    -सह a.
    1 easy to be borne.
    -2 bearing or enduring well. (
    -हः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -सहाय a. having a good companion; प्रणेतुं शक्यते दण्डः सुसहायेन धीमता Ms.7.31.
    -साधित a. well trained or educated.
    -सार a. having good sap or essence.
    (-रः) 1 good sap, essence, or substance.
    -2 competence.
    -3 the red-flowering Kha- dira tree.
    -सारवत् n. crystal.
    -सिकता 1 good sand.
    -2 gravel.
    -3 sugar.
    -सुरप्रिया jasmine.
    -सेव्य a. to be well or easily followed (as a road).
    -सौभगम् con- jugal felicity.
    -स्थ a.
    1 well-suited, being in a good sense.
    -2 in health, healthy, faring well.
    -3 in good or prosperous circumstances, prosperous.
    -4 happy, fortunate. (
    -स्थम्) a happy state, well-being; प्रह्लाद सुस्थरूपोसि पश्यन् व्यसनमात्मनः Mb.12.222.12; सुस्थे को वा न पण्डितः H.3.114.
    -स्थित a. in the same sense as सुस्थ. (
    -तम्) a house with a gallery on all sides.
    -स्थितिः (also सुस्थता) f.
    1 good condition, well-being, welfare, happiness.
    -2 health, convalescence.
    -स्थिर a.
    1 stable.
    -2 resolute, cool.
    -स्नातः 1 one who bathes at the end of a sacrifice; L. D. B.
    -2 well purified by bathing.
    -स्मित a. pleasantly smiling. (
    -ता) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance.
    -स्वपनः an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वर a.
    1 melodious, harmonious.
    -2 loud. ˚यन्त्रकम् a kind of musical instrument; युता सुस्वरयन्त्रकैः Śukra.1.247.
    -हित a.
    1 very fit or suitable, appro- priate.
    -2 beneficial, salutary.
    -3 friendly, affection- ate.
    -4 satisfied; सहस्रनेत्रः सुहितत्वमाप न Rām. ch.2.64. (
    -ता) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -हृद् a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate; सुहृदः सुहृदो$न्यांश्च दुर्हृदश्चापि दुर्हृदः । सम्यक्प्रवृत्तान् पुरुषान्नसम्यगनुपश्यतः ॥ Mb.3.28.36. (-m.)
    1 a friend; सुहृदः पश्य वसन्त किं स्थितम् Ku.4.27; मन्दायन्ते न खलु सुहृदामभ्युपेतार्थकृत्याः Me.4.
    -2 an ally. ˚भेदः
    1 the separation of friends.
    -2 N. of the 2nd book of the हितोपदेश; मित्रलाभः सुहृद्भेदो विग्रहः संधिरेव च । पञ्चतन्त्रात्तथान्यस्माद् ग्रन्थादाकृष्य लिख्यते ॥ H. Pr.9. ˚वाक्यम् the counsel of a friend.
    -हृदः a friend.
    -हृदय a.
    1 good-hearted.
    -2 dear, affectionate, loving.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > सु _su

  • 45 महेन्द्र


    mahêndra
    mahêndrá

    m. the great Indra AV. etc. etc. ( alsoﾠ applied to Vishṇu < R. > andﾠ Ṡiva < Ṡivag. >);

    a partic. star VP. ;
    a great chief orﾠ leader ( sarva-devānām) Nal.;
    a partic. high number Buddh. ;
    N. of a younger brother ( orﾠ son) of Aṡoka (who carried the Buddhist doctrine into Ceylon) MWB. 59 ;
    of another prince (= Kumāra-gupta) Inscr. ;
    of a poet Cat. ;
    of various other writers andﾠ teachers ( alsoﾠ with ācārya andﾠ sūri) ib. ;
    of a mountain orﾠ range of mountain (said to be one of the 7 principal chains in India, andﾠ sometimes identified with the northern parts of the Ghats) MBh. Kāv. etc.;
    of a Place MW. ;
    (ā) f. N. of a river MBh. ;
    (ī) f. a species of plant L. ;
    - kadalī f. a species of banana L. ;
    - ketu m. great Indra's banner Var. ;
    - gupta m. N. of a prince Inscr. ;
    - guru m. « great Inscr's teacher»
    N. of the planet Jupiter (= Bṛihas-pati) Var. ;
    - cāpa m. « great Inscr's bow», a rainbow Hariv. Kāv. ;
    - jit m. N. of Garuḍa L. ;
    - tva n. the name orﾠ rank of great Inscr AitBr. MBh. ;
    - devī f. the wife of great Inscr VarBṛS. Sch. ;
    - dhvaja m. = - ketu VarBṛS. ;
    - nagarī f. « great Inscr's city» i.e. Amarā-vatī L. ;
    - nātha m. N. of an author Cat. ;
    - pāla m. N. of a king ( alsoﾠ called nirbhaya-rāja, the pupil andﾠ patron of Rāja-ṡekhara) Bālar. Introd. ;
    - mantrin m. « great loud's counsellor», the planet Jupiter Var. (cf. - guru);
    - mandira n. great Inscr's palace Vikr. ;
    - mahôtsava m. a great festival in honour of great Inscr Cat. ;
    - yāga-prayoga m. N. of wk.;
    - yājin mfn. one who worships great Inscr MānṠr. ;
    - varman m. N. of a prince L. ;
    - vāruṇī f. a species of plant L. ;
    - ṡakti m. N. of a man Kathās. ;
    - siṉha m. N. of a king Inscr. ;
    -drâ̱cārya-ṡishya m. N. of an astronomer Cat. ;
    - drāṇī f. « the wife of great Inscr» i.e. Ṡacī MBh. ;
    -drâ̱ditya m. N. of a king Kathās. ;
    -drâ̱dri m. N. of a mountain BhP. ;
    - driya mfn. sacred orﾠ belonging to great Inscr Pāṇ. 4-2, 29 ;
    - drīya mfn. id. ib. (with graha m. Kāṭh.);
    - drôtsava m. festival of great Inscr MW.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > महेन्द्र

  • 46 ÓÐAL

    (pl. óðul), n. ancestral property, patrimony, inheritance (in land); family homestead; native place; flýja óðul sín, to abandon one’s home, go into exile.
    * * *
    n., pl. óðul; in Norse MSS. it is usually contracted before a vowel (whence arose the forms öðli eðli), and owing to a peculiarity in the Norse sound of ð an r is inserted in contracted forms, örðla, orðlom, N. G. L. passim: [akin to aðal, öðli, eðli, = nature; öðlask = adipisci; oðlingr, q. v.; A. S. êðel = patrimony; it is also the parent word of Germ. edel, adel, = noble, nobility, for the nobility of the earliest Teut. communities consisted of the land-owners. From this word also originated mid. Lat. allodium, prob. by inverting the syllables for the sake of euphony (all-od = od-al); oðal or ethel is the vernacular Teut. form, allodium the Latinised form, which is never found in vernacular writers; it may be that the transposition of syllables was due to the th sound in oðal; and hence, again, the word feudal is a compd word, fee-odal, or an odal held as a fee or feif from the king, and answering to heið-launað óðal of the Norse law (heið = fee = king’s pay), N. G. L. i. 91.]
    B. Nature, inborn quality, property, = aðal, eðli, öðli, q. v.; this seems to be the original sense, þat er eigi at réttu mannsins óðal, Sks. 326 B; þat er helzt byrjar til farmanns óðals, a seaman’s life, 52; þat er kaupmanna óðal (= mercatorum est), 28; jörlum öllum óðal batni, Gh. 21.
    II. a law term, an allodium, property held in allodial tenure, patrimony. The condition which in the Norse law constitutes an oðal was either an unbroken succession from father to son (er afi hefir afa leift) through three or more generations, N. G. L. i. 91, 237, Gþl. 284; or unbroken possession for thirty or more years, N. G. L. i. 249; or sixty years, Gþl. 284; or it might be acquired through brand-erfð (q. v.), through weregild, barn-fóstr (q. v.); and lastly heið-launað óðal, an allodial fief, was granted for services rendered to the king, see N. G. L. i. 91: the oðal descended to the son, and was opp. to útjarðir ( out-lands), and lausa-fé ( movables), which descended to the daughter, Gþl. 233; yet even a woman, e. g. a baugrygr (q. v.), could hold an oðal, in which case she was called óðals-kona, 92, jörð komin undir snúð ok snældu = an estate come under the rule of the spindle, N. G. L. i. 237; the allit. phrase, arfr ok óðal, 31, Gþl. 250: brigða óðal, N. G. L. i. 86; selja óðal, to sell one’s óðal, 237. The oðal was in a certain sense inalienable within a family, so that even when parted with, the possessor still retained a title (land-brigð, máldagi á landi). In the ancient Scandin. communities the inhabited land was possessed by free oðalsmen (allodial holders), and the king was the lord of the people, but not of the soil. At a later time, when the small communities were merged into great kingdoms, through conquest or otherwise, the king laid hold of the land, and all the ancient oðals were to be held as a grant from the king; such an attempt of king Harold Fairhair in Norway and the earls of Orkney in those islands is recorded in Hkr. Har. S. Hárf. ch. 6, Eg. ch. 4, cp. Ld. ch. 2, Orkn. ch. 8, 30, 80 (in Mr. Dasent’s Ed.); cp. also Hák. S. Goða ch. 1. Those attempts are recorded in the Icel. Sagas as acts of tyranny and confiscation, and as one of the chief causes for the great emigration from the Scandinavian kingdoms during the 9th century (the question of free land here playing the same part as that of free religion in Great Britain in the 17th century). The attempt failed in Norway, where the old oðal institution remains in the main to the present day. Even the attempts of king Harold were, according to historians (Konrad Maurer), not quite analogous to what took place in England after the Conquest, but appear to have taken something like the form of a land-tax or rent; but as the Sagas represent it, it was an attempt towards turning the free odal institution into a feudal one, such as had already taken place among the Teutons in Southern Europe.
    III. gener. and metaph. usages, one’s native land, homestead, inheritance; the land is called the ‘oðal’ of the reigning king, á Danr ok Danpr dýrar hallir, æðra óðal, en ér hafit, Rm. 45; eignask namtú óðal þegna, allan Noreg, Gauta spjalli, Fms. vi. 26 (in a verse); banna Sveini sín óðul, St. Olave will defend his óðal against Sweyn, 426 (in a verse); flýja óðul sín, to fly one’s óðal, go into exile, Fms. iv. 217; flýja óðul eðr eignir, vii. 25; koma aptr í Noreg til óðala sinna, 196; þeim er þar eru útlendir ok eigi eigu þar óðul, who are strangers and not natives there, Edda 3; öðlask Paradísar óðal, the inheritance of Paradise, 655 viii. 2; himneskt óðal, heavenly inheritance, Greg. 68; njóta þeirra gjafa ok óðala er Adam var útlægr frá rekinn, Sks. 512: allit., jarl ok óðal, earl (or franklin) and odal, Gh. 21.
    2. spec. phrase, at alda óðali, for everlasting inheritance, i. e. for ever and ever, D. N. i. 229: contr., at alda öðli, id., Grág. i. 264, D.I. i. 266; til alda óðals, for ever, iii. 88: mod., frá, alda öðli, from time immemorial.
    C. COMPDS: óðalsborinn, óðalsbréf, óðalsbrigð, óðalsjörð, óðalskona, óðalsmaðr, óðalsnautr, óðalsneyti, óðalsréttr, óðalsskipti, óðalstuptir, óðalsvitni.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > ÓÐAL

  • 47 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 48 hacer

    v.
    1 to do (realizar) (estudios, experimento, favor).
    ¿qué haces? what are you doing?
    tengo mucho que hacer I have a lot to do
    estoy haciendo segundo I'm in my second year
    ¿qué habré hecho con las llaves? what have I done with the keys?
    la carretera hace una curva there's a bend in the road
    Ella hace la tarea She does her work.
    2 to make.
    hacer un vestido/planes to make a dress/plans
    hacer un poema/una sinfonía to write a poem/a symphony
    hacer una fiesta to have a party
    para hacer la carne… to cook the meat…
    Ricardo hizo una casita Richard made a little house.
    Le hago estudiar I make him study.
    Nos hizo un problema He made us a problem (he made a problem for us)
    4 to do (arreglar) (casa, colada).
    5 to build (to build).
    han hecho un edificio nuevo they've put up a new building
    6 to make (movimientos, sonidos, gestos).
    le hice señas I signaled to her
    hacer ruido to make a noise
    el gato hace "miau" cats go "meow"
    debes hacer deporte you should start doing some sport
    8 to cause to look or seem (dar aspecto a).
    este espejo te hace gordo that mirror makes you look o seem fat
    9 to play (Cine & Teatro) (papel).
    hace el papel de la hija del rey she plays (the part of) the king's daughter
    10 to think, to reckon.
    a estas horas yo te hacía en París I thought o reckoned you'd be in Paris by now
    11 to be done to.
    Se me hizo una injusticia An injustice was done to me.
    12 to place.
    Haré una llamada a mi hermana I will place a call to my sister.
    13 to be made to.
    Se nos hizo pagar una gran suma We were made to pay a large amount.
    14 to be made for.
    Se me hizo una camisa A shirt was made for me.
    15 to travel, to make.
    Hicimos dos kilómetros We traveled two kilometers.
    * * *
    Present Indicative
    hago, haces, hace, hacemos, hacéis, hacen.
    Past Indicative
    Future Indicative
    Conditional
    Present Subjunctive
    Imperfect Subjunctive
    Future Subjunctive
    Imperative
    haz (tú), haga (él/Vd.), hagamos (nos.), haced (vos.), hagan (ellos/Vds.).
    Past Participle
    hecho,-a.
    * * *
    verb
    2) do
    3) be
    •
    - hacer falta
    - hacerse
    * * *
    Para las expresiones hacer añicos, hacer gracia, hacerse ilusiones, hacer pedazos, hacerse de rogar, hacer el tonto, hacer las veces de ver la otra entrada.
    1. VERBO TRANSITIVO
    1) [indicando actividad en general] to do

    ¿qué haces? — what are you doing?

    ¿qué haces ahí? — what are you doing there?

    ¡eso no se hace! — that's not done!

    • hacer el [amor] — to make love

    • hacer la [guerra] — to wage war

    hacer algo por hacer —

    2) [en lugar de otro verbo] to do
    3) (=crear) [+ coche, escultura, juguete, ropa, pastel] to make; [+ casa] to build; [+ dibujo] to do; [+ novela, sinfonía] to write

    • le cuesta trabajo hacer [amigos] — he finds it hard to make friends

    4) (=realizar) [+ apuesta, discurso, objeción] to make; [+ deporte, deberes] to do; [+ caca, pipí] to do; [+ nudo] to tie; [+ pregunta] to ask; [+ visita] to pay; [+ milagros] to do, work

    el gato hizo miau — the cat went miaow, the cat miaowed

    el árbol no hace mucha sombra — the tree isn't very shady, the tree doesn't provide a lot of shade

    ¿me puedes hacer el nudo de la corbata? — could you knot my tie for me?

    • hacer un [favor] a algn — to do sb a favour

    • hacer un [gesto] — [con la cara] to make {o} pull a face; [con la mano] to make a sign

    • hacer un [recado] — to do {o} run an errand

    • hacer [ruido] — to make a noise

    • hacer [sitio] — to make room

    • hacer [tiempo] — to kill time

    5) (=preparar) [+ cama, comida] to make

    hacer el pelo/las uñas a algn — to do sb's hair/nails

    • hacer las [maletas] — to pack one's bags

    6) (=dedicarse a)

    ¿qué hace tu padre? — what does your father do?

    • hacer [cine] — to make films

    • hacer [teatro] — to act

    7) (=actuar)

    hacer un papel — to play a role {o} part

    8) (=sumar) to make

    y cincuenta céntimos, hacen diez euros — and fifty cents change, which makes ten euros

    9) (=cumplir)

    voy a hacer 30 años la próxima semana — I'm going to be 30 next week, it's my 30th birthday next week

    10) (=obligar) + infin to make

    • hágale [entrar] — show him in, have him come in

    • me lo hizo [saber] — he told me about it, he informed me of it

    • hacer [que] + subjun —

    11) (=mandar)
    + infin
    12) (=transformar) + adj to make
    13) (=pensar) to think

    yo le hacía más viejo — I thought he was older, I had him down as being older

    14) (=acostumbrar)
    15) (=ejercitar)
    16)

    • hacer a algn [con] (=proveer) —

    2. VERBO INTRANSITIVO
    1) (=comportarse)

    • hacer [como] que {o} como si — to make as if

    hizo como que no se daba cuenta {o} como si no se diera cuenta — he made as if he hadn't noticed, he pretended not to have noticed

    2)

    • [dar que] hacer — to cause trouble

    dieron que hacer a la policía — they caused {o} gave the police quite a bit of trouble

    3) (=importar)

    no le hace — LAm it doesn't matter, never mind

    4) (=ser apropiado)

    ¿hace? — will it do?, is it all right?; (=¿de acuerdo?) is it a deal?

    5) (=apetecer)

    ¿te hace que vayamos a tomar unas copas? — how about going for a drink?, what do you say we go for a drink?

    ¿te hace un cigarrillo? — how about a cigarette?, do you fancy a cigarette?

    6) [seguido de preposición]
    hacer de (Teat) to play the part of hacer por (=intentar)

    hacer por hacer algo — to try to do sth, make an effort to do sth

    3. VERBO IMPERSONAL
    1) [con expresiones de tiempo atmosférico] to be

    hace calor/frío — it's hot/cold

    ¿qué tiempo hace? — what's the weather like?

    2) [con expresiones temporales]

    hace tres años que se fue — he left three years ago, it's three years since he left

    hace tres años que no lo veo — I haven't seen him for three years, it's three years since I (last) saw him

    ¿hace mucho que esperas? — have you been waiting long?

    • [desde] hace cuatro años — for four years

    3) LAm (=haber, tener)
    4.
    See:
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    1) ( crear) <mueble/vestido> to make; <casa/carretera> to build; < nido> to build, make; < coche> to make, manufacture; < túnel> to make, dig; <dibujo/plano> to do, draw; < lista> to make, draw up; < resumen> to do, make; < película> to make; <nudo/lazo> to tie; <pan/pastel> to make, bake; <vino/café/tortilla> to make; < cerveza> to make, brew

    me hizo un lugar or sitio en la mesa — he made room o a place for me at the table

    2)
    a) (efectuar, llevar a cabo) < sacrificio> to make; < milagro> to work, perform; <deberes/ejercicios/limpieza> to do; < mandado> to run; <transacción/investigación> to carry out; < experimento> to do, perform; < entrevista> to conduct; <gira/viaje> to do

    ¿me haces un favor? — will you do me a favor?

    hicimos un trato — we did o made a deal

    b) <cheque/factura> to make out, write out
    3) (formular, expresar) <declaración/promesa/oferta> to make; <proyecto/plan> to make, draw up; <crítica/comentario> to make, voice; < pregunta> to ask

    hacer caca — (fam) to do a poop (AmE) o (BrE) a pooh (colloq)

    hacer pis or pipí — (fam) to have a pee (colloq)

    hacer sus necesidades — (euf) to go to the bathroom o toilet (euph)

    5) ( adquirir) <dinero/fortuna> to make; < amigo> to make
    6) (preparar, arreglar) < cama> to make; < maleta> to pack

    hice el pescado al horno — I did o cooked the fish in the oven

    tengo que hacer la comida — I must make lunch; ver tb comida 2) b)

    7)
    a) (producir, causar) < ruido> to make

    las vacas hacen `mu' — cows go `moo'

    8) ( recorrer) <trayecto/distancia> to do, cover
    9) (en cálculos, enumeraciones)

    son 180... y 320 hacen 500 — that's 180... and 320 is o makes 500

    10)

    hacen una obra de Ibsen — they're doing o putting on a play by Ibsen

    deberías hacer ejercicio — you should do o get some exercise

    ¿hace algún deporte? — do you play o do any sports?

    b) (como profesión, ocupación) to do
    c) ( estudiar) to do

    hace Derecho — she's doing o studying o reading Law

    11)
    a) (realizar cierta acción, actuar de cierta manera) to do

    niño, eso no se hace! — you mustn't do that!

    qué se le va a hacer! or qué le vamos a hacer! — what can you o (frml) one do?

    hacerla — (Méx) (fam) to make it (colloq)

    hacerla (buena) — (fam)

    ahora sí que la hice! — now I've (really) done it!

    hacérsela buena a alguien — (Méx) to keep one's word o promise to somebody

    soñé que te sacabas la lotería - házmela buena! — I dreamed you won the lottery - if only!

    b) (dar cierto uso, destino, posición) to do

    y el libro ¿qué lo hice? — (CS, Méx fam) what did I do with the book?

    12) (esp Esp) ( actuar como)

    hacer el tonto — to act o play the fool

    voy a escribirle - deja, yo lo haré — I'm going to write to him - don't bother, I'll do it

    14) (Méx, RPl fam) (afectar, importar)

    ¿qué le hace? — so what? what does it matter?

    15) (transformar en, volver) to make

    te hará hombre, hijo mío — it will make a man of you, my son

    17) (inducir a, ser causa de que)

    hacer algo/a alguien + inf — to make something/somebody + inf

    todo hace suponer que... — everything suggests that o leads one to think that...

    hacer que algo/alguien + subj — to make something/somebody + inf

    18) ( obligar a)

    hacer + inf a alguien — to make somebody + inf

    hacer que alguien + subj — to make somebody + inf

    19)

    hacer hacer algo — to have o get something done/made

    hice acortar las cortinas — I had o got the curtains shortened

    20) (suponer, imaginar)
    2.
    hacer vi
    1)
    a) (obrar, actuar)

    ¿cómo se hace para que te den la beca? — what do you have to do to get the scholarship?

    ¿cómo hacen para vivir con ese sueldo? — how do they manage to live on that salary?

    hacerle a algo — (Chi, Méx fam)

    hacer y deshacer — to do as one pleases, do what one likes

    b) (+ compl)

    hiciste bien en decírmelo — you did o were right to tell me

    mamá, ya hice! — (esp AmL) Mommy, I've been o I've finished!

    hacer de cuerpo or de vientre — (frml) to have a bowel movement (frml)

    3) (fingir, simular)

    hizo como que no me había visto — he made out o pretended he hadn't seen me

    haz como si no supieras nada — act as if o pretend you don't know anything about it

    4) ( servir)

    hacer de algo: esta sábana hará de toldo this sheet will do for o as an awning; la escuela hizo de hospital — the school served as o was used as a hospital

    hacer de algo/alguien — to play (the part of) something/somebody

    hacía de `malo' — he played the bad guy

    6) (+ compl) ( sentar) (+ me/te/le etc)

    la trucha me hizo mal — (AmL) the trout didn't agree with me

    8)

    no le hace — ( no tiene importancia) it doesn't matter; ( no sirve de excusa) that's no excuse

    ¿no le hace que tire la ceniza aquí? — do you mind if I drop the ash here?

    9) (en 3a pers) (frml) (tocar, concernir)

    por lo que hace a or en cuanto hace a su solicitud — as far as your application is concerned

    10) (Esp fam) ( apetecer)

    ¿(te) hace una cerveza? — care for a beer?, do you fancy a beer? (BrE colloq)

    3.
    hacer v impers
    1)

    hace frío/calor/sol/viento — it's cold/hot/sunny/windy

    b) (fam & hum)

    hace sed ¿verdad? — it's thirsty weather/work, isn't it?

    parece que hace hambre — you/they seem to be hungry

    ¿cuánto hace que se fue? — how long ago did she leave?

    hace poco/un año — a short time/a year ago

    4.
    1) hacerse v pron

    hágase la luz — (Bib) let there be light; (+ me/te/le etc)

    se le ha hecho una ampolla — she's got o she has a blister

    por fin se le hizo ganar el premio — she finally got to win the award

    3)
    a) (refl) ( hacer para sí) <café/falda> to make oneself
    b) (caus) ( hacer que otro haga)
    4) ( causarse)

    ¿qué te hiciste en el brazo? — what did you do to your arm?

    ¿te hiciste daño? — did you hurt yourself?

    todavía se hace pis/caca — (fam) she still wets/messes herself

    6) (refl) ( adquirir) to make
    7)
    a) (volverse, convertirse en) to become

    hacerse famoso/monja — to become famous/a nun

    se está haciendo tarde — it's getting late; (+ me/te/le etc)

    c) ( cocinarse) pescado/guiso to cook
    d) (AmL) ( pasarle a)

    ¿qué se habrá hecho María? — what can have happened to María?

    8) ( resultar)

    esto se hace muy pesado — this gets very boring; (+ me/te/le etc)

    9) ( dar impresión de) (+ me/te/le etc)

    se me hace que está ofendida — I get the feeling o impression that she's upset

    se me hace que va a llover — I think o I have a feeling it's going to rain

    hacérsele a alguien — (Chi fam) to back out

    10) (caus)

    hacerse + inf: hazte respetar make people respect you; el desenlace no se hizo esperar the end was not long in coming; un chico que se hace querer a likable kid; se hizo construir una mansión he had a mansion built; hazte ver por un médico — (AmL) go and see a doctor

    hacerse a algo/+ inf — to get used to something/-ing

    12) ( fingirse)

    ¿éste es bobo o se (lo) hace? — (fam) is this guy stupid or just a good actor? (colloq)

    no te hagas el sordo — don't pretend o act as if you didn't hear me

    yo me hice — (Méx fam) I pretend not to notice

    13) ( moverse) (+ compl) to move

    hacerse atrás/a un lado — to move back/to one side

    15) hacerse de (AmL)

    tengo que hacerme de dinero — I must get o lay my hands on some money

    * * *
    = accomplish, design (for/to), be up to, cause, conduct, do, devise, produce, render, compose, make, get (a)round to, make out, get round to, brew.
    Ex. If a library prefers to simplify records in particular areas, this can usually be accomplished by not entering particular types of information.
    Ex. In lists designed for international use a symbolic notation instead of textual notes may be used.
    Ex. When I saw what he was up to, I drew back for a punch and hit him so hard on the nose that he fell on his back and lay there for some time, so that his wife stood over him and cried out 'Mercy! You've done my husband in!'.
    Ex. As usage of the language causes terms to become anachronistic, or as increases in our level of awareness reveal undesirable connotations, we seek to change subject heading terms.
    Ex. Obviously, this tagging must be conducted manually.
    Ex. In all these cases where scientists studied what crafstmen knew how to do the resulting benefits have accrued to science not to technology.
    Ex. Special classification schemes are generally devised for an application in which no major general scheme is suitable.
    Ex. The present OCLC system does not produce catalog cards in sets, but if it did it could produce over 6,000 different sets for one title.
    Ex. So strongly was it felt by proponents of change that just such unconscious biases rendered libraries 'part of the problem, instead of the solution'.
    Ex. There have never been any attempts to compose a bibliography of US government documents relating to international law.
    Ex. This concept comes mainly from the military, where a designated number of troops make a squad, a platoon, a regiment, etc..
    Ex. The article is entitled 'A list of lists of Web sites to check out: getting organized and getting around to it are two different things'.
    Ex. The cards for those headings should be removed from the index and new cards made out if necessary.
    Ex. The government have been making noises about it for some time but haven't quite got round to it.
    Ex. The goddess owned a potent magick cauldron in which she planned to brew a special liquid for her ugly son.
    ----
    * acceder haciendo clic = click.
    * acusación + hacer = accusation + level.
    * aguja de hacer croché = crochet hook, crochet needle.
    * aguja de hacer ganchillo = crochet hook, crochet needle.
    * aguja de hacer punto = knitting needle.
    * algo diverto que hacer = fun thing to do.
    * Algo que se hace para matar el tiempo = time filler.
    * al hacer esto = by so doing, in so doing, by doing so, in doing so.
    * a medio hacer = halfway done, half done.
    * anunciado desde hace tiempo = long-heralded.
    * aprender haciendo = learn by + doing.
    * batir hasta hacer espuma = work up + a lather.
    * ¡bien hecho! = the way to go!.
    * buscar una forma de hacer (algo) = develop + way + to make + Nombre.
    * contenedor para hacer compost = compost bin.
    * continuar con el buen hacer = keep up + the good work, keep up + the great work.
    * continuar haciendo algo = get on with + Nombre.
    * cuando hace frío = in the cold.
    * cumplido hace tiempo = long overdue.
    * decidir hacer = spring for.
    * decidir qué hacer con = make + disposition of.
    * de hace años = of years ago.
    * de hace muchos años = long-standing.
    * de hace mucho tiempo = age-old, long-lost.
    * de hace siglos = of yore.
    * de hace varios siglos = centuries-old.
    * dejar de hacer huelga = cross + the picket line.
    * dejar que Alguien haga las cosas a su manera = let + Nombre + do things + Posesivo + (own) way.
    * dejar sin hacer = leave + undone.
    * desde hace algún tiempo = for some time past, for days.
    * desde hace años = over the years, for years past, for years.
    * desde hace la tira (de tiempo) = for yonks, for yonks and yonks.
    * desde hace muchísimo tiempo = in ages (and ages and ages).
    * desde hace muchos años = for years.
    * desde hace mucho tiempo = for ages, long-time [longtime], long since, in ages (and ages and ages).
    * desde hace siglos = for yonks, for yonks and yonks.
    * desde hace tanto tiempo = so long.
    * desde hace tiempo = long [longer -comp., longest -sup.], over the years, for a long time, long since, for some time.
    * desde hace un montonazo de tiempo = for yonks and yonks.
    * desde hace un montón de tiempo = for yonks.
    * desde hace un par de + Tiempo = in these past couple of + Tiempo.
    * desde hace varios años + Presente = for several years + Pretérito Perfecto.
    * desde hace ya algún tiempo = for some time now.
    * desde hace ya años = for years now.
    * difícil de hacer = hard to do.
    * donde fueres haz lo que vieres = when in Rome (do as the Romans do).
    * dos entuertos no hacen un derecho = two wrongs do not make a right.
    * el que las hace, las paga = you've made your bed, now you must lie in it!.
    * encargado de hacer el presupuesto = budgetmaker.
    * esfuerzo + hacer sudar = work up + a lather.
    * es más fácil decirlo que hacerlo = easier said than done.
    * esperado hace tiempo = overdue.
    * esperar sin nada que hacer = kick + Posesivo + heels.
    * establecido desde hace tiempo = long-established.
    * estar haciendo = be up to.
    * estar haciendo Algo = have + Nombre + on the go.
    * estar haciendo algo que no se debe = be up to no good.
    * estar sin hacer nada = sit + idle, stand + idle.
    * existir desde hace años = be around for years.
    * frotar hasta hacer espuma = lather.
    * hace algunos años = some years ago.
    * hace algún tiempo = some time ago, a while back, some while ago, sometime back.
    * hace años = years ago.
    * hace demasiado tiempo = too long ago.
    * hacer huir en batalla = route.
    * hace la tira (de tiempo) = yonks, yonks and yonks.
    * hace miles de años = aeons ago.
    * hace muchas lunas = all those many moons ago, many moons ago.
    * hace muchísimos años = a great many years ago.
    * hace muchísimo tiempo = ages (and ages) ago, aeons ago, yonks.
    * hace muchos años = many years ago.
    * hace mucho tiempo = long since, all those many moons ago, many moons ago.
    * hace muy poco tiempo = a short time ago.
    * hace + Número + años = Número + years ago.
    * hace poco tiempo = a short time ago.
    * hacer a Alguien pasar vergüenza = embarrass.
    * hacer a Alguien precavido = put + Nombre + on + Posesivo + guard.
    * hacer abono orgánico = compost.
    * hacer acampada = camp.
    * hacer accesible a través de = make + available through.
    * hacer ademanes = flail about, gesticulate.
    * hacer aflorar = bring to + the surface.
    * hacer aflorar sentimientos de antagonismo = bring to + the surface + feelings of antagonism.
    * hacer ágil = limber up.
    * hacer agua = Negativo + hold + water.
    * hacer agua(s) = spring + a leak.
    * hacer a gusto del consumidor = make to + order.
    * hacer ajustes = make + adjustment.
    * hacer alarde de = boast, flaunt, brag, show off.
    * hacer alegaciones = plead.
    * hacer Algo a hurtadillas = sneak.
    * hacer algo alocado = do + something footloose and fancy-free.
    * hacer algo al respecto = do + something about it.
    * hacer Algo con dificultad = muddle through, plod (along/through).
    * hacer Algo con mucho esfuerzo = plod (along/through).
    * hacer algo con respecto a = do + something about.
    * hacer Algo de cara a la galería = play to + the gallery.
    * hacer Algo en exceso = push + Nombre + too far.
    * hacer algo funcionar = make + Nombre + tick.
    * hacer Algo muy bien = do + an excellent job of, make + an excellent job of.
    * hacer Algo para la galería = play to + the gallery.
    * hacer algo poco a poco = eat away at.
    * hacer algo por amor al arte = labour of love.
    * hacer Algo por + Posesivo + propia cuenta = make + Posesivo + own arrangements.
    * hacer Algo posible = make + provision for.
    * hacer Algo puré = mash.
    * hacer Algo rápidamente = put together.
    * hacer Algo realidad = make + Nombre + come true.
    * hacer Algo sin ser visto = sneak.
    * hacer Algo sobre la marcha = play + Nombre + by ear.
    * hacer Algo trocitos = tear + Nombre + to shreds, tear + Nombre + to bits.
    * hacer algunos comentarios sobre lo que Alguien ha dicho = take + a few cracks at.
    * hacer alusión a = make + allusion to, make + reference to.
    * hacer a mano = handcraft.
    * hacer a medida = custom-make, make to + order.
    * hacer a medida para satisfacer los requisitos = tailor to + meet the specification.
    * hacer amigos = win + friends.
    * hacer amistad = make + friend.
    * hacer amistad con = make + friends with, befriend.
    * hacer amistades = friend.
    * hacer ampollas = blister.
    * hacer anotaciones = annotate, mark + Nombre + up.
    * hacer añicos = shatter, blow + Nombre + to bits, smash + Nombre + to bits, tear + Nombre + to bits.
    * hacer aparecer = cause + display of.
    * hacer a partir de = make out of.
    * hacer apología = make + apology.
    * hacer arreglos florales = arrange + flowers.
    * hacer artesanalmente = handcraft.
    * hacer asequible = make + amenable.
    * hacer atractivo = endear.
    * hacer a un lado = nudge + Nombre + aside, push aside.
    * hacer autostop = thumb + a lift, hitch + a ride.
    * hacer avances = make + headway.
    * hacer avanzar = nudge + Nombre + forward, push + the frontiers of, nudge + Nombre + along, nudge + Nombre + into, push + the boundaries of.
    * hacer avanzar el conocimiento = push back + the frontiers of knowledge.
    * hacer avanzar hacia = nudge + Nombre + toward.
    * hacer averiguaciones = make + enquiry.
    * hacer bajar = force down.
    * hacer balance de = take + stock of.
    * hacer barrabasadas = play + pranks.
    * hacer basto = coarsen.
    * hacer bien = do + good.
    * hacer borrón y cuenta nueva = start with + a clean slate, cut + Posesivo + losses, turn over + a new leaf.
    * hacer borroso = blur.
    * hacer bromas = banter.
    * hacer bucles = loop.
    * hacer buenas migas = hit it off.
    * hacer buen uso de Algo = put to + good use.
    * hacer bulla = kick up + a stink, kick up + a fuss, raise + a stink, make + a stink (about), make + a racket, make + a row, make + a ruckus, kick up + a row.
    * hacer bulto = bulge.
    * hacer búsquedas en = search through.
    * hacer caca = take + a dump.
    * hacer caer = oust.
    * hacer caja = tally up + sales, balance + the cash, reconcile (with), balance + the cash drawer.
    * hacer caja con = cash in on, ride (on) + Posesivo + coattails.
    * hacer callar = shush, hush, quieten.
    * hacer cambiar = swing + Persona.
    * hacer cambiar las cosas = turn + the tide on.
    * hacer cambios en la búsqueda = renegotiate + search.
    * hacer cambios indebidamente = tamper (with).
    * hacer campaña = campaign, stump, go out on + the road.
    * hacer cara a = brave.
    * hacer caso = take + notice, listen (to).
    * hacer caso a Alguien = take + Posesivo + word for it.
    * hacer caso (a/de) = pay + attention to.
    * hacer caso omiso = disregard, brush aside, go + unheeded, fall on + deaf ears, meet + deaf ears, thumb + Posesivo + nose at, dismiss with + the wave of the hand, fly in + the face of, push aside.
    * hacer caso omiso de = be oblivious of/to.
    * hacer chanchullos = fiddle.
    * hacer chatting = chat.
    * hacer circular = pass around.
    * hacer circular por = circulate round.
    * hacer cisco = tear + apart, wipe + the floor with.
    * hacer coincidir (con) = reconcile (with).
    * hacer cola = queue up.
    * hacer colectas = exact + contributions.
    * hacer comentarios = air + comments.
    * hacer como el avestruz = bury + Posesivo + head in the sand (like an ostrich), stick + Posesivo + head in the sand.
    * hacer como si nada = play it + cool.
    * hacer comparaciones = draw + comparisons, make + comparisons.
    * hacer comparecer = arraign.
    * hacer compatible (con) = reconcile (with).
    * hacer compost = compost.
    * hacer compras = do + shopping.
    * hacer comprender = bring + home.
    * hacer con Alguien lo que Uno quiera = be like putty in + Posesivo + hands.
    * hacer concesiones = make + allowances.
    * hacer conjeturas = speculate.
    * hacer constar = state.
    * hacer contrabando = smuggle.
    * hacer copias = make + multiple copies.
    * hacer copias mediante multicopista por disolvente = spirit duplication.
    * hacer correr la voz = spread + the word, spread + the good word, pass on + the good word, spread + the news.
    * hacer cosas = get + things done.
    * hacer cosquillas = tickle.
    * hacer creer = lead to + believe, lull + Nombre + into thinking.
    * hacer crítica = find + fault with.
    * hacer croché = crochet.
    * hacer cuadrar (con) = reconcile (with).
    * hacer cuadrar las cuentas = reconcile + receipts.
    * hacer cuadras las facturas = reconcile + receipts.
    * hacer cualquier cosa = do + anything, give + Posesivo + right arm.
    * hacer cumplir = uphold.
    * hacer cumplir la disciplina = enforce + discipline.
    * hacer cumplir la legislación = enforce + legislation.
    * hacer cumplir la ley = law enforcement, enforce + law, legal enforcement.
    * hacer cumplir una norma = enforce + standard.
    * hacer cumplir una política = uphold + policy.
    * hacer cumplir unas normas = enforce + policy.
    * hacer daño = do + harm, hurt.
    * hacer dar vueltas = gyrate.
    * hacer de = make out of.
    * hacer de carabina = play + gooseberry.
    * hacer declamaciones = declaim.
    * hacer dedo = hitch + a ride, thumb + a lift.
    * hacer de la noche día = burn + the candle at both ends.
    * hacer del mismo molde = cast in + the same mould as.
    * hacer de nuevo = redo [re-do], remake.
    * hacer de + Posesivo + parte = do + Posesivo + bit.
    * hacer derretir el hielo = de-ice [deice].
    * hacer desaparecer = eradicate, dispel, banish.
    * hacer desaparecer una división = blur + division.
    * hacer desaparecer un mito = dispel + myth.
    * hacer descuento = discount.
    * hacer desfilar = parade.
    * hacer detonar = detonate.
    * hacer de tripas corazón = bite + the bullet.
    * hacer diabluras = play + pranks.
    * hacer diana = hit + home.
    * hacer difícil = make + it + difficult, make + difficult.
    * hacer dinero = make + money.
    * hacer dudar = make + Nombre + doubt, misgive.
    * hacer eco = echo, resonate.
    * hacer eco de = echo.
    * hacer efectivo = cash in.
    * hacer efectivo en metálico = pay in + cash.
    * hacer ejercicio físico = work out.
    * hacer ejercicios de calentamiento = limber up.
    * hacer el aire irrespirable = choke + the air.
    * hacer el amor = make + love.
    * hacer el avío = get + ready.
    * hacer el balance de cuentas = balance + the cash, balance + the cash drawer.
    * hacer el cambio = make + the change.
    * hacer el chorra = pissing into the wind.
    * hacer el deber de Uno = do + Posesivo + part.
    * hacer el dobladillo = hem.
    * hacer elección = make + choices.
    * hacer el esfuerzo necesario = pull + Posesivo + (own) weight.
    * hacer el indio = horse around/about.
    * hacer el intento = have + a go, give + it a shot, give + Nombre + a try, have + a stab at, take + a stab at, make + a stab at, give + it a whirl, give + it a try.
    * hacer el mal = do + evil.
    * hacer el mejor uso de = make + the best of.
    * hacer el monigote = fool around.
    * hacer el paripé = keep up + facade, put on + an act.
    * hacer el pasillo = form + a guard of honour.
    * hacer el pasillo de honor = form + a guard of honour.
    * hacer el recorrido normal = make + the rounds.
    * hacer el ridículo = make + a fool of + Reflexivo, make + an arse of + Reflexivo, make + a spectacle of + Reflexivo.
    * hacer el testamento = testate.
    * hacer el tonto = fool around, horse around/about.
    * hacer el último esfuerzo = go + the last mile, go + the extra mile.
    * hacer encaje = tat.
    * hacer encaje de bolillos = do + the impossible, jump through + hoops, double over + backwards.
    * hacer encaje de bolillos para que cuadre Algo = juggle.
    * hacer encargos = run + errands.
    * hacer enemigos = make + enemies.
    * hacer entender = get across.
    * hacer erupción = erupt.
    * hacer escala = stop over.
    * hacer eses = zigzag.
    * hacer esperar = cool + Posesivo + heels.
    * hacer espuma = work up + a lather, froth.
    * hacer esquina con = form + right angles with.
    * hacer estallar = spark, ignite, touch off, blow up, let off.
    * hacer estallar en añicos = blow + sky high.
    * hacer estallar una bomba = bomb.
    * hacer estallar un guerra = ignite + war.
    * hacer esto = go along + this road.
    * hacer esto y aquello de un modo relajado = mess about, pootle, piddle around.
    * hacer esto y aquello de un modo relajado = mess around.
    * hacer esto y aquello sin prisas = pootle.
    * hacer estragos = lay + waste to, create + havoc, wreak + havoc, cause + havoc, take + Posesivo + toll (on).
    * hacer estragos en = play + havoc with.
    * hacer estrías = rifle.
    * hacer exenciones = make + exemptions.
    * hacer experimentos = institute + experiments.
    * hacer explícito = make + explicit.
    * hacer explotar = blow up.
    * hacer extensivo + Posesivo + agradecimiento = extend + Posesivo + thanks.
    * hacer factible = make + feasible.
    * hacer falta = need, must, have to, it + take.
    * hacer flexible = limber up.
    * hacer fortuna = make + Posesivo + fortune, make + a fortune, strike + it rich, strike + gold, hit + the jackpot.
    * hacer fotocopias = photoduplication [photo-duplication].
    * hacer fotografía = make + picture.
    * hacer fracasar = foil, derail.
    * hacer frente = combat, come to + terms with, contain, address + Nombre + head-on, meet + Nombre + head-on, tackle + Nombre + head-on, face + Nombre + head-on, engage.
    * hacer frente a = confront, deal with, face, face up to, meet, cope with, wrestle with, stand up to, brave, breast, address.
    * hacer frente a deudas = meet + debts.
    * hacer frente a gastos = meet + expenses.
    * hacer frente a la delincuencia = tackle + crime.
    * hacer frente a la inflación = combat + inflation.
    * hacer frente a la realidad = confront + reality, face + (the) facts, face + (up to) the fact that, face + reality.
    * hacer frente a la realidad (de que) = face + the truth (that).
    * hacer frente a las diferencias = face + differences.
    * hacer frente a la situación = tackle + situation.
    * hacer frente a la vida = cope.
    * hacer frente al cambio = manage + change.
    * hacer frente al futuro = face up to + the future.
    * hacer frente al hecho de que = face + (up to) the fact that.
    * hacer frente a los elementos = brave + the elements.
    * hacer frente a los hechos = face + facts.
    * hacer frente a tiempos difíciles = cope with + difficult times, cope with + difficult times.
    * hacer frente a una amenaza = address + threat.
    * hacer frente a una crisis = face + crisis, meet + crisis.
    * hacer frente a una incertidumbre = meet + uncertainty.
    * hacer frente a una necesidad = meet + need, serve + need.
    * hacer frente a una responsabilidad = meet + responsibility, face up to + responsibility.
    * hacer frente a un cambio = meet + change.
    * hacer frente a un gasto = meet + cost.
    * hacer frente a un problema = attack + problem, combat + problem, wrestle with + problem.
    * hacer frente a un reto = rise (up) to + challenge, confront + challenge, meet + challenge, embrace + challenge.
    * hacer fresco = be cool.
    * hacer funcionar = service, do + the trick.
    * hacer gala de = sport.
    * hacer gala del conocimiento que uno tiene = air + knowledge.
    * hacer ganchillo = crochet.
    * hacer garabatos = scribble, scrawl, doodle.
    * hacer girar = twiddle, twirl.
    * hacer gozar = delight.
    * hacer gracia = tickle + Posesivo + fancy.
    * hacer grandes esfuerzos por = take + (great) pains to.
    * hacer grandes progresos = make + great strides.
    * hacer guardar silencio = shush.
    * hacer hasta la presente = do + all along.
    * hacer hidrófugo = render + water-repellent.
    * hacer hincapié = emphasise [emphasize, -USA].
    * hacer hincapié en = put + a premium on.
    * hacer hincapié en una idea = hammer + point.
    * hacer historia = make + history, history in the making, go down in + history.
    * hacer honor al nombre de Uno = live up to + Posesivo + name.
    * hacer horas extraordinarias = work + overtime.
    * hacer horas extras = work + overtime.
    * hacer hueco = make + room (for).
    * hacer huelga = strike.
    * hacer huella = leave + an impression, touch + Posesivo + life, leave + Posesivo + mark, cut + a swath(e), leave + an imprint, make + an impression.
    * hacer huir = drive away, chase + Nombre + off.
    * hacer imaginar = conjure up + an image of, conjure up + a vision of.
    * hacer impermeable = render + water-repellent.
    * hacer inalterable = set in + stone, set in + tablets of stone.
    * hacer incomprensible = render + incomprehensible, garble.
    * hacer indescifrable = render + indecipherable, garble.
    * hacer innecesario = obviate + the need for, make + redundant.
    * hacer insinuaciones = make + innuendoes.
    * hacer insinuaciones sobre = make + noises about, make + a noise about.
    * hacer insoluble = render + insoluble.
    * hacer inutilizable = render + useless.
    * hacer juego con = go with.
    * hacer juegos malabares = juggle.
    * hacer juegos malabares para que cuadre Algo = juggle.
    * hacer justicia = do + justice.
    * hacer la cama = make + the bed.
    * hacer la cuenta = tot up, tote up.
    * hacer la guerra = make + war.
    * hacer (la) mona = play + hooky, play + truant, skip + class.
    * hacer la paz = make + (the) peace.
    * hacer la pelota = butter + Nombre + up, toady, fawn (on/upon/over).
    * hacer la pelota a + Alguien = curry + favour with + Alguien.
    * hacer la pelotilla = toady, butter + Nombre + up.
    * hacer la prueba = give + it a whirl, give + it a shot, give + it a try.
    * hacer largos = swim + laps.
    * hacer las leyes más estrictas = tighten + laws.
    * hacer las maletas = pack up, pack + Posesivo + belongings, pack + Posesivo + things, pack + Posesivo + suitcases, pack + Posesivo + bags.
    * hacer las paces = heal + the breach, heal + the rift, bury + the hatchet, make + (the) peace, smoke + the peace pipe, smoke + the pipe of peace, bury + the tomahawk, bury + the war axe.
    * hacer la transición = make + the transition.
    * hacer la vida imposible = make + life hell.
    * hacer la vista gorda = look + the other way, turn + a blind eye to, pretend + not to have seen.
    * hacerle a Alguien un lavado de cerebro = brainwash.
    * hacerle las cosas fáciles a Alguien = play into + the hands of.
    * hacerle la vida más simple a todos = simplify + life for everyone.
    * hacerle una paja a un muerto = flog + a dead horse, beat + a dead horse, fart + in the wind.
    * hacerle un bombo a Alguien = knock + Alguien + up.
    * hacer llamada telefónica = make + telephone call.
    * hacer llorar = reduce + Nombre + to tears.
    * hacer llorar de emoción = move + Nombre + to tears.
    * hacerlo = do so, go ahead.
    * hacerlo bien = put + matters + right, get + it + right, be right on track.
    * hacer lo correcto = do + the right thing.
    * hacerlo de nuevo = go and do it again.
    * hacerlo difícil de + Infinitivo = make + it + hard to + Infinitivo.
    * hacer lo imposible = bend over backwards, do + the impossible, lean over + backwards, double over + backwards.
    * hacer lo imposible para = jump through + hoops.
    * hacerlo lo mejor que uno pueda = do + Posesivo + utmost, give + Posesivo + utmost, give + Posesivo + best.
    * hacerlo mal = get + it + (all) wrong.
    * hacer lo más acertado dadas las circunstancias = do + the best thing in the circumstances.
    * hacerlo más llevadero = make + life easier.
    * hacerlo mejor = do + a better job.
    * hacer lo mejor que Uno pueda = put + Posesivo + best into, give of + Posesivo + best.
    * hacer lo mejor que Uno puede = try + Posesivo + best, try + Posesivo + heart out.
    * hacerlo por uno mismo = do + it + on + Posesivo + own.
    * hacer lo que a Uno le de la gana = get away with + murder.
    * hacer lo que le corresponde a Uno = do + Posesivo + part.
    * hacer lo que uno dice que es capaz de hacer = live up to + Posesivo + claim.
    * hacer lo que Uno quiera = get away with + murder.
    * hacer los deberes = do + homework.
    * hacerlo sin la ayuda de nadie = do + it + on + Posesivo + own.
    * hacerlo solo = do + it + on + Posesivo + own.
    * hacer los primeros pinitos = take + the first step.
    * hacerlo todo excepto = stop at + nothing short of.
    * hacerlo todo menos = stop at + nothing short of.
    * hacer malabarismos = juggle.
    * hacer malabarismos para que cuadre Algo = juggle.
    * hacer mandados = run + errands.
    * hacer maravillas = work + wonders.
    * hacer más consciente de Algo = heighten + awareness.
    * hacer más copias de Algo = produce + additional copies.
    * hacer más eficiente = streamline.
    * hacer más estricto = tighten.
    * hacer más fuerte = toughen.
    * hacer más inteligente = smarten.
    * hacer más interesante = spice up, add + spice.
    * hacer más preciso = tightening up.
    * hacer más rico = add + richness to.
    * hacer más riguroso = tighten, tightening up.
    * hacer más sabroso = pep up.
    * hacer más sofisticado = dumb up.
    * hacer mejor = give + Nombre + an edge.
    * hacer mejoras = make + improvements.
    * hacer mella = take + Posesivo + toll (on), leave + an impression, touch + Posesivo + life, leave + Posesivo + mark, cut + a swath(e), leave + an imprint, make + an impression, hit + home.
    * hacer mella en = dent, make + a dent in, take + a bite out of.
    * hacer mención de/a = make + mention of.
    * hacer mezcla = mix + cement.
    * hacer milagros = work + wonders, work + miracles.
    * hacer mucha ilusión = be thrilled.
    * hacer mucho = do + much.
    * hacer mucho dinero = make + good money, earn + good money.
    * hacer mucho por = go + a long way (towards/to/in) + Gerundio.
    * hacer muchos aspavientos por Algo = make + a song and dance about.
    * hacer mucho tiempo que Algo ha desaparecido = be long gone.
    * hacer necesario = render + necessary.
    * hacer negocio = make + business.
    * hacer negocios = do + business, transact.
    * hacer + Nombre + llegar hasta aquí = get + Nombre + this far.
    * hacer + Nombre + responsable de = put + Nombre + in the driving seat.
    * hacer notar = bring to + Posesivo + attention, bring to + the attention, mark, note, bring to + notice, bring + attention to, bring to + Posesivo + notice.
    * hacer notar la presencia de = make + Posesivo + presence felt, make + Posesivo + presence known.
    * hacer novillos = play + hooky, skip + class, play + truant, bunk off, bunk + classes, skive, bunk + school.
    * hacer nudos = knot.
    * hacer objeciones contra = urge against.
    * hacer observaciones = comment on/upon.
    * hacer obsoleto = make + redundant.
    * hacer oídos sordos = turn + a deaf ear to.
    * hacer ordinario = coarsen.
    * hacer pagar tributos = exact + tributes.
    * hacer palmas = clap.
    * hacer paradas = make + stops.
    * hacer parecer = make + seem, make + Nombre + out to be.
    * hacer parecer pequeño = dwarf.
    * hacer partícipe = engage.
    * hacer pasajero = render + transitory.
    * hacer patochadas = fool around.
    * hacer payasadas = fool around.
    * hacer pedazos = shatter, smash + Nombre + to bits.
    * hacer peligrar = place + in jeopardy, imperil, endanger, pose + risk.
    * hacer pensar = provoke + thought, make to + think, lull + Nombre + into thinking, summon up + image.
    * hacer pensar en = conjure, conjure up + a picture of, bring to + mind, conjure up + an image of, conjure up, conjure up + a vision of.
    * hacer pequeños ajustes = tinker + around the edges, tinker with.
    * hacer perder el conocimiento = knock + Nombre + out, knock + Nombre + unconscious.
    * hacer perder el entusiasmo = dampen + Posesivo + enthusiasm.
    * hacer perder el sentido a = make + nonsense of.
    * hacer perder la agilidad física = stale.
    * hacer perder la agilidad mental = stale.
    * hacer perder las esperanzas = dampen + Posesivo + hopes.
    * hacer permanente = render + permanent.
    * hacer ping = ping.
    * hacer pipí = pee.
    * hacer pis = piss, pee, take + a leak, have + a leak, widdle, piddle.
    * hacer planes = plan, make + plans.
    * hacer poca distinción entre... y... = make + little distinction between... and....
    * hacer poco = do + little.
    * hacer popular = popularise [popularize, -USA].
    * hacer por encargo = make to + order.
    * hacer + Posesivo + agosto = make + a killing.
    * hacer + Posesivo + necesidades = relieve + Reflexivo, go + potty.
    * hacer + Posesivo + trabajo = get on with + Posesivo + work, do + Posesivo + business.
    * hacer posible = enable, provide for, make + possible, provide + a basis for, make + an opportunity.
    * hacer posible el crecimiento = accommodate + growth.
    * hacer preguntas = ask + questions, interrogate, air + questions, make + enquiry.
    * hacer preparativo = make + arrangements.
    * hacer preso = imprison, jail [gaol, -UK].
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    1) ( crear) <mueble/vestido> to make; <casa/carretera> to build; < nido> to build, make; < coche> to make, manufacture; < túnel> to make, dig; <dibujo/plano> to do, draw; < lista> to make, draw up; < resumen> to do, make; < película> to make; <nudo/lazo> to tie; <pan/pastel> to make, bake; <vino/café/tortilla> to make; < cerveza> to make, brew

    me hizo un lugar or sitio en la mesa — he made room o a place for me at the table

    2)
    a) (efectuar, llevar a cabo) < sacrificio> to make; < milagro> to work, perform; <deberes/ejercicios/limpieza> to do; < mandado> to run; <transacción/investigación> to carry out; < experimento> to do, perform; < entrevista> to conduct; <gira/viaje> to do

    ¿me haces un favor? — will you do me a favor?

    hicimos un trato — we did o made a deal

    b) <cheque/factura> to make out, write out
    3) (formular, expresar) <declaración/promesa/oferta> to make; <proyecto/plan> to make, draw up; <crítica/comentario> to make, voice; < pregunta> to ask

    hacer caca — (fam) to do a poop (AmE) o (BrE) a pooh (colloq)

    hacer pis or pipí — (fam) to have a pee (colloq)

    hacer sus necesidades — (euf) to go to the bathroom o toilet (euph)

    5) ( adquirir) <dinero/fortuna> to make; < amigo> to make
    6) (preparar, arreglar) < cama> to make; < maleta> to pack

    hice el pescado al horno — I did o cooked the fish in the oven

    tengo que hacer la comida — I must make lunch; ver tb comida 2) b)

    7)
    a) (producir, causar) < ruido> to make

    las vacas hacen `mu' — cows go `moo'

    8) ( recorrer) <trayecto/distancia> to do, cover
    9) (en cálculos, enumeraciones)

    son 180... y 320 hacen 500 — that's 180... and 320 is o makes 500

    10)

    hacen una obra de Ibsen — they're doing o putting on a play by Ibsen

    deberías hacer ejercicio — you should do o get some exercise

    ¿hace algún deporte? — do you play o do any sports?

    b) (como profesión, ocupación) to do
    c) ( estudiar) to do

    hace Derecho — she's doing o studying o reading Law

    11)
    a) (realizar cierta acción, actuar de cierta manera) to do

    niño, eso no se hace! — you mustn't do that!

    qué se le va a hacer! or qué le vamos a hacer! — what can you o (frml) one do?

    hacerla — (Méx) (fam) to make it (colloq)

    hacerla (buena) — (fam)

    ahora sí que la hice! — now I've (really) done it!

    hacérsela buena a alguien — (Méx) to keep one's word o promise to somebody

    soñé que te sacabas la lotería - házmela buena! — I dreamed you won the lottery - if only!

    b) (dar cierto uso, destino, posición) to do

    y el libro ¿qué lo hice? — (CS, Méx fam) what did I do with the book?

    12) (esp Esp) ( actuar como)

    hacer el tonto — to act o play the fool

    voy a escribirle - deja, yo lo haré — I'm going to write to him - don't bother, I'll do it

    14) (Méx, RPl fam) (afectar, importar)

    ¿qué le hace? — so what? what does it matter?

    15) (transformar en, volver) to make

    te hará hombre, hijo mío — it will make a man of you, my son

    17) (inducir a, ser causa de que)

    hacer algo/a alguien + inf — to make something/somebody + inf

    todo hace suponer que... — everything suggests that o leads one to think that...

    hacer que algo/alguien + subj — to make something/somebody + inf

    18) ( obligar a)

    hacer + inf a alguien — to make somebody + inf

    hacer que alguien + subj — to make somebody + inf

    19)

    hacer hacer algo — to have o get something done/made

    hice acortar las cortinas — I had o got the curtains shortened

    20) (suponer, imaginar)
    2.
    hacer vi
    1)
    a) (obrar, actuar)

    ¿cómo se hace para que te den la beca? — what do you have to do to get the scholarship?

    ¿cómo hacen para vivir con ese sueldo? — how do they manage to live on that salary?

    hacerle a algo — (Chi, Méx fam)

    hacer y deshacer — to do as one pleases, do what one likes

    b) (+ compl)

    hiciste bien en decírmelo — you did o were right to tell me

    mamá, ya hice! — (esp AmL) Mommy, I've been o I've finished!

    hacer de cuerpo or de vientre — (frml) to have a bowel movement (frml)

    3) (fingir, simular)

    hizo como que no me había visto — he made out o pretended he hadn't seen me

    haz como si no supieras nada — act as if o pretend you don't know anything about it

    4) ( servir)

    hacer de algo: esta sábana hará de toldo this sheet will do for o as an awning; la escuela hizo de hospital — the school served as o was used as a hospital

    hacer de algo/alguien — to play (the part of) something/somebody

    hacía de `malo' — he played the bad guy

    6) (+ compl) ( sentar) (+ me/te/le etc)

    la trucha me hizo mal — (AmL) the trout didn't agree with me

    8)

    no le hace — ( no tiene importancia) it doesn't matter; ( no sirve de excusa) that's no excuse

    ¿no le hace que tire la ceniza aquí? — do you mind if I drop the ash here?

    9) (en 3a pers) (frml) (tocar, concernir)

    por lo que hace a or en cuanto hace a su solicitud — as far as your application is concerned

    10) (Esp fam) ( apetecer)

    ¿(te) hace una cerveza? — care for a beer?, do you fancy a beer? (BrE colloq)

    3.
    hacer v impers
    1)

    hace frío/calor/sol/viento — it's cold/hot/sunny/windy

    b) (fam & hum)

    hace sed ¿verdad? — it's thirsty weather/work, isn't it?

    parece que hace hambre — you/they seem to be hungry

    ¿cuánto hace que se fue? — how long ago did she leave?

    hace poco/un año — a short time/a year ago

    4.
    1) hacerse v pron

    hágase la luz — (Bib) let there be light; (+ me/te/le etc)

    se le ha hecho una ampolla — she's got o she has a blister

    por fin se le hizo ganar el premio — she finally got to win the award

    3)
    a) (refl) ( hacer para sí) <café/falda> to make oneself
    b) (caus) ( hacer que otro haga)
    4) ( causarse)

    ¿qué te hiciste en el brazo? — what did you do to your arm?

    ¿te hiciste daño? — did you hurt yourself?

    todavía se hace pis/caca — (fam) she still wets/messes herself

    6) (refl) ( adquirir) to make
    7)
    a) (volverse, convertirse en) to become

    hacerse famoso/monja — to become famous/a nun

    se está haciendo tarde — it's getting late; (+ me/te/le etc)

    c) ( cocinarse) pescado/guiso to cook
    d) (AmL) ( pasarle a)

    ¿qué se habrá hecho María? — what can have happened to María?

    8) ( resultar)

    esto se hace muy pesado — this gets very boring; (+ me/te/le etc)

    9) ( dar impresión de) (+ me/te/le etc)

    se me hace que está ofendida — I get the feeling o impression that she's upset

    se me hace que va a llover — I think o I have a feeling it's going to rain

    hacérsele a alguien — (Chi fam) to back out

    10) (caus)

    hacerse + inf: hazte respetar make people respect you; el desenlace no se hizo esperar the end was not long in coming; un chico que se hace querer a likable kid; se hizo construir una mansión he had a mansion built; hazte ver por un médico — (AmL) go and see a doctor

    hacerse a algo/+ inf — to get used to something/-ing

    12) ( fingirse)

    ¿éste es bobo o se (lo) hace? — (fam) is this guy stupid or just a good actor? (colloq)

    no te hagas el sordo — don't pretend o act as if you didn't hear me

    yo me hice — (Méx fam) I pretend not to notice

    13) ( moverse) (+ compl) to move

    hacerse atrás/a un lado — to move back/to one side

    15) hacerse de (AmL)

    tengo que hacerme de dinero — I must get o lay my hands on some money

    * * *
    = accomplish, design (for/to), be up to, cause, conduct, do, devise, produce, render, compose, make, get (a)round to, make out, get round to, brew.

    Ex: If a library prefers to simplify records in particular areas, this can usually be accomplished by not entering particular types of information.

    Ex: In lists designed for international use a symbolic notation instead of textual notes may be used.
    Ex: When I saw what he was up to, I drew back for a punch and hit him so hard on the nose that he fell on his back and lay there for some time, so that his wife stood over him and cried out 'Mercy! You've done my husband in!'.
    Ex: As usage of the language causes terms to become anachronistic, or as increases in our level of awareness reveal undesirable connotations, we seek to change subject heading terms.
    Ex: Obviously, this tagging must be conducted manually.
    Ex: In all these cases where scientists studied what crafstmen knew how to do the resulting benefits have accrued to science not to technology.
    Ex: Special classification schemes are generally devised for an application in which no major general scheme is suitable.
    Ex: The present OCLC system does not produce catalog cards in sets, but if it did it could produce over 6,000 different sets for one title.
    Ex: So strongly was it felt by proponents of change that just such unconscious biases rendered libraries 'part of the problem, instead of the solution'.
    Ex: There have never been any attempts to compose a bibliography of US government documents relating to international law.
    Ex: This concept comes mainly from the military, where a designated number of troops make a squad, a platoon, a regiment, etc..
    Ex: The article is entitled 'A list of lists of Web sites to check out: getting organized and getting around to it are two different things'.
    Ex: The cards for those headings should be removed from the index and new cards made out if necessary.
    Ex: The government have been making noises about it for some time but haven't quite got round to it.
    Ex: The goddess owned a potent magick cauldron in which she planned to brew a special liquid for her ugly son.
    * acceder haciendo clic = click.
    * acusación + hacer = accusation + level.
    * aguja de hacer croché = crochet hook, crochet needle.
    * aguja de hacer ganchillo = crochet hook, crochet needle.
    * aguja de hacer punto = knitting needle.
    * algo diverto que hacer = fun thing to do.
    * Algo que se hace para matar el tiempo = time filler.
    * al hacer esto = by so doing, in so doing, by doing so, in doing so.
    * a medio hacer = halfway done, half done.
    * anunciado desde hace tiempo = long-heralded.
    * aprender haciendo = learn by + doing.
    * batir hasta hacer espuma = work up + a lather.
    * ¡bien hecho! = the way to go!.
    * buscar una forma de hacer (algo) = develop + way + to make + Nombre.
    * contenedor para hacer compost = compost bin.
    * continuar con el buen hacer = keep up + the good work, keep up + the great work.
    * continuar haciendo algo = get on with + Nombre.
    * cuando hace frío = in the cold.
    * cumplido hace tiempo = long overdue.
    * decidir hacer = spring for.
    * decidir qué hacer con = make + disposition of.
    * de hace años = of years ago.
    * de hace muchos años = long-standing.
    * de hace mucho tiempo = age-old, long-lost.
    * de hace siglos = of yore.
    * de hace varios siglos = centuries-old.
    * dejar de hacer huelga = cross + the picket line.
    * dejar que Alguien haga las cosas a su manera = let + Nombre + do things + Posesivo + (own) way.
    * dejar sin hacer = leave + undone.
    * desde hace algún tiempo = for some time past, for days.
    * desde hace años = over the years, for years past, for years.
    * desde hace la tira (de tiempo) = for yonks, for yonks and yonks.
    * desde hace muchísimo tiempo = in ages (and ages and ages).
    * desde hace muchos años = for years.
    * desde hace mucho tiempo = for ages, long-time [longtime], long since, in ages (and ages and ages).
    * desde hace siglos = for yonks, for yonks and yonks.
    * desde hace tanto tiempo = so long.
    * desde hace tiempo = long [longer -comp., longest -sup.], over the years, for a long time, long since, for some time.
    * desde hace un montonazo de tiempo = for yonks and yonks.
    * desde hace un montón de tiempo = for yonks.
    * desde hace un par de + Tiempo = in these past couple of + Tiempo.
    * desde hace varios años + Presente = for several years + Pretérito Perfecto.
    * desde hace ya algún tiempo = for some time now.
    * desde hace ya años = for years now.
    * difícil de hacer = hard to do.
    * donde fueres haz lo que vieres = when in Rome (do as the Romans do).
    * dos entuertos no hacen un derecho = two wrongs do not make a right.
    * el que las hace, las paga = you've made your bed, now you must lie in it!.
    * encargado de hacer el presupuesto = budgetmaker.
    * esfuerzo + hacer sudar = work up + a lather.
    * es más fácil decirlo que hacerlo = easier said than done.
    * esperado hace tiempo = overdue.
    * esperar sin nada que hacer = kick + Posesivo + heels.
    * establecido desde hace tiempo = long-established.
    * estar haciendo = be up to.
    * estar haciendo Algo = have + Nombre + on the go.
    * estar haciendo algo que no se debe = be up to no good.
    * estar sin hacer nada = sit + idle, stand + idle.
    * existir desde hace años = be around for years.
    * frotar hasta hacer espuma = lather.
    * hace algunos años = some years ago.
    * hace algún tiempo = some time ago, a while back, some while ago, sometime back.
    * hace años = years ago.
    * hace demasiado tiempo = too long ago.
    * hacer huir en batalla = route.
    * hace la tira (de tiempo) = yonks, yonks and yonks.
    * hace miles de años = aeons ago.
    * hace muchas lunas = all those many moons ago, many moons ago.
    * hace muchísimos años = a great many years ago.
    * hace muchísimo tiempo = ages (and ages) ago, aeons ago, yonks.
    * hace muchos años = many years ago.
    * hace mucho tiempo = long since, all those many moons ago, many moons ago.
    * hace muy poco tiempo = a short time ago.
    * hace + Número + años = Número + years ago.
    * hace poco tiempo = a short time ago.
    * hacer a Alguien pasar vergüenza = embarrass.
    * hacer a Alguien precavido = put + Nombre + on + Posesivo + guard.
    * hacer abono orgánico = compost.
    * hacer acampada = camp.
    * hacer accesible a través de = make + available through.
    * hacer ademanes = flail about, gesticulate.
    * hacer aflorar = bring to + the surface.
    * hacer aflorar sentimientos de antagonismo = bring to + the surface + feelings of antagonism.
    * hacer ágil = limber up.
    * hacer agua = Negativo + hold + water.
    * hacer agua(s) = spring + a leak.
    * hacer a gusto del consumidor = make to + order.
    * hacer ajustes = make + adjustment.
    * hacer alarde de = boast, flaunt, brag, show off.
    * hacer alegaciones = plead.
    * hacer Algo a hurtadillas = sneak.
    * hacer algo alocado = do + something footloose and fancy-free.
    * hacer algo al respecto = do + something about it.
    * hacer Algo con dificultad = muddle through, plod (along/through).
    * hacer Algo con mucho esfuerzo = plod (along/through).
    * hacer algo con respecto a = do + something about.
    * hacer Algo de cara a la galería = play to + the gallery.
    * hacer Algo en exceso = push + Nombre + too far.
    * hacer algo funcionar = make + Nombre + tick.
    * hacer Algo muy bien = do + an excellent job of, make + an excellent job of.
    * hacer Algo para la galería = play to + the gallery.
    * hacer algo poco a poco = eat away at.
    * hacer algo por amor al arte = labour of love.
    * hacer Algo por + Posesivo + propia cuenta = make + Posesivo + own arrangements.
    * hacer Algo posible = make + provision for.
    * hacer Algo puré = mash.
    * hacer Algo rápidamente = put together.
    * hacer Algo realidad = make + Nombre + come true.
    * hacer Algo sin ser visto = sneak.
    * hacer Algo sobre la marcha = play + Nombre + by ear.
    * hacer Algo trocitos = tear + Nombre + to shreds, tear + Nombre + to bits.
    * hacer algunos comentarios sobre lo que Alguien ha dicho = take + a few cracks at.
    * hacer alusión a = make + allusion to, make + reference to.
    * hacer a mano = handcraft.
    * hacer a medida = custom-make, make to + order.
    * hacer a medida para satisfacer los requisitos = tailor to + meet the specification.
    * hacer amigos = win + friends.
    * hacer amistad = make + friend.
    * hacer amistad con = make + friends with, befriend.
    * hacer amistades = friend.
    * hacer ampollas = blister.
    * hacer anotaciones = annotate, mark + Nombre + up.
    * hacer añicos = shatter, blow + Nombre + to bits, smash + Nombre + to bits, tear + Nombre + to bits.
    * hacer aparecer = cause + display of.
    * hacer a partir de = make out of.
    * hacer apología = make + apology.
    * hacer arreglos florales = arrange + flowers.
    * hacer artesanalmente = handcraft.
    * hacer asequible = make + amenable.
    * hacer atractivo = endear.
    * hacer a un lado = nudge + Nombre + aside, push aside.
    * hacer autostop = thumb + a lift, hitch + a ride.
    * hacer avances = make + headway.
    * hacer avanzar = nudge + Nombre + forward, push + the frontiers of, nudge + Nombre + along, nudge + Nombre + into, push + the boundaries of.
    * hacer avanzar el conocimiento = push back + the frontiers of knowledge.
    * hacer avanzar hacia = nudge + Nombre + toward.
    * hacer averiguaciones = make + enquiry.
    * hacer bajar = force down.
    * hacer balance de = take + stock of.
    * hacer barrabasadas = play + pranks.
    * hacer basto = coarsen.
    * hacer bien = do + good.
    * hacer borrón y cuenta nueva = start with + a clean slate, cut + Posesivo + losses, turn over + a new leaf.
    * hacer borroso = blur.
    * hacer bromas = banter.
    * hacer bucles = loop.
    * hacer buenas migas = hit it off.
    * hacer buen uso de Algo = put to + good use.
    * hacer bulla = kick up + a stink, kick up + a fuss, raise + a stink, make + a stink (about), make + a racket, make + a row, make + a ruckus, kick up + a row.
    * hacer bulto = bulge.
    * hacer búsquedas en = search through.
    * hacer caca = take + a dump.
    * hacer caer = oust.
    * hacer caja = tally up + sales, balance + the cash, reconcile (with), balance + the cash drawer.
    * hacer caja con = cash in on, ride (on) + Posesivo + coattails.
    * hacer callar = shush, hush, quieten.
    * hacer cambiar = swing + Persona.
    * hacer cambiar las cosas = turn + the tide on.
    * hacer cambios en la búsqueda = renegotiate + search.
    * hacer cambios indebidamente = tamper (with).
    * hacer campaña = campaign, stump, go out on + the road.
    * hacer cara a = brave.
    * hacer caso = take + notice, listen (to).
    * hacer caso a Alguien = take + Posesivo + word for it.
    * hacer caso (a/de) = pay + attention to.
    * hacer caso omiso = disregard, brush aside, go + unheeded, fall on + deaf ears, meet + deaf ears, thumb + Posesivo + nose at, dismiss with + the wave of the hand, fly in + the face of, push aside.
    * hacer caso omiso de = be oblivious of/to.
    * hacer chanchullos = fiddle.
    * hacer chatting = chat.
    * hacer circular = pass around.
    * hacer circular por = circulate round.
    * hacer cisco = tear + apart, wipe + the floor with.
    * hacer coincidir (con) = reconcile (with).
    * hacer cola = queue up.
    * hacer colectas = exact + contributions.
    * hacer comentarios = air + comments.
    * hacer como el avestruz = bury + Posesivo + head in the sand (like an ostrich), stick + Posesivo + head in the sand.
    * hacer como si nada = play it + cool.
    * hacer comparaciones = draw + comparisons, make + comparisons.
    * hacer comparecer = arraign.
    * hacer compatible (con) = reconcile (with).
    * hacer compost = compost.
    * hacer compras = do + shopping.
    * hacer comprender = bring + home.
    * hacer con Alguien lo que Uno quiera = be like putty in + Posesivo + hands.
    * hacer concesiones = make + allowances.
    * hacer conjeturas = speculate.
    * hacer constar = state.
    * hacer contrabando = smuggle.
    * hacer copias = make + multiple copies.
    * hacer copias mediante multicopista por disolvente = spirit duplication.
    * hacer correr la voz = spread + the word, spread + the good word, pass on + the good word, spread + the news.
    * hacer cosas = get + things done.
    * hacer cosquillas = tickle.
    * hacer creer = lead to + believe, lull + Nombre + into thinking.
    * hacer crítica = find + fault with.
    * hacer croché = crochet.
    * hacer cuadrar (con) = reconcile (with).
    * hacer cuadrar las cuentas = reconcile + receipts.
    * hacer cuadras las facturas = reconcile + receipts.
    * hacer cualquier cosa = do + anything, give + Posesivo + right arm.
    * hacer cumplir = uphold.
    * hacer cumplir la disciplina = enforce + discipline.
    * hacer cumplir la legislación = enforce + legislation.
    * hacer cumplir la ley = law enforcement, enforce + law, legal enforcement.
    * hacer cumplir una norma = enforce + standard.
    * hacer cumplir una política = uphold + policy.
    * hacer cumplir unas normas = enforce + policy.
    * hacer daño = do + harm, hurt.
    * hacer dar vueltas = gyrate.
    * hacer de = make out of.
    * hacer de carabina = play + gooseberry.
    * hacer declamaciones = declaim.
    * hacer dedo = hitch + a ride, thumb + a lift.
    * hacer de la noche día = burn + the candle at both ends.
    * hacer del mismo molde = cast in + the same mould as.
    * hacer de nuevo = redo [re-do], remake.
    * hacer de + Posesivo + parte = do + Posesivo + bit.
    * hacer derretir el hielo = de-ice [deice].
    * hacer desaparecer = eradicate, dispel, banish.
    * hacer desaparecer una división = blur + division.
    * hacer desaparecer un mito = dispel + myth.
    * hacer descuento = discount.
    * hacer desfilar = parade.
    * hacer detonar = detonate.
    * hacer de tripas corazón = bite + the bullet.
    * hacer diabluras = play + pranks.
    * hacer diana = hit + home.
    * hacer difícil = make + it + difficult, make + difficult.
    * hacer dinero = make + money.
    * hacer dudar = make + Nombre + doubt, misgive.
    * hacer eco = echo, resonate.
    * hacer eco de = echo.
    * hacer efectivo = cash in.
    * hacer efectivo en metálico = pay in + cash.
    * hacer ejercicio físico = work out.
    * hacer ejercicios de calentamiento = limber up.
    * hacer el aire irrespirable = choke + the air.
    * hacer el amor = make + love.
    * hacer el avío = get + ready.
    * hacer el balance de cuentas = balance + the cash, balance + the cash drawer.
    * hacer el cambio = make + the change.
    * hacer el chorra = pissing into the wind.
    * hacer el deber de Uno = do + Posesivo + part.
    * hacer el dobladillo = hem.
    * hacer elección = make + choices.
    * hacer el esfuerzo necesario = pull + Posesivo + (own) weight.
    * hacer el indio = horse around/about.
    * hacer el intento = have + a go, give + it a shot, give + Nombre + a try, have + a stab at, take + a stab at, make + a stab at, give + it a whirl, give + it a try.
    * hacer el mal = do + evil.
    * hacer el mejor uso de = make + the best of.
    * hacer el monigote = fool around.
    * hacer el paripé = keep up + facade, put on + an act.
    * hacer el pasillo = form + a guard of honour.
    * hacer el pasillo de honor = form + a guard of honour.
    * hacer el recorrido normal = make + the rounds.
    * hacer el ridículo = make + a fool of + Reflexivo, make + an arse of + Reflexivo, make + a spectacle of + Reflexivo.
    * hacer el testamento = testate.
    * hacer el tonto = fool around, horse around/about.
    * hacer el último esfuerzo = go + the last mile, go + the extra mile.
    * hacer encaje = tat.
    * hacer encaje de bolillos = do + the impossible, jump through + hoops, double over + backwards.
    * hacer encaje de bolillos para que cuadre Algo = juggle.
    * hacer encargos = run + errands.
    * hacer enemigos = make + enemies.
    * hacer entender = get across.
    * hacer erupción = erupt.
    * hacer escala = stop over.
    * hacer eses = zigzag.
    * hacer esperar = cool + Posesivo + heels.
    * hacer espuma = work up + a lather, froth.
    * hacer esquina con = form + right angles with.
    * hacer estallar = spark, ignite, touch off, blow up, let off.
    * hacer estallar en añicos = blow + sky high.
    * hacer estallar una bomba = bomb.
    * hacer estallar un guerra = ignite + war.
    * hacer esto = go along + this road.
    * hacer esto y aquello de un modo relajado = mess about, pootle, piddle around.
    * hacer esto y aquello de un modo relajado = mess around.
    * hacer esto y aquello sin prisas = pootle.
    * hacer estragos = lay + waste to, create + havoc, wreak + havoc, cause + havoc, take + Posesivo + toll (on).
    * hacer estragos en = play + havoc with.
    * hacer estrías = rifle.
    * hacer exenciones = make + exemptions.
    * hacer experimentos = institute + experiments.
    * hacer explícito = make + explicit.
    * hacer explotar = blow up.
    * hacer extensivo + Posesivo + agradecimiento = extend + Posesivo + thanks.
    * hacer factible = make + feasible.
    * hacer falta = need, must, have to, it + take.
    * hacer flexible = limber up.
    * hacer fortuna = make + Posesivo + fortune, make + a fortune, strike + it rich, strike + gold, hit + the jackpot.
    * hacer fotocopias = photoduplication [photo-duplication].
    * hacer fotografía = make + picture.
    * hacer fracasar = foil, derail.
    * hacer frente = combat, come to + terms with, contain, address + Nombre + head-on, meet + Nombre + head-on, tackle + Nombre + head-on, face + Nombre + head-on, engage.
    * hacer frente a = confront, deal with, face, face up to, meet, cope with, wrestle with, stand up to, brave, breast, address.
    * hacer frente a deudas = meet + debts.
    * hacer frente a gastos = meet + expenses.
    * hacer frente a la delincuencia = tackle + crime.
    * hacer frente a la inflación = combat + inflation.
    * hacer frente a la realidad = confront + reality, face + (the) facts, face + (up to) the fact that, face + reality.
    * hacer frente a la realidad (de que) = face + the truth (that).
    * hacer frente a las diferencias = face + differences.
    * hacer frente a la situación = tackle + situation.
    * hacer frente a la vida = cope.
    * hacer frente al cambio = manage + change.
    * hacer frente al futuro = face up to + the future.
    * hacer frente al hecho de que = face + (up to) the fact that.
    * hacer frente a los elementos = brave + the elements.
    * hacer frente a los hechos = face + facts.
    * hacer frente a tiempos difíciles = cope with + difficult times, cope with + difficult times.
    * hacer frente a una amenaza = address + threat.
    * hacer frente a una crisis = face + crisis, meet + crisis.
    * hacer frente a una incertidumbre = meet + uncertainty.
    * hacer frente a una necesidad = meet + need, serve + need.
    * hacer frente a una responsabilidad = meet + responsibility, face up to + responsibility.
    * hacer frente a un cambio = meet + change.
    * hacer frente a un gasto = meet + cost.
    * hacer frente a un problema = attack + problem, combat + problem, wrestle with + problem.
    * hacer frente a un reto = rise (up) to + challenge, confront + challenge, meet + challenge, embrace + challenge.
    * hacer fresco = be cool.
    * hacer funcionar = service, do + the trick.
    * hacer gala de = sport.
    * hacer gala del conocimiento que uno tiene = air + knowledge.
    * hacer ganchillo = crochet.
    * hacer garabatos = scribble, scrawl, doodle.
    * hacer girar = twiddle, twirl.
    * hacer gozar = delight.
    * hacer gracia = tickle + Posesivo + fancy.
    * hacer grandes esfuerzos por = take + (great) pains to.
    * hacer grandes progresos = make + great strides.
    * hacer guardar silencio = shush.
    * hacer hasta la presente = do + all along.
    * hacer hidrófugo = render + water-repellent.
    * hacer hincapié = emphasise [emphasize, -USA].
    * hacer hincapié en = put + a premium on.
    * hacer hincapié en una idea = hammer + point.
    * hacer historia = make + history, history in the making, go down in + history.
    * hacer honor al nombre de Uno = live up to + Posesivo + name.
    * hacer horas extraordinarias = work + overtime.
    * hacer horas extras = work + overtime.
    * hacer hueco = make + room (for).
    * hacer huelga = strike.
    * hacer huella = leave + an impression, touch + Posesivo + life, leave + Posesivo + mark, cut + a swath(e), leave + an imprint, make + an impression.
    * hacer huir = drive away, chase + Nombre + off.
    * hacer imaginar = conjure up + an image of, conjure up + a vision of.
    * hacer impermeable = render + water-repellent.
    * hacer inalterable = set in + stone, set in + tablets of stone.
    * hacer incomprensible = render + incomprehensible, garble.
    * hacer indescifrable = render + indecipherable, garble.
    * hacer innecesario = obviate + the need for, make + redundant.
    * hacer insinuaciones = make + innuendoes.
    * hacer insinuaciones sobre = make + noises about, make + a noise about.
    * hacer insoluble = render + insoluble.
    * hacer inutilizable = render + useless.
    * hacer juego con = go with.
    * hacer juegos malabares = juggle.
    * hacer juegos malabares para que cuadre Algo = juggle.
    * hacer justicia = do + justice.
    * hacer la cama = make + the bed.
    * hacer la cuenta = tot up, tote up.
    * hacer la guerra = make + war.
    * hacer (la) mona = play + hooky, play + truant, skip + class.
    * hacer la paz = make + (the) peace.
    * hacer la pelota = butter + Nombre + up, toady, fawn (on/upon/over).
    * hacer la pelota a + Alguien = curry + favour with + Alguien.
    * hacer la pelotilla = toady, butter + Nombre + up.
    * hacer la prueba = give + it a whirl, give + it a shot, give + it a try.
    * hacer largos = swim + laps.
    * hacer las leyes más estrictas = tighten + laws.
    * hacer las maletas = pack up, pack + Posesivo + belongings, pack + Posesivo + things, pack + Posesivo + suitcases, pack + Posesivo + bags.
    * hacer las paces = heal + the breach, heal + the rift, bury + the hatchet, make + (the) peace, smoke + the peace pipe, smoke + the pipe of peace, bury + the tomahawk, bury + the war axe.
    * hacer la transición = make + the transition.
    * hacer la vida imposible = make + life hell.
    * hacer la vista gorda = look + the other way, turn + a blind eye to, pretend + not to have seen.
    * hacerle a Alguien un lavado de cerebro = brainwash.
    * hacerle las cosas fáciles a Alguien = play into + the hands of.
    * hacerle la vida más simple a todos = simplify + life for everyone.
    * hacerle una paja a un muerto = flog + a dead horse, beat + a dead horse, fart + in the wind.
    * hacerle un bombo a Alguien = knock + Alguien + up.
    * hacer llamada telefónica = make + telephone call.
    * hacer llorar = reduce + Nombre + to tears.
    * hacer llorar de emoción = move + Nombre + to tears.
    * hacerlo = do so, go ahead.
    * hacerlo bien = put + matters + right, get + it + right, be right on track.
    * hacer lo correcto = do + the right thing.
    * hacerlo de nuevo = go and do it again.
    * hacerlo difícil de + Infinitivo = make + it + hard to + Infinitivo.
    * hacer lo imposible = bend over backwards, do + the impossible, lean over + backwards, double over + backwards.
    * hacer lo imposible para = jump through + hoops.
    * hacerlo lo mejor que uno pueda = do + Posesivo + utmost, give + Posesivo + utmost, give + Posesivo + best.
    * hacerlo mal = get + it + (all) wrong.
    * hacer lo más acertado dadas las circunstancias = do + the best thing in the circumstances.
    * hacerlo más llevadero = make + life easier.
    * hacerlo mejor = do + a better job.
    * hacer lo mejor que Uno pueda = put + Posesivo + best into, give of + Posesivo + best.
    * hacer lo mejor que Uno puede = try + Posesivo + best, try + Posesivo + heart out.
    * hacerlo por uno mismo = do + it + on + Posesivo + own.
    * hacer lo que a Uno le de la gana = get away with + murder.
    * hacer lo que le corresponde a Uno = do + Posesivo + part.
    * hacer lo que uno dice que es capaz de hacer = live up to + Posesivo + claim.
    * hacer lo que Uno quiera = get away with + murder.
    * hacer los deberes = do + homework.
    * hacerlo sin la ayuda de nadie = do + it + on + Posesivo + own.
    * hacerlo solo = do + it + on + Posesivo + own.
    * hacer los primeros pinitos = take + the first step.
    * hacerlo todo excepto = stop at + nothing short of.
    * hacerlo todo menos = stop at + nothing short of.
    * hacer malabarismos = juggle.
    * hacer malabarismos para que cuadre Algo = juggle.
    * hacer mandados = run + errands.
    * hacer maravillas = work + wonders.
    * hacer más consciente de Algo = heighten + awareness.
    * hacer más copias de Algo = produce + additional copies.
    * hacer más eficiente = streamline.
    * hacer más estricto = tighten.
    * hacer más fuerte = toughen.
    * hacer más inteligente = smarten.
    * hacer más interesante = spice up, add + spice.
    * hacer más preciso = tightening up.
    * hacer más rico = add + richness to.
    * hacer más riguroso = tighten, tightening up.
    * hacer más sabroso = pep up.
    * hacer más sofisticado = dumb up.
    * hacer mejor = give + Nombre + an edge.
    * hacer mejoras = make + improvements.
    * hacer mella = take + Posesivo + toll (on), leave + an impression, touch + Posesivo + life, leave + Posesivo + mark, cut + a swath(e), leave + an imprint, make + an impression, hit + home.
    * hacer mella en = dent, make + a dent in, take + a bite out of.
    * hacer mención de/a = make + mention of.
    * hacer mezcla = mix + cement.
    * hacer milagros = work + wonders, work + miracles.
    * hacer mucha ilusión = be thrilled.
    * hacer mucho = do + much.
    * hacer mucho dinero = make + good money, earn + good money.
    * hacer mucho por = go + a long way (towards/to/in) + Gerundio.
    * hacer muchos aspavientos por Algo = make + a song and dance about.
    * hacer mucho tiempo que Algo ha desaparecido = be long gone.
    * hacer necesario = render + necessary.
    * hacer negocio = make + business.
    * hacer negocios = do + business, transact.
    * hacer + Nombre + llegar hasta aquí = get + Nombre + this far.
    * hacer + Nombre + responsable de = put + Nombre + in the driving seat.
    * hacer notar = bring to + Posesivo + attention, bring to + the attention, mark, note, bring to + notice, bring + attention to, bring to + Posesivo + notice.
    * hacer notar la presencia de = make + Posesivo + presence felt, make + Posesivo + presence known.
    * hacer novillos = play + hooky, skip + class, play + truant, bunk off, bunk + classes, skive, bunk + school.
    * hacer nudos = knot.
    * hacer objeciones contra = urge against.
    * hacer observaciones = comment on/upon.
    * hacer obsoleto = make + redundant.
    * hacer oídos sordos = turn + a deaf ear to.
    * hacer ordinario = coarsen.
    * hacer pagar tributos = exact + tributes.
    * hacer palmas = clap.
    * hacer paradas = make + stops.
    * hacer parecer = make + seem, make + Nombre + out to be.
    * hacer parecer pequeño = dwarf.
    * hacer partícipe = engage.
    * hacer pasajero = render + transitory.
    * hacer patochadas = fool around.
    * hacer payasadas = fool around.
    * hacer pedazos = shatter, smash + Nombre + to bits.
    * hacer peligrar = place + in jeopardy, imperil, endanger, pose + risk.
    * hacer pensar = provoke + thought, make to + think, lull + Nombre + into thinking, summon up + image.
    * hacer pensar en = conjure, conjure up + a picture of, bring to + mind, conjure up + an image of, conjure up, conjure up + a vision of.
    * hacer pequeños ajustes = tinker + around the edges, tinker with.
    * hacer perder el conocimiento = knock + Nombre + out, knock + Nombre + unconscious.
    * hacer perder el entusiasmo = dampen + Posesivo + enthusiasm.
    * hacer perder el sentido a = make + nonsense of.
    * hacer perder la agilidad física = stale.
    * hacer perder la agilidad mental = stale.
    * hacer perder las esperanzas = dampen + Posesivo + hopes.
    * hacer permanente = render + permanent.
    * hacer ping = ping.
    * hacer pipí = pee.
    * hacer pis = piss, pee, take + a leak, have + a leak, widdle, piddle.
    * hacer planes = plan, make + plans.
    * hacer poca distinción entre... y... = make + little distinction between... and....
    * hacer poco = do + little.
    * hacer popular = popularise [popularize, -USA].
    * hacer por encargo = make to + order.
    * hacer + Posesivo + agosto = make + a killing.
    * hacer + Posesivo + necesidades = relieve + Reflexivo, go + potty.
    * hacer + Posesivo + trabajo = get on with + Posesivo + work, do + Posesivo + business.
    * hacer posible = enable, provide for, make + possible, provide + a basis for, make + an opportunity.
    * hacer posible el crecimiento = accommodate + growth.
    * hacer preguntas = ask + questions, interrogate, air + questions, make + enquiry.
    * hacer preparativo = make + arrangements.
    * hacer preso = imprison, jail [gaol, -UK].

    * * *
    hacer [ E18 ]
    ■ hacer (verbo transitivo)
    A
    1 crear
    2 extender: cheque, factura etc
    B efectuar, llevar a cabo
    C formular, expresar
    D con las necesidades fisiológicas
    E adquirir: dinero, amigos etc
    F preparar, arreglar
    G
    1 producir, causar
    2 refiriéndose a sonidos
    H recorrer
    I en cálculos, enumeraciones
    A
    1 ocuparse en una actividad
    2 como profesión, ocupación
    3 estudiar
    B
    1 actuar de cierta manera
    2 dar cierto uso
    3 causar daño
    C actuar como
    D hacer una vida
    E sustituyendo a otro verbo
    F afectar, importar
    A transformar en, volver
    B dar apariencia de
    C inducir a, ser la causa de que
    D obligar a
    E hacer hacer algo
    F acostumbrar
    G suponer, imaginar
    ■ hacer (verbo intransitivo)
    A
    1 obrar, actuar
    2 hacer bien, mal etc
    B con las necesidades fisiológicas
    C fingir, simular
    D intentar, procurar
    E servir
    F interpretar un personaje
    A
    1 sentarle bien, mal
    2 quedar, resultar
    B corresponder
    C no le hace
    D en tercera persona: concernir
    E apetecer
    ■ hacer (verbo impersonal)
    A
    1 refiriéndose al tiempo
    2 familiar humorístico
    B expresando el tiempo transcurrido
    ■ hacerse (verbo pronominal)
    A producirse
    B
    1 hacer para sí
    2 hacer que otro haga
    C causarse
    D con las necesidades fisiológicas
    E adquirir
    A
    1 volverse, convertirse en
    2 impersonal
    3 cocinarse
    4 pasarle (a algn)
    B resultar
    C dar la impresión de
    D causativo
    E acostumbrarse
    F fingirse
    G
    1 moverse
    2 colocarse
    H hacerse con
    I hacerse de
    vt
    A
    1 (crear) ‹mueble› to make; ‹casa/carretera› to build; ‹nido› to build, make; ‹coche› to make, manufacture; ‹dibujo› to do, draw; ‹lista› to make, draw up; ‹resumen› to do, make; ‹película› to make; ‹vestido/cortina› to make; ‹pan/pastel› to make, bake; ‹vino/café/tortilla› to make; ‹cerveza› to make, brew
    les hace toda la ropa a los niños she makes all the children's clothes
    hacer un nudo/lazo to tie a knot/bow
    hazme un plano de la zona do o draw me a map of the area
    me hizo un lugar or sitio en la mesa he made room o a place for me at the table
    le hizo un hijo ( fam); he got her pregnant
    hacen una pareja preciosa they make a lovely couple
    2 (extender) ‹cheque/factura/receta› to make out, write out, write
    me hizo un cheque she wrote o made me out a check
    B (efectuar, llevar a cabo) ‹sacrificio› to make; ‹milagro› to work, perform; ‹deberes/ejercicios› to do; ‹transacción› to carry out; ‹experimento› to do, perform; ‹limpieza› to do
    estaban haciendo los preparativos para el viaje they were making preparations for o they were preparing for the journey
    me hicieron una visita they paid me a visit, they came and visited me
    hicieron una gira por Europa they went on o did a tour of Europe
    hicimos el viaje sin parar we did the journey without stopping
    me hizo un regalo precioso she gave me a beautiful gift
    tengo que hacer los mandados I have some errands to run
    ¿me haces un favor? will you do me a favor?
    me hizo señas para que me acercara she motioned to me to come closer
    hicimos un trato we did o made a deal
    hago un papel secundario en la obra I have a minor part in the play
    aún queda mucho por hacer there is still a lot (left) to do
    C (formular, expresar) ‹declaración/promesa/oferta› to make; ‹proyecto/plan› to make, draw up; ‹crítica/comentario› to make, voice; ‹pregunta› to ask
    nadie hizo ninguna objeción nobody raised any objections, nobody objected
    nos hizo un relato de sus aventuras he related his adventures to us, he gave us an account of his adventures
    D
    (con las necesidades fisiológicas): hace dos días que no hago caca ( fam); I haven't been for two days ( euph)
    hice pis or pipí antes de salir ( fam); I had a pee before I left ( colloq)
    hacer sus necesidades ( euf); to go to the bathroom o toilet
    E (adquirir) ‹dinero/fortuna› to make; ‹amigo› to make
    hicieron muchas amistades en Chile they made a lot of friends in Chile
    F (preparar, arreglar) ‹cama› to make; ‹maleta› to pack
    tengo que hacer la comida I must get lunch (ready) o cook lunch
    hice el pescado al horno I did o cooked the fish in the oven
    G
    1 (producir, causar) ‹ruido› to make
    este jabón no hace espuma this soap doesn't lather
    esos chistes no me hacen gracia I don't find those jokes funny
    estos zapatos me hacen daño these shoes hurt my feet
    los perros hacen `guau guau' dogs go `bow-wow'
    el agua hacía glugluglú en los caños the water gurgled o made a gurgling noise in the pipes
    ¿cómo hace el coche del abuelo? how does Grandpa's car go?, what noise does Grandpa's car make?
    H (recorrer) ‹trayecto/distancia› to do
    hicimos los 500 kilómetros en cuatro horas we did o covered the 500 kilometers in four hours
    I
    (en cálculos, enumeraciones): son 180 … y 320 hacen 500 that's 180 … and 320 is o makes 500
    hace el número 26 en la lista she is o comes 26th on the list
    A
    ¿no tienes nada que hacer? don't you have anything to do?
    ya terminé ¿qué hago ahora? I've finished, what shall I do now?
    no hace más que or sino quejarse she does nothing but complain, all she ever does is complain
    no hice más que or sino cumplir con mi deber I only o merely did my duty
    le gustaría hacer teatro she would like to work in the theater
    están haciendo una obra de Ibsen they're doing o putting on a play by Ibsen
    deberías hacer ejercicio you should exercise, you should do o get some exercise
    ¿hace algún deporte? do you go in for o play o do any sports?
    no estaba haciendo turismo, sino en viaje de negocios I wasn't there on vacation ( AmE) o ( BrE) on holiday, it was a business trip
    2 (como profesión, ocupación) to do
    ¿qué hace su novio? — es médico what does her boyfriend do? — he's a doctor
    3 (estudiar) to do
    hace Derecho she's doing o studying o reading Law
    hizo un curso de contabilidad he did an accountancy course
    hizo la carrera de Filosofía she did a degree in philosophy o a philosophy degree, she studied philosophy
    B
    1 (actuar de cierta manera, realizar cierta acción) to do
    yo en tu caso habría hecho lo mismo in your situation I would have done the same
    perdona, lo hice sin querer I'm sorry, I didn't do it on purpose
    haz lo que quieras do what you like
    aquí se hace lo que digo yo I'm in charge around here, around here what I say goes
    ¡niño, eso no se hace! you mustn't do that!
    haré lo posible por hablar con él I'll do all o everything I can to speak to him
    ¡qué se le va a hacer! or ¡qué le vamos a hacer! what can you o ( frml) one do?
    no puedes aceptar — ¡qué le voy a hacer! no me queda más remedio you can't accept — what else can I do? I've no choice
    hacerla ( Méx fam): ya la hizo: lo nombraron director now he's really made it: he's been appointed director
    si le gano al sueco ya la hice if I can beat the Swede I'll have it in the bag ( colloq)
    la hicieron bien y bonita con ese negocio they did really well out of that deal
    hacerla (buena) ( fam): ¡ahora sí que la hice! me dejé las llaves dentro now I've (really) done it! I've left the keys inside
    ¡ya la hicimos! se pinchó la rueda that's done it! o now, we're in trouble, we've got a flat
    hacérsela buena a algn ( Méx); to keep one's word o promise to sb
    se la hizo buena y se casó con ella he kept his word o promise and married her
    soñé que te sacabas la lotería — ¡házmela buena! I dreamed you won the lottery — if only! o if only it would come true!
    mañana dejo de fumar — ¡házmela buena! I'm going to give up smoking tomorrow — oh, please! o if only you would!
    2 (dar cierto uso, destino, posición) to do
    ¿qué vas a hacer con el dinero del premio? what are you going to do with the prize money?
    no sé qué hice con los recibos I don't know what I did with the receipts
    y el libro ¿qué lo hice? (CS fam); what did I do with the book?
    3
    (causar daño): hacerle algo a algn to do sth to sb
    no le tengas miedo al perro, no hace nada don't be frightened of the dog, he won't hurt you
    yo no le hice nada I didn't touch her o do anything to her
    no te he contado la última que me hizo I haven't told you the latest thing he did to me
    C
    ( esp Esp) (actuar como): deja de hacer el tonto/payaso stop acting o playing the fool, stop clowning around
    D
    (llevar): hacer una vida solitaria/normal to lead a lonely life/normal life
    trata de hacer una vida sana try to lead a healthy life
    E
    (sustituyendo a otro verbo): toca bien la guitarra — antes lo hacía mejor she plays the guitar well — she used to play o be better
    voy a escribirle — deja, ya lo haré yo I'm going to write to him — don't bother, I'll do it
    voy a dimitir — por favor, no lo hagas I'm going to resign — please don't o please, don't do it
    F
    ( RPl fam) (afectar, importar): la salsa quedó un poco líquida — ¿qué le hace? the sauce came out a bit thin — so what? o what does it matter?
    eso no le hace nada that doesn't matter at all
    A (transformar en, volver) to make
    te hará hombre, hijo mío it will make a man of you, my son
    la hizo su mujer he made her his wife
    agarró la copa y la hizo añicos contra el suelo he grabbed the glass and smashed it to smithereens on the floor
    hizo pedazos or trizas la carta she tore the letter into tiny pieces
    la película que la hizo famosa the movie that made her famous
    este hombre me hace la vida imposible this man is making my life impossible
    quisiera agradecer a quienes han hecho posible este encuentro I should like to thank (all) those who have made this meeting possible
    hacer algo DE algo to turn sth INTO sth
    hice de mi afición por la cocina una profesión I turned my interest in cooking into a career, I made a career out of my interest in cooking
    hacer algo DE algn to make sth OF sb
    quiero hacer de ti un gran actor I want to make a great actor of you
    B
    (dar apariencia de): ese vestido te hace más delgada that dress makes you look thinner
    el pelo corto te hace más joven short hair makes you look younger
    C (inducir a, ser la causa de que) hacer algo/a algn + INF to make sth/sb + INF
    una de esas canciones que te hacen llorar one of those songs that make you cry
    todo hace suponer que fue así everything suggests that o leads one to think that that is what happened
    hizo caer al niño he knocked the child over
    haga pasar al próximo tell the next person to come in, have the next person come in
    eso no hizo sino precipitar el desenlace all that did was to hasten the end
    hacer que algo/algn + SUBJ to make sth/sb + INF
    ¡vas a hacer que pierda la paciencia! you're going to make me lose my temper!
    esto hace que sus reacciones sean lentas this makes him slow to react, this makes his reactions slow
    D (obligar a) hacer + INF a algn to make sb + INF
    me hizo esperar tres horas she kept me waiting for three hours
    se lo haré hacer de nuevo I'll make him do it again
    me hizo abrirla or me la hizo abrir he made me open it
    me hizo levantar(me) a las cinco she made me get up at five
    hacer que algn + SUBJ to make sb + INF
    hizo que todos se sentaran he made everybody sit down
    E
    hacer hacer algo to have o get sth done
    hice acortar las cortinas I had o got the curtains shortened
    le hice hacer un vestido para la boda I had o got a dress made for her for the wedding
    F (acostumbrar) hacer a algn A algo to get sb used o accustomed TO sth
    pronto la hizo a su manera de trabajar he soon got her used o accustomed to his way of working
    G
    (suponer, imaginar): te hacía en Buenos Aires I thought you were in Buenos Aires
    tiene 42 años — yo la hacía más joven she's 42 — I thought she was younger
    ¡yo que lo hacía casado y con hijos! I had the idea that he was married with children!
    ■ hacer
    vi
    A
    1
    (obrar, actuar): nadie trató de impedírselo, lo dejaron hacer nobody tried to stop him, they just let him get on with it
    tú no te preocupes, déjame hacer a mí don't you worry, just let me take care of it
    déjalo hacer a él, que sabe qué es lo que conviene let him handle it, he knows what's best
    ¿cómo se hace para que te den la beca? how do you go about getting the grant?
    ¿cómo hay que hacer para ponerlo en funcionamiento? what do you have to do to make it work?
    no me explico cómo hacen para vivir con ese sueldo I don't know how they manage to live on that salary
    hacerle a algo (Chi, Méx fam): Enrique le hace a la electricidad Enrique knows a bit o knows something about electricity
    tienen una empleada que le hace a todo they have a maid who does a bit of everything
    ya sabes que yo no le hago a esos menesteres you know I don't go in for o do that sort of thing
    hacer y deshacer to do as one pleases, do what one likes
    ¡no le hagas/hagan! ( Méx fam); you can't be serious!, you're joking o kidding! ( colloq)
    2 (+ complemento):
    hiciste bien en decírmelo you did o were right to tell me
    haces mal en mentir it's wrong of you to lie
    mejor haría callándose she'd do better to keep quiet
    B
    ( esp AmL) (con las necesidades fisiológicas): ¡mamá, ya hice! Mommy, I've been o I've finished!
    hace dos días que no hace ( euf); he hasn't been for two days ( euph)
    hagan antes de salir go to the bathroom o toilet before we leave, you'd better go before we leave ( euph)
    hacer de cuerpo or de vientre ( frml); to move one's bowels ( frml), to have a bowel movement ( frml)
    C
    (fingir, simular): hizo (como) que no me había visto he made out o pretended he hadn't seen me
    cuando entre haz (como) que lees when she comes in, make out o pretend you're reading, when she comes in, pretend to be reading
    hice (como) que no oía I pretended I couldn't hear, I acted as if I couldn't hear
    hacer COMO SI + SUBJ:
    haz como si no supieras nada make out o pretend you don't know anything about it, act as if you don't know anything about it
    D (intentar, procurar) hacer POR + INF to try to + INF
    tienes que hacer por corregir ese genio you must try to o ( colloq) try and do something about that temper (of yours)
    tú no haces por entenderla you don't even try to understand her
    E (servir) hacer DE algo:
    esta sábana hará de toldo this sheet will do for o as an awning
    la escuela hizo de hospital the school served as o was used as a hospital
    F (interpretar un personaje) hacer DE algo/algn to play (the part of) sth/sb
    siempre hace de `malo' he always plays the bad guy
    hizo de Hamlet he played (the part of) Hamlet
    A (+ compl)
    1 (sentar) (+ me/te/le etc):
    le va a hacer bien salir un poco it'll do her good to get out a bit
    ¡me hizo tanto bien su visita …! her visit did me such a lot of good …!
    los mejillones me hicieron muy mal ( AmL); the mussels made me really ill
    2
    ( Esp) (quedar): con los cuadros hace mucho más bonito it looks much prettier with the pictures
    esta tapa no le hace al frasco this lid doesn't fit the jar
    esta llave no le hace a la cerradura this isn't the right key for the lock
    C
    no le hace (no tiene importancia) it doesn't matter; (no sirve de excusa) that's no excuse, don't give me that ( colloq)
    ¿no le hace que tire la ceniza en este florero? do you mind if I drop the ash in this vase?
    (concernir, tocar): por lo que hace a or en cuanto hace a su solicitud as far as your application is concerned, as regards your application
    E
    ( Esp fam) (apetecer): ¿hace or te hace una cerveza? (do you) feel like a beer?, do you fancy a beer? ( BrE colloq)
    te invito a cenar a un chino ¿hace? — hace I'll take you out to a Chinese restaurant, how does that grab you? — great idea! ( colloq)
    ■
    A
    (refiriéndose al tiempo atmosférico): hace frío/calor/sol/viento it's cold/hot/sunny/windy
    hace tres grados bajo cero it's three degrees below (zero)
    nos hizo un tiempo espantoso we had terrible weather
    ojalá haga buen tiempo or ( esp Esp) bueno I hope the weather's fine o nice, I hope it's nice weather
    hace sed ¿verdad? it's thirsty weather/work, isn't it?
    parece que hace hambre you/they seem to be hungry
    ¿hace sueño, niños? are you getting sleepy, children?
    B
    (expresando el tiempo transcurrido): hace dos años que murió he died two years ago, he's been dead for two years
    ¿cuándo llegaste? — hace un ratito when did you get here? — a short while ago
    ¿cuánto hace que se fue? how long ago did she leave?, how long is it since she left?
    lo leí hace poco I read it a short time ago
    lo había visto hacía exactamente un año I had seen him exactly one year before
    ¿hace mucho que esperas? have you been waiting long?
    hace mucho tiempo que lo conozco or lo conozco desde hace mucho tiempo I've known him for a long time
    hace años que no lo veo or no lo veo desde hace años I haven't seen him for years o it's years since I saw him
    hacía años que no lo veía I hadn't seen him for o in years, it had been years since I'd seen him
    hasta hace poco vivían en Austria they lived in Austria until recently
    A
    (producirse): hágase la luz ( Bib) let there be light
    (+ me/te/le etc): se me ha hecho un nudo en el hilo I've got a knot in the thread, the thread has a knot in it
    si no lo revuelves se te hacen grumos if you don't stir it, it goes lumpy o forms lumps
    se le ha hecho una ampolla she's got o she has a blister
    hacérsele a algn ( Méx): por fin se le hizo ganar un campeonato she finally got to win a championship
    por fin se le hizo a Mauricio con ella Mauricio finally made it with her ( colloq)
    B
    1 ( refl)
    (hacer para sí): se hace toda la ropa she makes all her (own) clothes
    se hicieron una casita they built themselves a little house
    2 ( caus)
    (hacer que otro haga): se hace la ropa en Roma she has her clothes made in Rome
    se hicieron una casita they had a little house built
    se hizo la cirugía estética she had plastic surgery
    voy a hacerme las manos I'm going to have a manicure
    tienes que hacerte la barba you must get your beard trimmed
    C
    (causarse): me hice un tajo en el dedo I cut my finger
    ¿qué te hiciste en el brazo? what did you do to your arm?
    ¿te hiciste daño? did you hurt yourself?
    D
    (con las necesidades fisiológicas): todavía se hace pis/caca ( fam); she still wets herself/messes her pants
    se hace pis en la cama ( fam); he wets the bed
    ¡me estoy haciendo caca! ( fam); I'm desperate (to go to the bathroom o toilet)! ( colloq)
    E ( refl)
    (adquirir): se ha hecho un nombre en el mundo de la moda she's made a name for herself in the fashion world
    sólo conseguirás hacerte enemigos si sigues así you'll only make enemies if you keep on like that
    A
    1 (volverse, convertirse en) to become
    se quiere hacer monja she wants to become a nun
    se hizo famoso he became famous
    se están haciendo viejos they are getting o growing old
    en invierno se hace de noche muy pronto in winter it gets dark very early
    vamos, se está haciendo tarde come on, it's getting late
    (+ me/te/le etc): se nos hizo de noche esperándolo it got dark while we were waiting for him
    3 (cocinarse) «pescado/guiso» to cook
    dejar que se haga a fuego lento leave to cook over a low heat
    4
    ( AmL) (pasarle a): no sé qué se habrá hecho María I don't know what can have happened to María o ( colloq) where María can have got(ten) to
    B
    (resultar): se hace muy pesado repetir lo mismo tantas veces it gets very boring having to repeat the same thing over and over again
    (+ me/te/le etc): la espera se me hizo interminable the wait seemed interminable
    se me hace difícil creerlo I find it very hard to believe
    C (dar la impresión de) (+ me/te/le etc):
    se me hace que aquí pasa algo raro I get the feeling o impression that something strange is going on around here
    se me hace que va a llover I think o I have a feeling it's going to rain
    se me hace que esta vez vas a tener suerte something tells me o I have a feeling (that) this time you're going to be lucky
    D ( causativo) hacerse + INF:
    tienes que hacerte oír/respetar you have to make people listen to you/respect you
    el desenlace no se hizo esperar the end was not long in coming
    cuando era actriz se hacía llamar Mónica Duarte when she was an actress she went by the name of Monica Duarte o she used the name Monica Duarte
    es un chico que se hace querer he's a likable kid o a kid you can't help liking
    se hizo construir una mansión he had a mansion built
    hazte ver por un médico ( AmL); go and see a doctor
    E (acostumbrarse) hacerse A algo to get used TO sth
    no me hago al clima de este país I can't get used to the weather in this country
    no consigo hacerme a la idea I can't get used to the idea
    hacerse A + INF to get used TO -ING
    no se hace a vivir solo he hasn't got used to living alone
    F
    (fingirse): no te hagas el inocente don't act all innocent
    seguro que me vio pero se hizo el loco he must have seen me but he pretended he hadn't
    ¿éste es bobo o se (lo) hace? ( fam); is this guy stupid or just a good actor? ( colloq)
    no te hagas el sordo don't pretend o make out you didn't hear me
    se hizo la que no entendía she pretended o she made out she didn't understand
    yo me hice ( Méx fam); I pretended not to notice
    G
    1 (moverse) (+ compl):
    hacerse atrás to move back
    hacerse a un lado to move to one side, to move aside
    hazte para aquí/para allá move over this way/that way
    2
    ( Col) (colocarse): ¿quieres salir en la foto? — sí ¿dónde me hago? do you want to be in the photo? — yes, where shall I stand/sit?
    H hacerse con to take
    el ejército se hizo con la ciudad the army took the city
    se hizo con una fortuna considerable he amassed a considerable fortune
    tengo que hacerme con esa información como sea I must get hold of that information somehow
    se hicieron con la empresa they took over the company
    lograron hacerse con el control de la compañía they managed to gain o get control of the company
    no creo que puedan hacerse con la copa I don't think they can win the cup
    ( AmL): se hicieron de gran fama they became very famous
    tengo que hacerme de dinero I must get o lay my hands on some money
    se han hecho de muchos amigos allí they've made a lot of friends there
    * * *

     

    Multiple Entries:
    hacer    
    hacer algo
    hacer ( conjugate hacer) verbo transitivo
    1
    a) ( crear) ‹mueble/vestido› to make;

    ‹casa/carretera› to build;
    ‹ nido› to build, make;
    ‹ túnel› to make, dig;
    ‹dibujo/plano› to do, draw;
    ‹ lista› to make, draw up;
    ‹ resumen› to do, make;
    ‹ película› to make;
    ‹nudo/lazo› to tie;
    ‹pan/pastel› to make, bake;
    ‹vino/café/tortilla› to make;
    ‹ cerveza› to make, brew;

    hacen buena pareja they make a lovely couple
    b) (producir, causar) ‹ ruido› to make;


    estos zapatos me hacen daño these shoes hurt my feet
    2
    a) (efectuar, llevar a cabo) ‹ sacrificio› to make;

    ‹ milagro› to work, perform;
    ‹deberes/ejercicios/limpieza› to do;
    ‹ mandado› to run;
    ‹transacción/investigación› to carry out;
    ‹ experimento› to do, perform;
    ‹ entrevista› to conduct;
    ‹gira/viaje› to do;
    ‹ regalo› to give;
    ‹ favor› to do;
    ‹ trato› to make;

    aún queda mucho por hacer there is still a lot (left) to do;
    dar que hacer to make a lot of work
    b) ‹cheque/factura› to make out, write out

    3 (formular, expresar) ‹declaración/promesa/oferta› to make;
    ‹proyecto/plan› to make, draw up;
    ‹crítica/comentario› to make, voice;
    ‹ pregunta› to ask;

    4

    ◊ hacer caca (fam) to do a poop (AmE) o (BrE) a pooh (colloq);

    hacer pis or pipí (fam) to have a pee (colloq);
    hacer sus necesidades (euf) to go to the bathroom o toilet (euph)

    ◊ las vacas hacen `mu' cows go `moo'

    5 ( adquirir) ‹dinero/fortuna› to make;
    ‹ amigo› to make
    6 (preparar, arreglar) ‹ cama› to make;
    ‹ maleta› to pack;
    ◊ hice el pescado al horno I did o cooked the fish in the oven;

    tengo que hacer la comida I must make lunch;
    ver tb comida b
    7 ( recorrer) ‹trayecto/distancia› to do, cover
    8 (en cálculos, enumeraciones):
    ◊ son 180 … y 320 hacen 500 that's 180 … and 320 is o makes 500

    1


    ¿hacemos algo esta noche? shall we do something tonight?;
    hacer ejercicio to do (some) exercise;
    ¿hace algún deporte? do you play o do any sports?;
    See Also→ amor 1b
    b) (como profesión, ocupación) to do;

    ◊ ¿qué hace tu padre? what does your father do?


    2 (realizar cierta acción, actuar de cierta manera) to do;
    ◊ ¡eso no se hace! you shouldn't do that!;

    ¡qué le vamos a hacer! what can you o (frml) one do?;
    toca bien el piano — antes lo hacía mejor she plays the piano well — she used to play better;
    hacerla buena (fam): ¡ahora sí que la hice! now I've really done it!;
    See Also→ tonto sustantivo masculino, femenino
    1 (transformar en, volver) to make;

    hizo pedazos la carta she tore the letter into tiny pieces;
    ese vestido te hace más delgada that dress makes you look thinner;
    hacer algo de algo to turn sth into sth;
    quiero hacer de ti un gran actor I want to make a great actor of you
    2
    a) (obligar a, ser causa de que)


    me hizo abrirla he made me open it;
    me hizo llorar it made me cry;
    hágalo pasar tell him to come in;
    me hizo esperar tres horas she kept me waiting for three hours;
    hacer que algo/algn haga algo to make sth/sb do sth
    b)

    ◊ hacer hacer algo to have o get sth done/made;

    hice acortar las cortinas I had o got the curtains shortened
    verbo intransitivo
    1 (obrar, actuar):
    ◊ déjame hacer a mí just let me handle this o take care of this;

    ¿cómo se hace para que te den la beca? what do you have to do to get the scholarship?;
    hiciste bien en decírmelo you did o were right to tell me;
    haces mal en mentir it's wrong of you to lie
    2 (fingir, simular):

    haz como si no lo conocieras act as if o pretend you don't know him
    3 ( servir):
    ◊ esta sábana hará de toldo this sheet will do for o as an awning;

    la escuela hizo de hospital the school served as o was used as a hospital
    4 ( interpretar personaje) hacer de algo/algn to play (the part of) sth/sb
    (+ compl) ( sentar):


    (+ me/te/le etc)

    la trucha me hizo mal (AmL) the trout didn't agree with me
    hacer v impers
    1 ( refiriéndose al tiempo atmosférico):
    ◊ hace frío/sol it's cold/sunny;

    hace tres grados it's three degrees;
    (nos) hizo un tiempo espantoso the weather was terrible
    2 ( expresando tiempo transcurrido):

    hace mucho que lo conozco I've known him for a long time;
    hacía años que no lo veía I hadn't seen him for o in years;
    ¿cuánto hace que se fue? how long ago did she leave?;
    hace poco/un año a short time/a year ago;
    hasta hace poco until recently
    hacerse verbo pronominal
    1 ( producirse) (+ me/te/le etc):

    se le hizo una ampolla she got a blister;
    hacérsele algo a algn (Méx): por fin se le hizo ganar el premio she finally got to win the award
    2
    a) ( refl) ( hacer para sí) ‹café/falda› to make oneself;




    se hizo la cirugía estética she had plastic surgery
    3 ( causarse):
    ◊ ¿qué te hiciste en el brazo? what did you do to your arm?;

    ¿te hiciste daño? did you hurt yourself?
    4 ( refiriéndose a necesidades fisiológicas):
    ◊ todavía se hace pis/caca (fam) she still wets/messes herself

    5 ( refl) ( adquirir) to make;

    1
    a) (volverse, convertirse en) to become;


    se están haciendo viejos they are getting o growing old
    b) ( resultar):



    (+ me/te/le etc)

    se me hace difícil creerlo I find it very hard to believe
    c) ( impers):


    se está haciendo tarde it's getting late
    d) ( cocinarse) [pescado/guiso] to cook

    e) (AmL) ( pasarle a):

    ◊ ¿qué se habrá hecho María? what can have happened to María?

    2 ( acostumbrarse) hacerse a algo to get used to sth
    3 ( fingirse):

    ¿es bobo o se (lo) hace? (fam) is he stupid or just a good actor? (colloq);
    hacerse pasar por algn (por periodista, doctor) to pass oneself off as sb
    4 ( moverse) (+ compl) to move;

    5
    ◊ hacerse de (AmL) (de fortuna, dinero) to get;


    ( de amigos) to make
    hacer
    I verbo transitivo
    1 (crear, fabricar, construir) to make
    hacer un jersey, to make a sweater
    hacer un puente, to build a bridge
    2 (una acción) to do: eso no se hace, it isn't done
    haz lo que quieras, do what you want
    ¿qué estás haciendo?, (en este momento) what are you doing?
    (para vivir) what do you do (for a living)?
    hace atletismo, he does athletics
    hacer una carrera/ medicina, to do a degree/ medicine
    3 (amigos, dinero) to make
    4 (obligar, forzar) to make: hazle entrar en razón, make him see reason
    5 (causar, provocar) to make: ese hombre me hace reír, that man makes me laugh
    estos zapatos me hacen daño, these shoes are hurting me
    no hagas llorar a tu hermana, don't make your sister cry
    6 (arreglar) to make
    hacer la cama, to make the bed
    hacer la casa, to do the housework
    7 Mat (sumar, dar como resultado) to make: y con éste hacen cincuenta, and that makes fifty
    8 (producir una impresión) to make... look: ese vestido la hace mayor, that dress makes her look older
    9 (en sustitución de otro verbo) to do: cuido mi jardín, me gusta hacerlo, I look after my garden, I like doing it
    10 (representar) to play: Juan hizo un papel en Fuenteovejuna, Juan played a part in Fuenteovejuna
    11 (actuar como) to play: no hagas el tonto, don't play the fool
    12 (suponer) te hacía en casa, I thought you were at home
    II verbo intransitivo
    1 (en el teatro, etc) to play: hizo de Electra, she played Electra
    2 ( hacer por + infinitivo) to try to: hice por ayudar, I tried to help
    3 (simular) to pretend: hice como si no lo conociera, I acted as if I didn't know him
    4 fam (venir bien, convenir) to be suitable: si te hace, nos vamos a verle mañana, if it's all right for you, we'll visit him tomorrow
    III verbo impersonal
    1 (tiempo transcurrido) ago: hace mucho (tiempo), a long time ago
    hace tres semanas que no veo la televisión, I haven't watched TV for three weeks
    hace tres años que comenzaron las obras, the building works started three years ago
    2 (condición atmosférica) hacía mucho frío, it was very cold
    ¿To make o to do?
    El significado básico del verbo to make es construir, fabricar algo juntando los componentes (aquí hacen unos pasteles maravillosos, they make marvellous cakes here), obligar (hazle callar, make him shut up) o convertir: Te hará más fuerte. It'll make you stronger. También se emplea en expresiones compuestas por palabras tales como dinero ( money), ruido ( a noise), cama ( the bed), esfuerzo ( an effort), promesa ( a promise), c omentario ( a comment), amor ( love), guerra ( war).
    El significado del verbo to do es cumplir o ejecutar una tarea o actividad, especialmente tratándose de los deportes y las tareas domésticas: Hago mis deberes por la noche. I do my homework in the evening. ¿Quién hace la plancha en tu casa? Who does the ironing in your house? También se emplea con palabras tales como deber ( duty), deportes ( sports), examen ( an exam), favor ( a favour), sumas ( sums).
    ' hacer' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    abrir
    - aclarar
    - acopio
    - acto
    - adelantar
    - adelantamiento
    - advertir
    - alarde
    - aliviar
    - amagar
    - amarrar
    - amor
    - amortizar
    - ampliar
    - añicos
    - aplanar
    - aprecio
    - aprender
    - aspaviento
    - atonía
    - autostop
    - ayuno
    - balance
    - broma
    - burla
    - burrada
    - cábala
    - caballo
    - cabronada
    - caca
    - cafetera
    - caja
    - calceta
    - calentar
    - callar
    - calle
    - calor
    - cama
    - capacitar
    - capaz
    - caso
    - castigar
    - castillo
    - chantaje
    - colar
    - colada
    - colecta
    - comecome
    - comentar
    - como
    English:
    abort
    - abstain
    - abuse
    - accent
    - accentuate
    - accepted
    - accustom
    - act
    - advance
    - advertise
    - afraid
    - again
    - agitate
    - agree
    - aim at
    - aim to
    - air
    - all-out
    - amenable
    - antsy
    - apart
    - appearance
    - arm-twisting
    - as
    - assert
    - attempt
    - audition
    - authorize
    - backup
    - bake
    - balance
    - bandy about
    - bed
    - begin
    - blast
    - blind
    - blueberry
    - blur
    - boil
    - bonk
    - boohoo
    - book in
    - bounce
    - bring in
    - bubble
    - budget
    - bulldoze
    - bully
    - bundle
    - burp
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    1. [elaborar, crear, cocinar] to make;
    hacer una fiesta to have a party;
    hacer un vestido/planes to make a dress/plans;
    hacer un poema/una sinfonía to write a poem/symphony;
    hacer un nudo to tie a knot;
    los cristianos creen que Dios hizo al hombre Christians believe that God created mankind;
    haz un poco más la carne cook the meat a bit longer;
    Fam
    tu hermano ha hecho una de las suyas your brother has been up to his usual tricks;
    Fam
    ¡buena la has hecho! you've really gone and done it now!
    2. [construir] to build;
    han hecho un edificio nuevo they've put up a new building
    3. [generar] to produce;
    el árbol hace sombra the tree gives shade;
    la carretera hace una curva there's a bend in the road
    4. [movimientos, sonidos, gestos] to make;
    le hice señas I signalled to her;
    el gato hace “miau” cats go “miaow”;
    el reloj hace tic-tac the clock goes tick-tock;
    hacer ruido to make a noise
    5. [obtener] [fotocopia] to make;
    [retrato] to paint; [fotografía] to take
    6. [realizar] [trabajo, estudios] to do;
    [viaje] to make; [comunión] to take; [sacrificio] to make; [promesa, oferta] to make; [milagro] to perform; [experimento] to do, to perform; [favor] to do; [pregunta] to ask; [declaración] to make; [crucigrama] to do;
    hacer una entrevista to do an interview;
    tengo mucho que hacer I have a lot to do;
    hoy hace guardia she's on duty today;
    estoy haciendo segundo I'm in my second year;
    hago ingeniería I'm doing o studying engineering
    7. [obrar, realizar una acción] to do;
    ¿qué habré hecho con las llaves? what have I done with the keys?;
    CSur Fam
    y mis llaves, ¿qué las hice? and my keys, now what did I do with them?;
    ¡le he dicho mil veces que eso no se hace! I've told him time and again that it's wrong to do that!;
    Fam
    haz lo que te dé la gana do whatever you want;
    ¿qué haces? vas a romper la bicicleta what are you doing o what do you think you're doing?, you're going to break the bicycle!;
    ¡qué le vamos a hacer! never mind!;
    8. [practicar] [en general] to do;
    [tenis, fútbol] to play;
    debes hacer deporte you should start doing some sport
    9. [arreglar] [casa, colada] to do;
    [cama] to make; [maleta] to pack; [uñas] to do; [barba] to trim
    10. [dar aspecto a] to cause to look o seem;
    este espejo te hace gordo this mirror makes you look fat
    11. [transformar en]
    hacer a alguien feliz to make sb happy;
    la guerra no lo hizo un hombre the war didn't make him (into) a man;
    hizo pedazos el papel he tore the paper to pieces;
    hacer de algo/alguien algo to make sth/sb into sth;
    hizo de ella una buena cantante he made a good singer of her
    12. [comportarse como]
    hacer el tonto to act the fool;
    hacer el vándalo to act like a hooligan;
    hacer el ridículo to make a fool of oneself
    13. [causar]
    me hizo gracia I thought it was funny;
    un poco de aire fresco le hará bien a bit of fresh air will do her good;
    Am
    esos ñoquis me hicieron mal those gnocchi disagreed with me
    14. Cine & Teatro [papel] to play;
    [obra] to do, to perform;
    hace el papel de la hija del rey she plays (the part of) the king's daughter;
    hoy hacen una obra de Brecht today they're putting on o doing one of Brecht's plays
    15. [suponer] to think, to reckon;
    a estas horas yo te hacía en París I thought o reckoned you'd be in Paris by now;
    te hacía más joven I thought you were younger, I'd have said you were younger
    16. [ser causa de]
    hacer que alguien haga algo to make sb do sth;
    me hizo reír it made me laugh;
    has hecho que se enfadara you've made him angry;
    haces que me avergüence you make me ashamed;
    la tormenta hizo que se cancelara el concierto the storm caused the concert to be called off
    17. [mandar]
    hacer que se haga algo to have sth done;
    voy a hacer teñir este vestido I'm going to have this dress dyed;
    la hizo callarse he made her shut up
    18. [acostumbrar]
    la prisión lo hizo a la soledad prison made o got him used to being alone
    19. [cumplir]
    hizo los cincuenta la semana pasada he was fifty last week, he celebrated his fiftieth birthday last week
    20. [completar] to make;
    tres y dos hacen cinco three and two make five;
    y este huevo hace la docena and this egg makes (it) a dozen;
    hago el número seis en la lista I'm number six on the list
    21. [conseguir] to make;
    hizo una gran fortuna he made a large fortune;
    hizo muchas amistades en Australia she made a lot of friends in Australia
    22. [recorrer] to do;
    ¿cuántos kilómetros hiciste ayer? how many kilometres did you do yesterday?;
    hago dos kilómetros a pie todos los días I walk two kilometres every day
    23. [referido a necesidades fisiológicas] to do;
    Euf
    tengo que hacer mis necesidades I have to answer a call of nature;
    Fam
    los niños quieren hacer pipí the children want to have a pee
    24. [sustituyendo a otro verbo] to do;
    se negó a ir y yo hice lo mismo she refused to go and I did likewise;
    ya no puedo leer como solía hacerlo I can't read as well as I used to
    ♦ vi
    1. [intervenir, actuar]
    déjame hacer (a mí) let me do it;
    ser el que hace y deshace: en la empresa, él es el que hace y deshace he's the one who calls the shots in the company
    2.
    hacer de [trabajar] to work as;
    [servir] to serve as, to act as; Cine & Teatro [actuar] to play;
    hace de electricista he's an electrician, he works as an electrician;
    este tronco hará de asiento this tree trunk will do for somewhere to sit;
    hace de don Quijote he's playing Don Quixote
    3. [aparentar]
    hacer como si to act as if;
    haz como que no te importa act as if you don't care
    4. [procurar, intentar]
    hacer por hacer algo to try to do sth;
    haré por verle esta noche I'll try to see him tonight
    5. [proceder]
    haces mal en callarte it's wrong of you not to say anything;
    hizo bien dimitiendo she was right to resign;
    ¿cómo hay que hacer para abrir esta caja? how do you open this box?, what do you have to do to open this box?
    6. Esp Fam [apetecer]
    ¿hace un vaso de vino? would you like o Br do you fancy a glass of wine?
    7. Am [necesidades fisiológicas]
    ¿hiciste? have you done anything?;
    preciso un baño, no hice antes de salir I need to find a bathroom, I didn't go before I came out
    8. Méx Fam
    hacer(la) buena: [ojalá] [m5]dicen que te sacaste la lotería – ¡házmela buena! they say you've won the lottery – if only!;
    me ofreció empleo don Paco, voy a ver si me la hace buena Don Paco offered me a job, I'll see if he comes through for me
    9. Méx Fam
    hacerle a [profesión] to do;
    por las mañanas estudia y en la tarde le hace a la peluquería she studies in the morning and in the afternoon she does hairdressing
    10. Méx Fam
    hacerle a [droga] to do;
    ese tipo le hace a la cocaína that guy does coke
    11. Méx Fam
    hacerle a [aparentar] to pretend to be;
    le hace al tonto, pero bien que sabe he pretends to be clueless but he knows perfectly well;
    dile que no le haga al cuento tell him to stop Br spinning me a line o US jerking me around
    12. Méx Fam
    no le hagas [exclamación] come off it!, Br do me a favour!, US give me a break!;
    perdí mi libro – ¡no le hagas! I lost my book – pull the other one! o sure you did!
    13. Méx, RP
    no le hace [no importa] it doesn't matter;
    no sé si voy a poder ir – no le hace I don't know if I'll be able to go – it doesn't matter;
    ¿qué le hace? so what?, big deal!
    ♦ v impersonal
    1. [tiempo meteorológico]
    hace frío/sol/viento it's cold/sunny/windy;
    hace un día precioso it's a beautiful day;
    mañana hará mal tiempo the weather will be bad tomorrow
    2. [tiempo transcurrido]
    hace diez años ten years ago;
    hace mucho a long time ago;
    hace poco not long ago;
    hace un rato a short while ago;
    hace un mes que llegué it's a month since I arrived;
    no la veo desde hace un año I haven't seen her for a year;
    ¿cuánto hace de eso? how long ago was that?
    * * *
    <part hecho>
    I v/t
    1 ( realizar) do;
    ¡haz algo! do something!;
    hacer una pregunta ask a question;
    tengo que hacer los deberes I have to do my homework; !;
    no hace más que quejarse all he does is complain;
    no hay nada que hacer there’s nothing we can do;
    se hace lo que se puede one does one’s best;
    ¡eso no se hace! that’s just not done!
    2 ( elaborar, crear) make;
    hacer la comida make o cook a meal;
    hacer que algo ocurra make sth happen
    3 ( obligar a)
    :
    hacer que alguien haga algo make s.o. do sth;
    le hicieron ir they made him go
    4 ( cumplir)
    :
    hoy hago veinte años I am twenty today, today is my twentieth birthday
    5 ( equivaler a)
    :
    esta botella hace un litro this bottle holds a liter
    6
    :
    ¡qué le vamos a hacer! that’s life
    II v/i
    1
    :
    haces bien/mal en ir you are doing the right/wrong thing by going
    2 ( sentar)
    :
    me hace mal it’s making me ill
    3 ( servir de)
    :
    esto hará de mesa de objeto this will do as a table
    4 ( fingir)
    :
    como si act as if
    5 L.Am.
    no le hace it doesn’t matter
    6 L.Am. ( parecer)
    :
    se me hace que it seems to me that
    :
    ¿hace? fam does that sound good?
    8
    :
    hacer de malo TEA play the villain
    :
    hace calor/frío it’s hot/cold;
    hace tres días three days ago;
    hace mucho (tiempo) a long time ago, long ago;
    desde hace un año for a year
    * * *
    hacer {40} vt
    1) : to make
    2) : to do, to perform
    3) : to force, to oblige
    los hice esperar: I made them wait
    hacer vi
    : to act
    haces bien: you're doing the right thing
    hacer v impers
    hacer frío: to be cold
    hace viento: it's windy
    2)
    hace : ago
    hace mucho tiempo: a long time ago, for a long time
    3)
    no le hace : it doesn't matter, it makes no difference
    4)
    hacer falta : to be necessary, to be needed
    * * *
    hacer vb
    1. (crear, fabricar, conseguir) to make [pt. & pp. made]
    ¿has hecho la cama? have you made your bed?
    2. (una actividad, trabajo) to do [pt. did; pp. done]
    ¿qué haces? what are you doing?
    ¿qué hacen tus padres? what do your parents do?
    ¿qué has hecho en el cole hoy? what did you do at school today?
    ¿has hecho los deberes? have you done your homework?
    ¿me haces un favor? can you do me a favour?
    4. (dar cierto aspecto) to make... look...
    5. (pensar) to think [pt. & pp. thought]
    6. (aparentar) to pretend
    8. (poner) to show [pt. showed; pp. shown] / to be on
    ¿hace mucho que esperas? have you been waiting long?
    hacer daño to hurt [pt. & pp. hurt]
    hacer el tonto to act the fool / to mess about
    hacer señas to signal [pt. & pp. signalled]
    hacer un dibujo to draw a picture [pt. drew; pp. drawn]
    hacer una casa to build a house [pt. & pp. built]
    hacer una foto to take a photo [pt. took; pp. taken]
    hacer una redacción to write an essay [pt. wrote; pp. written]

    Spanish-English dictionary > hacer

  • 49 dominar

    v.
    1 to control (controlar) (pasión, nervios, caballo).
    era imposible dominar el vehículo it was impossible to maintain control of the vehicle
    2 to overcome.
    lo dominaba el deseo irrefrenable de besarla he was overcome by an irresistible desire to kiss her
    3 to master (conocer) (técnica, tema).
    domina varias lenguas she speaks various languages fluently
    ha conseguido dominar el inglés en pocos meses he managed to acquire a good command of English within a few months
    4 to overlook.
    desde aquí se domina todo Bilbao you can see the whole of Bilbao from here
    5 to predominate.
    6 to dominate, to domineer, to bestride, to have sway over.
    El tirano domina al pueblo The tyrant dominates the people.
    Ella domina su ira She dominates her anger.
    7 to tower above, to dominate.
    El cerro domina el horizonte The hill dominates the horizon.
    8 to have the control, to dominate, to have ascendancy, to have the ascendancy.
    Ella domina She has the control.
    9 to calm down forcibly, to calm down.
    10 to take over.
    * * *
    1 (tener bajo dominio) to dominate
    2 (avasallar) to domineer
    3 (controlar) to control, restrain
    4 (conocer a fondo) to master
    5 (ver) to overlook, dominate
    1 (ser superior) to dominate
    2 (destacar) to stand out
    3 (predominar) to predominate
    1 (controlarse) to control oneself, restrain oneself
    * * *
    verb
    •
    * * *
    1. VT
    1) (=controlar) [+ población, territorio] to dominate; [+ países] to rule, rule over; [+ adversario] to overpower; [+ caballo] to control
    2) (=contener) [+ incendio, epidemia] to check, bring under control; [+ rebelión] to put down, suppress; [+ pasión] to control, master; [+ nervios, emoción] to control; [+ dolor] to overcome
    3) [+ técnica, tema] to master
    4) (=estar por encima de)
    2. VI
    1) [edificio] to tower
    2) (=predominar) [color, rasgo] to stand out; [opinión, tendencia] to predominate
    3.
    See:
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    a) ( controlar) <nación/territorio/persona> to dominate; <pasión/cólera> to control; <vehiculo/caballo> to control

    dominado por la ambición/los celos — ruled by ambition/consumed by jealousy

    b) < idioma> to have a good command of; <tema/asignatura> to know... very well
    d) montaña/torre to dominate
    2.
    dominar vi color/tendencia to predominate; opinión to prevail; equipo to dominate
    3.
    dominarse v pron persona to restrain o control oneself
    * * *
    = dominate, dominate + the scene, get + command of, tame, subdue, master, command, conquer, preponderate, overtake, overlook, gain + control (over/of), get + a grip on, tower above/over, pervade, hold + sway (over), be king, lord over, lord it over, keep + a tight hold on.
    Ex. The ideology advocated by Panizzi has since dominated not only Anglo-American but Western cataloging generally.
    Ex. This may have something to do with the absence of CABx, who seem to have dominated the scene in other states.
    Ex. The great storyteller, FC Sayers, having advised the beginner to 'steep himself in folklore until the elemental themes are part of himself,' explains how best to get command of a tale.
    Ex. The problem reside in the fact that they environment we seek to tame and control is an open, unstructured dynamic process, while human organizations are static and highly resistant to change.
    Ex. Anyway, experience had taught him that a subordinate who attempts to subdue a superordinate is almost always lost; the superordinate has too many advantages in such a contest.
    Ex. The library director strove to master his frustration.
    Ex. Very few engravers commanded the necessary artistry.
    Ex. The tools and technologies provided by the Internet enable scholars to communicate or disseminate information in ways which conquer the barriers of time and space.
    Ex. The indexing languages used in science and technology were first in the field, and still preponderate, both in areas covered and in number.
    Ex. E-Books, while a curiosity and a lot of fun, do not seem to be overtaking the mass market.
    Ex. In this sense the British Council libraries may be seen as a window, overlooking the British Isles, their virtues and characteristics.
    Ex. Gradually many of these conquerors came to realize that, although military might was necessary to gain control over an area, sheer force of arms was not sufficient to govern effectively.
    Ex. The article ' Getting a grip on change' argues that only by confronting the challenges and inevitability of change can libraries retain their relevancy in the information age.
    Ex. Prague represents a unique collection of historical monuments dominated by Prague Castle towering high above the city.
    Ex. I strongly believe that we must cultivate a more positive attitude towards change in the field of library work, and that this attitude must pervade all levels of librarianship.
    Ex. This ideology appealed widely to the librarian as well as the library user and held sway for nearly a quarter of a millennium when, in 1841, a catalytic event in the history of cataloging took place.
    Ex. Despite the electronics invasion, books are still king, and book fairs keeps on growing every year.
    Ex. She argues that the way yeoman farmers lorded over their wives and dependents was similar to the way wealthy planters lorded over their slaves.
    Ex. They believe that the main use for government is for some people to lord it over others at their expense.
    Ex. A study of telly-addicts has found that in 45 per cent of homes mums keep a tight hold on the remote control.
    ----
    * dominar a Alguien = have + Nombre + under + Posesivo + thumb, bring + Nombre + under + Posesivo + sway.
    * dominar aún más = tighten + Posesivo + grip on.
    * dominar el miedo = conquer + fear.
    * dominar la situación = tame + the beast.
    * dominar por completo = sweep + the board.
    * dominar una destreza = master + skill.
    * dominar una técnica = master + technique.
    * la mano que mece la cuna es la mano que domina el mundo = the hand that rocks the cradle rules the world.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    a) ( controlar) <nación/territorio/persona> to dominate; <pasión/cólera> to control; <vehiculo/caballo> to control

    dominado por la ambición/los celos — ruled by ambition/consumed by jealousy

    b) < idioma> to have a good command of; <tema/asignatura> to know... very well
    d) montaña/torre to dominate
    2.
    dominar vi color/tendencia to predominate; opinión to prevail; equipo to dominate
    3.
    dominarse v pron persona to restrain o control oneself
    * * *
    = dominate, dominate + the scene, get + command of, tame, subdue, master, command, conquer, preponderate, overtake, overlook, gain + control (over/of), get + a grip on, tower above/over, pervade, hold + sway (over), be king, lord over, lord it over, keep + a tight hold on.

    Ex: The ideology advocated by Panizzi has since dominated not only Anglo-American but Western cataloging generally.

    Ex: This may have something to do with the absence of CABx, who seem to have dominated the scene in other states.
    Ex: The great storyteller, FC Sayers, having advised the beginner to 'steep himself in folklore until the elemental themes are part of himself,' explains how best to get command of a tale.
    Ex: The problem reside in the fact that they environment we seek to tame and control is an open, unstructured dynamic process, while human organizations are static and highly resistant to change.
    Ex: Anyway, experience had taught him that a subordinate who attempts to subdue a superordinate is almost always lost; the superordinate has too many advantages in such a contest.
    Ex: The library director strove to master his frustration.
    Ex: Very few engravers commanded the necessary artistry.
    Ex: The tools and technologies provided by the Internet enable scholars to communicate or disseminate information in ways which conquer the barriers of time and space.
    Ex: The indexing languages used in science and technology were first in the field, and still preponderate, both in areas covered and in number.
    Ex: E-Books, while a curiosity and a lot of fun, do not seem to be overtaking the mass market.
    Ex: In this sense the British Council libraries may be seen as a window, overlooking the British Isles, their virtues and characteristics.
    Ex: Gradually many of these conquerors came to realize that, although military might was necessary to gain control over an area, sheer force of arms was not sufficient to govern effectively.
    Ex: The article ' Getting a grip on change' argues that only by confronting the challenges and inevitability of change can libraries retain their relevancy in the information age.
    Ex: Prague represents a unique collection of historical monuments dominated by Prague Castle towering high above the city.
    Ex: I strongly believe that we must cultivate a more positive attitude towards change in the field of library work, and that this attitude must pervade all levels of librarianship.
    Ex: This ideology appealed widely to the librarian as well as the library user and held sway for nearly a quarter of a millennium when, in 1841, a catalytic event in the history of cataloging took place.
    Ex: Despite the electronics invasion, books are still king, and book fairs keeps on growing every year.
    Ex: She argues that the way yeoman farmers lorded over their wives and dependents was similar to the way wealthy planters lorded over their slaves.
    Ex: They believe that the main use for government is for some people to lord it over others at their expense.
    Ex: A study of telly-addicts has found that in 45 per cent of homes mums keep a tight hold on the remote control.
    * dominar a Alguien = have + Nombre + under + Posesivo + thumb, bring + Nombre + under + Posesivo + sway.
    * dominar aún más = tighten + Posesivo + grip on.
    * dominar el miedo = conquer + fear.
    * dominar la situación = tame + the beast.
    * dominar por completo = sweep + the board.
    * dominar una destreza = master + skill.
    * dominar una técnica = master + technique.
    * la mano que mece la cuna es la mano que domina el mundo = the hand that rocks the cradle rules the world.

    * * *
    dominar [A1 ]
    vt
    1 (controlar) ‹nación/territorio› to dominate; ‹persona› to dominate; ‹pasión/cólera› to control
    tiene a los niños totalmente dominados she has the children well under her thumb o under control
    dominado por la ambición ruled by ambition
    dominado por los celos consumed by jealousy
    no logró dominar su ira she couldn't contain o control her anger
    el equipo que dominó el encuentro the team which dominated the match
    no logró dominar el vehículo/caballo he couldn't get control of the vehicle/horse
    la policía dominó la situación en todo momento the police had the situation under control at all times
    2 ‹tema/idioma›
    no domino el tema I'm no expert on the subject
    domina el francés she has a good command of French
    nunca voy a poder dominar el inglés I'll never be able to master English
    3
    (abarcar con la vista): desde allí se domina toda la bahía there's a view over the whole bay from there, from there you can look out over the whole bay
    4 «montaña/torre» to dominate
    ■ dominar
    vi
    «color/tendencia» to predominate; «opinión» to prevail
    el tema que dominó en las negociones the subject which dominated the talks
    el equipo visitante dominó durante el segundo tiempo the visitors dominated the second half o were on top in the second half
    «persona» to restrain o control oneself
    * * *

     

    dominar ( conjugate dominar) verbo transitivo
    a) ( controlar) ‹nación/territorio/persona› to dominate;

    ‹pasión/cólera› to control;
    ‹vehículo/caballo› to control;
    ◊ dominado por la ambición/los celos ruled by ambition/consumed by jealousy


    ‹tema/asignatura› to know … very well


    verbo intransitivo [color/tendencia] to predominate;
    [ opinión] to prevail;
    [ equipo] to dominate
    dominarse verbo pronominal [ persona] to restrain o control oneself
    dominar
    I verbo transitivo
    1 (un pueblo, país) to dominate, rule
    2 (contener, controlar) to control
    3 (conocer perfectamente: un idioma) to speak very well
    (: un asunto, una actividad) to master
    4 (con la vista) to overlook
    II verbo intransitivo
    1 to dominate
    2 (un color, una característica) to stand out
    ' dominar' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    abarcar
    - imperar
    - imponerse
    - vencer
    - conocer
    - dejar
    - reducir
    - someter
    - sujetar
    English:
    control
    - curb
    - dominate
    - hold down
    - master
    - overpower
    - pervade
    - restrain
    - subdue
    - sway
    - tower
    - over
    - rule
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    1. [controlar] [país, territorio, pueblo] to dominate, to rule (over);
    [persona, caballo] to control; [emociones, nervios] to control, to keep under control; [situación] to be in control of; [incendio, epidemia] to bring under control; [rebelión] to put down; [partido] to dominate;
    la guerrilla domina toda esta zona guerrillas control this entire area;
    la policía logró dominar a los alborotadores the police managed to bring the troublemakers under control;
    tiene al marido dominado she has her husband under her thumb;
    era imposible dominar el vehículo it was impossible to maintain control of the vehicle;
    no supo dominar sus nervios she couldn't control her nervousness;
    el equipo local dominó el partido en todo momento the local team dominated the game from the beginning
    2. [sujeto: pasión, nervios, emociones] to overcome;
    lo dominaba el deseo irrefrenable de besarla he was overcome by an irresistible desire to kiss her
    3. [ser experto en] [técnica, tema] to master;
    [lengua] to be fluent in;
    domina a la perfección los temas de contabilidad he has a perfect mastery of accounting;
    domina varias lenguas she speaks various languages fluently;
    ha conseguido dominar el inglés en pocos meses he managed to acquire a good command of English in a few months;
    ¡cómo domina el balón! what great ball control!
    4. [divisar] to overlook;
    desde aquí se domina todo Bilbao you can see the whole of Bilbao from here
    5. [destacar por encima de] to dominate;
    el castillo domina el pueblo the castle dominates the town
    ♦ vi
    [predominar] to predominate;
    una zona donde domina el voto socialista an area with a predominantly socialist vote
    * * *
    I v/t
    1 persona, mercado dominate
    2 idioma have a good command of
    II v/i dominate
    * * *
    1) : to dominate
    2) : to master, to be proficient at
    : to predominate, to prevail
    * * *
    1. (en general) to dominate
    2. (tener bajo poder) to rule over
    3. (controlar) to control
    4. (contener) to bring under control [pt. & pp. brought]
    5. (idioma) to be fluent in
    6. (otras materias) to be good at / to be an expert on

    Spanish-English dictionary > dominar

  • 50 salir

    v.
    1 to go out (ir fuera).
    ¡sal aquí fuera! come out here!
    salir de to go/come out of
    ¿salimos al jardín? shall we go out into the garden?
    Yo salí I went out.
    2 to go out (ser novios).
    están saliendo they are going out (together)
    3 to turn out.
    ha salido muy estudioso he has turned out to be very studious
    ¿qué salió en la votación? what was the result of the vote?
    salir elegida actriz del año to be voted actress of the year
    salir premiado to be awarded a prize
    salir bien/mal to turn out well/badly
    salir ganando/perdiendo to come off well/badly
    me ha salido mal it didn't go very well; (examen, entrevista) it didn't turn out very well; (plato, dibujo) I got the wrong result (cuenta)
    ¿qué tal te ha salido? how did it go?
    4 to go out.
    salen mucho a cenar they eat out a lot
    5 to come out (surgir) (luna, estrellas, planta).
    le ha salido un sarpullido en la espalda her back has come out in a rash
    El plan me salió mal The plan came out bad.
    6 to come out (aparecer) (publicación, producto, traumas).
    ¡qué bien sales en la foto! you look great in the photo!
    ha salido en los periódicos/en la tele it's been in the papers/on TV
    salir de (Cine & Teatro) to appear as
    7 to come up.
    8 to turn up, to come along (presentarse) (ocasión, oportunidad).
    9 to work out.
    10 to lead.
    te toca salir a ti it's your lead
    11 to come out.
    la mancha de vino no sale the wine stain won't come out
    12 to get out, to escape.
    Me salió una espinilla I got a pimple.
    13 to slip out.
    Se me salió una imprudencia Something improper slipped out.
    14 to get away.
    El chico salió The boy got away.
    15 to step out, to pull out, to step outside.
    Ellos salieron con dificultad They pulled out with difficulty.
    16 to come up against, to encounter.
    Nos salió un problema We encountered a problem [came up against a problem]
    17 to be out, to come out.
    La luna sale a veces The moon comes out sometimes.
    18 to appear to.
    Nos salió un fantasma A ghost appeared to us.
    19 to work out for.
    20 to match.
    * * *
    Present Indicative
    salgo, sales, sale, salimos, salís, salen.
    Future Indicative
    Conditional
    Present Subjunctive
    Imperative
    sal (tú), salga (él/Vd.), salgamos (nos.), salid (vos.), salgan (ellos/Vds.).
    * * *
    verb
    1) to go out, get out
    2) depart, leave
    3) come out, appear
    5) become, be elected
    •
    * * *
    Para las expresiones salir adelante, salir ganando, salir perdiendo, salir de viaje, ver la otra entrada.
    1. VERBO INTRANSITIVO
    1) (=partir) [persona] to leave; [transportes] to leave, depart frm; (Náut) to leave, sail

    • salir [de] — to leave

    ¿a qué hora sales de la oficina? — what time do you leave the office?

    • salir [para] — to set off for

    2) (=no entrar) (=ir fuera) to go out; (=venir fuera) to come out; [a divertirse] to go out

    salió a la calle a ver si venían — she went outside {o} she went out into the street to see if they were coming

    -¿está Juan? -no, ha salido — "is Juan in?" - "no, I'm afraid he's gone out"

    ¿vas a salir esta noche? — are you going out tonight?

    la pelota salió fuera — (Ftbl) the ball went out (of play)

    • salió [corriendo] (del cuarto) — he ran out (of the room)

    • salir [de], nos la encontramos al salir del cine — we bumped into her when we were coming out of the cinema

    ¿de dónde has salido? — where did you appear {o} spring from?

    • salir de [paseo] — to go out for a walk

    salir de pobre —

    3) [al mercado] [revista, libro, disco] to come out; [moda] to come in

    acaba de salir un disco suyo — an album of his has just come out {o} been released

    4) [en medios de comunicación]

    la noticia salió en el periódico de ayer — the news was {o} appeared in yesterday's paper

    salir por la televisión — to be {o} appear on TV

    5) (=surgir) to come up

    cuando salga la ocasión — when the opportunity comes up {o} arises

    ¡ya salió aquello! — we know all about that!

    salirle algo a algn: le ha salido novio/un trabajo — she's got herself a boyfriend/a job

    6) (=aparecer) [agua] to come out; [sol] to come out; [mancha] to appear
    7) (=nacer) [diente] to come through; [planta, sol] to come up; [pelo] to grow; [pollito] to hatch
    8) (=quitarse) [mancha] to come out, come off

    el anillo no le sale del dedo — the ring won't come off her finger, she can't get the ring off her finger

    9) (=costar)

    • salir [a], sale a ocho euros el kilo — it works out at eight euros a kilo

    salimos a 10 libras por persona — it works out at £10 each

    • salir [por], me salió por 1.000 pesos — it cost me 1,000 pesos

    10) (=resultar)

    ¿cómo salió la representación? — how did the performance go?

    ¿qué número ha salido premiado en la lotería? — what was the winning number in the lottery?

    tenemos que aceptarlo, salga lo que salga — we have to accept it, whatever happens

    • salir [bien], el plan salió bien — the plan worked out well

    ¿salió bien la fiesta? — did the party go well?

    ¿cómo te salió el examen? — how did your exam go?

    • salir [mal], salió muy mal del tratamiento — the treatment wasn't at all successful

    ¡qué mal me ha salido el dibujo! — oh dear! my drawing hasn't come out very well!

    11)

    salirle algo a algn —

    a) (=poder resolverse)
    b) (=resultar natural)
    c) (=poder recordarse)
    12)

    • salir [a] — [calle] to come out in, lead to

    esta calle sale a la plaza — this street comes out in {o} leads to the square

    13)

    • salir [a] algn — (=parecerse) to take after sb

    14)

    • salir [con] algn — to go out with sb

    15)

    • salir [con] algo — [al hablar] to come out with sth

    16)

    • salir [de] — [proceder] to come from

    17)

    • salir [por] algn — (=defender) to come out in defence of sb, stick up for sb; [económicamente] to back sb financially

    cuando hubo problemas, salió por mí — when there were problems, she stuck up for me {o} came out in my defence

    18) (Teat) to come on

    "sale el rey" — [acotación] "enter the king"

    19) (=empezar) (Dep) to start; (Ajedrez) to have first move; (Naipes) to lead
    20) (Inform) to exit
    21) (=sobresalir) to stick out
    22) (=pagar)

    salir a los gastos de algn — to meet {o} pay sb's expenses

    2.
    See:
    SALIR Para precisar la forma de salir Aunque salir (de ) se suele traducir por come out (of ) o por go out (of) según la dirección del movimiento, cuando se quiere especificar la forma en que se realiza ese movimiento, estos verbos se pueden reemplazar por otros como run out, rush out, jump out, tiptoe out, climb out {etc}: Se vio a tres hombres enmascarados salir del banco corriendo Three masked men were seen running out of the bank Salió del coche con un salto He jumped out of the car Salió de puntillas de la habitación He tiptoed out of the room Para otros usos y ejemplos ver la entrada
    * * *
    1.
    verbo intransitivo
    1) ( partir) to leave

    ¿a qué hora sale tu tren/tu vuelo? — what time is your train/flight?

    salió corriendo or disparada — (fam) she was off like a shot (colloq)

    ¿de qué andén sale el tren? — what platform does the train leave from?

    no puedo salir, me he quedado encerrado — I can't get out, I'm trapped in here

    salir de algo — to come out/get out of something

    ¿tú de dónde has salido? — where have you sprung from?

    ¿de dónde salió este dinero? — where did this money come from?

    salió por la puerta de atrás — he went out o left by the back door

    salir a algo: salieron al balcón/al jardín they went out onto the balcony/into the garden; salir a + inf to go out/come out to + inf; ¿sales a jugar? are you coming out to play?; salió a hacer las compras — she's gone out (to do the) shopping

    ¿a qué hora sales de clase? — what time do you get out of class o finish your class?

    ¿cuándo sale del hospital? — when is he coming out of (the) hospital?

    4)
    a) ( como entretenimiento) to go out
    b) ( tener una relación) to go out

    ¿estás saliendo con alguien? — are you going out with anyone?

    5) (a calle, carretera)

    ¿por aquí se sale a la carretera? — can I get on to the road this way?

    ¿esta calle sale al Paseo Colón? — does this street come out onto the Paseo Colón?

    6) clavo/tapón to come out; anillo to come off
    7) (aparecer, manifestarse)
    a) cana/sarpullido to appear; (+ me/te/le etc)

    me salieron granos — I broke out o (BrE) come out in spots

    ¿te sale sangre? — are you bleeding o is it bleeding?

    b) sol ( por la mañana) to rise, come up; ( de detrás de una nube) to come out
    c) ( surgir) tema/idea to come up

    yo no se lo pedí, salió de él — I didn't ask him to do it, it was his idea o he offered

    ya salió aquello — you (o he etc) had to bring that up; (+ me/te/le etc)

    le salió así, espontáneamente — he just came out with it quite spontaneously

    me salió en alemán — it came o I said it in German

    d) carta ( en naipes) to come up

    ¿ha salido ya el 15? — have they called number 15 yet?

    8)
    a) ( tocar en suerte) (+ me/te/le etc)
    9) mancha ( aparecer) to appear; ( quitarse) to come out
    10)
    a) revista/novela to come out; disco to come out, be released
    b) (en televisión, el periódico) to appear

    salió por or en (la) televisión — she was o appeared on television

    c) ( en una foto) to appear; (+ compl)

    sale de pastor — he plays o he is a shepherd

    11) (expresando irritación, sorpresa)

    salir con algo: mira con qué sale éste ahora! did you hear what he just said?; no me salgas ahora con eso — don't give me that (colloq)

    12) ( expresando logro) (+ me/te/le etc)

    ¿te salió el crucigrama? — did you finish the crossword?

    ahora mismo no me sale su nombre — (fam) I can't think of her name right now

    13) ( resultar)

    ¿a ti te da 40? a mí me sale 42 — how do you get 40? I make it 42; (+ compl)

    sale muy caro — it works out o is very expensive

    ¿qué número salió premiado? — what was the winning number?

    salir bien/mal en un examen — (Chi fam) to pass/fail an exam; (+ me/te/le etc)

    no lo hagas deprisa que te va a salir todo mal — don't try to do it too quickly, you'll do it all wrong

    ¿cómo te salió el examen? — how did you get on o do in the exam?

    14) (de situación, estado)

    salir de algo: para salir del apuro in order to get out of an awkward situation; está muy mal, no sé si saldrá de ésta she's very ill, I don't know if she'll pull through; no sé cómo vamos a salir de ésta I don't know how we're going to get out of this one; me ayudó a salir de la depresión he helped me get over my depression; (+ compl) salió bien de la operación she came through the operation well; salieron ilesos del accidente they were not hurt in the accident; salió airosa del trance she came through it with flying colors; salir adelante negocio to stay afloat, survive; propuesta to prosper; fue una época muy dura, pero lograron salir adelante — it was a difficult period but they managed to get through it

    a) salir a ( parecerse a) to take after
    b) salir con (Col) ( combinar con) to go with
    c) salir de (Col, Ven) ( deshacerse de) to get rid of
    2.
    salirse v pron
    1)
    a) (de recipiente, límite)

    cierra el grifo, que se va a salir el agua — turn off the faucet (AmE) o (BrE) tap, the water's going to overflow

    salirse de algo: el camión se salió de la carretera the truck came/went off the road; el río se salió de su cauce the river overflowed its banks; la pelota se salió del campo de juego the ball went into touch o out of play; procura no salirte del presupuesto try to keep within the budget; te estás saliendo del tema — you're getting off the point

    b) (por orificio, grieta) agua/tinta to leak (out), come out; gas to escape, come out

    salirse de algo: se está saliendo el aire del neumático the air's coming o leaking out of the tire; se me salió el hilo de la aguja — the needle's come unthreaded

    c) (Chi, Méx) pluma/recipiente to leak
    2) ( soltarse) to come off; (+ me/te/le etc)

    se le salían los ojos de las órbitas — his eyes were popping out of his head

    3) ( irse) to leave

    salirse de algo — de asociación to leave something

    salirse con la suya — to get one's (own) way

    * * *
    = come out, debouch, depart, exit, go out of, make + departure, march off, quit, take + departure, leave, issue out, start out, go out and about, go out, pop, head out, socialise [socialize, -USA], be out and about, get out and about, go forth.
    Ex. Maybe it's the frustrated library school professor in him crying to come out -- whatever it is, give him a chance to show you what he knows.
    Ex. As they debouched into the street and hurried back to the library, Jergens thanked Meek for being someone she could share her concerns with.
    Ex. He smiled again, waved goodbye, and departed.
    Ex. Enter the lesson number you wish, or press the letter 'X' to exit the tutorial.
    Ex. In all 20 per cent of visitors went out of the bookshop with a book they had intended to buy, 15 per cent went out with a book they had not intended to buy and 67 went out with both intended and unintended purchases.
    Ex. Before making his departure, however, a few hints upon the methods of examining bibliographic compilations are necessary.
    Ex. Do not march off full-tilt in front of the readers.
    Ex. If you decide not to send or save the message, replace the question mark in front of ' Quit' with another character.
    Ex. 'I'm sure we'll be in touch a lot this week!' Suttie took her departure, repeating the offer.
    Ex. 'Do you ever let anyone leave without inspecting their bags?' Carpozzi asked as she sidled up to the checker.
    Ex. He bade her good day and issued out into the street.
    Ex. He went back into the house, addressing his Maker in low agonized tones, changed, and started out again.
    Ex. Thursday 22 August is your opportunity to go out and about - seeing at first hand the great variety of library and information centres located in the Central Belt of Scotland.
    Ex. They decided one day to take it upon themselves without his knowledge to go out and solicit funds from some of the large corn processors and farm equipment manufacturers.
    Ex. The azaleas are popping, the redbuds are in their finest attire, and the dogwoods are lacy jewels at the edge of the wood.
    Ex. It's tempting to splurge on a new hi-fi system or head out on a shopping spree, but the smart option might be to pay off an existing debt.
    Ex. She is married and has a family, but does not spend much time in the director's office or socialize with her.
    Ex. But if you' re out and about like I am, here's where I'll be over the next few nights, and feel free to say hi if you're going to be in the same area.
    Ex. Use the links below for ideas to get out and about.
    Ex. Finally six men agreed to go forth in their underclothes and nooses around their necks in hopeful expectation that their sacrifice would satisfy the king's bloodlust and he would spare the rest of the citizens.
    ----
    * acabar de salir de = be fresh out of.
    * a lo que salga = come what may.
    * a veces las cosas salen mal = shit happens.
    * a veces sales jodido = shit happens.
    * aventurarse a salir = venture forth.
    * ayudar a Alguien a salir adelante = help + Nombre + get on + Posesivo + feet.
    * cosas + salir bien = things + work out.
    * dejar que Alguien se salga con la suya = let + Nombre + do things + Posesivo + (own) way.
    * entrar y salir = come and go, drift in and out, wander in and out, go into and out of.
    * entrar y salir corriendo = run in and out.
    * estar saliendo con alguien = be in a dating relationship.
    * evitar que + salir = keep + Nombre + in.
    * hacer salir = push out, flush out.
    * imposibilitado para salir de casa = housebound [house-bound], homebound [home-bound].
    * invitar a Alguien a salir = ask + Nombre + out.
    * invitar a salir = take + Nombre + out.
    * no salir mal parado por = be none the worse for (that), be none the worse for wear.
    * obligar a salir = drive out + with a pitchfork, push out.
    * obligar a salir de = force from.
    * personas que no pueden salir de casa = homebound, the.
    * por un lado entra + Nombre + y por otro sale + Nombre = in go + Nombre + at one end, and out come + Nombre + at the other.
    * que puede salir en préstamo = loanable.
    * salir a = propagate out to, crash to, be out to.
    * salir a borbotones = gush out, spurt.
    * salir a chorros = gush out, spurt.
    * salir a comer = eat out.
    * salir a dar una vuelta = go out.
    * salir a dar una vuelta en coche = go out for + a drive.
    * salir a dar un paseo = go out for + a walk.
    * salir adelante = make + ends meet, keep + the wolves from the door, get + unstuck.
    * salir adelante a duras penas = eke out + a living, scratch (out) + a living, scrape + a living, eke out + an existence.
    * salir adelante en la vida, = get on in + life.
    * salir adelante por uno mismo = pull + Reflexivo + up(wards) by + Posesivo + (own) bootstraps.
    * salir adelante sin la ayuda de nadie = pull + Reflexivo + up(wards) by + Posesivo + (own) bootstraps.
    * salir a echarse un cigarro = go out for + a smoke.
    * salir a flote = make + ends meet.
    * salir a fumarse un cigarro = go out for + a smoke.
    * salir a hurtadillas = steal away.
    * salir airoso = pass + muster, pass with + flying colours.
    * salir airoso de = ride out.
    * salir a la calle = go out, hit + the streets.
    * salir a la calle en avalancha = spill (out) into + the streets.
    * salir a la luz = come to + light, go + live.
    * salir a la palestra = come out in + the open.
    * salir a las mil maravillas = work + a treat, come up + a treat, go down + a treat.
    * salir a la superficie = surface.
    * salir ampollas = blister.
    * salir a pasear en coche = go out for + a drive.
    * salir a pedir de boca = come up + roses, go off without + a hitch.
    * salir apresuradamente = dash off, shoot off.
    * salir a subasta = come up for + auction.
    * salir a toda prisa = make + a hasty exit.
    * salir a tomar una copa = go out for + a drink.
    * salir bien = go + well.
    * salir bien al final = turn out + right in the end.
    * salir bramando = roar out of.
    * salir con estupideces = talk + nonsense.
    * salir corriendo = leg it, run off, run away, bolt, make + a bolt for, dash off, take off, shoot off, take off + running, take to + Posesivo + heels.
    * salir corriendo a la calle = run into + the street.
    * salir de = get out of, walk out of, climb out of, break out of, break through, strike out from.
    * salir de casa = leave + home.
    * salir de copas = go out for + a drink.
    * salir de donde menos Uno se lo espera = come out of + the woodwork.
    * salir de fiesta = party.
    * salir de Guatemala para meterse en Guatapeor = out of the fire and into the frying pan.
    * salir de jarana = paint + the town red, go out on + the town.
    * salir de juerga = go out + boozing, paint + the town red, go out on + the town.
    * salir de la cárcel = release from + jail.
    * salir de la miseria = haul + Reflexivo + out of + Posesivo + bog.
    * salir del armario = come out of + the closet.
    * salir de la rutina tradicional = break out of + the traditional mould.
    * salir de la situación = extricate + Reflexivo.
    * salir del cascarón = come out of + Posesivo + shell.
    * salir del círculo = break out of + circle.
    * salir del trabajo = clock off + work.
    * salir de marcha = paint + the town red, party, go out on + the town.
    * salir de nuevo = come back out.
    * salir de parranda = go out + boozing, paint + the town red, go out on + the town.
    * salir de paseo = go out for + a walk.
    * salir de paseo en coche = go out for + a drive.
    * salir de perlas = come up + a treat, go down + a treat.
    * salir de + Posesivo + escondite = raise + Posesivo + head above the parapet.
    * salir de + Posesivo + refugio = raise + Posesivo + head above the parapet.
    * salir de quién sabe dónde = come out of + the woodwork.
    * salir desapercibido = sneak out of.
    * salir desde = set out from.
    * salir de una situación difícil = haul + Reflexivo + out of + Posesivo + bog.
    * salir de un impás = circumvent + impasse.
    * salir disparado = bolt, make + a bolt for, shoot off, dash off, take to + Posesivo + heels, run off.
    * salir disparado de = shoot out of.
    * salir echando leches = bolt, take off, make + a bolt for, dash off, shoot off.
    * salir el tiro por la culata = backfire, misfire.
    * salir en desbandada = stampede.
    * salir en estampida = stampede.
    * salir en forma radial de = radiate from.
    * salir enojado dando zapatazos = stomp out of.
    * salir en pareja con = date.
    * salir en tropel = stampede.
    * salir escaldado = get + the rough edge of + Posesivo + tongue.
    * salir fatal = go + pear-shaped.
    * salir fuera = be out and about, get out and about.
    * salir ganando = make + a profit, win, compare + favourably, be better off, win + the day, win out, be better served by, come out on + top.
    * salir grietas = develop + cracks.
    * salir horriblemente mal = go + horribly wrong.
    * salir huyendo = make off, do + a bunk.
    * salir ileso = escape + injury, leave without + a scratch.
    * salir impune = get away with it, get away with + murder, get away + scot-free.
    * salir inadvertidamente = sneak out of.
    * salir juntos = be an item.
    * salir los dientes = cut + Posesivo + teeth.
    * salir mal = go + wrong, go + awry, misfire, backfire.
    * salir malparado = get + the rough edge of + Posesivo + tongue.
    * salir perdiendo = victimise [victimize, -USA], come off + worst, lose out, compare + unfavourably, lose + neck, be a little worse off.
    * salir perjudicado = pay + the price, pay + the penalty.
    * salir pitando = take off, bolt, make + a bolt for, dash off, shoot off, take to + Posesivo + heels, run off.
    * salir por los cerros de Ubeda = go off on + a tangent, go off at + a tangent, fly off on + a tangent.
    * salir por piernas = make + a hasty exit.
    * salir por pies = take off + running, leg it, take to + Posesivo + heels, run off.
    * salir resueltamente = sally forth.
    * salir rugiendo = roar out of.
    * salir sangre = draw + blood.
    * salirse con la de Uno = have + Posesivo + way (with), get away with it.
    * salirse con las de Uno = get + Posesivo + (own) way, have + Posesivo + own way, get away with + murder, get away + scot-free.
    * salirse de = depart from, opt out of, step out of, spill out of.
    * salirse de convencionalismos = think out(side) + (of) the box.
    * salirse de la carretera = go off + the road.
    * salirse del molde = think out(side) + (of) the box.
    * salir según lo planeado = go off + as planned.
    * salir según lo previsto = go off + as planned.
    * salirse por la tangente = go off + the track, get off + the track, fly off on + a tangent, go off on + a tangent, go off at + a tangent, wander off + track, wander off + topic.
    * salir sigilosamente = steal away, slither out of.
    * salir sin ganar ni perder = break + even.
    * salir sin ser visto = sneak out of, slip out, steal away.
    * salir sin un rasguño = leave without + a scratch.
    * salir sobre ruedas = go off without + a hitch.
    * salir todo bien = land on + Posesivo + (own two) feet.
    * salir todo redondo = land on + Posesivo + (own two) feet.
    * salir una gotera = spring + a leak.
    * salir un momento a = pop down to.
    * salir un poco perjudicado = be a little worse prepared, be a little worse off.
    * salir volando = bolt, make + a bolt for, dash off, shoot off.
    * salir y caer = fall out (of).
    * salir zumbando = bolt, make + a bolt for.
    * si no aguantas el calor, sal de la cocina = if you can't stand the heat, get out of the kitchen.
    * sol + salir por = sun + rise on.
    * volver a salir = come back out.
    * volver a salir a la superficie = resurface.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo intransitivo
    1) ( partir) to leave

    ¿a qué hora sale tu tren/tu vuelo? — what time is your train/flight?

    salió corriendo or disparada — (fam) she was off like a shot (colloq)

    ¿de qué andén sale el tren? — what platform does the train leave from?

    no puedo salir, me he quedado encerrado — I can't get out, I'm trapped in here

    salir de algo — to come out/get out of something

    ¿tú de dónde has salido? — where have you sprung from?

    ¿de dónde salió este dinero? — where did this money come from?

    salió por la puerta de atrás — he went out o left by the back door

    salir a algo: salieron al balcón/al jardín they went out onto the balcony/into the garden; salir a + inf to go out/come out to + inf; ¿sales a jugar? are you coming out to play?; salió a hacer las compras — she's gone out (to do the) shopping

    ¿a qué hora sales de clase? — what time do you get out of class o finish your class?

    ¿cuándo sale del hospital? — when is he coming out of (the) hospital?

    4)
    a) ( como entretenimiento) to go out
    b) ( tener una relación) to go out

    ¿estás saliendo con alguien? — are you going out with anyone?

    5) (a calle, carretera)

    ¿por aquí se sale a la carretera? — can I get on to the road this way?

    ¿esta calle sale al Paseo Colón? — does this street come out onto the Paseo Colón?

    6) clavo/tapón to come out; anillo to come off
    7) (aparecer, manifestarse)
    a) cana/sarpullido to appear; (+ me/te/le etc)

    me salieron granos — I broke out o (BrE) come out in spots

    ¿te sale sangre? — are you bleeding o is it bleeding?

    b) sol ( por la mañana) to rise, come up; ( de detrás de una nube) to come out
    c) ( surgir) tema/idea to come up

    yo no se lo pedí, salió de él — I didn't ask him to do it, it was his idea o he offered

    ya salió aquello — you (o he etc) had to bring that up; (+ me/te/le etc)

    le salió así, espontáneamente — he just came out with it quite spontaneously

    me salió en alemán — it came o I said it in German

    d) carta ( en naipes) to come up

    ¿ha salido ya el 15? — have they called number 15 yet?

    8)
    a) ( tocar en suerte) (+ me/te/le etc)
    9) mancha ( aparecer) to appear; ( quitarse) to come out
    10)
    a) revista/novela to come out; disco to come out, be released
    b) (en televisión, el periódico) to appear

    salió por or en (la) televisión — she was o appeared on television

    c) ( en una foto) to appear; (+ compl)

    sale de pastor — he plays o he is a shepherd

    11) (expresando irritación, sorpresa)

    salir con algo: mira con qué sale éste ahora! did you hear what he just said?; no me salgas ahora con eso — don't give me that (colloq)

    12) ( expresando logro) (+ me/te/le etc)

    ¿te salió el crucigrama? — did you finish the crossword?

    ahora mismo no me sale su nombre — (fam) I can't think of her name right now

    13) ( resultar)

    ¿a ti te da 40? a mí me sale 42 — how do you get 40? I make it 42; (+ compl)

    sale muy caro — it works out o is very expensive

    ¿qué número salió premiado? — what was the winning number?

    salir bien/mal en un examen — (Chi fam) to pass/fail an exam; (+ me/te/le etc)

    no lo hagas deprisa que te va a salir todo mal — don't try to do it too quickly, you'll do it all wrong

    ¿cómo te salió el examen? — how did you get on o do in the exam?

    14) (de situación, estado)

    salir de algo: para salir del apuro in order to get out of an awkward situation; está muy mal, no sé si saldrá de ésta she's very ill, I don't know if she'll pull through; no sé cómo vamos a salir de ésta I don't know how we're going to get out of this one; me ayudó a salir de la depresión he helped me get over my depression; (+ compl) salió bien de la operación she came through the operation well; salieron ilesos del accidente they were not hurt in the accident; salió airosa del trance she came through it with flying colors; salir adelante negocio to stay afloat, survive; propuesta to prosper; fue una época muy dura, pero lograron salir adelante — it was a difficult period but they managed to get through it

    a) salir a ( parecerse a) to take after
    b) salir con (Col) ( combinar con) to go with
    c) salir de (Col, Ven) ( deshacerse de) to get rid of
    2.
    salirse v pron
    1)
    a) (de recipiente, límite)

    cierra el grifo, que se va a salir el agua — turn off the faucet (AmE) o (BrE) tap, the water's going to overflow

    salirse de algo: el camión se salió de la carretera the truck came/went off the road; el río se salió de su cauce the river overflowed its banks; la pelota se salió del campo de juego the ball went into touch o out of play; procura no salirte del presupuesto try to keep within the budget; te estás saliendo del tema — you're getting off the point

    b) (por orificio, grieta) agua/tinta to leak (out), come out; gas to escape, come out

    salirse de algo: se está saliendo el aire del neumático the air's coming o leaking out of the tire; se me salió el hilo de la aguja — the needle's come unthreaded

    c) (Chi, Méx) pluma/recipiente to leak
    2) ( soltarse) to come off; (+ me/te/le etc)

    se le salían los ojos de las órbitas — his eyes were popping out of his head

    3) ( irse) to leave

    salirse de algo — de asociación to leave something

    salirse con la suya — to get one's (own) way

    * * *
    = come out, debouch, depart, exit, go out of, make + departure, march off, quit, take + departure, leave, issue out, start out, go out and about, go out, pop, head out, socialise [socialize, -USA], be out and about, get out and about, go forth.

    Ex: Maybe it's the frustrated library school professor in him crying to come out -- whatever it is, give him a chance to show you what he knows.

    Ex: As they debouched into the street and hurried back to the library, Jergens thanked Meek for being someone she could share her concerns with.
    Ex: He smiled again, waved goodbye, and departed.
    Ex: Enter the lesson number you wish, or press the letter 'X' to exit the tutorial.
    Ex: In all 20 per cent of visitors went out of the bookshop with a book they had intended to buy, 15 per cent went out with a book they had not intended to buy and 67 went out with both intended and unintended purchases.
    Ex: Before making his departure, however, a few hints upon the methods of examining bibliographic compilations are necessary.
    Ex: Do not march off full-tilt in front of the readers.
    Ex: If you decide not to send or save the message, replace the question mark in front of ' Quit' with another character.
    Ex: 'I'm sure we'll be in touch a lot this week!' Suttie took her departure, repeating the offer.
    Ex: 'Do you ever let anyone leave without inspecting their bags?' Carpozzi asked as she sidled up to the checker.
    Ex: He bade her good day and issued out into the street.
    Ex: He went back into the house, addressing his Maker in low agonized tones, changed, and started out again.
    Ex: Thursday 22 August is your opportunity to go out and about - seeing at first hand the great variety of library and information centres located in the Central Belt of Scotland.
    Ex: They decided one day to take it upon themselves without his knowledge to go out and solicit funds from some of the large corn processors and farm equipment manufacturers.
    Ex: The azaleas are popping, the redbuds are in their finest attire, and the dogwoods are lacy jewels at the edge of the wood.
    Ex: It's tempting to splurge on a new hi-fi system or head out on a shopping spree, but the smart option might be to pay off an existing debt.
    Ex: She is married and has a family, but does not spend much time in the director's office or socialize with her.
    Ex: But if you' re out and about like I am, here's where I'll be over the next few nights, and feel free to say hi if you're going to be in the same area.
    Ex: Use the links below for ideas to get out and about.
    Ex: Finally six men agreed to go forth in their underclothes and nooses around their necks in hopeful expectation that their sacrifice would satisfy the king's bloodlust and he would spare the rest of the citizens.
    * acabar de salir de = be fresh out of.
    * a lo que salga = come what may.
    * a veces las cosas salen mal = shit happens.
    * a veces sales jodido = shit happens.
    * aventurarse a salir = venture forth.
    * ayudar a Alguien a salir adelante = help + Nombre + get on + Posesivo + feet.
    * cosas + salir bien = things + work out.
    * dejar que Alguien se salga con la suya = let + Nombre + do things + Posesivo + (own) way.
    * entrar y salir = come and go, drift in and out, wander in and out, go into and out of.
    * entrar y salir corriendo = run in and out.
    * estar saliendo con alguien = be in a dating relationship.
    * evitar que + salir = keep + Nombre + in.
    * hacer salir = push out, flush out.
    * imposibilitado para salir de casa = housebound [house-bound], homebound [home-bound].
    * invitar a Alguien a salir = ask + Nombre + out.
    * invitar a salir = take + Nombre + out.
    * no salir mal parado por = be none the worse for (that), be none the worse for wear.
    * obligar a salir = drive out + with a pitchfork, push out.
    * obligar a salir de = force from.
    * personas que no pueden salir de casa = homebound, the.
    * por un lado entra + Nombre + y por otro sale + Nombre = in go + Nombre + at one end, and out come + Nombre + at the other.
    * que puede salir en préstamo = loanable.
    * salir a = propagate out to, crash to, be out to.
    * salir a borbotones = gush out, spurt.
    * salir a chorros = gush out, spurt.
    * salir a comer = eat out.
    * salir a dar una vuelta = go out.
    * salir a dar una vuelta en coche = go out for + a drive.
    * salir a dar un paseo = go out for + a walk.
    * salir adelante = make + ends meet, keep + the wolves from the door, get + unstuck.
    * salir adelante a duras penas = eke out + a living, scratch (out) + a living, scrape + a living, eke out + an existence.
    * salir adelante en la vida, = get on in + life.
    * salir adelante por uno mismo = pull + Reflexivo + up(wards) by + Posesivo + (own) bootstraps.
    * salir adelante sin la ayuda de nadie = pull + Reflexivo + up(wards) by + Posesivo + (own) bootstraps.
    * salir a echarse un cigarro = go out for + a smoke.
    * salir a flote = make + ends meet.
    * salir a fumarse un cigarro = go out for + a smoke.
    * salir a hurtadillas = steal away.
    * salir airoso = pass + muster, pass with + flying colours.
    * salir airoso de = ride out.
    * salir a la calle = go out, hit + the streets.
    * salir a la calle en avalancha = spill (out) into + the streets.
    * salir a la luz = come to + light, go + live.
    * salir a la palestra = come out in + the open.
    * salir a las mil maravillas = work + a treat, come up + a treat, go down + a treat.
    * salir a la superficie = surface.
    * salir ampollas = blister.
    * salir a pasear en coche = go out for + a drive.
    * salir a pedir de boca = come up + roses, go off without + a hitch.
    * salir apresuradamente = dash off, shoot off.
    * salir a subasta = come up for + auction.
    * salir a toda prisa = make + a hasty exit.
    * salir a tomar una copa = go out for + a drink.
    * salir bien = go + well.
    * salir bien al final = turn out + right in the end.
    * salir bramando = roar out of.
    * salir con estupideces = talk + nonsense.
    * salir corriendo = leg it, run off, run away, bolt, make + a bolt for, dash off, take off, shoot off, take off + running, take to + Posesivo + heels.
    * salir corriendo a la calle = run into + the street.
    * salir de = get out of, walk out of, climb out of, break out of, break through, strike out from.
    * salir de casa = leave + home.
    * salir de copas = go out for + a drink.
    * salir de donde menos Uno se lo espera = come out of + the woodwork.
    * salir de fiesta = party.
    * salir de Guatemala para meterse en Guatapeor = out of the fire and into the frying pan.
    * salir de jarana = paint + the town red, go out on + the town.
    * salir de juerga = go out + boozing, paint + the town red, go out on + the town.
    * salir de la cárcel = release from + jail.
    * salir de la miseria = haul + Reflexivo + out of + Posesivo + bog.
    * salir del armario = come out of + the closet.
    * salir de la rutina tradicional = break out of + the traditional mould.
    * salir de la situación = extricate + Reflexivo.
    * salir del cascarón = come out of + Posesivo + shell.
    * salir del círculo = break out of + circle.
    * salir del trabajo = clock off + work.
    * salir de marcha = paint + the town red, party, go out on + the town.
    * salir de nuevo = come back out.
    * salir de parranda = go out + boozing, paint + the town red, go out on + the town.
    * salir de paseo = go out for + a walk.
    * salir de paseo en coche = go out for + a drive.
    * salir de perlas = come up + a treat, go down + a treat.
    * salir de + Posesivo + escondite = raise + Posesivo + head above the parapet.
    * salir de + Posesivo + refugio = raise + Posesivo + head above the parapet.
    * salir de quién sabe dónde = come out of + the woodwork.
    * salir desapercibido = sneak out of.
    * salir desde = set out from.
    * salir de una situación difícil = haul + Reflexivo + out of + Posesivo + bog.
    * salir de un impás = circumvent + impasse.
    * salir disparado = bolt, make + a bolt for, shoot off, dash off, take to + Posesivo + heels, run off.
    * salir disparado de = shoot out of.
    * salir echando leches = bolt, take off, make + a bolt for, dash off, shoot off.
    * salir el tiro por la culata = backfire, misfire.
    * salir en desbandada = stampede.
    * salir en estampida = stampede.
    * salir en forma radial de = radiate from.
    * salir enojado dando zapatazos = stomp out of.
    * salir en pareja con = date.
    * salir en tropel = stampede.
    * salir escaldado = get + the rough edge of + Posesivo + tongue.
    * salir fatal = go + pear-shaped.
    * salir fuera = be out and about, get out and about.
    * salir ganando = make + a profit, win, compare + favourably, be better off, win + the day, win out, be better served by, come out on + top.
    * salir grietas = develop + cracks.
    * salir horriblemente mal = go + horribly wrong.
    * salir huyendo = make off, do + a bunk.
    * salir ileso = escape + injury, leave without + a scratch.
    * salir impune = get away with it, get away with + murder, get away + scot-free.
    * salir inadvertidamente = sneak out of.
    * salir juntos = be an item.
    * salir los dientes = cut + Posesivo + teeth.
    * salir mal = go + wrong, go + awry, misfire, backfire.
    * salir malparado = get + the rough edge of + Posesivo + tongue.
    * salir perdiendo = victimise [victimize, -USA], come off + worst, lose out, compare + unfavourably, lose + neck, be a little worse off.
    * salir perjudicado = pay + the price, pay + the penalty.
    * salir pitando = take off, bolt, make + a bolt for, dash off, shoot off, take to + Posesivo + heels, run off.
    * salir por los cerros de Ubeda = go off on + a tangent, go off at + a tangent, fly off on + a tangent.
    * salir por piernas = make + a hasty exit.
    * salir por pies = take off + running, leg it, take to + Posesivo + heels, run off.
    * salir resueltamente = sally forth.
    * salir rugiendo = roar out of.
    * salir sangre = draw + blood.
    * salirse con la de Uno = have + Posesivo + way (with), get away with it.
    * salirse con las de Uno = get + Posesivo + (own) way, have + Posesivo + own way, get away with + murder, get away + scot-free.
    * salirse de = depart from, opt out of, step out of, spill out of.
    * salirse de convencionalismos = think out(side) + (of) the box.
    * salirse de la carretera = go off + the road.
    * salirse del molde = think out(side) + (of) the box.
    * salir según lo planeado = go off + as planned.
    * salir según lo previsto = go off + as planned.
    * salirse por la tangente = go off + the track, get off + the track, fly off on + a tangent, go off on + a tangent, go off at + a tangent, wander off + track, wander off + topic.
    * salir sigilosamente = steal away, slither out of.
    * salir sin ganar ni perder = break + even.
    * salir sin ser visto = sneak out of, slip out, steal away.
    * salir sin un rasguño = leave without + a scratch.
    * salir sobre ruedas = go off without + a hitch.
    * salir todo bien = land on + Posesivo + (own two) feet.
    * salir todo redondo = land on + Posesivo + (own two) feet.
    * salir una gotera = spring + a leak.
    * salir un momento a = pop down to.
    * salir un poco perjudicado = be a little worse prepared, be a little worse off.
    * salir volando = bolt, make + a bolt for, dash off, shoot off.
    * salir y caer = fall out (of).
    * salir zumbando = bolt, make + a bolt for.
    * si no aguantas el calor, sal de la cocina = if you can't stand the heat, get out of the kitchen.
    * sol + salir por = sun + rise on.
    * volver a salir = come back out.
    * volver a salir a la superficie = resurface.

    * * *
    salir [ I29 ]
    ■ salir (verbo intransitivo)
    A partir
    B salir al exterior
    C
    1 habiendo terminado algo
    2 Informática
    D
    1 como entretenimiento
    2 tener una relación
    E a una calle, carretera
    F salir: clavos, tapones etc
    A
    1 aparecer, manifestarse
    2 salir: sol
    3 surgir
    4 en naipes
    B
    1 tocar en suerte
    2 en un reparto
    C salir: manchas
    D
    1 salir: revista, novela etc
    2 en televisión, el periódico
    3 en una foto
    4 desempeñando un papel
    E expresando irritación, sorpresa
    A expresando logro
    B resultar
    C de una situación, un estado
    D parecerse a
    E salir con, combinar con
    F salir de, deshacerse de
    ■ salirse (verbo pronominal)
    A
    1 de un recipiente, un límite
    2 por un orificio, una grieta
    3 salirse: recipientes etc
    B soltarse
    C irse
    vi
    A (partir) to leave
    ¿a qué hora sale el tren/tu vuelo? what time does the train/your flight leave?, what time is your train/flight?
    salieron a toda velocidad they went off at top speed, they sped off
    ¿está Marcos? — no, ha salido de viaje can I speak to Marcos? — I'm afraid he's away at the moment
    salió corriendo or pitando or disparada ( fam); she was off like a shot ( colloq), she shot off ( colloq)
    salir DE algo to leave FROM sth
    ¿de qué andén sale el tren? what platform does the train leave from?
    salgo de casa a las siete I leave home at seven
    salir PARA algo to leave FOR sth
    los novios salieron para las Bahamas the newlyweds left for the Bahamas
    B (al exterior — acercándose al hablante) to come out; (— alejándose del hablante) to go out
    no salgas sin abrigo don't go out without a coat
    ha salido she's gone out, she's out
    ya puedes salir que te he visto you can come on out now, I can see you
    no puedo salir, me he quedado encerrado I can't get out, I'm trapped in here
    salir DE algo to come out/get out OF sth
    ¡sal de ahí! come out of there!
    ¡sal de aquí! get out of here!
    sal de debajo de la mesa come out from under the table
    no salió de su habitación en todo el día he didn't come out of o leave his room all day
    sal ya de la cama get out of bed
    de aquí que no salga ni una palabra not a word of this to anyone
    ¿tú de dónde has salido? where have you sprung from?
    ¿de dónde salió este dinero? where did this money come from?
    nunca ha salido de España/del pueblo he's never been out of Spain/the village
    está en libertad bajo fianza y no puede salir del país she's out on bail and can't leave the country
    para impedir que salgan más capitales del país to prevent more capital flowing out of o leaving the country
    salir POR algo to leave BY sth
    tuvo que salir por la ventana she had to get out through the window
    acaba de salir por la puerta de atrás he's just left by the back door, he's just gone out the back door
    salir A algo:
    salieron al balcón/al jardín they went out onto the balcony/into the garden
    salen al mar por la noche they go out to sea at night
    ¿quién quiere salir a la pizarra? who wants to come up to the blackboard?
    el equipo salió al terreno de juego the team took the field o came onto the field
    ¿quién te salió al teléfono? who answered (the phone)?
    salir A + INF to go out/come out to + INF
    ¿sales a jugar? are you coming out to play?
    ha salido a hacer la compra she's gone out (to do the) shopping
    C
    no salgo de trabajar hasta las siete I don't finish o leave work until seven
    empezó a trabajar aquí recién salido de la escuela he started working here just after he left school
    ¿a qué hora sales de clase? what time do you come out of class o get out of class o finish your class?
    ¿cuándo sale del hospital/de la cárcel? when is he coming out of (the) hospital/(the) prison?
    2 ( Informática) (del sistema) to log off, log out; (de una aplicación) to quit
    D
    estuvo castigado un mes sin salir he wasn't allowed to go out for a month
    salieron a cenar fuera they went out for dinner, they had dinner out
    hace tiempo que salen juntos they've been going out together for a while
    salir CON algn to go out WITH sb
    ¿estás saliendo con alguien? are you going out with anyone?, are you seeing anyone? ( AmE)
    E
    (a una calle, carretera): ¿por aquí se sale a la carretera? can I get on to the road this way?
    ¿esta calle sale al Paseo Colón? will this street take me to the Paseo Colón?, does this street come out onto the Paseo Colón?
    F «clavo/tapón» to come out; «anillo» to come off
    el anillo no me sale my ring won't come off, I can't get my ring off
    A (aparecer, manifestarse)
    1 «cana/sarpullido» to appear
    (+ me/te/le etc): ya me empiezan a salir canas I'm starting to go gray, I'm getting gray hairs
    ya le han salido los dientes de abajo she's already got o she's already cut her bottom teeth, her bottom teeth have already come through
    me ha salido una ampolla I've got a blister
    le salió un sarpullido he came out in a rash
    le ha salido un chichón en la frente a bump's come up on her forehead
    si como chocolate me salen granos if I eat chocolate I break out o ( BrE) come out in spots
    a ver ¿te sale sangre? let's have a look, are you bleeding o is it bleeding?
    me sale sangre de la nariz my nose is bleeding
    a la planta le están saliendo hojas nuevas the plant's putting out new leaves, the plant has some new leaves coming out
    2 «sol» (por la mañana) to rise, come up; (de detrás de una nube) to come out
    parece que quiere salir el sol it looks as though the sun's trying to come out
    3 (surgir) «tema/idea» to come up
    ¿cómo salió eso a la conversación? how did that come up in the conversation?
    yo no se lo pedí, salió de él I didn't ask him to do it, it was his idea o he offered
    (+ me/te/le etc): le salió así, espontáneamente he just came out with it quite spontaneously
    me salió en alemán it came out in German, I said it in German
    no me salió nada mejor nothing better came up o turned up
    ¿has visto el novio que le ha salido? ( fam); have you seen the boyfriend she's found herself? ( colloq)
    no voy a poder ir, me ha salido otro compromiso I'm afraid I won't be able to go, something (else) has come up o cropped up
    4 «carta» (en naipes) to come up
    el as de diamantes todavía no ha salido the ace of diamonds hasn't come up yet
    ¿ya ha salido el 15? have they called number 15 yet?, has number 15 gone yet?
    B
    1 (tocar en suerte) (+ me/te/le etc):
    me salió un tema que no había estudiado I got a subject I hadn't studied
    me salió un cinco I got a five
    2 ( Esp) (en un reparto) salir A algo; to get sth
    salimos a dos pastelitos cada uno we get two cakes each, it works out as two cakes each
    son tres hermanos, así que salen a tres mil cada uno there are three brothers, so they each end up with o get three thousand
    C «mancha» (aparecer) to appear; (quitarse) to come out
    D
    1 «revista» to come out; «novela» to come out, be published; «disco» to come out, be released
    un producto que acaba de salir al mercado a new product which has just come on to the market
    2 (en televisión, el periódico) to appear
    la noticia salió en primera página the news appeared on the front page
    salió por or en (la) televisión she was o appeared on television
    ayer salió mi primo en or por la televisión my cousin was on (the) television yesterday
    3 (en una foto) to appear
    no sale en esta foto he doesn't appear in o he isn't in this photograph
    (+ compl): ¡qué bien saliste en esta foto! you've come out really well in this photograph, this is a really good photograph of you
    4
    (desempeñando un papel): ¿tú sales en la obra de fin de curso? are you in the end-of-term play?
    sale de pastor he plays o he is a shepherd
    me salió de testigo en el juicio ( RPl); he testified on my behalf
    le salí de testigo cuando se casó ( RPl); I was a witness at her wedding
    E (expresando irritación, sorpresa) salir + GER:
    y ahora sale diciendo que no lo sabía and now he says he didn't know
    salir CON algo:
    ¡mira con qué sale éste ahora! did you hear what he just said?
    no me salgas ahora con eso don't give me that ( colloq)
    y ahora me sale con que no quiere ir and now he tells me he doesn't want to go!
    ¡a veces sale con cada cosa más graciosa! sometimes she comes out with the funniest things!
    A (expresando logro) (+ me/te/le etc):
    ¿te salió el crucigrama? did you finish the crossword?
    no me sale esta ecuación/cuenta I can't do this equation/sum
    ¿me ayudas con este dibujo que a mí no me sale? can you help me with this drawing? I can't get it right
    no te sale el acento mexicano you're not very good at the Mexican accent, you haven't got the Mexican accent right
    ahora mismo no me sale su nombre ( fam); I can't think of her name right now
    estaba tan entusiasmado que no le salían las palabras he was so excited he couldn't get his words out
    B
    (resultar): de aquí no va a salir nada bueno no good is going to come of this
    van a lo que salga, nunca hacen planes they just take things as they come, they never make plans
    ¿a ti te da 40? a mí me sale 42 how do you get 40? I make it 42
    (+ compl): las cosas salieron mejor de lo que esperábamos things turned out/worked out better than we expected
    tenemos que acabarlo salga como salga we have to finish it, no matter how it turns out
    no ha salido ninguna de las fotos none of the photographs has come out
    la foto ha salido movida the photograph has come out blurred
    mandarlo certificado sale muy caro sending it registered mail works out o is very expensive
    salió elegido tesorero he was elected treasurer
    ¿qué número salió premiado? what was the winning number?
    salió beneficiado en el reparto he did well out of the division o ( BrE) share-out
    (+ me/te/le etc): el postre no me salió bien the dessert didn't come out right
    las cosas no nos han salido bien things haven't gone right for us
    no lo hagas deprisa que te va a salir todo al revés don't try to do it too quickly, you'll do it all wrong
    si lo haces sin regla te va a salir torcido if you do it without a ruler it'll come out crooked
    así te va a salir muy caro it'll work out very expensive for you that way
    ¿cómo te salió el examen? how did you get on o do in the exam?, how did the exam go?
    el niño les salió muy inteligente their son turned out (to be) really bright
    C (de una situación, un estado) salir DE algo:
    para salir del apuro in order to get out of an awkward situation
    está muy mal, no sé si saldrá de ésta she's very ill, I don't know if she'll make it o if she'll pull through
    no sé cómo vamos a salir de ésta I don't know how we're going to get out of this one
    luchan por salir de la miseria en que viven they struggle to escape from the poverty in which they live
    me ayudó a salir de la depresión he helped me get over my depression
    a este paso no vamos a salir nunca de pobres the way we're going we're never going to stop being poor
    (+ compl): salió bien de la operación she came through the operation well
    salieron ilesos del accidente they were not hurt in the accident
    salió airosa del trance she came through it with flying colors*
    salir bien/mal en un examen ( Chi) ( Educ) to pass/fail an exam
    salir adelante: fue una época muy dura, pero lograron salir adelante it was a difficult period but they managed to get through it
    para que el negocio salga adelante if the business is to stay afloat o survive
    paso1 (↑ paso (1))
    D salir a (parecerse a) to take after
    es gordita, sale a la madre she's chubby, she takes after her mother
    ¡tiene a quien salir! you can see who she takes after!
    en lo tozudo sale a su padre he gets his stubbornness from his father
    E salir con ( Col) (combinar con) to go with
    F salir de ( Col) (deshacerse de) to get rid of
    no han podido salir de él they haven't been able to get rid of him
    A
    1
    (de un recipiente, un límite): cierra el grifo, que se va a salir el agua turn off the faucet ( AmE) o ( BrE) tap, the water's going to overflow
    vigila que no se salga la leche don't let the milk boil over
    salirse DE algo:
    el camión se salió de la carretera the truck came/went off the road, the truck left the road
    el río se salió de su cauce the river overflowed its banks
    no te salgas de las líneas keep inside the lines
    la pelota se salió del campo de juego the ball went out of play o into touch
    procura no salirte del presupuesto try to keep within the budget
    te estás saliendo del tema you're getting off the point
    2 (por un orificio, una grieta) «agua/tinta» to leak, leak out, come out; «gas» to escape, come out
    está rajado y se sale el aceite it's cracked and the oil leaks out
    salirse DE algo:
    se está saliendo el aire del neumático the air's coming o leaking out of the tire*
    se me ha salido el hilo de la aguja the needle's come unthreaded
    3 (Chi, Méx) «recipiente/pluma» to leak
    B (soltarse) to come off
    se ha salido el pomo de la puerta the knob has come off the door
    (+ me/te/le etc): estos zapatos se me salen these shoes are too big for me
    se le ha salido una rueda it's lost a wheel, one of the wheels has come off
    se le salían los ojos de las órbitas his eyes were popping out of his head o were out on stalks
    C (irse) to leave salirse DE algo ‹de una asociación› to leave sth
    se salió del cine a la mitad de la película she walked out halfway through the movie
    salirse con la suya to get one's (own) way
    * * *

     

    salir ( conjugate salir) verbo intransitivo
    1 ( partir) to leave;
    ◊ ¿a qué hora sale el tren? what time does the train leave?;

    el jefe había salido de viaje the boss was away;
    salió corriendo (fam) she was off like a shot (colloq);
    salir de algo to leave from sth;
    ¿de qué andén sale el tren? what platform does the train leave from?;
    salgo de casa a las siete I leave home at seven;
    salir para algo to leave for sth
    2 ( al exterior — acercándose al hablante) to come out;
    (— alejándose del hablante) to go out;

    no puedo salir, me he quedado encerrado I can't get out, I'm trapped in here;
    salir de algo to come out/get out of sth;
    ¡sal de ahí/de aquí! come out of there/get out of here!;
    ¿de dónde salió este dinero? where did this money come from?;
    nunca ha salido de España he's never been out of Spain;
    salir por la ventana/por la puerta to get out through the window/leave by the door;
    salieron al balcón/al jardín they went out onto the balcony/into the garden;
    ¿por aquí se sale a la carretera? can I get on to the road this way?;
    salió a hacer las compras she's gone out (to do the) shopping
    3 ( habiendo terminado algo) to leave;
    ◊ ¿a qué hora sales de clase? what time do you get out of class o finish your class?;

    ¿cuándo sale del hospital? when is he coming out of (the) hospital?
    4



    salir con algn to go out with sb
    5 [clavo/tapón/mancha] to come out;
    [ anillo] to come off
    1 (aparecer, manifestarse)
    a) [cana/sarpullido] to appear;

    (+ me/te/le etc)

    le están saliendo los dientes she's teething;
    me salió una ampolla I've got a blister;
    le salió un sarpullido he came out in a rash;
    me salieron granos I broke out o (BrE) came out in spots;
    me sale sangre de la nariz my nose is bleeding;
    a la planta le están saliendo hojas nuevas the plant's putting out new leaves

    ( de detrás de una nube) to come out
    c) ( surgir) [tema/idea] to come up


    2
    a) [revista/novela] to come out;

    [ disco] to come out, be released;

    b) (en televisión, en el periódico) to appear


    (+ compl)

    1 ( expresando logro) (+ me/te/le etc):

    ahora mismo no me sale su nombre (fam) I can't think of her name right now;
    no le salían las palabras he couldn't get his words out
    2

    ◊ sale más barato/caro it works out less/more expensive

    b) ( resultar):

    ◊ todo salió bien everything turned out o worked out well;

    salió tal como lo planeamos it turned out just as we planned;
    no salió ninguna de las fotos none of the photographs came out;
    ¿qué número salió premiado? what was the winning number?;
    salir bien/mal en un examen (Chi fam) to pass/fail an exam;

    (+ me/te/le etc)

    3 (de situación, estado) salir de algo ‹ de apuro› to get out of sth;
    ‹ de depresión› to get over sth;

    salir adelante [ negocio] to stay afloat, survive;

    [ propuesta] to prosper;
    ◊ lograron salir adelante they managed to get through it

    4 ( con preposición)
    a)


    b)


    salirse verbo pronominal
    1
    a) (de borde, límite) [ agua] to overflow;

    [ leche] to boil over;
    salirse de algo ‹ de carretera› to come/go off sth;
    ‹ de tema› to get off sth;

    procura no salirte del presupuesto try to keep within the budget
    b) (por orificio, grieta) [agua/tinta] to leak (out), come out;

    [ gas] to escape, come out
    2 ( soltarse) [pedazo/pieza] to come off;
    (+ me/te/le etc)

    3 ( irse) to leave;
    salirse de algo ‹ de asociación› to leave sth;
    ◊ salirse con la suya to get one's (own) way

    salir verbo intransitivo
    1 (de un lugar) to go out: nunca ha salido de su país, he's never been out of his country
    el ladrón salió por la ventana, the burglar got out through the window
    (si el hablante está fuera) to come out: ¡sal de la habitación, por favor! please, come out of the room!
    2 Inform to exit
    (de un sistema) to log off
    3 (partir) to leave: salí de casa a mediodía, I left home at noon
    nuestro avión sale a las seis, our plane departs at six
    4 (para divertirse) to go out: siempre sale los viernes, she always goes out on Friday
    5 (tener una relación) to go out: está saliendo con Ana, he's going out with Ana
    6 Dep to start
    (en juegos) to lead
    7 (manifestarse, emerger) le ha salido un grano en la cara, he has got a spot on his face
    me salió sangre de la nariz, my nose was bleeding
    (un astro) to rise: la Luna sale al atardecer, the moon comes out in the evening
    (retoñar, germinar) to sprout
    8 (surgir) la idea salió de ti, it was your idea
    9 (aparecer) mi hermana salía en (la) televisión, my sister appeared on television
    (un libro, un disco, etc) to come out
    10 salir a (parecerse) ha salido a su hermano, he takes after his brother
    (costar) el almuerzo sale a 800 pesetas cada uno, lunch works out at 800 pesetas a head
    11 (resultar) su hija le ha salido muy estudiosa, her daughter has turned out to be very studious
    salió premiado el número 5.566, the winning number was 5,566
    (una operación matemática) a él le da 20, pero a mí me sale 25, he gets 20, but I make it 25
    12 (costar) nos sale barato, it works out cheap
    13 (superar una situación, una gran dificultad) to come through, get over: estuvo muy enfermo, pero salió de esa, he was very ill, but he pulled through
    14 (ser elegido por votación) salió alcalde, he was elected mayor
    ♦ Locuciones: salir con, (manifestación inesperada) no me salgas ahora con estupideces, stop talking nonsense
    ' salir' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    acampada
    - ahora
    - airosa
    - airoso
    - al
    - asomarse
    - atusar
    - boca
    - cabronada
    - casa
    - con
    - concebir
    - contraluz
    - coscorrón
    - cuenta
    - dar
    - dejar
    - desalojar
    - desfilar
    - desorbitar
    - dimanar
    - echar
    - entrar
    - estar
    - gatas
    - grabar
    - gracia
    - gustar
    - hondura
    - irse
    - niqui
    - palestra
    - para
    - parada
    - parado
    - paso
    - pico
    - pierna
    - pitar
    - portazo
    - puntilla
    - quite
    - rana
    - relucir
    - revés
    - rodada
    - rodado
    - salida
    - sangrar
    - señora
    English:
    after
    - appear
    - as
    - ask out
    - average out at
    - back out
    - be
    - blow off
    - boomerang
    - bootstrap
    - break
    - break out
    - break through
    - call away
    - can
    - check out
    - chicken out
    - clean up
    - climb
    - come away
    - come off
    - come on
    - come out
    - come up
    - crowd
    - dash off
    - dash out
    - date
    - depart
    - discipline
    - do
    - doll
    - doubtfully
    - downpour
    - draw out
    - drive-through
    - emerge
    - even
    - exit
    - fancy
    - flounce
    - forward
    - genie
    - get about
    - get along
    - get away
    - get away with
    - get off
    - get out
    - go
    * * *
    ♦ vi
    1. [ir fuera] to go out;
    [venir fuera] to come out;
    ¡sal aquí fuera! come out here!;
    no pueden salir, están atrapados they can't get out, they're trapped;
    ¿salimos al jardín? shall we go out into the garden?;
    salieron al balcón they went out onto the balcony;
    salió a la puerta she came/went to the door;
    salir a escena [actor] to come/go on stage;
    salir a pasear/tomar el aire to go out for a walk/for a breath of fresh air;
    salir a hacer la compra/de compras to go shopping;
    salir de to go/come out of;
    me lo encontré al salir del cine I met him as I was coming out of the cinema;
    ¡sal de aquí! get out of here!;
    ¡sal de ahí! come out of there!;
    salimos por la escalera de incendios/la puerta trasera we left via the fire escape/through the back door;
    Fam
    porque me sale/no me sale de las narices because I damn well feel like it/damn well can't be bothered;
    muy Fam
    porque me sale/no me sale de los huevos because I bloody well feel like it/because I can't be arsed
    2. [marcharse] to leave ( para for);
    cuando salimos de Quito/del país when we left Quito/the country;
    salí de casa/del trabajo a las siete I left home/work at seven;
    ¿a qué hora o [m5] cuándo sale vuestro vuelo? when does your flight leave?;
    ¿a qué hora o [m5] cuándo sales de trabajar? what time do you leave o finish work?;
    salir corriendo to run off;
    Fam
    salir pitando to leg it;
    salir de vacaciones to go (away) on Br holiday o US vacation;
    salir de viaje to go away (on a trip)
    3. [ser novios] to go out ( con with);
    están saliendo they are going out (together);
    ¿desde cuándo llevan saliendo? how long have they been going out (together)?
    4. [ir a divertirse] to go out;
    suelo salir el fin de semana I usually go out at the weekend;
    salen mucho a cenar they eat out a lot
    5. [librarse]
    salir de la droga to get off drugs;
    Marisa ha salido de la depresión Marisa has got over o come through her depression;
    salir de la miseria to escape from poverty;
    salir de un apuro to get out of a tight spot;
    le he ayudado a salir de muchos líos I've helped him out of a lot of tricky situations;
    no sé si podremos salir de ésta I don't know how we're going to get out of this one;
    con este dinero no vamos a salir de pobres this money isn't exactly enough for us never to have to work again
    6. [desembocar] [calle, sendero, carretera]
    ¿a dónde sale esta calle? where does this street come out?
    7. [separarse]
    este anillo sale fácilmente this ring comes off easily;
    este corcho no sale this cork won't come out
    8. [resultar] to turn out;
    ha salido muy estudioso he's turned out to be very studious;
    ¿cómo salió la fiesta? how did the party go?;
    ¿qué salió en la votación? what was the result of the vote?;
    a mí me sale un total de 35.000 pesos I've got a total of 35,000 pesos, I make it 35,000 pesos in total;
    salió (como) senador por California he was elected (as) senator for California;
    salió elegida actriz del año she was voted actress of the year;
    salió herido/ileso del accidente he was/wasn't injured in the accident;
    salir premiado to be awarded a prize;
    salir bien/mal [examen, entrevista] to go well/badly;
    [plato, dibujo] to turn out well/badly;
    ¿qué tal te ha salido? how did it go?;
    me ha salido bien/mal [examen, entrevista] it went well/badly;
    [plato, dibujo] it turned out well/badly; [cuenta] I got it right/wrong;
    normalmente me sale a la primera I normally get it right first time;
    a mí la paella no me sale tan bien como a ti my paella never turns out as well as yours does;
    ¿te salen las cuentas? do all the figures tally?;
    salir ganando/perdiendo to come off well/badly
    9. [en sorteo, juego] [número, nombre] to come up;
    no me ha salido un as en toda la partida I haven't got o had a single ace in the whole game
    10. [proceder]
    salir de to come from;
    el vino sale de la uva wine comes from grapes;
    salió de él (lo de) regalarte unas flores it was his idea to get you the flowers
    11. [surgir, brotar] [luna, estrellas] to come out;
    [sol] to rise; [flores, hojas] to come out; [dientes] to come through;
    le han salido varias flores al rosal the rose bush has got several flowers now;
    le están saliendo canas he's getting grey hairs, he's going grey;
    le están saliendo los dientes her teeth are starting to come through, she's teething;
    me salen los colores con tanto cumplido all these compliments are making me blush;
    le ha salido un sarpullido en la espalda her back has come out in a rash;
    te está saliendo sangre you're bleeding;
    me ha salido un grano en la nariz I've got a spot on my nose
    12. [aparecer] [publicación, producto, modelo] to come out;
    [disco] to come out, to be released; [moda, ley] to come in; [trauma, prejuicios] to come out; [tema, asunto] to come up;
    una revista que sale los jueves a magazine that comes out on Thursdays;
    su nuevo disco saldrá al mercado en otoño her new record comes out o will be released in the autumn;
    salieron (a relucir) todos sus miedos all his fears came out;
    ¡qué bien sales en esta foto! you look great in this photo!;
    ha salido en los periódicos/en la tele it's been in the papers/on TV;
    salir de/en [en película, serie, obra de teatro] to appear as/in;
    salía de extra en “Ben-Hur” he appeared as o was an extra in “Ben-Hur”;
    salir en defensa de alguien to come to sb's defence
    13. [presentarse, ofrecerse] [ocasión, oportunidad] to turn up, to come along;
    [puesto, empleo] to come up; [problema] to arise; [contratiempo] to occur;
    le ha salido una plaza de profesor en Tegucigalpa a job has come up for him as a teacher in Tegucigalpa;
    a lo que salga, salga lo que salga whatever happens
    14. [costar]
    salimos a 20 dólares por cabeza it came to o worked out at $20 each;
    ¿por cuánto me saldría una moto de segunda mano? how much would a second-hand motorbike cost me o come to?;
    en botella te saldrá más barata la cerveza the beer works out cheaper if you buy it bottled;
    salir caro [económicamente] to be expensive;
    [por las consecuencias] to be costly
    15. [decir u obrar inesperadamente]
    nunca se sabe por dónde va a salir you never know what she's going to come out with/do next;
    el jefe sale con cada tontería… the boss comes out with some really stupid remarks;
    salió con que era un incomprendido y nadie le hacía caso he claimed he was misunderstood and that no one ever took any notice of him;
    ¿y ahora nos sales con ésas? now you tell us!
    16. [parecerse]
    salir a alguien to take after sb;
    eres un vago, en eso has salido a tu padre you're a layabout, just like your father
    17. [en juegos] to lead;
    te toca salir a ti it's your lead;
    salió con un as she led with an ace;
    salen blancas [en damas, ajedrez] white goes first
    18. [desaparecer] to come out;
    la mancha de vino no sale the wine stain won't come out
    19. Informát [instrucción] to quit, to exit;
    salir de un programa to quit o exit a program
    20.
    salir adelante [persona, empresa] to get by;
    [proyecto, propuesta, ley] to be successful;
    la familia lo está pasando muy mal para salir adelante the family is struggling to get by o to make ends meet
    * * *
    v/i
    1 leave, go out;
    salir de (ir fuera de) leave, go out of; ( venir fuera de) leave, come out of;
    salir a Avda. América come out onto Avda. América; de calle lead to Avda. América;
    salir de apuros get out of difficulties;
    salir corriendo run off;
    salir con alguien date s.o., go out with s.o.
    2 ( aparecer) appear, come out
    3
    :
    salir a bolsa float, be floated
    4 DEP en carrera start;
    salir fuera de pelota go out
    5 INFOR de programa quit, exit
    6 ( parecerse a)
    :
    salir a alguien de bebé take after s.o.
    :
    salir bien/mal turn out well/badly;
    salió caro tb fig it worked out expensive;
    salir ileso escape unharmed;
    salir perdiendo end up losing;
    salir a 1000 colones cost 1000 colons;
    a lo que salga any old how
    8
    :
    ¡ya salió aquello! fam why did you have to bring that up?;
    salir con algo fam come out with sth;
    ¿y ahora me sales con que no tienes dinero? and you’re telling me now that you don’t have any money?
    :
    el dibujo no me sale fam I can’t get this drawing right;
    no me salió el trabajo I didn’t get the job
    10
    :
    salir por alguien stand up for s.o.
    * * *
    salir {73} vi
    1) : to go out, to come out, to get out
    salimos todas las noches: we go out every night
    su libro acaba de salir: her book just came out
    2) partir: to leave, to depart
    3) aparecer: to appear
    salió en todos los diarios: it came out in all the papers
    4) : to project, to stick out
    5) : to cost, to come to
    6) resultar: to turn out, to prove
    7) : to come up, to occur
    salga lo que salga: whatever happens
    salió una oportunidad: an opportunity came up
    8)
    salir a : to take after, to look like, to resemble
    9)
    salir con : to go out with, to date
    * * *
    salir vb
    1. (en general) to go out
    2. (partir) to leave [pt. & pp. left]
    3. (aparecer) to be
    ¿por qué no sales tú en la foto? why aren't you in the photo?
    4. (publicarse) to come out [pt. came; pp. come]
    ¿cuándo sale esa revista? when does that magazine come out?
    5. (sol amanecer) to rise [pt. rose; pp. risen]
    ¿a qué hora sale el sol? what time does the sun rise?
    6. (sol verse) to come out
    7. (surgir) to get
    si me sale este trabajo... if I get this job...
    8. (resultar) to turn out / to work out
    salir perdiendo to lose out [pt. & pp. lost]

    Spanish-English dictionary > salir

  • 51 Bibliografia

       ■ ADAMS, Les, y RAYNEY, Buck. Shoot’em-Ups. The Complete Reference Guide to Westerns of the Sound Era. New Rochelle, New York: Arlington House, 1978.
       ■ ANDERSON, Lindsay. About John Ford. Londres: Plexus, 1981.
       ■ ARESTE, Jose Maria. Pero….donde esta Willy? En busca de William Wyler. Madrid: Rialp, 1998.
       ■ ASTRE, Georges-Albert, y HOARAU, Albert Patrick. Univers du western. Paris: Seghers, 1973.
       ■ BELLIDO LOPEZ, Adolfo y NUNEZ SABIN, Pedro. Budd Boetticher. Un caminante solitario. Valencia: Filmoteca de la Generalitat, 1995.
       ■ BINH, N.T. Joseph L. Mankiewicz. Madrid: Catedra, 1994.
       ■ BOGDANOVICH, Peter (entrevistador). John Ford. Madrid: Fundamentos, 1983.
       ■ BOGDANOVICH, Peter. Fritz Lang en America. Madrid: Fundamentos, 1984.
       ■ BOUINEAU, Jean-Marc, CHARLOT, Alain, y FRIMBOIS, Jean-Pierre. Les 100 chefs-d’oeuvre du western. Alleur (Belgique): Marabout, 1989.
       ■ BOURGET, Jean-Loup. John Ford. Paris: Rivages, 1990.
       ■ BOURGOIN, Stephane. Roger Corman.Paris: Edilig, 1983.
       ■ BOURGOIN, Stephane. Richard Fleischer. Paris: Edilig, 1986.
       ■ BOURGOIN, Stephane y MERIGEAU, Pascal. Serie B. Paris: Edilig, 1983.
       ■ BRANSON, Clark. Howard Hawks. A Jungian Study. Santa Barbara: Capa Press, 1987.
       ■ BRION, Patrick. Richard Brooks. Paris: Chene, 1986.
       ■ BUSCOMBE, Edward (ed.). The BFI Companion to the Western. London: Andre Deutsch/BFI Publishing, 1988.
       ■ BUSCOMBE, Edward. Stagecoach. Londres, BFI, 1992.
       ■ CASAS, Quim. El western. El genero americano. Barcelona: Paidos, 1994.
       ■ CASAS, Quim. John Ford. El arte y la leyenda. Barcelona: Dirigido por, 1989.
       ■ CASAS, Quim. Howard Hawks. La comedia de la vida. Barcelona: Dirigido por, 1998.
       ■ CASAS, Quim. Fritz Lang. Madrid: Catedra, 1991.
       ■ CHARLOT, Alain, FRIMBOIS, Jean-Pierre, y BOUINEAU, Jean-Marc. Les 100 chefs-d’oeuvre du western. Alleur (Belgique): Marabout, 1989.
       ■ CIMENT, Gilles (director). John Huston. Paris: Positif-Rivages, 1988.
       ■ CIMENT, Michel (entrevistador). Elia Kazan por Elia Kazan. Madrid: Fundamentos, 1987.
       COCCHI, John. The Westerns. A Picture Quiz Book. New York: Dover, 1976.
       COMA, Javier. Diccionario del western clasico. Barcelona: Plaza y Janes, 1992.
       COMAS, Angel. Lo esencial de Anthony Mann. Madrid: T & B, 2004.
       CORMAN, Roger (con Jim Jerome). How I Made a Hundred Movies in Hollywood and Never Lost a Dime. New York: Random House, 1990.
       CUEVAS, Efren. Elia Kazan. Madrid: Catedra, 2000.
       DIXON, Wheeler W. The “B” Directors. A Biographical Directory. Metuchen, New Jersey: The Scarecrow Press, 1985.
       DUMONT, Herve. Robert Siodmak. El maestro del cine negro. Madrid-San sebastian: Filmoteca Espanola, 1987.
       DUMONT, Herve. William Dieterle. Antifascismo y compromiso romantico. San Sebastian-Madrid: Filmoteca Espanola, 1994.
       DURGNAT, Raymond, y SIMMON, Scott. King Vidor, American. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988.
       EDWARDS, Anne. The De Milles. An American Family. New York: Harry N. Abrams, 1988.
       ERICE, Victor y OLIVER, Jos. Nicholas Ray y su tiempo. Madrid: Filmoteca Espanola, 1986.
       FAGEN, Herb. The Encyclopedia of Westerns. Facts on File, 2003.
       FERNANDEZ-SANTOS, Angel. Mas alla del Oeste. Madrid: Ed. El Pais, 1988.
       FETROW, Alan G. Sound Films, 1927-1939. A United States Filmography. Jefferson, North Carolina: McFarland, 1992.
       FINLEY, Joel W. The Movie Directors Story. Londres: Octopus, 1985.
       FRENCH, Philip. Westerns. Aspects of a Movie Genre. New York: The Viking Press, 1973.
       FRIMBOIS, Jean-Pierre, BOUINEAU, Jean-Marc, y CHARLOT, Alain. Les 100 chefs d’oeuvre du western. Alleur (Belgique): Marabout, 1989.
       GALLAGHER, Tag. John Ford. The Man and His Films. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1986.
       GARFIELD, Brian. Western Films. A Complete Guide. New York: Da Capo, 1982.
       GEIST, Kenneth L. Pictures Will Talk. The Life & Films of Joseph L. Mankiewicz. New York: Scribner, 1978.
       GIULIANI, Pierre. Raoul Walsh. Paris: Edilig, 1986.
       GRIVEL, Daniele, y LACOURBE, Roland. Robert Wise. Paris: Edilig, 1985.
       HARDY, Phil. The Western. London: Aurum Press, Revised Edition, 1991.
       HAUSTRATE, Gaston. Arthur Penn. La vida se mueve. Valladolid: 39 Semana Internacional de Cine, 1994.
       HENRIET, G, y MAUDUY, J. Geographies du western. Une nation en marche. Paris: Nathan, 1989.
       HEREDERO, Carlos F. Sam Peckinpah. Madrid: Ediciones JC, 1982.
       HILLIER, Jim y WOLLEN, Peter (editores). Howard Hawks. American Artist. Londres: BFI, 1996.
       HITT, Jim. The American West from Fiction (1823-1976) into Film (1909-1986). Jefferson, North Carolina: McFarland, 1990.
       HOARAU, Albert-Patrick, y ASTRE, Georges-Albert. Univers du western. Paris: Seghers, 1973.
       HOLLAND, Ted. B Western Actors Encyclopedia. Facts, Photos and Filmographies for More than 250 Familiar Faces. Jefferson, North Carolina: McFarland, 1989.
       HURTADO, Jose A y LOSILLA, Carlos. Richard Fleischer, entre el cielo y el infierno..Valencia: Filmoteca de la Generalitat Valenciana, 1997.
       HUSTON, John. A libro abierto. Madrid: Espasa Calpe, 1986.
       JENSEN, Paul M. Fritz Lang. Madrid: JC, 1990.
       KAZAN, Elia. Mi vida. Madrid: Temas de Hoy, 1990.
       LACOURBE, Roland, y GRIVEL, Daniele. Robert Wise. Paris: Edilig, 1985.
       LARDIN, Ruben. Sam Peckinpah. Hermano perro. Valencia: Midons, 1988.
       LEEMAN, Sergio. Robert Wise on His Films. Los Angeles: Silman-James, 1995.
       LEUTRAT, Jean-Louis. Le Western. Archeologie d’un genre. Lyon: Presses Universitaires de Lyon, 1987.
       LEUTRAT, Jean-Louis. L’Alliance brisee. Le Western des annees 1920. Lyon: Presses Universitaires de Lyon, 1985.
       LEUTRAT, Jean-Louis. John Ford. La Prisonniere du desert. Paris: Adam Biro, 1990.
       LEUTRAT, J.-L., y LIANDRAT-GUIGUES, S. Les Cartes de l’ouest. Un genre cinematographique: le western. Paris: Armand Colin, 1990.
       LIANDRAT-GUIGUES, S, y LEUTRAT, J.-L. Les Cartes de l’ouest. Un genre cinematographique. Le western. Paris: Armand Colin, 1990.
       LOSILLA, Carlos y HURTADO, Jose A. Richard Fleischer, entre el cielo y el infierno. Valencia: Filmoteca de la Generalitat Valenciana, 1997.
       MAUDUY, J, y HENRIET, G. Geographies du western. Une nation en marche. Paris: Nathan, 1989.
       McBRIDE, Joseph y WILMINGTON, Michael. John Ford. Madrid: JC, 1984.
       McBRIDE, Joseph (entrevistador). Hawks segun Hawks. Madrid: Akal, 1988.
       McCARTY, John. The Films of John Huston. Secaucus: Citadel, 1987.
       McGEE, Mark Thomas. Roger Corman. The Best of the Cheap Acts. Jefferson: McFarland, 1988.
       McGOWAN, John J. J.P. McGowan. Biography of a Hollywood Pioneer. Jefferson, North Carolina: McFarland, 2005.
       MEMBA, Javier. La serie B. Madrid: T & B, 2006.
       MENDEZ-LEITE VON HAFE, Fernando. Fritz Lang. Barcelona: Daimon, 1980.
       MERIDA, Pablo. Michael Curtiz. Madrid: Catedra, 1996.
       MERIGEAU, Pascal y BOURGOIN, Stephane. Serie B. Paris: Edilig, 1983.
       MERIKAETXEBARRIA, Anton. Raoul Walsh…a lo largo del sendero. San Sebastian: Ttarttalo, 1996.
       NASH, Jay Robert, y ROSS, Stanley Ralph. The Motion Picture Guide. 1927-1983. Cinebooks, 1985
       NUNEZ SABIN, Pedro y BELLIDO LOPEZ, Adolfo. Budd Boetticher. Un caminante solitario. Valencia: Filmoteca de la Generalitat, 1995.
       OKUDA, Ted. Grand National, Producers Releasing Company, and Screen Guild/Lippert. Complete Filmographies with Studio Histories. Jefferson, North Carolina: McFarland, 1989.
       OLIVER, Jos y ERICE, Victor. Nicholas Ray y su tiempo. Madrid: Filmoteca Espanola, 1986.
       PARISH, James Robert, y PITTS, Michael R. The Great Western Pictures. Metuchen, New Jersey: The Scarecrow Press, 1976.
       PARISH, James Robert, y PITTS, Michael R. The Great Western Pictures II. Metuchen, New Jersey: The Scarecrow Press, 1988.
       PITTS, Michael R., y PARISH, James Robert. The Great Western Pictures. Metuchen, New Jersey: The Scarecrow Press, 1976.
       PITTS, Michael R., y PARISH, James Robert. The Great Western Pictures II. Metuchen, New Jersey: The Scarecrow Press, 1988.
       PLACE, J.A. The Western Films of John Ford. Secaucus: Citadel, 1974.
       PLACE, J.A. The Non-Western Films of John Ford. Secaucus: Citadel, 1979.
       RAINEY, Buck, y ADAMS, Les. Shoot’em-Ups. The Complete Reference Guide to Westerns of the Sound Era. New Rochelle, New York: Arlington House, 1978.
       REEMES, Dana M. Directed by Jack Arnold. Jefferson: McFarland, 1988.
       RIEUPEYROUT, Jean-Louis. La grande aventure du western. Du Far West a Hollywood (1894-1963). Paris: Ed, du Cerf, 1964.
       ROMERO GUILLEN, Maria Dolores. Las mujeres en el cine americano de Fritz Lang. Zaragoza: Mira, 2000.
       ROOS, Stanley Ralph, y NASH, Jay Robert. The Motion Picture Guide. 1927-1983. Cinebooks, 1985.
       SANCHEZ BIOSCA, Vicente (coordinador). Mas alla de la duda. El cine de Fritz Lang. Valencia: Universitat de Valencia,1992.
       SIEGEL, Don. A Siegel Film. An Autobiopraphy. London: Faber and Faber, 1993.
       SIMMON, Scott, y DURGNAT, Raymond. King Vidor, American. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988.
       SIMMONS, Garner. Peckinpah. A Portrait in Montage. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1982.
       STOWELL, Peter. John Ford. Boston: Twayne, 1986.
       TCHERNIA, Pierre. 80 grands succes du Western. Casterman, 1989.
       THOMPSON, Frank T. William A. Wellman. San Sebastian: Filmoteca Espanola, 1993.
       URKIJO, Francisco javier. Sam Peckinpah. Madrid: Catedra, 1995.
       VARIOS. John Ford. Madrid: Fimoteca espanola, 1991.
       VARIOS. King Vidor. San Sebastian: Nosferatu, n. 31, 2004.
       VARIOS. Sam Fuller. San Sebastian: Nosferatu, n. 12, 1993.
       VARIOS. Jacques Tourneur. Paris: Camera/Stylo, 1986.
       VEILLON, Olivier-Rene. Le cinema americain. Les annees trente. Paris: Du Seuil, 1986.
       VEILLON, Olivier-Rene. Le cinema americain. Les annees cinquante. Paris: Du Seuil, 1984.
       VEILLON, Olivier-Rene. Le cinema americain. Les annees quatre-vingt. Paris: Du Seuil, 1988.
       WALSH, Raoul. Un demi-siecle a Hollywood. Memoires d’un cineaste. Paris: Calmann-Levy, 1976)
       WILMINGTON, Michael y McBRIDE, Joseph. John Ford. Madrid: JC, 1984.
       WOLLEN, Peter y HILLIER, Jim (editores). Howard Hawks. American Artist. Londres: BFI, 1996.
       WOOD, Robin. Howard Hawks. Madrid: JC, 1982.
       ZINNEMANN, Fred. A Life in the Movies. New York: Scribner, 1992.
       ZUMALDE, Imanol. Paisajes del odio. El dispositivo espacial de Centauros del desierto. Valencia: Universitat de Valencia, 1995.

    English-Spanish dictionary of western films > Bibliografia

  • 52 CULTURE, LITERATURE, AND LANGUAGE

       ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. The Oxford Book of Portuguese Verse: XIIth Century-XXth Century. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1925, 1952 (2nd edition, B. Vi-digal, ed.).
       ■. Portuguese Literature. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1922, 1970 (2nd edition, B. Vidigal, ed.).
       ■ Bleiberg, German, Maureen Ihrie, and Janet Pérez, eds. Dictionary of the Literature of the Iberian Peninsula, 2 vols. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1993.
       ■ Castro, Francisco Lyon de, ed. História da literatura portuguesa, 7 vols. Lisbon: Alfa, 2001-02.
       ■ Cidade, Hernani. Lições de Cultura e Literatura Portuguesa, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1960-62.
       ■ Cook, Manuela. Portuguese: A Complete Course for Beginners. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1996. Figueiredo, Fidelino. História literária de Portugal. Coimbra, 1944. Gentile, Georges Le. La Littérature Portugaise. Rev. ed. Paris, 1951. Kunoff, Hugo. Portuguese Literature from Its Origins to 1990: A Bibliography Based on the Collections at Indiana University. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1994.
       ■ Longland, Jean. Contemporary Portuguese Poetry. A Bilingual Selection. Irvington-on-Hudson: Harvey House, 1966. Prado Coelho, Jacinto do. Dicionário das Literaturas Portuguesas, Galega e Brasileira, 3rd ed. Oporto, 1978. Rossi, Giuseppe C. Storia della letteratura portoghesa. Florence, 1953.
       ■ Santos, João Camilo dos. "Portuguese Contemporary Literature." In Antônio Costa Pinto, ed., Modern Portugal, 218-42. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.
       ■ Saraiva, Antônio José. História da cultura em Portugal, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1950-60.
       ■. História da Literatura Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990 ed.
       ■, and Oscar Lopes. História da Literatura Portuguesa. Oporto and Coimbra, 1992 ed.
       ■ Seguier, Jaime de, ed. Dicionário Prático Ilustrado. Oporto: Lello, 1961 and later eds.
       ■ Simões, João Gaspar. História da poesia portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1955-56 and later eds.
       ■. História da poesia portuguesa do século XX. Lisbon, 1959 and later eds.
       ■ Stern, Irwin, ed.-in-chief. Dictionary of Brazilian Literature. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1988.
       ■ TRAVEL AND TOURIST GUIDES ON PORTUGAL
       ■ Adragão, José Victor. The Algarve: The Land, the Sea and Its People. Lisbon, 1988.
       ■ Ballard, Sam, and Jane Ballard. Pousadas of Portugal: Unique Lodgings in State-owned Castles, Palaces, Mansions and Hotels. Boston: Harvard Common, 1986.
       ■ Bridge, Ann, and Susan Lowndes Marques. The Selective Traveller in Portugal. London: Chatto & Windus, 1968.
       ■ Ellingham, Mark, et al. Portugal: The Rough Guide. London: Rough Guides, 2008 ed.
       ■ Hogg, Anthony. Travellers' Portugal. London: Solo Mio, 1983.
       ■ Kite, Cynthia, and Ralph Kite. Portuguese Country Inns & Pousadas. New York: Warner Books; Karen Brown's Country Inn Series, 1988.
       ■ Lowndes, Susan, ed. Fodor's Portugal 1991. New York: Fodor's, 1990.
       ■ Proença Raúl, and Sant'anna Dionísio, eds. Guía De Portugal. I. Generalidades. Lisboa E, Arredores. Lisbon: Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian, 1924; 1983.
       ■ Robertson, Ian. Portugal: Blue Guide. London: Benn; New York: Norton, 2000 and later eds.
       ■ Stoop, Anne de. Living in Portugal. Paris and New York: Flammarion, 1995. Wright, David, and Patrick Swift. Minho and North Portugal: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1968.
       ■. Lisbon: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1971.
       ■. Algarve: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1973.
       ■ HISTORY OF PORTUGAL Ancient and Medieval (2000 BCE-1415 CE)
       ■ Alarção, Jorge de. Roman Portugal. Volume I: Introduction. Warminster, U.K., 1988.
       ■ Almeida, Fortunato de. História de Portugal. Vol. I. Coimbra, 1922. Arnaut, Salvador Dias. A Crise Nacional dos fins do século XVI. Vol. 1. Coimbra, 1960.
       ■ Baião, Antônio, Hernani Cidade, and Manuel Múrias, eds. História de Expansão Portuguesa no Mundo, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1937-40. Caetano, Marcello. Lições de História do Direito Português. Coimbra, 1962. Cortesão, Jaime. Os Factores Democráticos no Formação de Portugal. Lisbon, 1960.
       ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone. Portugal's Secret Jews: The End of an Era. Rumford, R.I.: Peregrinação Publications, 1999. Diffie, Bailey W. Prelude to Empire: Portugal Overseas before Henry the Navigator. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1960. Dutra, Francis A. "Portugal: To 1279." Dictionary of the Middle Ages. Vol. X: 35-48. New York: Scribners, 1987.
       ■. "Portugal: 1279-1481." Dictionary of the Middle Ages. Vol. X: 48-56. New York: Scribners, 1987. Gama Barros, Henrique de. História de Administração Pública em Portugal nos séculos XII à XV, 11 vols. Lisbon, 1945-51. Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. A Economia dos Descobrimentos Henriquinos. Lisbon, 1962.
       ■ Gonzaga de Azevedo, Luís. História de Portugal, 6 vols. Lisbon, 1939-44.
       ■ Herculano, Alexandre. História de Portugal, 8 vols., 9th ed. Lisbon, 1940.
       ■ Kennedy, Hugh. Muslim Spain and Portugal: A Political History of al-Anda-lus. London: Longman, 1996.
       ■ Lencastre e Tavora, Luía Gonzaga. O Estudo da Sigilografia Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990.
       ■ Livermore, H. V. The Origins of Spain and Portugal. London: Allen & Unwin, 1971.
       ■ Lopes, David. "Os Árabes nas obras de Alexandre Herculano." Boletim da Segunda Classe. Lisbon: Academia Real das Sciéncias, III (1909-10). MacKendrick, Paul. The Iberian Stones Speak. New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1969.
       ■ Martinez, Pedro Soares. História Diplomática De Portugal [chapter I, 114315]. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■ Mattoso, José, ed. A Nobreza Medieval Portuguesa: A Família e o Poder. Lisbon: Estampa, 1981.
       ■. Religião e cultura na Idade Média Portuguesa. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1982.
       ■. Identificaçao de um país ( ensaio sobre as orígens de Portugal), 2 vols. Lisbon: Estampa, 1985.
       ■. Novos Ensaios de História Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon: Edit. Presença, 1988.
       ■. Historia de Portugal. Vol. 2: A Monarquia Feudal ( 1096-1480). Lisbon: Estampa, 1993.
       ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. Hansa e Portugal na Idade Média. Lisbon, 1959.
       ■. Daily Life in Portugal in the Middle Ages. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1971.
       ■. "Introduçao à História da Cidade Medieval Portuguesa." Bracara Augusta XXV, 92-93 (January-December 1981): 367-87.
       ■. Guía do Estudante de História Medieval Portuguesa, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■. Portugal Na Crise Dos Séculos XIV e XV-Vol. IV of Serrão and Oliveira Marques, Nova História de Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.
       ■ Peres, Damião de, ed. História de Portugal. Vols. I, II. Barcelos, 1928-29.
       ■ Rau, Virginia. Subsídios para o estudo das Feiras Medievais Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1943.
       ■. Sesma'rias Medievais Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1946.
       ■ Ribeiro, Orlando. "Portugal, formação de." Dicionário da História de Portugal. Vol. III, 432-51. Lisbon, 1966.
       ■ Rogers, Francis M. The Travels of the Infante Dom Pedro of Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1961.
       ■ Russell, P. E. The English Intervention in Spain and Portugal in the Time of Edward III and Richard II. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1955.
       ■ Savory, H. N. Spain and Portugal: The Prehistory of the Iberian Peninsula. New York: Thames and Hudson, 1968.
       ■ Silva, Armando Coelho Ferreira. A Cultura Castreja no Noroeste de Portugal. Pacos de Ferreira, 1986.
       ■ Varagnac, André. O Homem antes da Escrita ( Pre-história). Lisbon, 1963.
       ■ Azevedo, J. Lúcio de. História de António de Vieira, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1918-20.
       ■. Épocas de Portugal Económico. Lisbon, 1929.
       ■ Borges de Macedo, Jorge. Problemas de História de Indústria Portuguesa no Século X VIII. Lisbon, 1963.
       ■. "Pombal." Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. III, 415-23. Lisbon, 1968.
       ■ Boxer, C. R. Four Centuries of Portuguese Expansion, 1415-1825: A Succinct Survey. Johannesburg, South Africa: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1961.
       ■. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.
       ■. João de Barros: Portuguese Humanist and Historian of Asia. New Delhi, India: Xavier Centre, 1981.
       ■ Cheke, Marcus. Dictator of Portugal: A Life of the Marquis of Pombal, 16991782. London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1938.
       ■ Cunha, Luís da. Testamento Político. Lisbon, 1820.
       ■ Davidson, Lillias C. Catherine of Bragança. London: John Murray, 1908.
       ■ Dutra, Francis A. "Membership in the Order of Christ in the Seventeenth Century." The Americas 27 (1970): 3-25.
       ■ Eberlein, H. D., and R. W. Ramsdell. The Practical Book of Italian, Spanish and Portuguese Furniture. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1927.
       ■ Ericeira, Luís de Meneses [Count of]. História de Portugal Restaurado, 4 vols. Oporto, 1945.
       ■ Fisher, H. E. S. "Anglo-Portuguese Trade, 1700-70." Economic History Review XVI, 2 (1963): 219-33.
       ■ Francis, A. D. The Methuens and Portugal: 1691-1708. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1966.
       ■. Portugal, 1715-1808. London: Tamesis, 1985.
       ■ Hanson, Carl A. Economy and Society in Baroque Portugal, 1668-1703. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1981.
       ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. New York: AMS Press, 1968 reprint.
       ■ Kendrick, T. D. The Lisbon Earthquake. London: Methuen, 1956.
       ■ Livermore, H. V. "The Privileges of an Englishman in the Kingdom and Dominions of Portugal." Atlante 11 (1954): 57-77.
       ■ Macauley, Neil. Dom Pedro: The Struggle for Liberty in Brazil and Portugal, 1798-1834. Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 1986.
       ■ Macauley, Rose. They Went to Portugal. London: Jonathan Cape, 1946.
       ■. They Went to Portugal, Too. London: Carcanet, 1990.
       ■ Magalhães Godinho, Vitorino. Prix et Monnaies au Portugal. Paris, 1955.
       ■. "Portugal and Her Empire." In New Cambridge Modern History. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, Vol. V (1961): 384-97; Vol. VI (1961): 509-10.
       ■ Mauro, Frédéric. Le Portugal et l'Atlantique au XVII siécle ( 1570-1670). Paris: SEVPEN, 1960.
       ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. "Pombal and the Nationalization of the Luso-Brazilian Economy." Hispanic American Historical Review XLVIII (November 1968): 608-31.
       ■. Conflicts and Conspiracies: Brazil and Portugal, 1750-1808. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1973.
       ■ Norris, A. H., and R. W. Bremner. The Lines of Torres Vedras. Lisbon: British Historical Society of Portugal, 1980.
       ■ Oliveira, Antônio de. A Vida Económica e Social de Coimbra de 1537 à 1640, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1971-72.
       ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Royal Power and the Cortes in Portugal. Watford, U.K.: Voss & Michael, 1927.
       ■. Portuguese Pioneers. London: Black, 1933.
       ■. "The Mode of Government in Portugal during the Restoration [1640-68] Period." In Edgar Prestage, ed., Melange d'Etudes Portugaises Offerts a M. Georges Le Gentil, 265-70. Lisbon, 1949.
       ■ Rabassa, Gregory. "Padre Antônio Vieira: Portugal's Amazing Polymath." Camões Centre Quarterly 2, 3-4 (Autumn and Winter 1990): 27-32. Rau, Virginia. D. Catarina de Bragança: Rainha de Inglaterra. Lisbon, 1944. Ricard, Robert. "Prophecy and Messianism in the Works of Antônio Vieira." The Americas 37 (1960): 357-88.
       ■ Roche, T. W. E. Philippa: Dona Filipa of Portugal. London: Phillimore, 1971.
       ■ Rogers, Francis M. The Travels of the Infante Dom Pedro of Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1961.
       ■ Rooney, Peter T. "Hapsburg Fiscal Policies in Portugal, 1580-1640." Journal of European Economic History 23, 3 (1994): 545-62.
       ■ Roth, Cecil. "The Religion of the Marranos." Jewish Quarterly Review 22 (1931): 1-33.
       ■. A History of the Marranos. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America, 1932.
       ■ Saraiva, Antônio José. Inquisição e Cristãos-Novos. Oporto, 1969.
       ■. A Inquisição Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1969 and later eds.
       ■ Schneider, Susan. O Marquês De Pombal E O Vinho Do Porto: Dependência e subdesenvolvimento em Portugal no século XVIII. Lisbon, 1980.
       ■ Shaw, L. M. E. Trade, Inquisition and the English Nation in Portugal, 16401690. London: Carcancet, 1989.
       ■ Shillington, V. M., and A. B. W. Chapman. The Commercial Relations of England and Portugal. London: Routledge, 1907.
       ■ Sideri, Sandro. Trade and Power: Informal Colonialism in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. Rotterdam: Rotterdam University Press, 1970.
       ■ Smith, John Athelstone [Conde de Carnota]. Marquis of Pombal, 2nd ed. London, 1872.
       ■ Thomas, Gerturde Z. Richer Than Spices. New York: Knopf, 1965. Walford, A. R. The British Factory in Lisbon. Lisbon, 1940.
       ■ Baptista, Jacinto. O Cinco de Outubro. Lisbon, 1965. Brandão, Raúl. Memórias, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1969 ed.
       ■ Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. O desenvolvimento do capitalismo em Portugal no século XIX. Lisbon, 1981. Caetano, Marcello. História Breve das Constituções portuguesas. Lisbon, 1971 ed.
       ■ Carnota, Conde da. Memoirs of Marshal, the Duke of Saldanha, with Selections from His Correspondence, 2 vols. London: John Murray, 1880. Carvalho, Joaquim de. Estudos sobre a cultura portuguesa do século XIX. Coimbra, 1955.
       ■ Cheke, Marcus. Carlota Joaquina, Queen of Portugal. London: Sidgwick and Jackson, 1947.
       ■ França, José-Augusto. Zé Provinho na Obra de Rafael Bordalo Pinheiro. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■ Fuschini, Augusto. Liquidações políticas. Lisbon, 1896.
       ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. Estrutura da Antiga Sociedade Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975 ed.
       ■ Hammond, Richard J. Portugal and Africa, 1815-1910: A Study in Uneconomic Imperialism. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1966.
       ■ Homem, Amadeu Carvalho. A Propaganda Republicana ( 1870-1910). Coimbra, 1990.
       ■ Livermore, H. V. Portugal: A Short History. Edinburgh, U.K.: Edinburgh University Press, 1973. Machado, Alvaro Manuel. A Geração de 70-uma revolução cultural e literária. Lisbon, 1986 ed.
       ■ Martins, Joaquim Pedro de Oliveira. Portugal Contemporâneo, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1953 ed.
       ■ Medina, João. Eça Político. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. Fontes Pereira de Melo. Oporto: Ed. Afrontamento, 1999.
       ■ Nobre, Eduardo. Paixoes Reais. Lisbon: Quimera, 2002.
       ■ Peres, Damião, ed. História de Portugal. Volume III. Barcelos, 1935 ed.
       ■ Ramos, Rui. D.Carlos. 1863-1908. Lisbon: Circulo de Leitores, 2006.
       ■. Liberal Reformism in Portugal. Oliveira Martins, the Movement for New Life and the Politics of the Constitutional Monarchy ( 1885-1908). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.
       ■ Rorick, David. Maria da Fonte: History and Myth. M.A. thesis, History Department, Sonoma State University, Sonoma, Calif., 1984.
       ■ Sá, Vítor de. Perspectivas do Século XIX. Lisbon, 1964.
       ■ Serrão, Joel. Sampaio Bruno: O homem e o pensamento. Lisbon, 1958.
       ■. Temas Oitocentistas, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1959-62.
       ■. "Liberalismo." In Joel Serrão, ed., Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. II, 732-41. Lisbon, 1965.
       ■. Do Sebastianismo ao Socialismo. Lisbon, 1975 ed.
       ■ Silbert, Albert. Do Portugal de Antiga Regime ao Portugal Oitocentista. Lisbon, 1972.
       ■ Teles, Basílio. Do Ultimatum ao 31 de Janeiro. Lisbon, 1968 ed.
       ■ Parliamentary, Republican Portugal (1910-26)
       ■ Antunes, José Freire. A Cadeira do Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1980. Arriaga, Manuel de. Na primeira presidência da República Portugueza: Um rápido relatório. Lisbon, 1916.
       ■ Bell, Aubrey, F. G. In Portugal. London, 1912.
       ■. Portugal of the Portuguese. London: Pitman, 1915.
       ■ Bragança-Cunha, V. de. Revolutionary Portugal, 1910-1936. London: Swift, 1937.
       ■ Brandão, Raúl. Memórias, 3 vols. In Brandão, Obras Completas. Lisbon, 1969.
       ■ Burity, Braz [Pseudonym of Joaquim Madureira]. A Forja da Lei. Coimbra, 1915.
       ■ Cabral, Manuel V. Portugal Na Alvorada Do Século XX. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■. 'The Aesthetics of Nationalism: Modernism and Authoritarianism in Early 20th-Century Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, Wisc.) 26, 1 (Summer 1989): 15-43. Campos, Ezequiel. Política. Oporto, 1924.
       ■ Cardia, Sottomayor, ed. Seara Nova: Antologia. Pela Reforma da República (1, 2) 1921-1926, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1971-72.
       ■ Carqueja, Bento. O Povo de Portugal. Oporto, 1916.
       ■ Chagas, João. Diário, 1914-1918, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1929-30.
       ■ Cortesão, Jaime. "Memórias da Grande Guerra." In Obras Completas de Jaime Cortesão. Lisbon, 1969.
       ■ Cunha Leal, Francisco. As Minhas Memórias, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1966-68.
       ■ Derou, Jean. Les Relations Franco-Portugaises ( 1910-1926). Paris: Publications de la Sorbonne, 1986.
       ■ Fazenda, Pedro. A Crise Política. Lisbon, 1926.
       ■ Ferrão, Carlos. História De la República. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■ Ferreira, David. "5 De Outubro de 1910." In Joel Serrão, ed., Dicionário de História De Portugal III (1968): 264-67. Ferreira Martins, Gen. Luís, ed. Portugal na Grande Guerra, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1945.
       ■ Gomes da Costa, Gen. Manuel. Memórias. Lisbon, 1930. História Política da Primeira República Portuguesa ( 1910-1915), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1973.
       ■ Lorenzo, Felix. Portugal ( cinco anos de republica). Madrid, 1915.
       ■ Machado, Bernardino. Depois de 21 de Maio. Lisbon, 1922.
       ■ Machado Santos, Antônio. 1907-1910: A revolução portugueza. Relatôrio.
       ■ Lisbon, 1911. Madureira, Arnaldo. 0 28 De Maio. Lisbon, 1982.
       ■ Magno, David. Livro da Guerra de Portugal na Flandres. Oporto, 1920.
       ■. A Situação Portuguesa. Oporto, 1926.
       ■ Marques Guedes, Armando. Cinco Meses no governo. Oporto, 1926.
       ■ Martins, Rocha. Memórias sobre Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1921.
       ■, ed. História Contemporânea De Portugal: Primeira República, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. "Uma Aristocracia Operária: Os Chapeleiros (18701913)." Análise Social 60, 2nd series (1979). Montalvor, Luís de, ed. História de Regimen Republicano em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1930-32.
       ■ Oliveira, César. O Operariado E A República Democrática, 1910-1914. Oporto, 1972.
       ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. "The Portuguese 1920s: A General Survey." Iberian Studies 2 (1973): 32-40.
       ■. História De la República Portuguesa: As Estruturas De Base, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1973-74.
       ■. O Terceiro Governo Afonso Costa— 1917. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■. Pabôn, Jesus. La Revolución Portuguesa, 2 vols. Madrid, 1945-46; Portuguese edition: Lisbon, 1961. Paxeco, Oscar. Os Que Arrancaram Em 28 De Maio. Lisbon, 1937. Peres, Damião, ed. História De Portugal. Ediçao Monumental: Supplemento. Oporto, 1954.
       ■ Pessoa, Fernando. A Memória do Presidente— Rei Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1928.
       ■ Relvas, José. Memórias Políticas, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1977-78.
       ■ Schwartzman, Kathleen C. "Lucros, investimentos e coligações políticas na I República." Análise Social XVIII, 72-71 (1982): 741-58.
       ■ Serrão, Joel. Liberalismo, socialismo e republicanismo. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Silva, Antônio Maria da. O Meu Depoimento, 2 vols. Mem Martins, 1978-82.
       ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. O Poder e a guerra, 1914-1918. Lisbon: Estampa, 1996.
       ■, and Antônio Costa Pinto, eds. A Primeira República Portuguesa: Entre O Liberalismo E O Autoritarismo. Lisbon: Ed. Colibri, 2000.
       ■ Telo, Antônio José. Decadência E Queda Da I República Portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1980-84.
       ■ Torre (Gomez), Hipôlito dela, and J. Sanchez Cervello. Portugal En El Siglo XX. Madrid: Ediciones Istmo: Colecciôn La Historia en sus textos, 1992.
       ■ Valente, Vasco Pulido. "A República e as classes trabalhadores (Outubro 1910-Agosto 1911)." Análise Social IX, 31 (1972): 293-316.
       ■. O Poder e o Povo: A Revolução de 1910. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■ Veríssimo Serrao, Joaquim. História De Portugal. Volume XI: A Primeira República ( 1910-1926): História Política, Religiosa, Militar e Ultramarina. Lisbon, 1989.
       ■ Vincent-Smith, John. "Britain and Portugal, 1910-1916." Ph.D. dissertation, History, University of London, 1971.
       ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese Revolution of 1910." Journal of Modern History 44 (June 1972): 172-94.
       ■. Republican Portugal: A Political History, 1910-1926. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978.
       ■. "Nightmare Republic: Portugal, 1910-1926." History Today (London) 32 (September 1981): 5-10.
       ■ Young, George. Portugal Old and Young: An Historical Study. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1917.
       ■ Afonso, Rui. Injustiça: O Caso Sousa Mendes. Lisbon: Caminho, 1990.
       ■. Um Homem Bom: Aristides De Sousa Mendes, O " Wallenberg Portuguese' Lisbon: Caminho, 1995.
       ■ Antunes, José Freire. Os Americanos E Portugal. Vol. 1. Os anos de Ricard Nixon, 1969-1974. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■. Os Americanos e Portugal. 1961. Kennedy e Salazar: O Leão e a Raposa. Lisbon, 1991.
       ■. Salazar/Caetano. Cartas Secretas. 1932-1968. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1993.
       ■. Jorge Jardim: Agente Secreto. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1996.
       ■. Portugal na guerra do petróleo: Os Açores E As Vitórias de Israel 1973. Lisbon: Edeline, 2000. Aquino, Acácio Tómas de. O Segredo das Prisões Atlânticas. Lisbon, 1978. Araquistain, Luis. "Dictatorship in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 7 (October 1928): 41-53.
       ■ Assac, Jacques Ploncard. Salazar. Paris: La Table Ronde, 1967.
       ■ Baklanoff, Eric N. "The Political Economy of Portugal's Old Regime: Growth and Change Preceding the 1974 Revolution." World Development 7, 8-9 (August-September 1979): 799-812.
       ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. The Three Marias: New Portuguese Letters. New York: Doubleday, 1975.
       ■ Blume, Norman. "SEDES: An Example of Opposition in a Conservative Authoritarian State." Government and Opposition 12 (Summer 1977): 351-66.
       ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel. A origem da democracia-cristã em Portugal e o Sala-zarismo. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■. "Notas para uma caracterização política do salazarismo." In Gabinete de Investigações Sociais. Análise Social: A Formação de Portugal Contemporâneo: 1900-1980. Vol. I, 72-74 (April-December 1981): 773-94.
       ■. "O Integralismo nas origens do Salazarismo." Análise Social XVIII (1982): 1409-19.
       ■. "A Oposição Eleitoral ao Salazarismo." Revista de História das Ideias V (1983).
       ■ Cabral, Manuel V. "Sobre o fascismo e o seu avento em Portugal." Análise Social XII, 48 (1976), 873-915.
       ■ Caetano, Marcello. A Missão Dos Dirigentes. Lisbon, 1966, 4th ed.
       ■. Depoimento. São Paulo, 1974.
       ■. As Minhas Memórias de Salazar. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■ Campinos, Jorge. A Ditadura Militar, 1926-1933. Lisbon, 1975. Carrilho, Maria. Forças Armadas e Mudança Política em Portugal no Século XX. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■ Carvalho, Otelo Saraiva de. Alvorada em Abril. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■ Castanheira, Jose Pedro and Valdemar Cruz. A Filha Rebelde. Lisbon: Temas & Debates, 2003.
       ■ Costa Pinto, Antônio, et al. O Fascismo Em Portugal [Proceedings of Conference, Lisbon, March 1980]. Lisbon, 1982.
       ■. 'The Radical Right and the Military Dictatorship in Portugal: The National May 28 League (1928-1933)." Luso-Brazilian Review 23, 1 (Summer 1986): 1-15.
       ■. "O Salazarismo No Recente Investigação Sobre o Fascismo Europeu...." Análise Social XXV (1990): 695-713.
       ■. Salazar's Dictatorship and European Fascism: Problems of Interpretation. New York: Columbia University Press, 1995.
       ■. The Blue Shirts: Portuguese Fascists and the New State. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000.
       ■ Delgado, Humberto. The Memoirs of General Delgado. London: Cassell, 1964.
       ■. Memórias De Humberto Delgado. Iva Delgado and Antônio de Figueiredo, eds. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1991.
       ■ Duarte Silva, A. E., et al. Salazar E O Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1989.
       ■ Egerton, F. C. C. Salazar, Rebuilder of Portugal. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1943.
       ■ Ferraz, Artur Ivens. A Asenção de Salazar: Memórias de Ivens Ferraz. Lisbon, 1988.
       ■ Ferro, Antônio. Salazar: O Homem E A Sua Obra. Lisbon, 1933. English edition: Salazar: Portugal and Her Leader. London: Faber & Faber, 1939, and editions in other languages.
       ■ Figueiredo, Antônio. Portugal and Its Empire: The Truth. London: Gollancz, 1961.
       ■. "The Case Against Portugal." In Philip Mason, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 46-57. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962.
       ■. Portugal. Fifty Years of Dictatorship. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1975.
       ■ Fox, Ralph. Portugal Now. London, 1937.
       ■ Freitas do Amaral, Diogo. O Antigo Regime E A Revolução. Memórias Políticas ( 1941-1975). Lisbon: Bertrand, 1995.
       ■ Fryer, Peter, and Patricia McGowan Pinheiro. Oldest Ally: A Portrait of Sala-zar's Portugal. London: Dobson, 1961.
       ■ Gallagher, Tom. "Controlled Repression in Salazar's Portugal." Journal of Contemporary History 14, 3 (July 1979): 385-403.
       ■. "The Mystery Train: Portugal's Military Dictatorship 1926-32." European Studies Review 11 (1981): 325-54.
       ■. "From Hegemony to Opposition: The Ultraright Before and After 1974." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 81-103. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■. Portugal: A Twentieth Century Interpretation. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1983.
       ■ Galvão, Henrique. Santa Maria: My Crusade for Portugal. London: Weiden-feld and Nicholson, 1961.
       ■. Carta Aberta ao Dr. Salazar. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■ Gamier, Christine. Vacances avec Salazar. Paris, 1952; American edition: Salazar in Portugal: An Intimate Portrait. New York, 1954. Georgel, Jacques. O Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■ Gouveia, Fernando. Memórias de um Inspector da PIDE. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Graham, Lawrence S. "Portugal: The Bureaucracy of Empire." LADAC Occasional Papers series 2, 9 (1973). Austin, Tex.: Institute of Latin American Studies.
       ■. Portugal: The Decline and Collapse of an Authoritarian Order. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1975.
       ■. "The Military in Politics: The Politicization of the Portuguese Armed Forces." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 221-56. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■, and Harry M. Makler, eds. Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■ Guyomard, George. La Dictature Militaire au Portugal. Paris, 1927.
       ■ Janeiro, Helena Pinto. Salazar E Pétain. Relações Luso-Francesas Durante A II Guerra Mundial ( 1940-44). Lisbon: Cosmos, 1998.
       ■ Kay, Hugh. "A Catholic View." In Philip Mason, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 80-103. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962.
       ■. Salazar and Modern Portugal. New York: Hawthorne, 1970.
       ■ Leeds, Elizabeth. "Labor Export, Development and the State: The Political Economy of Portuguese Emigration." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1984.
       ■ Lewis, Paul H. "Salazar's Ministerial Elite, 1932-1968."Journal of Politics 40 (August 1987): 622-47.
       ■ Lins, Alvaro. Missão em Portugal. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■ Linz, Juan. "Foreword." In L. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, xii-xi. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■ Lucena, Manuel. A evolução do sistema corporativo português, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■. "The Evolution of Portuguese Corporatism under Salazar and Caetano." In L. Graham and H. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 47-88. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■ McCarthy, Mary. "Letter from Lisbon." The New Yorker XXX, 51 (February 5, 1955): 80-96.
       ■ Magalhães Godinho, Vitorino. O Socialismo e o Futuro da Peninsula. Lisbon, 1969.
       ■ Makler, Harry M. A " Elite" Industrial Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1969.
       ■. "The Portuguese Industrial Elite and Its Corporative Relations." Economic Development and Cultural Change 24, 3 (April 1976): 495-526.
       ■ Martins, Hermínio. "Opposition in Portugal." Government and Opposition 4 (Spring 1969): 250-63.
       ■. "Portugal." In S. J. Woolf, ed., European Fascism, 302-36. New York: Vintage, 1969.
       ■. "Introduction: Tristes durées." In R. Feijô, H. Martins and J. de Pina-Cabral, eds., Death in Portugal: Studies in Portuguese Anthropology and Modern History. Oxford: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 1983.
       ■ Medina, João. Salazar em França. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■. Ditadura: O " Estado Novo," 2 vols., in his História Contemporânea De Portugal. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■ Ministério dos Negôcios Estrangeiros, ed. Dez Anos de Política Externa ( 1936-1947): A Nação Portuguesa e a Segunda Guerra Mundial, 12 vols., and in progress. Lisbon, 1964.
       ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. Educação e Sociedade no Portugal de Salazar. Lisbon, 1978.
       ■ Nogueira, Alberto Franco. Salazar, 6 vols. Coimbra and Oporto, 1978-85.
       ■. História de Portugal, 1933-1974: II Supplemento. Oporto, 1981.
       ■. Um político confessa-se ( Diário: 1960-1968), 3rd ed. Oporto, 1987.
       ■ Oliveira, César. Portugal e a II República de Espanha, 1931-l 936. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■. Salazar E A Guerra Civil De Espanha, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1988.
       ■. Os Anos Decisivos: Portugal 1962-1985. Um testemunho. Lisbon: Presença, 1993.
       ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. A Maçonaria Portuguesa e o Estado Novo. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■. History of Portugal; 1 in 2 vols. New York: Columbia University Press, 1976 ed.
       ■. História de Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon: 1980 and later eds.
       ■, ed. A Literatura Clandestina Em Portugal, 1926-1932, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1990.
       ■ Patriarca, Fátima. A Questaão Social no Salazarismo. Vol. 1. Lisbon: INCM, 1995.
       ■. Sindicatos contra Salazar: A revolta do 18 de janeiro de 1934. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, 2000. Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wisc.: Bruce, 1957.
       ■ Payne, Stanley G. A History of Spain and Portugal. Volume 2. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1973.
       ■. "Salazarism: 'Fascism' or 'Bureaucratic Authoritarianism'?" In Estudos de história portuguesa: Homenagem à A. H. de Oliveira Marques. Lisbon, 1983.
       ■ Pereira, José Pacheco. Conflitos sociais nos campos do sul de Portugal. Mem Martins, 1978.
       ■. "Problemas da história do P. C. P." In A. Costa Pinto et al., eds., O Fascismo Em Portugal [Proceedings of Conference, University of Lisbon, March 1980], 269-85. Lisbon, 1982.
       ■ Pimentel, Irene Flunser. Judeus em Portugal durante a II Guerra Mundial. Em fuga de Hitler e do Holocausto. Lisbon: Esfera dos Livros, 2006.
       ■ Pires, José Cardoso. Dinossauro Excelentíssimo. Lisbon, 1972.
       ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm, 1977.
       ■ Presidência do Conselho de Ministros. Comissão do Livro Negro Sobre o Regime Fascista ["Black Book" series]. Eleições No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■. A Política De Informação No Regime Fascista, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1980.
       ■. Livros Proibidos No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1981.
       ■. Presos Políticos No Regime Fascista, 5 vols. Lisbon, 1981-87.
       ■. Relatórios Para Oliveira Salazar, 1931-1939. Lisbon, 1981.
       ■. Proibição Da " Time" No Regime Fascista [ Time magazine July 23, 1946, with Dr. Salazar on cover]. Lisbon, 1982.
       ■. Os Estudantes No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1983.
       ■ Queiroga, Captain Fernando. Portugal Oprimido. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■ Raby, David L. "Populism and the Portuguese Left: From Delgado to Otelo." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 61-80. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■ Raby, Dawn Linda. "The Portuguese Presidential Election of 1949: A Successful Government Maneuver?" Luso-Brazilian Review 27, 1 (Summer 1990): 63-77.
       ■ Rêgo, Raúl. Diário Político. Lisbon, 1969; 1974, 2nd ed.
       ■. Horizontes Fechados. Oporto, 1970.
       ■. Horizontes Fechados/ Páginas de Política, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■ Ribeiro, Aquilino. Volfrâmio. Lisbon, 1944.
       ■. Quando os Lobos Uivam. Lisbon, 1958; English ed. Patricia McGowan
       ■ Pinheiro, trans. London: Cape, 1963.
       ■ Robinson, Richard A. H. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London and Boston: Allen & Unwin, 1979.
       ■ Rocha, José Antônio De Oliveira. The Portuguese Administrative State. Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, University of South Carolina, 1986.
       ■ Rosa, Frederico Delgado. Humberto Delgado. Biografia Do General Sem Medo. Lisbon: Esfera dos Livros, 2008. Rosas, Fernando. O Estado Novo Nos Anos Trinta: 1928-1938. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■. Portugal Entre A Paz E A Guerra... 1939-1945. Lisbon, 1990.
       ■. O Estado Novo ( 1926-1974). Vol. VII of José Mattoso, ed. Historia De
       ■ Portugal. Lisbon: Edit. Estampa, 1994.
       ■. and Pedro Aires Oliveira (eds.). A Transicao Falhada. O Marcelismo e o Fim do Estado Novo ( 1968-1974). Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 2004.
       ■ Rudel, Christian. Salazar. Paris: Mercure de France, 1969.
       ■ Sá Carneiro, Francisco. Uma Tentativa de Participação política. Lisbon, 1971.
       ■. A Liberalização bloqueada. Lisbon, 1972.
       ■. Vale a Pena ser Deputado? Fundão, 1973.
       ■ Salazar, Antônio de Oliveira. Discursos E Notas Políticas. [Speeches, Broadcasts, Notes and Statements, 1928-1966, 6 vols. Coimbra, 1935-1966]. Several editions.
       ■. Doctrine and Action: Internal and Foreign Policy of the New Portugal, I928-1939. Robert Edgar Broughton, trans. London: Faber & Faber, 1939.
       ■. "Realities and Trends of Portugal's Policies." International Affairs XXXIX, 2 (April 1963): 169-83.
       ■. The Road for the Future [Speeches, statements of policy made during 1928-62]. Lisbon, 1963.
       ■. Entrevistas: 1960-1966 [interviews]. Coimbra, 1967.
       ■. Salazar: Pensamento e doutrina política. Textos anthológicos. [Anthology of speeches, writings, interviews granted, 1914-68]. Mendo C. Henriques and Gonçalo de Sampaio e Melo, eds. Lisbon, 1989.
       ■ Santana, Emilio. Historia de um Atentado. O atentado contra Salazar. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■ Schmitter, Philippe C. Corporatism and Public Policy in Authoritarian Portugal. London: Sage, 1975.
       ■. "Liberation by Golpe: Retrospective Thoughts on the Demise of Authoritarian Rule in Portugal." Armed Forces and Society 2 (Nov. 1975): 5-33.
       ■. "The Impact and Meaning of Elections in Authoritarian Portugal, 1933-74." In G. Hermet et al., eds., Elections Without Choice. Basingstoke, U.K.: Macmillan, 1978.
       ■. "'The 'Regime d'exception' That Became the Rule: Forty-Eight Years of Authoritarian Domination in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Mak-ler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 3-46. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■, and Gerhard Lehmbruch, eds. Trends towards Corporatist Intermediation. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1979.
       ■ Shelton, Richard L. "Development of the Communist Party of Portugal, 1921-1976." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of History, St. Louis University, 1984.
       ■ Silva, José. Memórias de um operário. Vol. 2. Oporto, 1971. Soares, Mário. Escritos Políticos. Lisbon, 1969.
       ■. Portugal Bailloné. Paris, 1972; Portuguese edition: Portugal Amordaçado, Lisbon, 1974; English edition: Portugal's Struggle for Liberty. Translated by Mary Gawsworth. London: Allen & Unwin, 1975.
       ■ Spínola, Antônio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon, 1974; English edition: Johannesburg: Perskor, 1974.
       ■ Teixeira, Luis [Sampaio]. Perfil de Salazar. Lisbon, 1938.
       ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. "From Neutrality to Alignment: Portugal in the Foundation of the Atlantic Pact." EUI: Working Papers in History. Florence, Italy: European University Institute, 1991.
       ■ Telo, Antônio José. Portugal na Segunda Guerra. Lisbon, 1987.
       ■. A Neutralidade Portuguesa e o Ouro Nazi. Lisbon: Quetzal, 2000.
       ■ Teotônio Pereira, Pedro. Memórias, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1972-73.
       ■ Vasco, Nuno. Vigiados e perseguidos. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■ Veríssimo, Serrão. Marcelo Caetano: Confidencias No Exílio. Lisbon, 1985. Vintras, R. E. The Portuguese Connection: The Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman & Turner, 1974. West, S. George. The New Corporative State of Portugal [Inaugural lecture, King's College, London, Feb. 1937]. London: New Temple Press, 1937. Wheeler, Douglas L. "Thaw in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 48, 4 (July 1970): 769-81.
       ■. "Days of Wine and Carnations: The Portuguese Revolution of [April 25] 1974." Bulletin. New Hampshire Council on World Affairs XX (July 1974): 1-10.
       ■. "Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970)." In Jacques Frémontier, ed., Les Hommes d'Siecle XX: Les Dictateurs. Paris: Mazenod, 1978.
       ■. "The Military and the Portuguese Dictatorship, 1926- 1974." In S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 191-219. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■. "In the Service of Order: The Portuguese Dictatorship's Political Police (PVDE; PIDE) and the British, German and Spanish Intelligence [Services]." Journal of Contemporary History 24, 2 (January 1983): 1-25.
       ■. Republican Portugal: A Political History, 1910-1926. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978. Portuguese edition: História Política de Portugal, 1910-l926. Mem Martins, 1985.
       ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question, and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review [two part article] 12, 1-2 (Summer 1986; Winter 1986): 107-27.
       ■. A Ditadura Militar Portuguesa, 1926-1933. Mem Martins, 1988.
       ■. "The Third Pig: From Theory to Grubby Fact in Reassessing the Estado Novo." In B. F. Taggie and R. W. Clement, eds., Iberia & the Mediterranean, 145-68. Warrensburg: Central Missouri State Press, 1989.
       ■. "And Who Is My Neighbor? A World War II Hero of Conscience for Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review 26, 1 (Summer 1989): 119-39.
       ■. "Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970)." In Research Guide to European Historical Biography. Vol. 3. Washington, D.C.: Beacham, 1992.
       ■. "'Estado Presente de tranquilidade,' posto em causa: Portugal observado e analisado no contexto internacional de 1958-59." In Iva Delgado, Carlos Pacheco, and Telmo Faria, eds., Humberto Delgado: As eleições de 58, 448-71. Lisbon: Vega, 1998.
       ■, and René Pélissier. Angola. New York: Praeger and London: Pall Mall, 1971; reprinted: Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977.
       ■ Wiarda, Howard J. "Toward a Framework for the Study of Political Change in Iberic-Latin Tradition: The Corporative Model." World Politics 25 (January 1973): 206-35.
       ■. Corporatism and Development: The Portuguese Experience. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1977.
       ■. "The Corporatist Tradition and the Corporative System in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal. The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 89-122. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■ Afonso, Rui. Um Homem Bom. Aristides De Sousa Mendes O " Wallenberg Portugues." Lisbon: Caminho, 1995.
       ■. Injustica-o Caso Sousa Mendes. Lisbon: Caminho, 1990.
       ■ Agudo, Manuel Ros. La Guerra Secreta de Franco ( 1939-1945). Barcelona, 2002.
       ■ Barreiros, Jose Antonio. A Lusitania Dos Espioes. Lisbon: Hugin, 1995.
       ■. O Espiao Alemao Em Goa. Operacao Long Shanks, 1943. Lisbon, 2001.
       ■ Beevor, J. G. SOE. Recollections and Reflections 1940-45. London, 1981. Bloch, Michael. Operation Willi: The Plot to Kidnap the Duke of Windsor July 1940. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1984. Carrilho, Maria et. al., Portugal Na Segunda Guerra Mundial. Contributos para uma reavaliacao. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1989. Cole, Robert. Britain and the War of Words in Neutral Europe, 1939-45. New York: St. Martin's, 1990. Colvin, Ian. Flight 777. London: Evans, 1957. Dias, Mariana Tavares. Lisboa nos Anos 40. Lisbon: Quimera, 1997. Eizenstadt, Stuart E. Coord. U.S. and Allied Efforts to Recover and Restore Gold and Other Assets Stolen or Hidden by Germany during World War II. New York, 2001.
       ■ Fralon, Jose-Alain. A Good Man in Evil Times. The Story of Aristides De Sousa Mendes: The Man Who Saved the Lives of Countless Refugees in World War II. New York: Carroll & Graf, 2001.
       ■ Giraudoux, Jean. Portugal. Paris: Grasset, 1958.
       ■ Johns, Philip. Within Two Cloaks. Missions With SIS and SOE. London, 1979.
       ■ Koestler, Arthur. Arrival and Departure. London, 1943.
       ■ Leitz, Christian. Sympathy for the Devil: Neutral Portugal and Nazi Germany in World War II. New York, 2001.
       ■ Louca, Antonio. Hitler e Salazar. Comercio em tempos de Guerra 1940-1944. Lisbon, 2000.
       ■ Luca, Antonio. "Portugal's Double Game: Between the Nazis and the Allies." In Avi Beker, ed., The Plunder of Jewish Property during the Holocaust. Confronting European History. New York, 2001. MacIntyre, Ben. Agent Zigzag. New York: Harmony, 2007. Martins, Maria Joao. O Paraiso Triste. O Quotidiano em Lisboa durante a II Grande Guerra. Lisbon: Vega, 1994. Masterman, J.C. The Double-Cross System in the War of 1939 to 1945. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1972. Muggeridge, Malcolm. Chronicles of Wasted Time. Chronicle 2: The Infernal Grove. New York: William Morrow, 1974.
       ■ Nery, Julia. O Consul. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1991.
       ■ Pimentel, Irene Flunser. Judeus em Portugal na Segunda Guerra Mundial. Lisbon, 2006.
       ■ Popov, Dusko. Spy/ Counterspy. London, 1974.
       ■ Prokosch, Frederick. The Conspirators. New York, 1943.
       ■ Remarque, Erich Maria. The Night in Lisbon. New York, 1966.
       ■ Ribeiro, Aquilino. Volfarmio Romance. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1943.
       ■ Rosas, Fernando. Portugal entre a Paz e a Guerra. Lisbon: Estampa, 1990.
       ■ Saint-Exupery, Antoine. Wartime Writings, 1939-1944. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1986.
       ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano, ed. Portugal E A Guerra. Historia das Intervencoes militares portuguesas nos grandes conflitos mundiais seculos XIX e XX. Lisbon: Colibri, 1998.
       ■ Telo, Antonio Jose. Propagandal E Guerra Secreta Em Portugal 1939-45. Lisbon, 1990.
       ■. Portugal na Segunda Guerra ( 1941-1945), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1991.
       ■. Os Acores E O Controlo Do Atlantico ( 1898/ 1948). Lisbon: Ed. Asa, 1993.
       ■. A neutralidade portuguesa e o ouro nazi. Lisbon, 2000.
       ■ Vintras, R.E. The Portuguese Connection: The Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman and Turner, 1974. Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Age Old Business of Espionage." 1987 World Book Year Book. Chicago, 1987.
       ■. "'In the Service of Order.' The Portuguese Political Police and the British, Germany and Spanish Intelligence [Services]." Journal of Contemporary History 36: no. 3 (Jan. 1983), 1-25.
       ■. "And Who is My Neighbor? A World War II Hero of Conscience for Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review 23 (no. 2) (Summer 1989), 119-39.
       ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question, and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, WI), 23 (nos.1, 2) (Summer, 1986; Winter, 1986). 97-111; 108-127.
       ■. "Last of the Great Air Mysteries of the War [World War II]." Bridport and Lyme Regis Gazette (Dorset, U.K.), June 5, 2003, 24-25.
       ■. "Leslie Howard Helped Win World War II," St. Louis Post-Dispatch (St. Louis, Mo.), April 3, 5, 2005.
       ■ Wilson, Robert. A Small Death in Lisbon. London, 2000.
       ■. The Company Of Strangers. San Diego, 2002.
       ■ Wylie, Neville. "An Amateur Learns His Job? Special Operations Executive in Portugal, 1940-42." Journal of Contemporary History. 36: no. 3 (2001), 441-57.
       ■ The Military
       ■ Ferreira Martins, General. Historia do Exercito Portugues. Lisbon: Inquerito, 1945.
       ■ Kaulza de Arriaga, General. Guerra e Politica. Em nome da verdade. Os anos decisivos. Lisbon: Referendo, 1987.
       ■ Pereira Marques, Fernando. Exercito e Sociedade em Portugal. No Declinio do Antigo Regime e advento do Liberalismo. Lisbon: Regra do Jogo, 1981.
       ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm, 1977.
       ■ Ribeiro Dos Santos, Antonio Pedro. O Estado E A Order Publica. As Institui-coes Militares Portuguesas. Lisbon: Instituto Superior De Ciencias Sociais E Politicas, 1999.
       ■ Saraiva de Carvalho, Otelo. Alvorada em Abril. Amadora (Portugal): Bertrand, 1977.
       ■ Selvagem, Carlos. Portugal Militar. Compendio de Historia Militar e Naval de Portugal. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1931.
       ■ Spinola, Antonio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon: Arcadia, 1974.
       ■. Pais Sem Rumo. Contributo para a historia de uma Revolucao. Lisbon: Scire, 1978.
       ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. Portugal e a Guerra. Historia das intervencoes militares portuguesas nos grandes conflitos mundiais do seculo XX. Lisbon: Ed. Colibri, 1999.
       ■. Coord., Nova Historia Militar de Portugal, 5 vols. Lisbon: Circulo de Leitores, 2003-.
       ■ Valente, Vasco Pulido. O Poder e o Povo. A Revolucao de 1910. Lisbon: Moraes, 1976, 1982.
       ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. Republican Portugal: A Political History ( 1910-1926). Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978, 1998.
       ■. A Ditadura Militar Portuguesa ( 1926-1933). Mem Martins: Europa- America, 1988.
       ■. "The Military and the Portuguese Dictatorship, 1926-1974: "The Honor of the Army." In Lawrence S. Graham and Harry M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. 191-219. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■ Aguiar, Joaquim. "Hidden Fluidity in an Ultra-Stable Party System." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 101-27. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel, ed. Sistema Eleitoral Portugües: Debate Político e Parlamentar. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional/ Casa da Moeda, 1998.
       ■, ed. "Portugal Político 25 Anos Depois." In Análise Social XXXV, 154/155 (Summer, 2000): 1-404.
       ■ Bruneau, Thomas C., and Alex Macleod. Politics in Contemporary Portugal: Parties and the Consolidation of Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1986.
       ■ Bruneau, Thomas C., ed. Political Parties and Democracy in Portugal. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1997. Carlucci, Frank. "Confiei no Povo Portugues." Visao (Lisbon), April 10, 1997, 46-47.
       ■. "The View from the U.S. Embassy." In Hans Binnendijk, ed., Authoritarian Regimes in Transition. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of State, Foreign Service Institute, Center for the Study of Foreign Affairs, 1987.
       ■ Coelho, Mário Baptista, ed. Portugal. O Sistema Política a Constitucional, 1974-87. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, UNL, 1989.
       ■ Costa Pinto, Antonio. "Settling Accounts with the Past in a Troubled Transition to Democracy: The Portuguese Case." In Alexandra Barahona De Brito, Carmen Gonzalez-Enriquez, and Paloma Aguilar, eds., The Politics of Memory: Transitional Justice in Democratizing Societies, 65-91. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2001.
       ■ Cruzeiro, Maria Manuela. Costa Gomes-o Ultimo Marechal. Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 1998.
       ■ Domingos, Emídio Da Veiga. Portugal Político. Análise das Instituiçoes. Lisbon, 1989.
       ■ Goldey, David. "Elections and the Consolidation of Portuguese Democracy: 1974-1983." Electoral Studies 2, 3 (1983): 229-40.
       ■ Graham, Lawrence S. "Institutionalizing Democracy: Governance in Post-1974 Portugal." In Ali Farazmand, ed., Handbook of Comparative and Development Public Administration, 81-90. New York: Dekker, 1991.
       ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■ Gunther, Richard. "Spain and Portugal." In G. A. Dorfman and P. J. Duignan, eds., Politics in Western Europe, 186-236. Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1988.
       ■ Magone, José Maria. European Portugal: The Difficult Road to Sustainable Democracy. Basingstoke, U.K.: Macmillan, 1997.
       ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. The Making of Portuguese Democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.
       ■, ed. Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.
       ■ Maxwell, Kenneth R., and Scott C. Monje, eds. Portugal: The Constitution and the Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-1989. New York: Camões Center, RIIC, Camões Center Special Report No. 2, Columbia University, 1991.
       ■ Opello, Walter C., Jr. "The New Parliament in Portugal." Legislative Studies Quarterly, 3 (May 1978): 309-334.
       ■. "Local Government and Political Culture in a Portuguese Rural County." Comparative Politics 13 (April 1981): 271-89.
       ■. "Portugal's Administrative Elite: Social Origins and Political Attitudes." West European Politics 6 (Jan. 1983): 63-74.
       ■. Portugal's Political Development: A Comparative Approach. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1985.
       ■ Pinto Balsemão, Francisco. "The Constitution and Politics: Options for the Future." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 197-232. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.
       ■ Sartori, Giovanni. "Portugal." In Sartori, G, ed., Parties and Party Systems. Vol. 1, 131-45. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976. Secretary of State for Mass Communications. Constitution of the Portuguese Republic [1976]. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■ Aguiar, Joaquim. A Ilusão do poder: Analise do Sistema Partidário, 19761982. Lisbon, 1983. Almeida, Diniz de. Orígens e Evolução do Movimento dos Capitães. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■. Ascensao, Apogeu e Queda do MFA, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Alves, Márcio Moreira. Les Soldats Socialistes du Portugal. Paris: Gallimard, 1975.
       ■ Antunes, José Freire. Sá Carneiro: Um Meteoro Nos Anos Setenta. Lisbon, 1982.
       ■. O Segredo do 25 de Novembro. Mem Martins, 1983.
       ■ Arouca, Manuel. Os Filhos Da Costa Do Sol. Mem Martins, 1989. Audibert, Pierre, and Daniel Brignon. Portugal: Les nouveaux centurions. Paris, 1974.
       ■ Baptista, Jacinto. Caminhos para uma revolução. Lisbon, 1975. Barreto, Antônio. Memórias da Reforma Agrária. Mem Martins: Europa-Amé-rica, 1983.
       ■, and C. V. Preto, eds. A Situação Social em Portugal, 1960-1996. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, 1996.
       ■ Bermeo, Nancy Gina. "Worker Management in Industry: Reconciling Representative Government and Industrial Democracy in a Polarized Society." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 181-98. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■. The Revolution within the Revolution: Workers' Control in Rural Portugal. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.
       ■ Braeckman, Colette. Portugal: Revolution surveilée. Brussels: Rossei, 1975.
       ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel. "O Presidente da República na génese e evolução do sistema de governor portugües." Análise social XXIX, 125-26 (1994): 237-65.
       ■, coord. "Portugal Político 25 Anos Depois." Análise Social XXXV, 154/155 (Summer 2000): 1-404. Bruneau, Thomas C. "Popular Support for Democracy in Post-revolutionary Portugal: Results from a Survey." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 21-42. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■. Politics and Nationhood: Post-Revolutionary Portugal. New York: Praeger, 1984.
       ■. "Portugal Fifteen Years after the April Revolution." Field Staff Reports ( 1989-90/ No. 1, Europe), 3-11. Indianapolis, Ind.: Universities Field Staff International, 1990.
       ■, and Alex Macleod. Politics in Contemporary Portugal: Parties and the Consolidation of Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1986.
       ■ Carvalho, Ortelo Saraiva de. Cinco Meses Mudaram Portugal. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■. Alvorada em Abril. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■ Cid, Augusto. PREC-Processo Revolucionário Eventualmente Chocante. Viseu, 1977.
       ■ Costa Lobo, Marina, and Pedro C. Magalhaes. "From 'Third Wave' to 'Third Way': Europe and the Portuguese Socialists (1975-1999)," Journal of Southern Europe and the Balkans 3, no. 1 (2001), 25-35.
       ■ Costa Pinto, Antônio, ed. Modern Portugal. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.
       ■, and Nuno Severiano Teixeira, eds. Southern Europe and the Making of the European Union. New York: Columbia Univ. Press, 2002.
       ■ Cunhal, Alvaro. A Revolução Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone. Portugal's Secret Jews: The End of an Era. Rumford, R.I.: Peregrinação Publications, 1999.
       ■ Downs, Charles. "Comissões de Moradores and Urban Struggles in Revolutionary Portugal." International Journal of Urban and Regional Research 4 (1986): 267-94.
       ■. Revolution at the Grassroots: Community Organizations in the Portuguese Revolution. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1989.
       ■ Dufour, Jean-Marc. Prague sur Tage. Paris, 1975.
       ■ Durão Barroso, José. Le systémepolitiqueportugais face à l'intégration euro-péenne. Lisbon, 1983.
       ■ Eisfeid, Rainer. "Portugal: What Role/What Future?" In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal Ten Years after the Revolution. New York: RIIC, Columbia University, 1984.
       ■. Sozialistischer Pluralismus in Europa: Ansãtze und Scheitern am Beispiel Portugal. Cologne: Verlag Wissenchaft ünd Politik, 1985.
       ■. "Portugal and Western Europe." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 29-62. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.
       ■ Farinha, Luis. "Regresso a Europa. Uma opcao feliz." Historia. XXIX; 95, III series (March 2007), 23-33.
       ■ Faye, Jean-Pierre, ed. Portugal: The Revolution in the Labyrinth. Nottingham, U.K.: Spokesman, 1976. Ferreira, Hugo Gil, and Michael W. Marshall. Portugal's Revolution: Ten Years On. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986. Figueira, João Costa. Cavaco Silva: Homem de Estado. Lisbon, 1987. Filoche, Gérard. Printemps Portugais. Paris: Editions Action, 1984. Frémontier, Jacques. Os Pontos nos ii. Lisbon, 1976. Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian. 25 de Abril-10 anos depois. Lisbon, 1984. Futscher Pereira, Bernardo. "Portugal and Spain." In K. Maxwell, ed. Portugal in the 1980s, 63-87. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.
       ■ Gama, Jaime. Política Externa Portuguesa 1983-85: Ministério dos Negôcios Estrangeiros. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■. "Preface." In J. Calvet de Magalhães, A. de Vasconcelos, and J. Ramos Silva, eds., Portugal: An Atlantic Paradox, 9-11. Lisbon, 1990. Gaspar, Jorge, and Nuno Vitorino. As Eleições De 25 De Abril: Geografia E Imagem Dos Partidos. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■. "10 Anos de Democracia: Reflexos na geografia política." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opelio, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal 1974-1984/ Conflitos e Mudanças em Portugal, 1974-1984, 135-55. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■, et al. As Eleições para assembleia da república, 1979-1983: Estudos de geografia eleitoral. Lisbon, 1984. Gaspar, Jorge, and Nuno Vitorino, eds. Portugal em mapas e em números. Lisbon, 1981.
       ■ Giaccone, Fausto. Una Storia Portoghese/ Uma História Portuguesa. Palermo: Randazzo Focus, 1987.
       ■ Gladdish, Ken. "Portugal: An Open Verdict." In Geoffrey Pridham, ed. Securing Democracy: Political Parties and Democratic Consolidation in Southern Europe, 104-25. London and New York: Routledge, 1990.
       ■ Graham, Lawrence S. The Decline and Collapse of an Authoritarian Order. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1975.
       ■, and Harry M. Makler, eds. Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■ Grayson, George W. "Portugal and the Armed Forces Movement." Orbis XIX, 2 (Summer 1975): 335-78.
       ■ Green, Gil. Portugal's Revolution. New York: International, 1976.
       ■ Hammond, John L. Building Popular Power: Workers' and Neighborhood Movements in the Portuguese Revolution. New York: Monthly Review Press, 1988.
       ■ Harsgor, Michael. Naissance d'un Nouveau Portugal. Paris: Ed. du Seuil, 1975.
       ■. Portugal in Revolution. Washington, D.C.: CSIS and Sage, 1976.
       ■ Harvey, Robert. Portugal, Birth of a Democracy. London: Macmillan, 1978.
       ■ Herr, Richard, ed. Portugal: The Long Road to Democracy and Europe. Berkeley, Calif.: International and Area Studies, 1992.
       ■ Insight Team of the Sunday [London] Times. Insight on Portugal: The Year of the Captains. London: Deutsch, 1975.
       ■ Janitschek, Hans. Mario Soares: Portrait of a Hero. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1985.
       ■ Keefe, Eugene K., et al. Area Handbook for Portugal, 1st ed. Washington, D.C.: Foreign Area Studies of American University, 1977. Kramer, Jane. "A Reporter at Large: The Portuguese Revolution." The New Yorker (Dec. 15, 1975): 92-131.
       ■ Lauré, Jason, and Ettagal Lauré. Jovem Portugal: After the Revolution. New York: Straus, Farrar and Giroux, 1977.
       ■ Livermore, H. V. A New History of Portugal. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976.
       ■ Lourenço, Eduardo. Os Militares e O Poder. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■. O Fascismo Nunca Existiu. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■. "Identidade e Memôria: o caso português." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-l 984, 17-22. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■. "A herança de duas revoluções." In M. Baptista Coelho, ed., Portugal: O Sistema Político e Constitucional, 1974-87, 505-55. Lisbon, 1989.
       ■ Macedo, Jorge Braga de, and S. Serfaty. Portugal since the Revolution: Economic and Political Perspectives. New York: Praeger, 1981.
       ■ Magone, José M. European Portugal: The Difficult Road to Sustainable Democracy. New York: St. Martin's, 1997. Mailer, Phil. Portugal: The Impossible Revolution. London: Solidarity, 1977. Manta, João Abel. Cartoons/ 1969-1975. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■ Manuel, Paul C. Uncertain Outcome: The Politics of Portugal's Transition to Democracy. Lanham, Md. and London: University Press of America, 1994.
       ■ Mateus, Rui. Contos Proibidos. Memorias de Um PS Desconhecido, 3rd ed. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1996.
       ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. "Portugal under Pressure." The New York Review of Books (May 2, 1974).
       ■. "The Hidden Revolution in Portugal." The New York Review of Books (April 17, 1975).
       ■. "The Thorns of the Portuguese Revolution." Foreign Affairs 54, 2 (Jan. 1976): 250-70.
       ■. "The Communists and the Portuguese Revolution." Dissent 27, 2 (Spring 1980): 194-206.
       ■. Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.
       ■. The Making of Portuguese Democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.
       ■, ed. "Portugal: Toward the Twenty-First Century." Camoes Center Quarterly 5, 3-4 (Fall 1995): 6-55.
       ■, ed. The Press and the Rebirth of Iberian Democracy. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1983.
       ■. Portugal Ten Years after the Revolution: Reports of Three Columbia University-Gulbenkian Workshops. New York: Research Institute on International Change, Columbia University, 1984.
       ■ Maxwell, Kenneth, and Michael H. Haltzel, eds. Portugal: Ancient Country, Young Democracy. Washington, D.C.: Wilson Center Press, 1990.
       ■ Medeiros Ferreira, José. Ensaio Histórico sobre a revolução do 25 de Abril. Lisbon, 1983.
       ■ Medina, João, ed. Portugal De Abril: Do 25 Aos Nossos Dias. In Medina, ed., História Contemporãnea De Portugal. Lisbon, 1985. Merten, Peter. Anarchismus ünd Arbeiterkãmpf in Portugal. Hamburg: Libertare, 1981.
       ■ Miranda, Jorge. Constituição e Democracia. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■. A Constituição de 1976. Lisbon, 1978.
       ■ Morrison, Rodney J. Portugal: Revolutionary Change in an Open Economy. Boston: Auburn House, 1981.
       ■ Mujal-Leôn, Eusebio. "The PCP [Portuguese Communist Party] and the Portuguese Revolution." Problems of Communism 26 (Jan.- Feb. 1977): 21-41.
       ■ Neves, Mário. Missão em Moscovo. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■ Oliveira, César. M. F. A. e Revolução Socialista. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■. Os Anos Decisivos: Portugal 1962-1985. Um testemunho. Lisbon: Presença, 1993.
       ■ Opello, Waiter C., Jr. Portugal's Political Development: A Comparative Approach. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1985.
       ■. Portugal: From Monarchy to Pluralist Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1991.
       ■ Pell, Senator Claiborne H. Portugal ( Including the Azores and Spain) in Search of New Directions: Report to the Committee on Foreign Relations, U.S. Senate. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1976.
       ■ Pereira, J. Pacheco. "A Case of Orthodoxy: The Communist Party of Portugal." In Waller and Fenema, eds., Communist Parties in Western Europe: Adaptation or Decline? Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1988.
       ■ Pilmott, Ben. "Socialism in Portugal: Was It a Revolution?" Government and Opposition 7 (Summer 1977).
       ■. "Were the Soldiers Revolutionary? The Armed Forces Movement in Portugal, 1973-1976." Iberian Studies 7, 1 (1978): 13-21.
       ■, and Jean Seaton. "Political Power and the Portuguese Media." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 43-57. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm and Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1977.
       ■ Pouchin, Dominique. Portugal, quelle révolution? Paris, 1976.
       ■ Pulido Valente, Vasco. "E Viva Otelo." In Pulido Valente, V., ed., O País das Maravilhas, 451-54. Lisbon, 1979 [anthology of articles from weekly Lisbon paper, Expresso].
       ■. Estudos Sobre a Crise Nacional. Lisbon, 1980.
       ■ Rebelo de Sousa, Marcelo. O Sistema de Governo Português antes e depois da Revisão Constitucional, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1981. Rêgo, Raúl. Militares, Clérigos e Paisanos. Lisbon, 1981. Robinson, Richard A. H. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London: Allen & Unwin, 1979.
       ■ Rodrigues, Avelino, Cesário Borga, and Mário Cardoso. O Movemento dos Capitães e o 25 de Abril. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■. Portugal Depois De Abril. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■ Ruas, H. B., ed. A Revolução das Flores. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■ Rudel, Christian. La Liberte couleur d'oeillet. Paris: Fayard, 1980.
       ■ Sa, Tiago Moreira de. Os Americanos na Revolucao Portuguesa ( 1974-1976). Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 2004.
       ■ Sá Carneiro, Francisco. Por Uma Social-Democracia Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■ Sanches Osôrio, Helena. Um Só Rosto. Uma Só Fé. Conversas Com Adelino Da Palma Carlos. Lisbon, 1988. Sanches Osôrio, J. The Betrayal of the 25th of April in Portugal. Madrid: Sedmay, 1975.
       ■ Schmitter, Philippe C. "Liberation by Golpe: Retrospective Thoughts on the Demise of Authoritarian Rule in Portugal." Armed Forces and Society 2 (1974): 5-33.
       ■. "An Introduction to Southern European Transitions from Authoritarian Rule: Italy, Greece, Portugal, Spain and Turkey." In G. O'Donnell,
       ■ P. C. Schmitter, and L. Whitehead, eds., Transitions from Authoritarian Rule, 3-10. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1986.
       ■ Silva, Fernando Dioga da. "Uma Administração Envelhecido." Revista da Ad-ministraçao Pública 2 (Oct.-Dec. 1979).
       ■ Simões, Martinho, ed. Relatório Do 25 De Novembro: Texto Integral, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■ Soares, Isabel, ed. Mário Soares: O homem e o político. Lisbon, 1976. Soares, Mário. Democratização e Descolonização: Dez meses no Governo Provisório. Lisbon, 1975. Sobel, Lester A., ed. Portuguese Revolution, 1974-1976. New York: Facts on File, Inc., 1976.
       ■ Spínola, Antônio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■ Stock, Maria José. Os Partidos do Poder: Dez Anos Depois do " 25 De Abril." Evora, 1986.
       ■ Story, Jonathan. "Portugal's Revolution of Carnations: Patterns of Change and Continuity." International Affairs 52 (July 1976): 417-34. Sweezey, Paul. "Class Struggles in Portugal." Monthly Review 27, 4 (Sept. 1975): 1-26.
       ■ Szulc, Tad. "Lisbon and Washington: Behind Portugal's Revolution." Foreign Policy 21 (Winter 1975-76): 3-62. Tavares de Almeida, Antônio. Balsemão: O retrato. Lisbon, 1981. "Vasco." Desenhos Políticos. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■ Vasconcelos, Alvaro. "Portugal in Atlantic-Mediterranean Security." In Douglas T. Stuart, ed., Politics and Security in the Southern Region of the Atlantic Alliance, 117-36. London: Macmillan, 1988.
       ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "Golpes militares e golpes literários. A literatura do golpe de 25 de Abril de 1974 em contexto histôrico." Penélope. Fazer E Desfazer A História, 19-20 (1998): 191-212.
       ■. "Tributo ao Historiador dos Historiadores. Memorias de A.H.de Oliveira Marques (1933-2007)," Historia XXIX, 95, III series (March 2007), 18-22.
       ■ Wiarda, Howard J. Transcending Corporatism? The Portuguese Corporative System and the Revolution of 1974. Columbia: Institute of International Studies, University of South Carolina, 1976.
       ■. The Transition to Democracy in Spain and Portugal. Washington, D.C.: American Enterprise Institute for Public Policy Research, 1989. Wise, Audrey. Eyewitness in Revolutionary Portugal. With a Preface by Judith Hart, MP. London: Spokesman, 1975.
       ■ PHYSICAL FEATURES: GEOGRAPHY, GEOLOGY, FAUNA, AND FLORA
       ■ Birot, Pierre. Le Portugal: Étude de géographie régionale. Paris, 1950.
       ■ Embleton, Clifford. Geomorphology of Europe. London: Macmillan, 1984.
       ■ Girão, Aristides de Amorim. Divisão regional, divisão agrícola e divisão administrativa. Coimbra, 1932.
       ■. Atlas de Portugal, 2nd ed. Coimbra, 1958.
       ■ Ribeiro, Orlando. Portugal, O Mediterrâneo e o Altântico. Coimbra, 1945 and later eds.
       ■. Portugal. Volume V of Geografia de Espana y Portugal. Barcelona, 1955.
       ■. Ensaios de Geografia Humana e regio nal. Lisbon, 1970.
       ■ Stanislawski, Dan. The Individuality of Portugal. Austin: The University of Texas Press, 1959.
       ■. Portugal's Other Kingdom: The Algarve. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1963.
       ■ Taylor, Albert William. Wild Flowers of Spain and Portugal. London: Chatto & Windus, 1972.
       ■ Way, Ruth, and Margaret Simmons. A Geography of Spain and Portugal. London: Methuen, 1962.
       ■ ARCHAEOLOGY AND PREHISTORY
       ■ "Actas do Colóquio Inter-Universitário do Noroeste Peninsular (Porto-Baião, 1988), vol. II, Proto-História, romanização e Idade Média." In Trabalhos de antropologia e etnologia. 28, 3-4 (1988).
       ■ Alarcão, Jorge de, ed. "Do Paleolítico va arte visigótica." Vol. 1, História da
       ■ Arte em Portugal. Lisbon: Alfa, 1986.
       ■. Roman Portugal, 3 vols. Warminister, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1988.
       ■. Portugal Das Orígens A Romanização. Vol. I. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds. Nova História de Portugal. Lisbon: Presença, 1990. Anderson, James M., and M. S. Lea. Portugal 1001 Sights: An Archaeological and Historical Guide. Calgary, Alberta: University of Calgary and Robert Hale, 1994.
       ■ Balmuth, Miriam S., Antonio Gilman, and Lourdes Prados-Torreira, eds. Encounters and Transformations: The Archaeology of Iberia in Transition. Monographs in Mediterranean Archaeology, no. 7. Sheffield, U.K.: Sheffield Academic Press, 1997.
       ■ Beirão, C. M. M. Une civilization protohistorique du Sud au Portugal ( 1er Age du Fer). Paris: D. Boccard, 1986.
       ■ Cardoso, João Luís, Santinho A. Cunha, and Delberto Aguiar. O Homem Pre-Histórico no Concelho de Oeiras. Oeiras, Portugal: Estudos Arquelógicos de Oeiras, 1991.
       ■ Harrison, Richard J. The Bell Beaker Cultures of Spain and Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1977.
       ■ Mangas, Júlio, ed. Hispania epigraphica. Madrid, 1989.
       ■ Maloney, Stephanie J. "The Villa of Toerre de Palma, Portugal: Archaeology and Preservation." Portuguese Studies Review VIII, 1 (Fall-Winter, 1999-2000): 14-28.
       ■ Savory, H. N. Spain and Portugal: The Prehistory of the Iberian Peninsula. London, 1968.
       ■ Silva, A. C. F. A cultura castreja no Noroeste de Portugal. Paços de Ferreira:
       ■ Museu da Citânia de Sanfins, 1986. Straus, L. G. Iberia before the Iberians. Albuquerque, N.M., 1992.
       ■ FOREIGN TRAVELERS AND RESIDENTS' ACCOUNTS
       ■ Andersen, Hans Christian. A Visit to Portugal 1866. London: Peter Owen, 1972.
       ■ Beckford, William. Italy, with Sketches of Spain and Portugal. Paris: Baudry's European Library, 1834.
       ■ Boyd Alexander, ed. London: Hart-Davies, 1954.
       ■. Recollections of an Excursion to the Monasteries of Alcoboca and Batalha. Fontwell, U.K.: Centaur Press, 1972.
       ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. In Portugal. London: Bodley Head, 1912.
       ■ Borrow, George. The Bible in Spain, 2 vols. London: Constable, 1923 ed.
       ■ Chaves, Castelo Branco. Os livros de viagens em Portugal no século XVIII e a sua projecção europeia. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■ Costigan, Arthur William. Sketches of Society and Manners in Portugal. London: T. Vernon, 1787.
       ■ Crawfurd, Oswald. Portugal Old and New. London: Kegan, Paul, 1880.
       ■. Round the Calendar in Portugal. London: Chapman & Hall, 1890.
       ■ Darymple, William. Travels through Spain and Portugal in 1774. London: J. Almon, 1777.
       ■ Dumouriez, Charles Francois Duperrier. An Account of Portugal as It Appeared in 1766. London: C. Law, 1797.
       ■ Fielding, Henry. Jonathan Wild and the Journal of a Voyage to Lisbon. London: J. M. Dent, 1932.
       ■ Fullerton, Alice. To Portugal for Pleasure. London: Grafton, 1945.
       ■ Gibbons, John. I Gathered No Moss. London: Robert Hale, 1939.
       ■ Gordon, Jan, and Cora Gordon. Portuguese Somersault. London: Harrap, 1934.
       ■ Hewitt, Richard. A Cottage in Portugal. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1996.
       ■ Huggett, Frank. South of Lisbon: Winter Travels in Southern Portugal. London: Gollancz, 1960.
       ■ Hume, Martin. Through Portugal. London: Richards, 1907.
       ■ Hyland, Paul. Backwards Out of the Big World: A Voyage into Portugal. Hammersmith, U.K.: HarperCollins, 1996.
       ■ Jackson, Catherine Charlotte, Lady. Fair Lusitania. London: Bentley, 1874.
       ■ Kelly, Marie Node. This Delicious Land Portugal. London: Hutchinson, 1956.
       ■ Kempner, Mary Jean. Invitation to Portugal. New York: Athenaeum, 1969.
       ■ Kingston, William H. G. Lusitanian Sketches of the Pen and Pencil. 2 vol. London: Parker, 1845.
       ■ Landmann, George. Historical, Military and Picturesque Observations on Portugal. 2 vol. London: Cadell and Davies, 1818.
       ■ Latouche, John [Pseudonym of Oswald Crawfurd]. Travels in Portugal. London: Ward, Lock & Taylor, ca. 1874.
       ■ Link, Henry Frederick. Travels in Portugal and France and Spain. London: Longman & Rees, 1801.
       ■ Macauley, Rose. They Went to Portugal. London: Jonathan Cape, 1946.
       ■. They Went to Portugal, Too. Manchester: Carcanet Books, 1990.
       ■ Merle, Iris. Portuguese Panorama. London: Ouzel, 1958.
       ■ Murphy, J. C. Travels in Portugal. London: 1795.
       ■ Proper, Datus C. The Last Old Place: A Search through Portugal. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1992.
       ■ Quillinan, Dorothy [Wordsworth]. Journal of a Few Months in Portugal with Glimpses of the South of Spain. 2 vol. London: Moxon, 1847. Sitwell, Sacheverell. Portugal and Madeira. London: Batsford, 1954. Smith, Karine R. Until Tomorrow: Azores and Portugal. Snohomish, Wash.: Snohomish Publishing, 1978. Southey, Robert. Journals of a Residence in Portugal, 1800-1801 and a Visit to France, 1838. London and New York: Oxford Univ. Press, 1912. Thomas, Gordon Kent. Lord Byron's Iberian Pilgrimage. Provo, Utah: Brigham Young University Press, 1983. Twiss, Richard. Travels through Portugal and Spain in 1772-1773. London, 1775.
       ■ Watson, Gilbert. Sunshine and Sentiment in Portugal. London: Arnold, 1904. Wheeler, Douglas L. "A[n American] Fulbrighter in Lisbon, Portugal, 196162." Portuguese Studies Review 1 (1991): 9-16.
       ■ PORTUGUESE CARTOGRAPHY, DISCOVERIES, AND NAVIGATION
       ■ Albuquerque, Luís de. Curso de História de Naútica. Coimbra, 1972.
       ■. Introdução a história dos descobrimentos, 3rd ed. Mem Martins, 1983.
       ■. Os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Lisbon: Alfa, 1983.
       ■. Os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■ Boorstin, Daniel. The Discoverers. New York: Random House, 1983. Boxer, C. R. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire, 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.
       ■ Brazão, Eduardo. La découverte de Terre-Neuve. Montreal: Les Presses de l'Université, 1964.
       ■. "Les Corte-Real et le Nouveau Monde." Revue d'histoire d'Amérique Française 19, 1 (1965): 335-49. Cortesão, Armando, and Avelino Teixeira de Mota. Cartografia Portuguesa Antiga. Lisbon, 1960.
       ■. Portugalia Monumenta Cartográfica, 6 vols. Lisbon, 1960-62.
       ■. História da Cartografia Portuguesa, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1969-70.
       ■ Cortesão, Jaime. L'expansion des portugais dans l'historie de la civilisation. Brussels, 1930.
       ■. Os descobrimentos portugueses, 2 vols. V. Magalhães Godinho and Joel Serrão, eds. Lisbon, 1960.
       ■ Costa, Abel Fontoura da. A Marinharia dos Descobrimentos, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1960.
       ■ Costa Brochado, Idalino F. Descobrimento do Atlântico. Lisbon, 1958. English ed., 1959-60.
       ■ Coutinho, Admiral Gago. A naútica dos descobrimentos, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1951-52.
       ■ Crone, G. R. Maps and Their Makers. New York: Capricorn Books, 1966.
       ■ Dias, José S. da Silva. Os descobrimentos e a problemática cultural do Século XVI, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1982.
       ■ Disney, Anthony, and Emily Booth, eds. Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.
       ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães, ed. Documentos sobre a expansão portuguesa [ to 1460], 3 vols. Lisbon, 1945-54.
       ■ Guedes, Max, and Gerald Lombardi, eds. Portugal. Brazil: The Age of Atlantic Discoveries. Lisbon: Bertrand; Milan: Ricci; Brazilian Culture Foundation, 1990. [Catalogue of New York Public Library Exhibit, Summer 1990]
       ■ Harley, J. B., and David Woodward. The History of Cartography. Volume 1: Cartography in Prehistoric, Ancient and Medieval Europe and Mediterranean. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987.
       ■ Leite, Duarte. História dos Descobrimentos: Colectânea de esparsos, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1958-61.
       ■ Ley, Charles. Portuguese Voyages, 1498-1663. London: Dent, 1953.
       ■ Marques, J. Martins da Silva. Descobrimentos portugueses, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1944-71.
       ■ Martyn, John R. C., ed. Pedro Nunes ( 1502-1578): His Lost Algebra and Other Discoveries. John R. C. Martyn, trans. New York: Peter Lang, 1996.
       ■ Morison, Samuel Eliot. The European Discovery of America: The Northern Voyages, A. D. 500-1600. New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.
       ■. Portuguese Voyages to America in the Fifteenth Century. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1974.
       ■ Mota, Avelino Teixeira da. Mar, Além-Mar-Estudos e Ensaios de História e Geografia. Lisbon, 1972.
       ■ Nemésio, Vitorino. Vida e Obra do Infante D. Henrique. Lisbon, 1959.
       ■ Parry, J. H. The Discovery of the Sea. New York: Dial, 1974.
       ■ Penrose, Boies. Travel and Discovery in the Renaissance, 1420-1620. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1952.
       ■ Peres, Damião. História dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. Oporto, 1943.
       ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Portuguese Pioneers. London, 1933; New York: Barnes & Noble, 1967.
       ■ Rogers, Francis M. Precision Astrolabe: Portuguese Navigators and Transoceanic Aviation. Lisbon, 1971.
       ■ Seary, E. R. "The Portuguese Element in the Place Names of Newfoundland." In Luís Albuquerque, ed., Vice-Almirante A. Teixeira da Mota: In Memo-riam. Vol. II, 359-64. Lisbon: Academia da Marinha, 1989.
       ■ Subrahmanyam, Sanjay. The Career and Legend of Vasco Da Gama. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997.
       ■ Velho, Alvaro. Roteiro ( Navigator's Route) da Primeira Viagem de Vasco da Gama ( 1497-1499). Lisbon, 1960.
       ■ Winius, George, ed. Portugal, the Pathfinder: Journeys from the Medieval toward the Modern World 1300-ca. 1600. Madison, Wisc.: Hispanic Seminary of Medieval Studies, 1995.
       ■ PORTUGAL AND HER OVERSEAS EMPIRES (1415-1975)
       ■ Abshire, David M., and Michael A. Samuels, eds. Portuguese Africa: A Handbook. New York: Praeger, 1969.
       ■ Afonso, Aniceto, and Carlos de Matos Gomes. Guerra Colonial. Lisbon: Noticias, 2001.
       ■ Albuquerque, J. Moushino de. Moçambique. Lisbon, 1898.
       ■ Alden, Dauril. The Making of an Enterprise: The Society of Jesus in Portugal, Its Empire & Beyond. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1995.
       ■ Alexandre, Valentim. Orígens do Colonialismo Português Moderno ( 18221891). Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1979.
       ■. Velho Brasil, Novas Africas: Portugal e o Império ( 1808-1975). Oporto: Afrontamento, 2000.
       ■, and Jill Dias, eds. "O Império Africano 1825-1890. Volume X." In J.
       ■ Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds., Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1998.
       ■ Ames, Glen J. "The Carreira da India, 1668-1682: Maritime Enterprise and the Quest for Stability in Portugal's Asian Empire." Journal of European Economic History 20, 1 (1991): 7-28.
       ■. Renascent Empire? The House of Braganza and the Quest for Stability in Portuguese Monsoon Asia, ca. 1640-1683. Amsterdam: Amsterdam Univ.Press, 2000.
       ■. Vasco da Gama. Renaissance Crusader. New York: Pearson/Longman, 2005.
       ■ Antunes, José Freire. O Império com Pés de Barro: Colonizaçao e Descolonização: As Ideologias em Portugal. Lisbon: D. Quixote, 1980.
       ■. O Factor Africano 1890-1990. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1990.
       ■. A Guerra De Africa 1961-1974, 2 vols. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1995-96.
       ■. Jorge Jardim: Agente Secreto 1919-1982. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1996.
       ■ Axelson, Eric A. South-East Africa, 1488-1530. London: Longmans, 1940.
       ■. "Prince Henry and the Discovery of the Sea Route to India." Geographical Journal (U.K.) 127, 2 (June 1961): 145-58.
       ■. Portugal and the Scramble for Africa, 1875-1891. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1967.
       ■. Portuguese in South-East Africa, 1488-1699. Cape Town: Struik, 1973.
       ■. Congo to Cape: Early Portuguese Explorers. New York: Harper & Row, 1974.
       ■ Azevedo, Mário. Historical Dictionary of Mozambique, 2nd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2003.
       ■ Baião, António, Hernãni Cidade, and Manuel Murias, eds. História da Expansão Portuguesa no Mundo, 4 vols. Lisbon, 1937-40.
       ■ Bender, Gerald J. "The Limits of Counterinsurgency [in the Angolan War, 1961-72]." Comparative Politics (1972): 331-60.
       ■. Angola under the Portuguese: The Myth Versus Reality. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978.
       ■ Birmingham, David. The Portuguese Conquest of Angola. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965.
       ■. Trade and Conflict in Angola. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1966.
       ■. Frontline Nationalism in Angola & Mozambique. London: James Currey, 1992.
       ■. Portugal and Africa. New York: St. Martins, 1999.
       ■ Bottineau, Yves. Le Portugal Et Sa Vocation Maritime. Paris: Boccard, 1977. Boxer, C. R. Fidalgos in the Far East— Fact and Fancy in the History of Macau. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1948. ———. The Christian Century in Japan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1951.
       ■ ———. Four Centuries of Portuguese Expansion, 1415-1825: A Succinct Survey. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1961.
       ■ ———. The Golden Age of Brazil, 1695-1750. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1962.
       ■ Clarendon Press, 1963. ———. Portuguese Society in the Tropics. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1965.
       ■ ———. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415-1825. London: Hutchi nson, 1969.
       ■ ———, and Carlos de Azevedo, eds. Fort Jesus and the Portuguese in Mombasa. London: Hollis and Carter, 1960.
       ■ Broadhead, Susan H. Historical Dictionary of Angola, 2nd ed. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1992.
       ■ Burton, Richard. Goa and the Blue Mountains. London: Bentley, 1851.
       ■ Cabral, Luís. Crónica da Libertação. Lisbon, 1984.
       ■ Caetano, Marcello. Colonizing Traditions, Principles and Methods of the Portuguese. Lisbon, 1951.
       ■ ———. Portugal E A Internacionalização Dos Problemas Africanos, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1965.
       ■ Cann, John P. Counterinsurgency in Africa: The Portuguese Way of War, 1961-1974. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1997. Castelo, Claudia. " O modo portugues de estar no mundo." O luso-tropicalismo e a ideologia colonial portuguesa ( 1931-1961). Oporto: Afrontamento, 1998. Castro, Armando. O Sistema Colonial Português em Africa ( meados do Século XX). Lisbon, 1978.
       ■ Chaliand, Gerard. "The Independence of Guinea-Bissau and the Heritage of [Amilcar] Cabral." In Revolution in the Third World. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1978.
       ■ Chilcote, Ronald H. Portuguese Africa. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967.
       ■ Clarence-Smith, Gervase. Slaves, Peasants and Capitalists in Southern Angola 1840-1926. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1979.
       ■ ———. The Third Portuguese Empire 1825-1975: A Study in Economic Imperialism. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1985.
       ■ Coates, Timothy J. Convicts and Orphans: Forced and State-Sponsored Colonizers in the Portuguese Empire, 1550-1720. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 2001.
       ■ Davies, Shann. Macau. Singapore: Times Editions, 1986.
       ■ Dias, C. Malheiro, ed. História da colonização portuguesa no Brasil, 3 vols. Oporto, 1921-24.
       ■ Diffie, Bailey W., and George Winius. Foundations of the Portuguese Empire, 1415-1580. Minneapolis: Minnesota University Press, 1977.
       ■ Disney, Anthony R. Twilight of the Pepper Empire: Portuguese Trade in Southwest India in the Early Seventeenth Century. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1978.
       ■ ———, and Emily Booth, eds. Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.
       ■ Duffy, James. Shipwreck and Empire: Being an Account of Portuguese Maritime Disaster in a Century of Decline. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1955.
       ■ ———. Portuguese Africa. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1959. ———. Portugal in Africa. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1962.
       ■. "The Portuguese Territories." In Colin Legum, ed., Africa: A Handbook to the Continent. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1967. ———. A Question of Slavery. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1967. Felgas, Hélio. História do Congo Português. Carmona, Angola, 1958. ———. Guerra em Angola. Lisbon, 1961.
       ■ Galvão, Henrique, and Carlos Selvagam. O Império Ultramarino Português, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1953.
       ■ Gleijeses, Piero. Conflicting Missions: Havana, Washington and Africa, 19591976. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2002.
       ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. "Portugal and Her Empire." In The New Cambridge Modern History. Vol. V (1961): 384-97; Vol. VI (1963): 509-TO.
       ■ Grenfell, F. James. História da Igreja Baptista em Angola, 1879-1975. Queluz, Portugal: Núcleo, 1998.
       ■ Hammond, Richard J. "Economic Imperialism: Sidelights on a Stereotype." Journal of Economic History XXI, 4 (1961): 582-98.
       ■ ———. Portugal and Africa, 1815-1910: A Study in Uneconomic Imperialism. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1966.
       ■ Hanson, Carl. Portugal and the Wider World 1147-1497. New Orleans, La.: University Press of the South, 2001.
       ■ Harris, Marvin. Portugal's African Wards. New York: American Committee on Africa, 1957.
       ■ ———. "Portugal's Contribution to the Underdevelopment of Africa and Brazil." In Ronald H. Chilcote, ed., Protest & Resistance in Angola & Brazil: Comparative Studies, 209-23. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972.
       ■ Henderson, Lawrence W. Angola: Five Centuries of Conflict. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1979. ———. A Igreja Em Angola. Lisbon: Edit. Além-Mar, 1990. Heywood, Linda. Contested Power in Angola 1840s to the Present. Rochester, N.Y.: University of Rochester Press, 2000.
       ■ Hilton, Anne. The Kingdom of Kongo. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1985.
       ■ Hower, Alfred, and Richard Preto-Rodas, eds. Empire in Transition: The Portuguese World in the Time of Camões. Gainesville: University Presses of Florida, 1985.
       ■ Isaacman, Allen. "The Prazos da Coroa 1752-1830: A Functional Analysis of the Political System." STUDIA (Lisbon) 26 (1969): 149-78.
       ■. Mozambique: The Africanization of a European Institution: The Zambezi Prazos, 1750-1902. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1972.
       ■ ———. The Tradition of Resistance in Mozambique: Anti-Colonial Activity in the Zambesi Valley 1850-1921. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1976.
       ■ James, Martin. Historical Dictionary of Angola, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2004.
       ■ Jardim, Jorge. Sanctions Double-Cross: Oil to Rhodesia. Lisbon, 1978. Johnson, Harold, and Maria Beatriz Nizza da Silva. O Império Luso-Brasileiro 1500-1620. Volume VI. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds. Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1992. Joliffe, Jill. East Timor: Nationalism & Colonialism. University of Queensland Press, 1978.
       ■ Kea, Ray A. Settlements, Trade and Politics in the Seventeenth Century Gold Coast. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982.
       ■ Kohen, Arnold. From the Place of the Dead. The Epic Struggles of Bishop Belo of East Timor. New York: St Martins, 1999.
       ■ Livingstone, Charles, and David Livingstone. Narrative of an Expedition to the Zambezi and Its Tributaries. New York: 1866.
       ■ Livingstone, David. Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa. London, 1857.
       ■ Lobban, Richard, and Joshua Forrest. Historical Dictionary of the Republic of Guinea-Bissau, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 1996. Lobban, Richard, and Marilyn Halter. Historical Dictionary of Cape Verde, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 1993. Martino, Antonio M. Joao de Azevedo Coutinho. Marinheiro e soldado de Portugal. Lisbon: Colibri, 2002. Martins, Rocha. História das Colónias Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1933. Marvaud, Angel. Le Portugal et Ses Colonies. Paris, 1912. Mason, Philip, ed. Angola: A Symposium; Views of a Revolt. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1961. Melo, João de, ed. Os Anos Da Guerra 1961-1975: Os Portugueses em Africa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1988. Miller, Joseph C. Way of Death: Merchant Capitalism and the Angolan Slave Trade, 1730-1830. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1988.
       ■ Ministry of Foreign Affairs. Portugal. Vinte Anos de Defesa do Estado Português de India. Lisbon, 1967.
       ■. Portugal Replies in the United Nations. Lisbon, 1970.
       ■ Mondlane, Eduardo. The Struggle for Mozambique. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1969.
       ■ Moreira, Adriano. Política Ultramarina. Lisbon, 1956.
       ■. Portugal's Stand in Africa. New York: University Publishers, 1962.
       ■, and Jose Carlos Venancio. Eds. Luso-Tropicalismo. Uma Teoria Social em Questao. Lisbon: Vega, 2000.
       ■ Múrias, Manuel, ed. História da expansão portuguesa no mundo, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1937-42.
       ■ Newitt, Malyn. Portuguese Settlement on the Zambesi: Exploration, Land Tenure and Colonial Rule in East Africa. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1973.
       ■. Portugal in Africa: The Last Hundred Years. London: Longmans, 1981.
       ■. A History of Mozambique. London: Hurst, 1995.
       ■. A History ofPortuguese Overseas Expansion, 1400-1668. London: Routledge, 2005.
       ■. História De Portugal. 1933-1974: II Suplemento. Oporto, 1981.
       ■. Um político confessa-se ( Diário: 1960-1968), 3rd ed. Oporto, 1987.
       ■. Salazar. Vol. V: A Resistência ( 1958-1964). Oporto, 1981.
       ■ Nowell, Charles E. "Portugal and the Partition of Africa." Journal of Modern History XIX, 1 (1947): 1-17.
       ■ Nunes, Antonio Lopes Pires. Angola 1961. Da Baixa do Cassange a Nambu-angongo. Lisbon: Prefacio, 2005.
       ■ Okuma, Thomas. Angola in Ferment: The Background and Prospects of Angolan Nationalism. Boston: Beacon, 1962.
       ■ Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wise.: Bruce, 1957.
       ■ Pélissier, René. Les Guerres Grises: Resistance Et Revoltes en Angola ( 18451941). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1977.
       ■. Naissance Du Mozambique: Tome 1, Tome 2, Resistance Et Revoltes Anticoloniales ( 1854-1981), 2 vols. Orgeval: Pélissier, 1984.
       ■. História de Moçambique. Vol. II. Lisbon, 1988.
       ■. Timor En Guerre: Le Crocodile et les Portugais ( 1847-1913). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1996.
       ■ Pires, Adelino Serras, and Fiona Claire Capstick. The Winds of Havoc: A Memoir of Adventure and Destruction in Deepest Africa. New York: St. Martin's, 2001.
       ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Portuguese Pioneers. London: Black, 1933.
       ■ Ranger, T. [Terence] O. "Revolt in Portuguese East Africa: The Makombe Rising of 1917." St. Anthony's Papers. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 15 (1963).
       ■ Remy. Goa, Rome of the Orient. Trans. from the French by Lancelot Sheppard. London, 1957.
       ■ Ribeiro, General Goncalves. A Vertigem da Descolonizacao. Da Agonia do Exodo a Cidadania Plena. Lisbon: Inquerito, 2002. Ricard, Robert. Etudes sur l'Histoire des Portugais au Maroc. Coimbra, 1955.
       ■ Richards, J. M. Goa. London: Hurst, 1982.
       ■ Rodney, Walter. A History of the Upper Guinea Coast, 1545-1800. New York: Oxford University Press, 1970. Rodrigues, José Honório. Africa e Brasil: Outro Horizonte. Rio de Janeiro, 1961.
       ■ Rogers, Francis M. "Valentim Fernandes, Rodrigo de Santaella, and the Recognition of the Antilles as "Opposite India." Boletim da Sociedade de Geografia de Lisboa series 75 (July-September 1957): 279-309.
       ■. The Obedience of a King of Portugal. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1958.
       ■. The Quest for Eastern Christians: Travels and Rumors in the Age of Discovery. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1962.
       ■ Russell-Wood, A. J. Fidalgos and Philanthropists: The Santa Casa da Mi-sericordia of Bahia, 1550-1755. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1968.
       ■. "Colonial Brazil." In David W. Cohen and Jack Greene, eds., Neither Slave nor Free, 84-133. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1972.
       ■. "Local Government in Portuguese America: A Study in Cultural Divergence." Comparative Studies in Society and History 16 (1974): 187-231.
       ■. From Colony to Nation: Essays on the Independence of Brazil. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1975.
       ■. World on the Move: The Portuguese in Africa, Asia & America, 1415-1808. New York: St. Martins, 1993.
       ■ Salazar, António de Oliveira. Goa and the Indian Union. Lisbon, 1954.
       ■. "Portugal, Goa and the Indian Union." Foreign Affairs (New York) 34, 3 (April, 1956): 418-31.
       ■. "Realities and Trends of Portugal's Policies." International Affairs (London) XXXIX, 2 (April 1963): 169-83.
       ■ Saldanha, C. F. A Short History of Goa. Goa, 1957.
       ■ Sanceau, Elaine. Indies Adventure: The Amazing Career of Afonso de Albuquerque. London: Blackie, 1936.
       ■. Portugal in Quest of Prester John. London: Hutchinson, 1943.
       ■. The Land of Prester John. New York: Knopf, 1944.
       ■. Henry the Navigator. New York: Norton, 1947.
       ■. The Perfect Prince: Dom João II. Oporto, 1959.
       ■. Good Hope, the Voyage of Vasco da Gama. Lisbon, 1967.
       ■. The Reign of the Fortunate King ( Manuel I), 1495-1521. Hamden, Conn.: Archon, 1969.
       ■ Schubert, Benedict. A Guerra e as Igrejas: Angola, 1961-1991. Basel, Switzerland: Schlettwein, 2000 [orig. ed. in German, Lucerne, Exodus Pub., 1997].
       ■ Schwartz, Stuart G. Sovereignty and Society in Colonial Brazil. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973.
       ■ Serra, Carlos, ed. História de Moçambique, 2 vols. Maputo, Mozambique: Tempo, 1982-83.
       ■ Silva, Botelho da, ed. and comp. " Dossier" Goa. ( General Manuel) Vassalo e Silva. A Recusa do Sacrifício Inútil. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■ Silva, Maria Beatriz Nizza da, ed. O Império Luso-Brasileiro 1750-1822. Volume VIII. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds., Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1986.
       ■ Silva Cunha J. M. da. Questões Ultramarinos e Internacionais. Lisbon, 1960.
       ■ Silva Rego, A. da. História das missões do padroado português do Oriente: India ( 1500-1542). 1 vol. Lisbon, 1949.
       ■. Portuguese Colonization in the Sixteenth Century: A Study of Royal Ordinances. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1957.
       ■. O Ultramar Português No Século XIX ( 1834-1910). Lisbon, 1966.
       ■ Sousa Dias, Gastão. Os Portugueses em Angola. Lisbon, 1959.
       ■ Sykes, John. Portugal and Africa: The People and the War. London: Hutchinson, 1971.
       ■ Telo, António José. Lourenço Marques na Política Externa Portuguesa. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1991.
       ■. Economia E Império No Portugal Contemporânea. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1994.
       ■. Os Açores e o Controlo do Atlântico. Lisbon: Asa, 1993.
       ■ Vail, Leroy, and Landeg White. Capitalism and Colonialism in Mozambique: A Study of Quelimane District. Minneapolis: Minnesota University Press, 1980.
       ■ Veen, Ernst van. Defeat or Decay? An Inquiry into the Portuguese Decline in Asia 1580-1645. Leiden: University of Leiden, 2000.
       ■ Verlinden, Charles. "Italian Influence on Iberian Colonization." Hispanic American Historical Review 33 (1953): 99-211.
       ■. The Beginnings of Modern Colonization. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1970.
       ■ Vogel, Charles. Le Portugal et Ses Colonies. Paris, 1860.
       ■ Vogt, John. Portuguese Rule on the Gold Coast 1469-1682. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1979.
       ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese in Angola. 1836-1891: A Study in Expansion and Administration." Ph.D. dissertation, Boston University, Department of History, 1963.
       ■. "Anti-Imperialism Traditions in Portugal, Yesterday and Today." Boston University Graduate Journal XII, 2 (Spring 1964): 125-37.
       ■. 'The Portuguese and Mozambique: The Past against the Future." In John A. Davis and James K. Baker, eds., Southern Africa in Transition. 180-96. New York: Praeger, 1966.
       ■. "Gungunhana." In Norman R. Bennett, ed., Leadership in Eastern Africa, Six Political Biographies, 165-220. Boston: Boston University Press, 1968.
       ■. "Gungunyane the Negotiator." Journal of African History IX, 4 (1968): 585-602.
       ■. "Nineteenth-Century African Protest in Angola: Prince Nicolas of Kongo (1830?-1860)." African Historical Studies (Boston) I (1968): 40-59.
       ■. "The Portuguese Army in Angola." Journal of Modern African Studies (Cambridge U.K.), 7, 3 (Oct. 1969): 425-39.
       ■. "Thaw in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 48, 4 (July 1970): 769-81.
       ■. "Portugal in Angola: A Living Colonialism?" In C. Potholm and R. Dale, eds., Southern Africa in Perspective, 172-82. New York: Free Press, 1972.
       ■. "The First Portuguese Colonial Movement, 1835-1875." Iberian Studies (Keele, U.K.) I, 1 (Spring 1975): 25-27.
       ■. "Rebels and Rebellions in Angola, 1672-1892." In Mark Karp, ed., African Dimensions: Essays in Honor of William O. Brown, 81-93. Boston: Boston University Press, 1975.
       ■. "African Elements in Portugal's Armies in Africa (1961-1974)." Armed Forces and Society (Chicago) 2, 2 (Feb. 1976): 233-50.
       ■. "Portuguese Colonial Governors in Africa, 1870-1974." In L. H. Gann and Peter Duignan, eds., African Proconsuls: European Governors in Africa, 415-26. New York: Free Press, 1978; and "J. Mousinho de Albuquerque (1855-1902)" and "J. Norton de Matos (1867-1955)": 427-44; 445-63.
       ■. "The Portuguese Withdrawal from Africa, 1974-1975; The Angolan Case." In John Seiler, ed., Southern Africa Since the Portuguese Coup, 3-21. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1980.
       ■. "The Portuguese Exploration Expeditions and Expansion in Angola, 1877-1883." In Academia de Marinha and Instituto de Investigação Científica Tropical, eds., Vice Almirante A. Teixeira Da Mota: In Memoriam. Volume I, 267-76. Lisbon, 1987.
       ■. "'Aqui é Portugal!': The Politics of the Colonial Idea during the Estado Novo, 1926-1974." In Pavilhão de Portugal, EXPO'98 and Instituto de História Contemporânea, eds., Portugal No Transição Do Milênio: Colóquio Internacional, 375-105. Lisbon: Fim de Século, 1998.
       ■. The Empire Time Forgot: Writing a History of the Portuguese Overseas Empire, 1808-1975. Oporto: Universidade Fernando Pessoa, 1998.
       ■. "Filho Do Porto, Filho Do Império: Antônio Francisco Da Silva Porto (1817-1890) and the Politics of Motivation in Portugal's First and Second Scrambles for Africa (1836-1861; 1875-1891)." Revista da UFP [Universidade Fernando Pessoa] 4 (Dec. 1999): 225-54.
       ■. "'Mais leis do que mosquitos': A Primeira República Portuguesa e o Império Ultramarino (1910-1926)." In Nuno Severiano Teixeira and Antó-nio Costa Pinto, eds., A Primeira República Portuguesa Entre O Liberalismo E O Autoritarismo, 133-68. Lisbon: University Nova de Lisboa, 2000.
       ■. "Spiritual Peoples at Odds: Portugal, India and the Goa Question, 1947-61." In Anthony Disney and Emily Booth, eds., Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia, 452-70. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.
       ■. "Portugal, Africa and the future." In Stewart Lloyd-Jones and Antonio Costa Pinto, eds., The Last Empire: Thirty Years of Portuguese Decolonization, 113-25. Bristol, U.K.: Intellect, 2003.
       ■. "The Forced Labor 'System' in Angola, 1903-1947: Reassessing Origins and Persistence in the Context of Colonial Consolidation, Economic Growth and Reform Failures." In CEAUP, Centro de Estudos Africanos da Universidade do Porto, ed., Trabalho forcado africano-experiencias coloniais comparadas, 367-393. Oporto: CEAUP, 2006.
       ■. "As Raizes Do Nacionalismo Angolano: Publicacoes De Protesto Dos Assimilados, 1870-1940." In Nuno Vidal and Justino Pinto De Andrade, eds., O Processo De Transicao Para O Multipartidarismo Em Angola, 73-92. Lisbon: Ed. Firmamento, 2006.
       ■, and René Pélissier. Angola. London: Pall Mall and New York: Praeger, 1971; reprinted, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977; Portuguese lang. edition, Lisbon: Tinta-da-China, 2009. Whiteway, R. W. The Rise of the Portuguese Power in India, 1497-1550. London: Constable, 1899.
       ■ Winius, George D. The Fatal History of Portuguese Ceylon: Transition to Dutch Rule. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1971.
       ■. "The Portuguese Asian 'Decadência' Revisited." In Alfred Hower and Richard Preto-Rodas, eds., Empire in Transition, 106-17. Gainesville: University Presses of Florida, 1980.
       ■. The Black Legend of Portuguese India. New Delhi: New Concept, 1985.
       ■ Alves, Marcial. Os Portugueses no Mundo. Lisbon, 1983.
       ■ Anderson, Grace M., and David Higgs, eds. A Future to Inherit: Portuguese Communities in Canada. Toronto: McClelland and Stewart, 1976. Arroteia, Jorge Carvalho. A emigração Portuguesa-suas origens e distribuição. Lisbon, 1983.
       ■ Brettell, Caroline B. "Nineteenth- and Twentieth-Century Portuguese Emigration: A Bibliography." Portuguese Studies Newsletter 3 (Fall-Winter, 1977-78).
       ■. "Emigrar Para Voltar: A Portuguese Ideology of Return Migration." Papers in Anthropology 20 (1979): 1-20.
       ■. We Have Already Cried Many Tears: The Stories of Three Portuguese Migrant Women. Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman Publishing Co., 1982.
       ■. Men Who Migrate, Women Who Wait: Population and History in a Portuguese Parish. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.
       ■ Carvalho, Eduardo de. Os portugueses na Nova Inglaterra. Rio de Janeiro, 1931.
       ■ Caspari, Andrea. "The Return Orientation among Portuguese Migrants in France." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 193-203. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone, ed. Portugueses na América do Norte. Baden: Peregrinação, 1983.
       ■ Fagundes, Francisco Cota. Hard Knocks: An Azorean-American Odyssey.
       ■ [Memoir]. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 2000. Felix, John Henry, and Peter F. Senecal. The Portuguese in Hawaii. Honolulu, Hawaii: Authors' edition, 1978. Fernandes, Ferreira. Os Primos da América. Lisbon: Relógio D'Agua, 1991. Ferreira, Eduardo de Sousa. As orígens e formas de emigração. Lisbon, 1976. Freitas, J. F. Portuguese-American Memories. Honolulu, Hawaii, 1930.
       ■ Giles, Wenona. "Motherhood and Wage Labour in London, England: Portuguese Migrant Women and the Politics of Gender." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. University of Toronto, 1987.
       ■ Higgs, David, ed. Portuguese Migration in Global Perspective. Ontario: Multicultural Historical Society of Ontario, 1990.
       ■ Klimt, Andrea. "Portuguese Migrants in Germany: Class, Ethnicity and Gender." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. Stanford University, 1987.
       ■ Lavigne, Gules. Les ethniques et la ville: L'aventure des immigrants portugais à Montreal. Montreal: Preamble, 1987.
       ■ Leder, Hans Howard. Cultural Persistence in a Portuguese-American Community. New York: Arno Press, 1980.
       ■ Lewis, J. R., and A. M. Williams. "Emigrants and Retornados: A Comparative Analysis of the Economic Impact of Return Migration in the Região Centro." In E. D. Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 227-50. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■ McCabe, Marsha L., and Joseph D. Thomas, eds. Portuguese Spinner: An American Story; Stories of History, Culture and Life from Portuguese Americans in Southeastern New England. New Bedford, Mass.: Spinner, 1998.
       ■ Marques, D., and J. Medeiros. Portuguese Immigrants: 25 Years in Canada. Toronto: West End YMCA, 1989.
       ■ Martins, J. Oliveira. Fomento Rural e emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1956.
       ■ Mira, Manuel. The Forgotten Portuguese: The Melungeons and Other Groups; The Portuguese Making of America. Franklin, N.C.: Portuguese-American Historical Research Foundation, 1998.
       ■ Nazareth, J. Manuel. "Familia e Emigração em Portugal." Economia e Sociedade (Lisbon) 23 (1977): 31-50.
       ■ Nunes, Maria Luisa. A Portuguese Colonial in America: Belmira Nunes Lopes; The Autobiography of a Cape Verdean-American. Pittsburgh, Penn.: Latin American Literary Review Press, 1982.
       ■ Oliver, Lawrence. Never Backward: The Autobiography of Lawrence Oliver; A Portuguese-American. San Diego, 1972.
       ■ Pap, Leo. The Portuguese-Americans. Boston: Twayne, 1981.
       ■ Pereira, Miriam Halpern. A Política Portuguesa de Emigraçao, 1850 a 1930. Lisbon: Regra do Jogo, 1981.
       ■ Pereira da Rosa, Victor M., and Salvato V. Trigo. "Elementos para uma Caracterização da Família Imigrante Portuguesa na Africa do Sul." Economia e Sociologia 41 (1986): 61-71.
       ■. Azorean Emigration: A Preliminary Overview. Oporto: Fernando Pessoa University, 1994.
       ■ Purves, James. "Portuguese in Bermuda." Bermuda Historical Quarterly 3 (1946): 133-42.
       ■ Ribeiro, F. G. Cassola. Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■ Rocha-Trinidade, Maria Beatriz da. "La Sociologie des Migrations au Portugal." Current Sociology 32, 2 (Summer 1984): 175-98.
       ■. "Towards Reintegration of Emigrants." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and Guy Clausse, eds., Closing the Migratory Cycle: The Case of Portugal, 183-94. Saarbrücken: Breitenbach, 1985.
       ■. "Emigração." In Dicionario Illustrado Da História De Portugal ( 1985): 205-7.
       ■. A Emigração. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■. "Espaços de herança cultural portuguesa-gentes, factos, políticas." Analise Social (Lisbon) XXIV (1988): 313-51.
       ■ Rocha-Trinidade, Maria Beatriz da, and Jorge Arroteia. Bibliografia da Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1984.
       ■ Rogers, Francis M. Americans of Portuguese Descent: A Lesson in Differentiation. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1974.
       ■ Silva, F. Emídio da. A Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1917.
       ■ Silva, Manuela, et al. Retorno, Emigração e Desenvolvimento Regional em Portugal. Lisbon, 1984.
       ■ Simões, Mário Pinto. O Emigrante Português: Processos de Adaptação ( o exemplo da Suiça). Oporto, 1985.
       ■ Simões, Nuno. O Brasil e a Emigração Portuguesa. Coimbra, 1934.
       ■ Sousa Ferreira, Eduardo de, and Guy Clausse, eds. Closing the Migratory Cycle: The Case of Portugal. Saarbrucken: Verlag Breitenbach, 1986.
       ■ Teixeira, Carlos, and Victor M. Pereira da Rosa, eds. The Portuguese in Canada: From the Sea to the City. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000.
       ■ Viera, David, et al. Portuguese in the United States: A Bibliography ( Supplement to the 1976 Leo Pap Bibliography). Essay Number 6 in Essays in Portuguese Studies. Durham, N.H.: International Conference Group on Portugal, 1989.
       ■ Williams, Jerry. And Yet They Come: Portuguese Immigration from the Azores to the United States. New York: Center for Migration Studies, 1982.
       ■ Portugal's Atlantic Islands (Azores, Madeiras)
       ■ Biddle, Anthony J. Drexel. The Madeira Islands, 2 vols. London: Hurst and Blackett, 1900.
       ■ Bryans, Robin. Madeira, Pearl of the Atlantic. London: Robert Hale, 1959.
       ■. The Azores. London: Faber & Faber, 1963.
       ■ Cooke, Rupert Croft. Madeira. London: Putnam, 1961.
       ■ Cossart, Noel. Madeira— the Island Vineyard. London: Christie's, 1984.
       ■ Da Silva, Fernando Augusto, and Carlos Azevedo de Menezes. Elucidário Madeirense, 3 vols. Funchal, 1940.
       ■ Duncan, T. Bentley. Atlantic Islands in the Seventeenth Century: Madeira, the Azores and the Cape Verdes in Seventeenth-Century Commerce andNavigation. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1972.
       ■ Guill, James H. A History of the Azores Islands. Menlo Park, Calif.: Author's Edition, 1972.
       ■ Instituto Histórico Da Ilha Terceira [Azores]. Os Açores E O Atlântico ( Séculos XIV-XVII) [Proceedings of International Colloquium, August 1983]. Angra do Heroismo, Terceira Island, Azores, 1984.
       ■ Koebel, William Henry. Madeira Old and New. London: Griffiths, 1909.
       ■ Mee, Jules. Histoire de la découverte des Iles Açores. Ghent, 1901.
       ■ Peres, Damião. A Madeira sob os donatórios-Séculos XV e XVI. Funchal, 1914.
       ■ Rogers, Francis M. Atlantic Islanders of the Azores and Madeiras. North Quincy, Mass.: Christopher House, 1979.
       ■ Serpa, Caetano Valadão. A Gente Dos Açores. Identificaçao-Emigraçio E Religiosidade: Séculos XVI-XX. Lisbon: 1978.
       ■ Silva, J. Donald. "With Columbus in Madeira." Portuguese Studies Review (Durham, NH) I, 1 (Spring-Summer 1991).
       ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Azores and the United States (1787-1987): Two Hundred Years of Shared History." Boletim do Instituto Histórico da Ilha Terceira XLV (1988): 55-71.
       ■ Almada, José de. A Aliança Inglesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1947.
       ■ Atkinson, William C. British Contributions to Portuguese and Brazilian Studies. London: British Council, 1974.
       ■ Bourne, Kenneth. The Foreign Policy of Victorian England 1830-1902. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1970.
       ■ British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC). 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance. London: BBC, 1973.
       ■ British Community Council of London. Souvenir Brochure Commemorating the 600th Anniversary of the Anglo-Portuguese Treaty of Alliance and Friendship, 1373-1973. Lisbon, 1973.
       ■ Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. Portugal na Alvorada do Século XX. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Caetano, Marcello "Aliança Inglesa." Enciclopédia Luso-Brasileira da Cultura. Vol. 1 (1963): 1270-1271.
       ■. "L'alliance Anglo-Portuguese: Histoire et situation actuelle." Chronique de politique etrangére (Paris) XX, 6 (1967): 695-708.
       ■ Castro, Armando. A dominação inglesa em Portugal. Estudo seguido de Antologia Textos dos Sécs. XVIII e XIX. Oporto: Afrontamento, 1972.
       ■ Crollen, Luc. Portugal, the U.S. and NATO. Leuven, Belgium: Leuven University Press, 1973.
       ■. "Portugal." In O. De Raeymaeker et al. Small Powers in Alignment, 27-96. Leuven, Belgium: Leuven University Press, 1974.
       ■ Cunha Leal, Francisco. Portugal e Inglaterra. Corunna, 1932.
       ■ Davidson, Basil. "The Oldest Alliance Faces a Crisis." In Philip Masonm, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 138-60. London: Oxford University Press, 1962.
       ■ Duff, Katherine. "The War and the Neutrals." In Arnold and Veronica Toyn-bee, eds., Survey of International Affairs. London: Chatham House, 1956.
       ■ Duffy, James. A Question of Slavery. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1967.
       ■ Epstein, John. "The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 1373-1973." World Survey (London) 54 (June 1973): p. 18.
       ■ Ferreira, José Medeiros. Estudos de Estratégia e Relações Internacionais. Lisbon, 1981.
       ■ Ferreira Martins, General L. O Poder Militar Da Gran-Bretanha E A Aliança Anglo-Lusa. Coimbra, 1939.
       ■ Francis, A. D. The Methuens and Portugal 1691-1700. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1966.
       ■. Portugal 1715-1808. London: Tamesis, 1985.
       ■ Freitas, A. Barjona de. A Questão Ingleza. Lisbon, 1891.
       ■ Gonçalves, Caetano. A Aliança Luso-Britânica e o Domínio Colonial Português. Lisbon, 1917.
       ■ Guedes, Armando Marques. A Aliança Inglesa: Notas de História diplomática, 1383-1943. Lisbon, 1943. Halpern Pereira, Miriam. Revoluçio, finanças, dependência externa. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Howorth, A. H. D'Araujo Scott. A Aliança Luso-Britânica E A Segunda Guerra Mundial. Lisbon, 1956.
       ■ Kay, Hugh. Salazar and Modern Portugal. New York: Hawthorne, 1970.
       ■ Lawrence, L. Nehru Seizes Goa. New York: Pageant, 1963.
       ■ Livermore, H. V. "The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance: Historical Perspective." 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 7-15. Lisbon: BBC, 1973.
       ■ Macedo, Jorge Borges de. História Diplomática Portuguesa-Constantes e Linhas de Força. Lisbon, 1987.
       ■ Manoel, J. de Câmara. Portugal e Inglatterra. Lisbon, 1909.
       ■ Martinez, Pedro S. História Diplomática de Portugal. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■ Medlicott, W. N. The Economic Blockade, Vol. II. London: His Majesty's Stationery Office, 1952.
       ■ Oliveira, Pedro Aires. Os Despojos Da Alianca. A Gra-Bretanha e a questao colonial portuguesa 1945-1975. Lisbon: Tinta-da-China, 2007. Ortigão, Ramalho. John Bull. Lisbon, 1887.
       ■ Prestage, Edgar. Diplomatic Relations of Portugal with France, England and Holland from 1646 to 1668. Watford, U.K.: Voss & Michael, 1925.
       ■. Chapters in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. London: Voss & Michael, 1935.
       ■ Russell, Peter E. The English Intervention in Spain and Portugal in the Time of Edward III and Richard II. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1955. Sarmento, J. E. Morães. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance and Coast Defense. London, 1908.
       ■ Serrão, Joel. "O Ultimatum (January 1890)." Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. IV (1971): 219-24.
       ■ Shafaat, Ahmed Khan, ed. Anglo-Portuguese Negotiations Relating to Bombay, 1660-1667. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1922.
       ■ Sideri, Sandro. Trade and Power: Informal Colonialism in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. Rotterdam: Rotterdam University Press, 1970.
       ■ Sousa, Carlos Hermenegildo de. A Aliança Anglo-Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1943.
       ■ Stone, Glyn A. "The Official British Attitude to the Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 1910-45." Journal of Contemporary History (London) 10, 4 (Oct. 1975): 729-46.
       ■. The Oldest Ally: Britain and the Portuguese Connection, 1936-1941. Woodbridge, U.K.: Royal Historical Society and Boydell Press, 1994. Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. O Ultimatum Inglês: Política Externa no Portugal do 1890. Lisbon, 1990.
       ■ Teles, Basilio. Do Ultimatum ao 30 de Janeiro. Oporto, 1905.
       ■ Vicente, António Pedro. "Um testemunho de 1796 sobre a Situação de Portugal face ao domínio inglês." In Arquivos do Centro Cultural Portugües, IV. Paris, 1972.
       ■ Vieira de Castro, Luís. D. Carlos I. ( Elementos de História Diplomática), 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1941.
       ■ Vincent-Smith, John. "Britain, Portugal and the First World War." European Studies Review 4, 3 (1974).
       ■. "The Portuguese Economy and the Anglo-Portuguese Commercial Treaty of 1916." Iberian Studies (Keele, U.K.) III, 2 (Autumn 1974): 49-54.
       ■. "The Portuguese Republic and Britain, 1910-14." Journal of Contemporary History 10, 4 (Oct. 1975): 707-27.
       ■ Vintras, R. E. The Portuguese Connection: A Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman & Turner, 1974. Viriato [Pseud]. A Aliança lnglesa. Lisbon, 1914.
       ■ Walford, A. R. The British Factory in Lisbon and Its Closing Stages Ensuring upon the Treaty of 1810. Lisbon, 1940.
       ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese in Angola, 1836-1891: A Study in Expansion and Administration." Ph.D. dissertation, History Department, Boston University, 1963.
       ■. "19th Century: Anglo-Portuguese Alliance and the Scramble for Africa." In BBC, 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 40-43. London: BBC, 1973.
       ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, Wisc.) 34, 1, 2 (Summer 1986; Winter 1986): 107-27; 97-111.
       ■ Wordsworth, William. William Wordsworth's Convention of Cintra: A Facsimile of the 1809 Tract [Introduction by Gordon Kent Thomas]. Provo, Utah: Brigham Young University Press, 1983.
       ■ Young, George. Portugal Old and Young. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1917.
       ■ ANTHROPOLOGY, SOCIOLOGY, RURAL AND URBAN SOCIETY
       ■ Almeida, Miguel Vale de. The Hegemonic Male: Masculinity in a Portuguese Town. Oxford: Berghan, 1996.
       ■ Black, Richard. Crisis and Change in Rural Europe: Agricultural Development in the Portuguese Mountains. Aldershot, U.K.: Avebury and Ashgate, 1992.
       ■ Brettell, Caroline B. Men Who Migrate, Women Who Wait: Population and History in a Portuguese Parish. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.
       ■. "The Absence of Men." Natural History 96, 2 (Feb. 1987): 52-61.
       ■. "The Portuguese." In Encyclopedia of World Cultures. New Haven, Conn.: Human Relations Area Files, 1990.
       ■. "The Priest and His People: The Contractual Basis for Religious Practice in Rural Portugal." In Ellen Badone, ed., Religious Orthodoxy and Popular Faith in European Society, 55-75. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1990.
       ■ Brogger, Jan. Pre-bureaucratic Europeans: A Study of a Portuguese Fishing Community. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989. Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. "Portuguese Perspectives." Sociologia Ruralis [Journal of European Rural Sociology] XXIV, 1 (1986); number devoted to rural Portugal today. Chaney, Rick. Regional Emigration and Remittances in Developing Countries: The Portuguese Experience. New York: Praeger, 1986. Cole, Sally. Women of the Praia: Work and Lives in a Portuguese Colonial Community. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1991. Cutileiro, José. A Portuguese Rural Society. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1971.
       ■ Deschamps, Paul. Portugal: La Vie Sociale Actuelle. Paris, 1935.
       ■. Histoire Sociale du Portugal. Paris, 1959.
       ■ Dias, Jorge. Rio do Onor-comunitarismo agropastoral. Oporto, 1953.
       ■. Ensaios Etnológicos. Lisbon, 1961.
       ■. The Portuguese Contribution to Cultural Anthropology. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1964.
       ■. Vilarinho Da Furna: Uma Aldeia Comunitária. Rev. ed. Lisbon, 1981.
       ■ Downs, Charles. Os Moradores à Conquista da Cidade. Lisbon, 1978.
       ■. "Community Organization, Political Change and Urban Policy: Portugal. 1974-1976." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Sociology. University of California, 1980.
       ■. "Residents' Commissions and Urban Struggles in Revolutionary Portugal." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■ Dracklé, Dorlé. Macht und Ohnmacht: Der Kampf num die Agarreform im Alentejo ( Portugal). Gottingen, Germany: Edit. Re, 1991.
       ■ Espírito Santo, Moise. Communidade Rural ao Norte do Tejo. Lisbon, 1980.
       ■ Feijó, Rui, H. Martins, and João de Pina Cabral, eds. Death in Portugal. Oxford: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 1983.
       ■ Feijó, Rui Graça. "State, Nation and Regional Diversity in Portugal: An Overview." In Richard Herr and John H. Polt, eds., Iberian Identity: Essays on the Nature of Identity in Portugal and Spain, 37-47. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, University of California, 1989.
       ■ Feio, Mariano. Les Bas Alentejo et l'Algarve. Lisbon, 1949.
       ■ Ferreira de Almeida, João. Classes sociais nos campos. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■ Fonseca, Ramiro da. O Livro da Saúde e da Doença. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Gallop, Rodney. Portugal: A Book of Folk-Ways. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1936. Reprinted, 1961.
       ■ Hoefgen, Lynn. "The Integration of Returnees from the Colonies into Portugal's Social and Economic Life." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, University of Florida, 1985.
       ■ Ingerson, Alice Elizabeth. "Corporatism and Class Consciousness in Northwestern Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. Johns Hopkins University, 1984.
       ■ Jenkins, Robin. The Road to Alto. London: Pluto Press, 1979.
       ■ Lawrence, Denise. "Menstrual Politics: Women and Pigs in Rural Portugal." In T. Buckley and A. Gottlieb, eds., Blood Magic: The Anthropology of Menstruation, 117-36. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988.
       ■. "Suburbanization of House Form and Gender Relations in a Rural Portuguese Agro-Town." Architecture and Behavior 4, 3 (1988): 197-212.
       ■ Martins, Hermínio. "Portugal." In Margaret S. Archer and Salvador Giner, eds., Contemporary Europe: Class, Status and Power. New York: St. Martins, 1971.
       ■ Mattoso, José. Identificação de um país. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■ Merten, Peter. Anarchismüs und Arbeiterkãmpf in Portugal. Hamburg: Libera-tare Association, 1981.
       ■ Nataf, Daniel. "Social Cleavages and Regime Formation in Contemporary Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, UCLA, 1987.
       ■ Nazareth, J. Manuel. "Familia e Emigração em Portugal: Ensaio Exploratório." Economia e Socialismo 23 (1977): 31-50.
       ■ O'Neill, Brian Juan. "Dying and Inheriting in Rural Tras-os-Montes." Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford 14 (1983): 44-74.
       ■. Social Inequality in a Portuguese Hamlet: Land, Late Marriage, and Inheritance, 1870-1978. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987.
       ■ Pacheco, Helder. Tradições Populares de Portugal. Lisbon, 1985.
       ■ Pardoe, Julia. Traits and Traditions of Portugal, 2 vols. London, 1832.
       ■ Pereira Neto, João Baptista. "Social Evolution in Portugal since 1945." In Raymond S. Sayers, ed., Portugal and Brazil in Transition, 212-27. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1968.
       ■ Pina-Cabral, João de. Sons of Adam, Daughters of Eve: The Peasant World-View of the Alto Minho. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.
       ■. "Sociocultural Differentiation and Regional Identity in Portugal." In
       ■ R. Herr and J. H. Polt, eds., Iberian Identity, 3-18. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, 1989.
       ■ Poinard, Michel. La Retour des Traveilleurs Portugais. Paris: La Documentation Francaise, 1979.
       ■ Reed, Robert Roy. "Managing the Revolution: Revolutionary Promise and Political Reality in Rural Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, Indiana University, 1988.
       ■ Riegelhaupt, Joyce F. "In the Shadow of the City: Integration of a Portuguese Village" [São João das Lampas, nr, Cascais]. Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, Columbia University, 1964.
       ■. "Saloio Women: An Analysis of Informal and Formal Political and Economic Roles of Portuguese Peasant Women." Anthropological Quarterly 40, 3 (July 1967): 109-26.
       ■. "Festas and Padres: The Organization of Religious Action in a Portuguese Parish." American Anthropologist 75 (1973): 835-52.
       ■. "Peasants and Politics in Salazar's Portugal: The Corporate State and Village 'Nonpolitics'" In L. S. Graham and H. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 167-90. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■ Rodrigues, Julieta E. S. de Almeida. "Continuity and Change in Urban Portuguese Women's Roles: Emerging New Household Structures." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Sociology, Columbia University, 1979.
       ■ Rowland, Robert. "Demographic Patterns and Rural Society in Portugal." So-ciologica Ruralis 26, 1 (1986): 36-47.
       ■ Sanchis, Pierre. Arraial. La Fête d'un Peuple: Les Pélerinages Populaires au Portugal. Paris, 1976.
       ■ Siegel, Bernard J. "Social Structure and Medical Practitioners in Rural Brazil and Portugal." Sociologia (São Paulo) 20, 4 (Oct. 1958): 463-76.
       ■. "Conflict, Parochialism and Social Differentiation in Portuguese Society." Journal of Conflict Resolution V, 1 (March 1961): 35-12.
       ■ Smith, T. Lynn. "The Social Relationships of Man to the Land in Portugal." Sociologia 25, 1 (Dec. 1963): 319-43.
       ■ Sousa Santos, Boaventura. "Estado e sociedade na semiperíferia do sistema mundiale: O caso português." Análise Social 87-89 (1985): 869-902.
       ■. "Social Crisis and the State." In Kenneth Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation, 167-95. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.
       ■ Vasconcellos, Joaquim Leite de. Ethnograia Portuguesa, 8 vols. Lisbon, 1941-82.
       ■. Tradições Populares Portugueses. New ed. Lisbon, 1986.
       ■ Willems, Emilio. "On Portuguese Family Structure." International Journal of Comparative Society (Dharwar, India) 3, 1 (Sept. 1962): 65-79.
       ■ ARTS, ARCHITECTURE, URBAN PLANNING, MUSIC
       ■ Almeida, Rodrigo Vicente de. História da Arte em Portugal: ( Segundo Estudo) Documentos lnéditos. Oporto, 1883. Almeida D'Eca, Admiral Vicente M. Castles of Portugal. Lisbon, 1925. Amaral, Francisco K. Lisboa: Uma Cidade em Transformação. Lisbon, 1969. Azevedo, Carlos de, and Chester Brummel. Churches of Portugal. New York: Scala Books, 1985.
       ■ Barreira, João, ed. Arte Portuguesa: As Decorativas, 2 vols. Lisbon, n.d.
       ■ Barretto, Mascarenhas, and George Dykes. Fado: Lyrical Origins and Poetical Motivation. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■ Binney, Marcus. Country Manors of Portugal. London: Scala, 1987.
       ■ Branco, Luís de Freitas. A Música em Portugal. Lisbon, 1930.
       ■ Brito, Manuel Carlos de. Opera in Portugal in the Eighteenth Century. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989.
       ■ Carvalho, Pinto de. História de Fado. Lisbon, 1903 and 1982 eds.
       ■ Castro d'Aire, Teresa. O Fado. Lisbon: Temas da Actualidade, 1996.
       ■ Chicó, Mário Tavares. A Architectura Gótica em Portugal. Lisbon, 1968.
       ■ França, José-Augusto. A Arte em Portugal No Século XIX. Lisbon, 1966.
       ■. Lisboa Pombalina e o Illuminismo, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1977.
       ■ Gallop, Rodney. "The Fado (The Portuguese Song of Fate)." Musical Quarterly XIX (1933): 199-213.
       ■. Eight Portuguese Folksongs. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1936.
       ■ Gil, Júlio. The Finest Churches in Portugal. Lisbon, 1988.
       ■. The Finest Castles in Portugal, 3rd ed. George F. W. Dykes, trans. Lisbon, 1996.
       ■ Gonçalves, Rui Mário. Pintura e escultura em Portugal. Lisbon: Instituto de Cultura, 1984.
       ■. 100 Pintores Portugueses do século XX. Lisbon: Alfa, 1986.
       ■ Kubler, George. Portuguese Plain Architecture: Between Spices and Diamonds, 1521-1706. Middletown, Conn.: Wesleyan University Press, 1972.
       ■. Studies in Ancient American and European Art: The Collected Essays of George Kubler. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1985.
       ■, and Martin Soria. Art and Architecture in Spain and Portugal. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1959.
       ■ Lacerda, Aarão de. História da Arte em Portugal, 2 vols. Oporto, 1942-48.
       ■ Leão, Joaquim de Sousa. "Decorative Art: The Azulejo." In H. V. Livermore, ed. Portugal and Brazil: An Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1953.
       ■ Lopes Graça, Fernando. A canção popular portuguesa. Lisbon, 1953.
       ■ Moita, Luís. O fado: canção de vencidos. Lisbon, 1936.
       ■ Neves, José Cassiano. The Palace and Gardens of Fronteira: Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century Portuguese Style. Lisbon: Quetzal and Scala, 1995. North, C.T. Guia dos castelos antigos de Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon: Bertrand Ed., 2002.
       ■ Pacheco, Jose. Stuart Carvalhais. O desenho grafico e a imprensa. Lisbon: Biblioteca do Empresario, 2000. Pereira, Paulo, ed. Arte portuguesa. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1995. Picchio, Luciana Stegagno. Storia del Teatro Portoghese. Rome: Edizinio deli' Ateneo, 1964.
       ■ Queirós, José. Cerâmica Portuguesa, 2 vols. 2nd rev. ed. Lisbon, 1948.
       ■ Santos, Luís Reis. Monuments of Portugal. Lisbon, 1940.
       ■ Santos, Reinaldo dos. A Escultura em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1948-50.
       ■. História da Arte em Portugal. Oporto, 1953.
       ■ Sasportes, José. História da Dança em Portugal. Lisbon, 1970. Simões, J. M. dos Santos. "Azulejos in a Land of Many Colours." Connoisseur (London) CXXXVII, 551 (1956): 15-21.
       ■ Smith, Robert C. A Talha em Portugal. Lisbon, 1963.
       ■. The Art of Portugal, 1500-1800. London, Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1968.
       ■. "The Building of Mafra." Apollo 97, 134 (April 1973): 360-67.
       ■ Stoop, Anne de. Demeures portugaises dans les environs de Lisbonne. Paris: Weber, 1986.
       ■. Palais et manoirs: Le Minho. Paris: Ed. du Seuil, 1995.
       ■ Tannock, Michael. Portuguese 20th Century Artists: A Biographical Dictionary. Chichester, U.K.: Phillimore, 1978.
       ■ Taylor, René. "The Architecture of Port Wine." The Architectural Review CXXIX, 772 (1961): 368-99.
       ■ Terol, Marylene. Azulejos a Lisbonne. Paris: Hervas, 1992.
       ■ Veiga de Oliveira, Ernesto. Instrumentos musicais populares portugueses. Lisbon, 1982.
       ■ Watson, Walter Crum. Portuguese Architecture. London: Constable, 1908. Wohl, Hellmut. "Carlos Mardel and His Lisbon Architecture." Apollo 97, 134 (April 1973): 350-59.
       ■ Andrade, Sergio de. "Presepios." In Dicionario de Arte Barroca em Portugal. Lisbon: Presenca, 1989. Barreira, Joao. Arte Portuguesa, Arquitectura e Escultura. Lisbon: Excelsior, n.d.
       ■ Cardoso, Arnaldo Pinto. O Presepio Barroco Portugues. Lisbon: Bertrand, 2003.
       ■ Chaves, Luis. Os Barristas Portugueses. Coimbra, 1925.
       ■. Natal Portugues. Oporto: Liv. Classica Editora, 1942.
       ■ Gargano, Pietro. Il Presepio. Otto Secoli di Storia, Arte, Tradizione. Milan: Fenice, 1995.
       ■ Lima, Henrique de Campos F. Joaquim Machado de Castro, Escultor Conimbricense. Coimbra: Instituto de Historia de Arte, 1989. Macedo, Diogo de. Presepios Portugueses. Lisbon: Artis, 1951.
       ■. Machado de Castro. Lisbon: Artis, 1958.
       ■ Morais, Heitor. Natal do Meu Coracao. Braga: Ed. A.O., 1991.
       ■ Pais, Alexandre Nobre. Presepios Portugueses Monumentos do Seculo XVIII em Terracotta, 2 vols. Master's thesis in history of art, Universidade Nova de Lisboa, 1998.
       ■ Queiros, Jose. Ceramica Portuguesa. Lisbon: Presenca, 1998. Santos, Reinaldo dos. A Escultura em Portugal. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1951. Serrao, Vitor. Historia da Arte em Portugal IV-O Barroco. Lisbon: Presenca, 2003.
       ■ Smith, Robert C. The Art Of Portugal 1500-1800. New York: Meredith Press, 1968.
       ■ Sousa, Ernesto de. Presepios. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1998.
       ■ Cinema
       ■ Antunes, Joao and Jose de Matos-Cruz, Cinema Portugues 1896-1998. Lisbon: Lusomundo, 1997.
       ■ Bandeira, Jose Gomes. Porto: 100 anos de cinema portugues. Oporto: Camara Municipal do Porto, 1996. Duarte, Fernando. Primitivos do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Cinecultura, 1960.
       ■ Faria de Almeida, M., Resumo da Historia do Cinema. Lisbon: RTP, 1982. Nobre, Roberto. Singularidades do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Portugalia, n.d.
       ■ Pina, Luis de. Aventura do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Vega, 1977.
       ■. Documentarismo Portugues. Lisbon: IPC, 1977.
       ■. Panorama do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Terra Livre, 1978.
       ■. Historia do Cinema Portugues. Mem Martins: Europa-America, 1986.
       ■ Ribeiro, Felix. O Cinema Portugues antes do Sonoro. Esboco Historiconema Portugues. Lisbon: Terra Livre, 1978.
       ■. Panorama do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: n.d.
       ■ Andresen, Sofia de Melo Breyner. A Fada Oriana. 9th ed. Lisbon: Figueiri-nhas, 1985.
       ■ Araújo, Matilde Rosa. A estrada fascinante. Lisbon: Livros Horizonte, 1988. Barreto, Garcia. Literatura Para Crianças E Jovens Em Portugal. Oporto:
       ■ Campo Das Letras, 1998. Bastos, Glória. A escrita para crianças em Portugal no seculo XIX. Lisbon:
       ■ Caminho da Educaçao, 1997. Cadet, Maria Rita Chiappe. Os Contos da Mamã. Lisbon: Lallement Freres, 1883.
       ■ Castro, Fernanda. Mariazinha em Africa, 2nd ed. Lisbon: Portugália, 1947. Cross, Esther, and Wilbur Cross. Portugal. Chicago: Childrens Press, 1986. DeSkalon, Anna, and Christa Stadtler. We Live in Portugal. New York: Watts, 1987.
       ■ Gomes, Alice. A Nau Catrineta, 2nd ed. Lisbon: Portugália, 1973.
       ■. A literatura para a infância. Lisbon: Torres & Abreu, 1979.
       ■ Letria, José Jorge. Do sentimento mágico da vida. Lisbon: Escritor, 1994. Müller, Adolfo Simões. Historiazinha de Portugal, 6th ed. Oporto: Tavares Martins, 1983.
       ■ Osório, Ana de Castro. Para as crianças. Illustr. by Leal da Câmara. Setúbal: Liv. Crianças, 1908.
       ■ Pires, Maria Laura Bettencourt. História da literatura infantil portuguesa. Lisbon: Vega, 1981. Ribeiro, Aquilino. Arca de Noé-III Classe. Lisbon, 1989. Rocha, Natércia. Breve História da Literatura para Crianças em Portugal. Lisbon: Instituto de Cultura e Língua Portuguesa, 1984.
       ■. Bibliografia geral da literatura portuguesa para crianças. Lisbon: Edit. Comunicação, 1987.
       ■ Sá, Domingos Guimarães de. A literatura infantil em Portugal. Braga: Edit. Franciscana, 1981.
       ■ Selfridge. John. Portugal. New York: Chelsea House, 1990. Vaz de Carvalho, Maria Amália. Contos para os Nossos Filhos, 11th ed. Oporto: Barreira, 1947.
       ■ Viana, António Manuel Couto. Jõao de Deus e um século de literatura infantil em Portugal. Lisbon: Ed. do Templo, 1978.
       ■ Lisbon, Capital City, in History and Literature
       ■ Castelo-Branco, Fernando. Lisboa Seiscentista, 3rd ed. Lisbon: 1969.
       ■ Castilho, Júlio de. Lisboa Antiga, 7 vols. Lisbon, 1935-45.
       ■ Couto, Dejanirah. Histoire de Lisbonne. Paris: Fayard, 2000.
       ■ Crespo, Ángel. Lisboa Mítica e Literária. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1987.
       ■ Dias, Marina Tavares. Lisboa Desaparecida. Lisbon: Quimera, 1990.
       ■ Dionísio, Sant'anna, ed. Guia de Portugal. Vol. I: Lisboa e Arredores. Lisbon: Biblioteca Nacional de Lisboa, 1924, orig. ed; reprint, Gulbenkian Foundation, 1979.
       ■ França, José-Augusto. Lisboa Pombalina e o Iluminismo. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1977.
       ■ Moita, Irisalva, ed. O Livro de Lisboa. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1994.
       ■ Neves, Orlando. Lisboa em Crónica. Lisbon: Author's Ed., 1968.
       ■ Pavão, Luís, and Mário Pereira. Tabernas de Lisboa. Lisbon: Assírio & Alvim, 1981.
       ■ Pessoa, Fernando. Lisboa. O que o turista deve ver: What the Tourist Should See. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1997.
       ■ Queirós, José Maria Eça de. À Capital. Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1960.
       ■ Santos, Piedade Braga, et al. Lisboa Setecentista vista por Estrangeiros. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1996.
       ■ Vieira, Alice. Esta Lisboa. Lisbon: Caminho, 1993.
       ■ Wright, David, and Patrick Swift. Lisbon: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1971.
       ■ Azevedo, João Lúcio. Historia das Cristãos-Novos. Lisbon: Liv. Clássica, 1975.
       ■ Baião, António. A Inquisição em Portugal e no Brasil: Subsídios para a sua história. Lisbon: Arquivo Histórico Portugues, 1906. Bethencourt, Francisco. "Portugal: A Scrupulous Inquisition," In Bengt Ankarloo and Gustav Henningsen, eds., Early Modern Witchcraft: Centres and Peripheries, 403-22. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1990.
       ■. "Os equilíbrios sociais do Poder." In José Mattoso, ed., Historia De Portugal, Vol. 3, No Alvorecer Da Modernidade ( 1480-1620). Lisbon: Estampa, 1993.
       ■. História das Inquisições: Portugal, Espanha e Itália. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1994.
       ■ Braga, Maria Luísa. A Inquisição em Portugal na primeira metade do Séc. XVIII. Lisbon: Inst. Nacional de Investigação Científica, 1992.
       ■ Haliczer, Stephen, ed. Inquisition and Society in Early Modern Europe. London: Croom Helm, 1987.
       ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. Reprint. New York: AMS Press, 1968.
       ■ Magalhães, Joaquim Romero. "Em Busca dos Tempos da Inquisição (15731615)." Revista de História das Ideias 9 (1987): 191-228.
       ■ Mea, Elvira Cunha Azevedo. A Inquisição de Coimbra no Século XVI. Oporto, 1989.
       ■ Mendonça, José Lourenço D. de, and António Joaquim Moreira. História da Inquisição em Portugal. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1980.
       ■ Novinsky, Anita, and Luísa M. Carneiro, eds. Inquisição: Ensaios sobre Mentalidade, Heresias e Arte. Rio de Janeiro: Expressão e Cultura, 1992.
       ■ Pereira, Isais da Rosa. Documentos para a história da Inquisição em Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.
       ■ Rego, Yvonne Cunha, ed. Feiticeiros, Profetas e Visionários: Textos Antigos Portugueses. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional e Casa da Moeda, 1981.
       ■ Saraiva, António José. Inquisição e cristãos-novos. Lisbon: Estampa, 1985.
       ■ Walker, Timothy Dale. "Doctors, Folk Medicine and the Inquisition: The Repression of Popular Healing in Portugal during the Enlightenment Era." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of History, Boston University, 2001.
       ■ Literature in English Translation: Selection
       ■ Alcaforado, Mariana. The Letters of a Portuguese Nun ( Mariana Alcaforado). Edgar Prestage, trans. London: D. Nutt, 1893.
       ■ Andrade, Eugénio de. "White on White." Alexis Levitin, trans. Quarterly Review of Literature. Poetry Series VIII. Vol. 27. Princeton, N.J., 1987.
       ■. Another Name for Earth; O outro nome da terra. Alexis Levitin, trans. Ft. Bragg, Calif.: QED Press, 1997.
       ■ Andresen, Sophia de Mello Breyner. Marine Rose: Selected Poems. Ruth Fain-light, trans. Redding Ridge, Conn.: Swan Books, 1989.
       ■ Antunes, António Lobo. South of Nowhere. Elizabeth Lowe, trans. New York: Random House, 1983.
       ■. Fado Alexandrino. Gregory Rabassa, trans. New York: Grove Weidenfeld, 1990.
       ■. An Explanation of the Birds. Richard Zenith, trans. New York: Grove Weidenfeld, 1991.
       ■. Act of the Damned. New York: Grove Press, 1995.
       ■. The Natural Order of Things. New York: Grove Press, 2000.
       ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. The Three Marias: New Portuguese Letters. Helen R. Lane, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975.
       ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. Poems from the Portuguese ( with the Portuguese text). A.
       ■ Bell, trans. Oxford: Blackwell, 1913.
       ■ Camões, Luís de. The Lusiads of Luís de Camões. Leonard Bacon, trans. New York: Hispanic Society of America, 1950.
       ■. The Lusiads. William C. Atkinson, trans. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1952.
       ■. The Lusiads. Landeg White, trans. New York: Oxford University Press, 1997.
       ■ Castelo Branco, Camilo. Doomed Love ( A Family Memoir). Alice R. Clemente, trans Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1995. Castro, José Maria Ferreira de. Emigrants. Dorothy Ball, trans. New York: Macmillan, 1962.
       ■. Jungle. Charles Duff, trans. New York: Viking, 1935.
       ■. The Mission. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Hamilton, 1963.
       ■ Dantas, Júlio. The Cardinals' Collation, 48th ed. A. Saintsbury, trans. London, 1962.
       ■ Dias de Melo. Dark Stones. Gregory McNab, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1996.
       ■ Dinis, Júlio. The Fidalgos of Casa Mourisca. Rosanna Dabney, trans. Boston: D. Lothrop, 1891.
       ■ Garrett, Almeida. Brother Luiz de Sousa [play]. Edgar Prestage, trans. London: Elkin Mathess, 1909.
       ■. Travels in My Homeland. John M. Parker, trans. London: Peter Owen and UNESCO, 1987. Griffin, Jonathan. Camões: Some Poems Translated from the Portuguese by Jonathan Griffin. London: Menard Press, 1976. Jorge, Lídia. The Murmuring Coast. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1995.
       ■ Lisboa, Eugénio, ed. Portuguese Short Fiction. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1997.
       ■ Lopes, Fernão. The English in Portugal 1367-87: Extracts from the Chronicles of Dom Fernando and Dom João. Derek W. Lomax and R. J. Oakley, eds. and trans. Warminster, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1988.
       ■ Macedo, Helder, ed. Contemporary Portuguese Poetry: An Anthology in English. Helder Macedo, et al., trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet New Press, 1978.
       ■ Martins, J. P. De Oliveira. A History of Iberian Civilization. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans.; preface by Salvador de Madariaga. New York: Cooper Square, 1969.
       ■ Mendes Pinto, Fernão. The Travels of Mendes Pinto [Orig. title: Peregrinação].
       ■ Rebecca D. Catz, trans., with introduction and notes. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1989. Miguéis, José Rodrigues. A Man Smiles at Death with Half a Face. George
       ■ Monteiro, trans. Hanover, N.H.: University Press of New England, 1991.
       ■. Happy Easter. John Byrne, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1995.
       ■. Steerage and Ten Other Stories. George Monteiro, ed. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1998. Monteiro, Luís De Sttau. The Rules of the Game. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Hamilton, 1965.
       ■ Mourão-Ferreira, David. Lucky in Love. Christine Robinson, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1999. Namora, Fernando. Field of Fate. Dorothy Ball, trans. London: Macmillan, 1970.
       ■. Mountain Doctor. Dorothy Ball, trans. London: Macmillan, 1956.
       ■ Nemésio, Vitorino. Inclement Weather over the Channel. Francisco Cota Fagundes, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1993.
       ■. Stormy Isles: An Azorean Tale. Francisco C. Fagundes, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 2000.
       ■ Paço D'Arcos, Joaquim. Memoirs of a Banknote. Robert Lyle, trans. London, 1968.
       ■ Pedroso, Consiglieri, comp. Portuguese Folk-Tales. Henriqueta Monteiro, trans. Reprint of orig. 1882 ed. New York: Benjamin Blom, 1969.
       ■ Pessoa, Fernando. Fernando Pessoa: Sixty Portuguese Poems. F. E. G. Quintanilha, ed. and trans. Cardiff: University of Wales Press, 1971.
       ■. Selected Poems: Fernando Pessoa. 2nd rev. ed. Jonathan Griffin, trans. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1982.
       ■. The Book of Disquiet. Alfred MacAdams, trans. New York: Pantheon, 1991.
       ■. Fernando Pessoa: Selected Poems. Peter Rickard, ed. and trans. Edinburgh, U.K.: Edinburgh University Press, 1991.
       ■. "The Mariner: A 'Static Drama' in One Act." In Translation: Portugal.
       ■ George Ritchie, et al., trans. The Journal of Literary Translation. Vol. XXV, 38-56. New York: Translation Center, Columbia University, 1991.
       ■. Message: Bilingual Edition. Jonathan Griffin, trans. London: Menard Press and King's College, 1992.
       ■ Pires, José Cardoso. Ballad of a Dog's Beach. Mary Fitton, trans. London: J. M. Dent, 1986.
       ■ Queirós, José Maria Eça de. Cousin Bazilio. Roy Campbell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1953.
       ■. The Relic. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1954.
       ■. The City and the Mountains. Roy Campbell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1955.
       ■. The Sin of Father Amaro. Nan Flanagan, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1962.
       ■. The Maias. Patricia McGowan Pinheiro, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1965.
       ■. The Illustrious House of Ramires. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1968.
       ■. Letters from England. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1970.
       ■. To the Capital. John Vetch, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1995.
       ■ Quental, Antero de. Sixty-four Sonnets. Edgar Prestage, trans. London: David Nutt, 1894.
       ■ Redol, Alves. The Man with Seven Names. L. L. Barrett, trans. New York: Knopf, 1964.
       ■ Resende, André de. André deResende's 'Poema Latina'/ 'Latinpoems.' J. C. R. Martyn, ed. and trans. Lewiston N.Y.: Lampeter and Edwin Mellen, 1998. Ribeiro, Aquilino. When the Wolves Howl. Patricia McGowan Pinheiro, trans. New York: Macmillan; London: Cape, 1963. Sá Carneiro, Mário de. The Great Shadow ( and Other Stories). Margaret Jull Costa, trans. Sawtry, U.K.: Dedalus, 1996. Santareno, Bernardo. The Promise. Nelson H. Vieira, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1981.
       ■ Saramago, José. Baltasar and Blimunda. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1987.
       ■. The Stone Raft. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1991.
       ■. The Year of the Death of Ricardo Reis. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1991.
       ■. The History of the Siege of Lisbon. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt Brace, 1996.
       ■. Blindness. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1999.
       ■. Tale of the Unknown Island. New York: Harcourt Brace, 2000.
       ■. All the Names. Margaret Jull Costa, trans. New York: Harcourt, 2000.
       ■. Journey to Portugal. New York: Harcourt Brace, 2001.
       ■ Sena, Jorge de. The Poetry of Jorge de Sena: A Bilingual Selection. Frederick G. Williams et al., trans. Santa Barbara, Calif.: Mudborn Press, 1980.
       ■. By the Rivers of Babylon and Other Stories. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1989.
       ■ Vicente, Gil. Four Plays of Gil Vicente: Edited from the Editio Princeps ( 1562). Aubrey F. G. Bell, ed. and trans. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1920.
       ■. Lyrics of Gil Vicente. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans. Oxford: Oxford University Press, Hispanic Notes and Monographs, Portuguese Series 1, 1921.
       ■. The Play of Rubena. Jack E. Tomlins, trans.; Rene P. Garay and José I. Suarez, eds. New York: National Hispanic Foundation for Humanities, 1993.
       ■. The Boat Plays. David Johnston, trans. and adaptation. London: Oberon, 1996.
       ■. Three Discovery Plays. Anthony Lappin, trans. Warminster, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1997.
       ■ Vieira, António. Dust Thou Art. Rev. W. Anderson, trans. London, 1882.
       ■ Portuguese and Portuguese-American Cooking: Cuisine
       ■ Anderson, Jean. Food of Portugal. New York: Hearst, 1994. Asselin, E. Donald. A Portuguese-American Cookbook. Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1966.
       ■ Bourne, Ursula. Portuguese Cookery. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1973. Crato, Maria Helena Tavares. Cozinha Portuguesa I, II. Lisbon: Editorial Presença, 1978.
       ■ Dienhart, Miriam, and Anne Emerson, ed. Cooking in Portugal. Cascais: American Women of Lisbon, 1978.
       ■ Feibleman, Peter S. The Cooking of Spain and Portugal. New York: Time-Life Books; Foods of the World, 1969.
       ■ Koehler, Margaret H. Recipes from the Portuguese of Provincetown. Riverside, Conn.: Chatham Press, 1973. Manjny, Maite. The Home Book of Portuguese Cookery. London: Faber & Faber, 1974.
       ■ Marques, Susan Lowndes. Good Food from Spain and Portugal. London: Muller, 1956.
       ■ Modesto, Maria de Lourdes. Cozinha Tradicional Portuguesa. Lisbon: Verbo, 1982.
       ■ Ortiz, Elisabeth Lambert. The Food of Spain and Portugal. The Complete Iberian Cuisine. New York: Atheneum, 1989. Pinto, Elvira. La Bonne Cuisine Portugaise. Paris: Edicions Garanciere, 1985.
       ■ Robertson, Carol. Portuguese Cooking: The Authentic and Robust Cuisine of Portugal. Berkeley Calif.: North Atlantic, 1993. Schmaeling, Tony. The Cooking of Spain and Portugal. Ware, U.K.: Omega, 1983.
       ■ Vieira, Édite. The Taste of Portugal. London: Robinson, 1989.
       ■ Von Treskow, Maria. Zü Gast in Portugal: Eine Kulnarische Reise in Garten Europas. Weingarten: Kunstverlag, 1989. Wright, Carol. Portuguese Food. London: Dent, 1969.
       ■ Afonso, Simonetta Luz, and Angela Delaforce. Palace of Queluz— The Gardens. Lisbon, 1989.
       ■ Araújo, Iluídio Alves de. Arte Paisagista e Arte das Jardins em Portugal. Lisbon, 1962.
       ■ Azeredo, Francisco de. Casas Senhoriais Portuguesas. Barcelos, 1986.
       ■ Binney, Marcus. Country Manors of Portugal. New York: Scala Books, 1987.
       ■ Bowe, Patrick, and Nicolas Sapieha. Gardens of Portugal. New York: Scala Books and Harper and Row, 1989.
       ■ Cane, Florence du. The Flowers and Gardens of Madeira. London, 1924.
       ■ Cardoso, Pedro Homem, and Helder Carita. Da Grandeza das Jardins em Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.
       ■ Carita, Helder, and Homem Cardoso. Portuguese Gardens. London: Antique Collector's Club, 1987.
       ■ Costa, António da, and Luís de O. Franquinho. Madeira: Plantas e Floras. Funchal, 1986.
       ■ Nichols, Rose Standish. Spanish and Portuguese Gardens. Boston, 1926.
       ■ Pereira, Arthur D. Sintra and Its Farm Manors. Sintra, 1983.
       ■ Sampaio, Gonçalo. Flora Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1946.
       ■ Sitwell, Sacheverell. Portugal and Madeira. London: Batsford, 1945.
       ■ Underwood, John, and Pat Underwood. Landscapes of Madeira. London, 1980.
       ■ Vieira, Rui. Flowers of Madeira. Funchal, 1973.
       ■ Viterbo, Francisco Marques de Sousa. A Jardinagem em Portugal, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1906-9.
       ■ Education, Science, Health, and Medical History
       ■ Albuquerque, Luís de. Estudos de História, 3 vols. Coimbra, 1973-81.
       ■ Baião, Antônio. Episódios Dramáticos da Inquisição Portuguesa, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1936-55.
       ■ Cabreira, Antônio. Portugal nos mares e nas ciências. Lisbon, 1929. Carvalho, Rômulo de. A Astronomia em Portugal (séc. xviii). Lisbon, 1985. Fernandes, Barahona. Egas Moniz: Pioneiro de descobrimentos médicos. Lisbon, 1983.
       ■ Gaitonde, P. D. Portuguese Pioneers in India: Spotlight on Medicine. London: Sangam Books, 1983.
       ■ Hanson, Carl A. "Portuguese Cosmology in the Late Seventeenth Century." In Benjamin F. Taggie and Richard W. Clement, eds., Iberia & the Mediterranean, 75-85. Warrensburg: Central Missouri State University, 1989.
       ■ Higgins, Michael H., and Charles F. S. de Winton. Survey of Education in Portugal. London, 1942.
       ■ Hirsch, Elizabeth Feist. Damião de Góis: The Life and Thought of a Portuguese Humanist. The Hague, 1967.
       ■ Lemos, Maximiano. Arquivos de História da Medicina Portuguesa. Several vols. Lisbon, 1886-1923. Vol. I. História da Medicina em Portugal. Doutrina e Instituições. Lisbon, 1899.
       ■ Mira, Matias Ferreira de. História da Medicina Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1948.
       ■ Orta, Garcia de. Colóquios dos Simples e Drogas e Cousas Medicinais da India. Conde de Ficalho, ed., 2 vols. Lisbon, 1891-95.
       ■ Osório, J. Pereira. História e Desenvolvimento da Ciência em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1986-89.
       ■ Pina, Luís de. "Uma prioridade portuguesa do século XVI. João de Barros e a Dactiloscópia Oriental." Arquivo da Repartição de Antropologia Criminal IV (1936).
       ■. "As Ciências na História do Império Colonial Português — Séculos XV a XIX." Anais de Faculdade de Ciências do Porto ( 1939-10).
       ■. "Os Portugueses Mestres de Ciência e Metras no Estrangeiro." Actas do Congresso do Mundo Português. Lisbon, 1940.
       ■. "A Ciência em Portugal (bosquejo Histórico)." In Secretariado Nacional da Informação, ed., Portugal: Breviário Da Pátria Para Os Portugueses Ausentes, 277-301. Lisbon, 1946.
       ■ Richards, Robert A. C., ed. Guide to World Science: Vol. 9: Spain and Portugal, 2nd ed. Guernsey, U.K.: F. H. Books, 1974.
       ■ Saraiva, António José. História da Cultura em Portugal, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1950-62.
       ■ ———. "João de Barros." In Serrao, ed., Dicionário de História de Portugal 1 (1963): 307-8.
       ■ Veiga-Pires, J. A., and Ronald G. Grainger, eds. Pioneers in Angiography: The Portuguese School ofAngiography. Lancaster, U.K.: MTP Press, 1982.
       ■ Walker, Timothy. "Doctors, Folk Medicine and the Inquisition: The Repression of Popular Healing in Portugal during the Enlightenment Era." Ph.D. dissertation, History Department, Boston University, 2001.
       ■ Barbosa, Madelena. "Women in Portugal." Women's Studies International Quarterly 4 (1981): 477-80.
       ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. Novas Cartas Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1972.
       ■ ———. The Three Marias. New Portuguese Letters. Helen R. Lane, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975.
       ■ Brettell, Caroline B. We Have Already Cried Many Tears: The Stories of Three Portuguese Migrant Women. Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman, 1982.
       ■ Ferreira, Virginia. "Engendering Portugal: Social Change, State Politics, and Women's Social Mobilization." In António Costa Pinto, ed., Modern Portugal, 162-88. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.
       ■ Goodwin, Mary. "Portuguese Feminism." Portuguese Studies Newsletter 17 (Spring-Summer 1987): 12-13.
       ■ Lamas, Maria. As Mulheres do Meu País. Lisbon, 1948.
       ■ "Mulheres Portuguesas e Feminismo." Análise Social [special number on Portuguese Women and Feminism] 22 (1986): 92-93.
       ■ Osório, Ana de Castro. As Mulheres Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1905.
       ■ Sadlier, Darlene J. The Question of How: Women Writers and New Portuguese Literature. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood; Contributions in Women's Studies, no. 109, 1989.
       ■ Silva, Manuela. The Employment of Women in Portugal. Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications, European Communities, 1984. Velho da Costa, Maria. Maina Mendes. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■ Vicente, Ana, and Maria Reynolds de Souza. Family Planning in Portugal. Lisbon, 1984.
       ■ Almeida, Fortunato de. História da Igreja em Portugal. 6 vols. Coimbra, 1910-24, and Oporto, 1967-72. Alonso, Joaquim Maria. The Secret of Fátima: Fact and Legend. Cambridge, Mass.: Ravengate Press, 1979. Alves, José da Felicidade, ed. Católicos e política de Humberto Delgado à Marcelo Caetano. Lisbon, 1969. Araújo, Miguel de, ed. Dicionario político; 1; Os Bispos e a revoluçao de Abril. Lisbon, 1976. Bishko, Charles Julian. Spanish and Portuguese Monastic History 600-1300. London, Variorum Reprints, 1984.
       ■ Blanshard, Paul. Freedom and Catholic Power in Spain and Portugal. Boston: Beacon Press, 1962.
       ■ Boxer, C. R. The Church Militant and Iberian Expansion 1440-1770. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1978. Bruneau, Thomas C. "Church and State in Portugal: Crises of Cross and Sword." Journal of Church and State XVIII (1976): 463-90. Freire, José Geraldes. Resistência Católico ao Salazarismo-Marcelismo. Oporto, 1976.
       ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. John C. Banner, trans. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1962.
       ■ IPOPE. Estudo sobre liberdade e religião em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973. Johnston, Francis. Fátima: The Great Sign. Chulmleigh, U.K.: Augustine Publications, 1980.
       ■ Kondor, Fr. Louis. Fátima in Lucia's Own Words: Sister Lucia's Memoirs. Fatima: Postulation Center, 1976. Lourenço, Joaquim Maria. Situação jurídica da Igreja em Portugal. Coimbra, 1943.
       ■ Mattoso, José. Religião e Cultura na Idade Média Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1982. Miller, Samuel J. Portugal and Rome c. 1748-1830: An Aspect of Catholic Enlightenment. Rome: Universita Gregoriana Editrice, 1978. O'Malley, John W. The First Jesuits. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1993.
       ■ Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wisc.: Bruce, 1957.
       ■ Prestage, Edgar. Portugal: A Pioneer of Christianity. Lisbon, 1945.
       ■ Richard, Robert. Etudes sur l'histoire morale et religieuse de Portugal. Paris: Centro Cultural de Gulbenkian, 1970.
       ■ Robinson, Richard A. H. "The Religious Question and Catholic Revival in Portugal, 1900-1930." Journal of Contemporary History XII (1977): 345-62.
       ■. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London: Allen & Unwin, 1979.
       ■ Rodrigues, R. P. Francisco. História da Companhia de Jesus na Assistência de Portugal, 7 vols. Lisbon, 1931-50.
       ■ Roth, Cecil. A History of the Marranos. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America, 1932.
       ■ Agriculture, Viticulture, and Fishing
       ■ Abreu-Ferreira, Darlene. "The Portuguese in Newfoundland: Documentary Evidence Examined." Portuguese Studies Review 4, 1 (1995-96): 11-33.
       ■ Allen, H. Warner. The Wines of Portugal. London: Michael Joseph, 1963.
       ■ Barros, Afonso de. A reforma agrária em Portugal. Oeiras, 1979.
       ■ Beamish, Huldine V. The Hills of Alentejo. London: Geoffrey Bles, 1958.
       ■ Bennett, Norman R. "The Golden Age of the Port Wine System, 1781-1807." The International History Review XII (1990): 221-18.
       ■ Black, Richard. "The Myth of Subsistence: Market Production in the Small Farm Sector of Northern Portugal." Iberian Studies 1, 8 (1989): 25-41.
       ■ Bravo, Pedro, and Duarte de Oliveira. Viticulture Moderna. Lisbon, 1974.
       ■. Vinhas e Vinhos De Portugal. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Cabral, Manuel V. "Agrarian Structures and Recent Movements in Portugal." Journal of Peasant Studies 4, 5 (July 1978): 411-45.
       ■ Cardoso, José Carvalho. A Agricultura Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1973.
       ■ Carvalho, Bento de. Guía Dos Vinhos Portugueses. Lisbon, 1982.
       ■ Clarke, Robert. Open Boat Whaling in the Azores: The History and Present Methods of a Relic Industry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1954.
       ■ Cockburn, Ernest. Port Wine and Oporto. London: Wine & Spirit, 1949. Cole, S. C. "Cod, Cod Country and Family: The Portuguese Newfoundland Fishery." Mast 3, 1 (1990): 1-29.
       ■ Coull, James. The Fisheries of Europe. London: G. Bell & Sons, 1972.
       ■ Croft-Cooke, Rupert. Port. London: Putnam, 1957.
       ■. Madeira. London: Putnam, 1961.
       ■ Delaforce, John. The Factory House at Oporto. London: Christie's Wine Publications, 1979 and later eds.
       ■ Doel, Patricia A. Port O'Call: Memories of the Portuguese White Fleet in St. John's Newfoundland. St. John's, Newfoundland: ISER, 1992.
       ■ Fletcher, Wyndham. Port: An Introduction to Its History and Delights. London: Bernet, 1978.
       ■ Francis, A. D. The Wine Trade. London: Adam and Charles Black, 1972.
       ■ Freitas, Eduardo, João Ferreira de Almeida, and Manuel Villaverde Cabral. Modalidades de penetração do capitalismo na agricultura: estruturas agrárias em Portugal Continental, 1950-1970. Lisbon, 1976.
       ■ Gonçalves, Francisco Esteves. Portugal: A Wine Country. Lisbon, 1984.
       ■ Gulbenkian Foundation. Agrarian Reform. Lisbon, 1981.
       ■ Kurlansky, Mark. Cod: A Biography of the Fish That Changed the World. New York: Walker, 1997.
       ■ Malefakis, Edward. "Two Iberian Land Reforms Compared: Spain, 1931-1936 and Portugal, 1974—1978." In Gulbenkian Foundation, Agrarian Reform. Lisbon, 1981.
       ■ Moreira da Fonseca, A. Port Wine: Notes on Its History, Production and Technology. Oporto, 1981.
       ■ Moutinho, M. História da pesca do bacalhau. Lisbon: Imprensa Universitária, 1985.
       ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. lntrodução a história da agricultura em Portugal.
       ■ Lisbon, 1968. Pato, Octávio. O Vinho. Lisbon, 1971.
       ■ Pearson, Scott R. Portuguese Agriculture in Transition. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1987.
       ■ Postgate, Raymond. Portuguese Wine. London: Dent, 1969.
       ■ Read, Jan. The Wines of Portugal. London: Faber & Faber, 1982.
       ■ Robertson, George. Port. London: Faber & Faber, 1982 ed.
       ■ Rutledge, Ian. "Land Reform and the Portuguese Revolution." Journal of Peasant Studies 5, 1 (Oct. 1977): 79-97.
       ■ Sanceau, Elaine. The British Factory at Oporto. Oporto, 1970.
       ■ Simon, Andre L. Port. London: Constable, 1934.
       ■ Simões, J. Os grandes trabalhadores do Mar: Reportagens na Terra Nova e na Groenlândia. Lisbon: Gazeta dos Caminho de Ferro, 1942.
       ■ Smith, Diana. Portugal and the Challenge of 1992: Special Report. New York: Camões Center/RIIC, Columbia University, 1990.
       ■ Stanislawski, Dan. Landscapes of Bacchus: The Vine in Portugal. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1970.
       ■ Teixeira, Carlos, and Victor M. Pereira da Rosa, eds. The Portuguese in Canada: From the Seat to the City. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000.
       ■ Unwin, Tim. "Farmers' Perceptions of Agrarian Change in Northwest Portugal." Journal of Rural Studies 1, 4 (1985): 339-57.
       ■ Valadão do Valle, E. Bacalhau: tradições históricas e económicos. Lisbon, 1991.
       ■ Venables, Bernard. Baleia! The Whalers of Azores. London: Bodley Head, 1968.
       ■ Villiers, Alan. The Quest of the Schooner Argus: A Voyage to the Banks and Greenland. New York: Scribners, 1951. World Bank. Portugal: Agricultural Survey. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.
       ■ ECONOMY, INDUSTRY, AND DEVELOPMENT
       ■ Aiyer, Srivain, and Shahid A. Chandry. Portugal and the E.E.C.: Employment and Implications. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Baklanoff, Eric N. The Economic Transformation of Spain and Portugal. New York: Praeger, 1978.
       ■. "Changing Systems: The Portuguese Revolution and the Public Enterprise Sector." ACES ( Association of Comparative Economic Studies) Bulletin 26 (Summer-Fall 1984): 63-76.
       ■. "Portugal's Political Economy: Old and New." In K. Maxwell and M. Haltzel, eds., Portugal: Ancient Country, Young Democracy, 37-59. Washington, D.C.: Wilson Center Press, 1990.
       ■ Barbosa, Manuel P. Growth, Migration and the Balance of Payments in a Small, Open Economy. New York: Garland, 1984.
       ■ Braga de Macedo, Jorge, and Simon Serfaty, eds. Portugal since the Revolution: Economic and Political Perspectives. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1981.
       ■ Carvalho, Camilo, et al. Sabotagem Econômica: " Dossier" Banco Espírito Santo e Comercial de Lisboa. Lisbon, 1975.
       ■ Corkill, David. The Development of the Portuguese Economy: A Case of Euro-peanization. London: Routledge, 1999.
       ■ Cravinho, João. "The Portuguese Economy: Constraints and Opportunities." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 111-65. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.
       ■ Dornsbusch, Rudiger, Richard S. Eckhaus, and Lane Taylor. "Analysis and Projection of Macroeconomic Conditions in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 299-330. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.
       ■ The Economist (London). "On the Edge of Europe: A Survey of Portugal." (June 30, 1981): 3-27.
       ■. "Coming Home: A Survey of Portugal." (May 28, 1988).
       ■. 'The New Iberia: Not Quite Kissing Cousins" [Spain and Portugal]. (May 5, 1990): 21-24.
       ■ Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian and German Marshall Fund of the U.S., eds. II Conferência Internacional sobre e Economia Portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.
       ■ Hudson, Mark. Portugal to 1993: Investing in a European Future. London: The Economist Intelligence Unit/Special Report No. 11 57/EIU Economic Prospects Series, 1989.
       ■ International Labour Office (ILO). Employment and Basic Needs in Portugal. Geneva: ILO, 1979.
       ■ Kavalsky, Basil, and Surendra Agarwal. Portugal: Current and Prospective Economic Trends. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.
       ■ Krugman, Paul, and Jorge Braga de Macedo. "The Economic Consequences of the April 25th Revolution." Economia III (1979): 455-83.
       ■ Lewis, John R., and Alan M. Williams. "The Sines Project: Portugal's Growth Centre or White Elephant?" Town Planning Review 56, 3 (1985): 339-66.
       ■ Makler, Harry M. "The Consequences of the Survival and Revival of the Industrial Bourgeoisie." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 251-83. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■ Marques, A. La Politique Economique Portugaise dans la Période de la Dictature ( 1926-1974). Doctoral thesis, 3rd cycle, University of Grenoble, France, 1980.
       ■ Martins, B. Sociedades e grupos em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973.
       ■ Mata, Eugenia, and Nuno Valério. História Econômica De Portugal: Uma Perspectiva Global. Lisbon: Edit. Presença, 1994. Murteira, Mário. "The Present Economic Situation: Its Origins and Prospects." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 331-42. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979. OCED. Economic Survey: Portugal: 1988. Paris: OCED, 1988 [see also this series since 1978].
       ■ Pasquier, Albert. L'Economie du Portugal: Données et Problémes de Son Expansion. Paris: Librarie Generale de Droit, 1961. Pereira da Moura, Francisco. Para onde vai e economia portuguesa? Lisbon, 1973.
       ■ Pintado, V. Xavier. Structure and Growth of the Portuguese Economy. Geneva: EFTA, 1964.
       ■ Pitta e Cunha, Paulo. "Portugal and the European Economic Community." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 321-38. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.
       ■. "The Portuguese Economic System and Accession to the European Community." In E. Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 281-300. Lisbon, 1985. Porto, Manuel. "Portugal: Twenty Years of Change." In Alan Williams, ed., Southern Europe Transformed, 84-112. London: Harper & Row, 1984. Quarterly Economic Review. London: The Economist Intelligence Unit, 1974-present.
       ■ Salgado de Matos, Luís. Investimentos Estrangeiros em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973 and later eds.
       ■ Schmitt, Hans O. Economic Stabilisation and Growth in Portugal. Washington, D.C.: International Monetary Fund, 1981.
       ■ Smith, Diana. Portugal and the Challenge of 1992. New York: Camões Center, RIIC, Columbia University, 1989.
       ■ Tillotson, John. The Portuguese Bank Note Case [ 1920s]: Legal, Economic and Financial Approaches to the Measure of Damages in Contract. Manchester, U.K.: Faculty of Law, University of Manchester, 1992.
       ■ Tovias, Alfred. Foreign Economic Relations of the Economic Community: The Impact of Spain and Portugal. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1990.
       ■ Valério, Nuno. A moeda em Portugal, 1913-1947. Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1984.
       ■ World Bank. Portugal: Current and Prospective Economic Trends. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978 and to the present.
       ■ PHOTOGRAPHY ON PORTUGAL
       ■ Alves, Afonso Manuel, Antônio Sacchetti, and Moura Machado. Lisboa. Lisbon, 1991.
       ■ Antunes, José. Lisboa do nosso olhar; A look on Lisbon. Lisbon: Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, 1991. Beaton, Cecil. Near East. London: Batsford, 1943.
       ■. Lisboa 1942: Cecil Beaton, Lisbon 1942. Lisbon: British Historical Society of Portugal/Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian, 1995.
       ■ Bottineau, Yves. Portugal. London: Thames & Hudson, 1957.
       ■ Câmara Municipal de Lisboa. 7 Olhares ( Seven Viewpoints). Lisbon: Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, 1998.
       ■ Capital, A. Lisboa: Imagens d'A Capital. Lisbon: Edit. Notícias, 1984.
       ■ Dias, Marina Tavares. Photographias de Lisboa, 1900 ( Photographs of Lisbon, 1900). Lisbon: Quimera, 1991.
       ■ Finlayson, Graham, and Frank Tuohy. Portugal. London: Thames & Hudson, 1970.
       ■ Glassner, Helga. Portugal. Berlin-Zurich: Atlantis-Verlag, 1942. Hopkinson, Amanda, ed. Reflections by Ten Portuguese photographers. Bark-way, U.K.: Frontline/Portugal 600, 1996.
       ■ Lima, Luís Leiria, and Isabel Salema. Lisboa de Pedra e Bronze. Lisbon, 1990.
       ■ Martins, Miguel Gomes. Lisboa ribeirinha ( Riverside Lisbon). Lisbon: Arquivo Municipal, Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, Livros Horizonte, 1994. Vieira, Alice. Esta Lisboa ( This Lisbon). Lisbon: Caminho, 1994. Wohl, Hellmut, and Alice Wohl. Portugal. London: Frederick Muller, 1983.
       ■ EQUESTRIANISM
       ■ Andrade, Manoel Carlos de, Luz da Liberal e Nobre Arte da Cavallaria. Lisbon, 1790.
       ■ Graciosa, Filipe. Escola Portuguesa de Arte Equestre. Lisbon, 2004.
       ■ Horsetalk Magazine. Published in New Zealand.
       ■ Oliveira, Nuno. Reflections on the Equestrian Art. London, 2000.
       ■ Russell, Eleanor, ed. The Truth in the Teaching of Nuno Oliveira. Stanhope,
       ■ Queensland, Australia, 2003. Vilaca, Luis V., and Pedro Yglesias d'Oliveira, eds. LUSITANO. Coudelarias De Portugal. O Cavalo ancestral do Sudoeste da Europa. Lisbon: ICONOM, 2005.
       ■ Websites of interest: www.equestrian.pt portugalweb.com

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > CULTURE, LITERATURE, AND LANGUAGE

  • 53 Vermuyden, Sir Cornelius

    SUBJECT AREA: Civil engineering
    [br]
    b. c. 1590 St Maartensdijk, Zeeland, the Netherlands
    d. 4 February 1656 probably London, England
    [br]
    Dutch/British civil engineer responsible for many of the drainage and flood-protection schemes in low-lying areas of England in the seventeenth century.
    [br]
    At the beginning of the seventeenth century, several wealthy men in England joined forces as "adventurers" to put their money into land ventures. One such group was responsible for the draining of the Fens. The first need was to find engineers who were versed in the processes of land drainage, particularly when that land was at, or below, sea level. It was natural, therefore, to turn to the Netherlands to find these skilled men. Joachim Liens was one of the first of the Dutch engineers to go to England, and he started work on the Great Level; however, no real progress was made until 1621, when Cornelius Vermuyden was brought to England to assist in the work.
    Vermuyden had grown up in a district where he could see for himself the techniques of embanking and reclaiming land from the sea. He acquired a reputation of expertise in this field, and by 1621 his fame had spread to England. In that year the Thames had flooded and breached its banks near Havering and Dagenham in Essex. Vermuyden was commissioned to repair the breach and drain neighbouring marshland, with what he claimed as complete success. The Commissioners of Sewers for Essex disputed this claim and whthheld his fee, but King Charles I granted him a portion of the reclaimed land as compensation.
    In 1626 Vermuyden carried out his first scheme for drainage works as a consultant. This was the drainage of Hatfield Chase in South Yorkshire. Charles I was, in fact, Vermuyden's employer in the drainage of the Chase, and the work was undertaken as a means of raising additional rents for the Royal Exchequer. Vermuyden was himself an "adventurer" in the undertaking, putting capital into the venture and receiving the title to a considerable proportion of the drained lands. One of the important elements of his drainage designs was the principal of "washes", which were flat areas between the protective dykes and the rivers to carry flood waters, to prevent them spreading on to nearby land. Vermuyden faced bitter opposition from those whose livelihoods depended on the marshlands and who resorted to sabotage of the embankments and violence against his imported Dutch workmen to defend their rights. The work could not be completed until arbiters had ruled out on the respective rights of the parties involved. Disagreements and criticism of his engineering practices continued and he gave up his interest in Hatfield Chase. The Hatfield Chase undertaking was not a great success, although the land is now rich farmland around the river Don in Doncaster. However, the involved financial and land-ownership arrangements were the key to the granting of a knighthood to Cornelius Vermuyden in January 1628, and in 1630 he purchased 4,000 acres of low-lying land on Sedgemoor in Somerset.
    In 1629 Vermuyden embarked on his most important work, that of draining the Great Level in the fenlands of East Anglia. Francis Russell, 4th Earl of Bedford, was given charge of the work, with Vermuyden as Engineer; in this venture they were speculators and partners and were recompensed by a grant of land. The area which contains the Cambridgeshire tributaries of the Great Ouse were subject to severe and usually annual flooding. The works to contain the rivers in their flood period were important. Whilst the rivers were contained with the enclosed flood plain, the land beyond became highly sought-after because of the quality of the soil. The fourteen "adventurers" who eventually came into partnership with the Earl of Bedford and Vermuyden were the financiers of the scheme and also received land in accordance with their input into the scheme. In 1637 the work was claimed to be complete, but this was disputed, with Vermuyden defending himself against criticism in a pamphlet entitled Discourse Touching the Great Fennes (1638; 1642, London). In fact, much remained to be done, and after an interruption due to the Civil War the scheme was finished in 1652. Whilst the process of the Great Level works had closely involved the King, Oliver Cromwell was equally concerned over the success of the scheme. By 1655 Cornelius Vermuyden had ceased to have anything to do with the Great Level. At that stage he was asked to account for large sums granted to him to expedite the work but was unable to do so; most of his assets were seized to cover the deficiency, and from then on he subsided into obscurity and poverty.
    While Cornelius Vermuyden, as a Dutchman, was well versed in the drainage needs of his own country, he developed his skills as a hydraulic engineer in England and drained acres of derelict flooded land.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    Knighted 1628.
    Further Reading
    L.E.Harris, 1953, Vermuyden and the Fens, London: Cleaver Hume Press. J.Korthals-Altes, 1977, Sir Cornelius Vermuyden: The Lifework of a Great Anglo-
    Dutchman in Land-Reclamation and Drainage, New York: Alto Press.
    KM / LRD

    Biographical history of technology > Vermuyden, Sir Cornelius

  • 54 Morland, Sir Samuel

    [br]
    b. 1625 Sulhampton, near Reading, Berkshire, England
    d. 26 December 1695 Hammersmith, near London, England
    [br]
    English mathematician and inventor.
    [br]
    Morland was one of several sons of the Revd Thomas Morland and was probably initially educated by his father. He went to Winchester School from 1639 to 1644 and then to Magdalene College, Cambridge, where he graduated BA in 1648 and MA in 1652. He was appointed a tutor there in 1650. In 1653 he went to Sweden in the ambassadorial staff of Bulstrode Whitelocke and remained there until 1654. In that year he was appointed Clerk to Mr Secretary Thurloe, and in 1655 he was accredited by Oliver Cromwell to the Duke of Savoy to appeal for the Waldenses. In 1657 he married Susanne de Milleville of Boissy, France, with whom he had three children. In 1660 he went over to the Royalists, meeting King Charles at Breda, Holland. On 20 May, the King knighted him, creating him baron, for revealing a conspiracy against the king's life. He was also granted a pension of£500 per year. In 1661, at the age of 36, he decided to devote himself to mathematics and invention. He devised a mechanical calculator, probably based on the pattern of Blaise Pascal, for adding and subtracting: this was followed in 1666 by one for multiplying and other functions. A Perpetual Calendar or Almanack followed; he toyed with the idea of a "gunpowder engine" for raising water; he developed a range of speaking trum-pets, said to have a range of 1/2 to 1 mile (0.8–1.6 km) or more; also iron stoves for use on board ships, and improvements to barometers.
    By 1675 he had started selling a range of pumps for private houses, for mines or deep wells, for ships, for emptying ponds or draining low ground as well as to quench fire or wet the sails of ships. The pumps cost from £5 to £63, and the great novelty was that he used, instead of packing around the cylinder sealing against the bore of the cylinder, a neck-gland or seal around the outside diameter of the piston or piston-rod. This revolutionary step avoided the necessity of accurately boring the cylinder, replacing it with the need to machine accurately the outside diameter of the piston or rod, a much easier operation. Twenty-seven variations of size and materials were included in his schedule of'Pumps or Water Engines of Isaac Thompson of Great Russel Street', the maker of Morland's design. In 1681 the King made him "Magister mechanicorum", or Master of Machines. In that year he sailed for France to advise Louis XIV on the waterworks being built at Marly to supply the Palace of Versailles. About this time he had shown King Charles plans for a pumping engine "worked by fire alone". He petitioned for a patent for this, but did not pursue the matter.
    In 1692 he went blind. In all, he married five times. While working for Cromwell he became an expert in ciphers, in opening sealed letters and in their rapid copying.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    Knighted 1660.
    Bibliography
    Further Reading
    H.W.Dickinson, 1970, Sir Samuel Morland: Diplomat and Inventor, Cambridge: Newcomen Society/Heffers.
    IMcN

    Biographical history of technology > Morland, Sir Samuel

  • 55 इन्द्रः _indrḥ

    इन्द्रः [इन्द्-रन्; इन्दतीति इन्द्रः; इदि ऐश्वर्ये Malli.]
    1 The lord of gods.
    -2 The god of rain, rain; cloud; इन्द्रो वरुणः सोमो रुद्रः । शं न इन्द्रो बृहस्पतिः Tait. Vp.1.1.1. Bṛi. Up.1.4.11.
    -3 A lord or ruler (as of men &c.). इन्द्रो- मायाभिः पुरुरूप ईयते Bṛi. Up.2.5.19. first or best (of any class of objects), always as the last member of comp.; नरेन्द्रः a lord of men i. e. a king; so मृगेन्द्रः a lion; गजेन्द्रः the lord or chief of elephants; so योगीन्द्रः, कपीन्द्रः.
    -4 A prince, king.
    -5 The pupil of the right eye.
    -6 N. of the plant कुटज.
    -7 Night.
    -8 One of the divisions of भारतवर्ष.
    -9 N. of the 26th Yoga.
    -1 The human or animal soul.
    -11 A vegetable poison.
    -12 The Yoga star in the 26th Nakṣatra.
    -13 Greatness.
    -14 The five objects of senses.
    -द्रा 1 The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī.
    -2 N. of a plant (मरुबक Mar. मरवा) [Indra, the god of the firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭakā, and in Rv.1.9.13 he is said to have sprung from the mouth of Puruṣa. He is of a ruddy or golden colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the demons of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi, Vṛitra, Śambar, Namu- chi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles, and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain, and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achieve- ments (cf. Rv.1.119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother; a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the deliverer and comforter of his ser- vants. He is a wall of defence; his friend is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts of temporal blessings as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence, pros- perous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra's wife is Indrānī, who is invoked among the goddesses.
    *****Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and Dākṣāyaṇī or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahmā, Viṣṇu and Maheśa (though in some places Viṣṇu is regard- ed as his younger brother, cf. R.14.59,15.4), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is com- monly styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of which is his seduction of Ahalyā, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage im- pressed upon him a 1 marks resembling the female organ, and he was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the Rāmāyana Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off to Laṅkā by Ravaṇa's son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received the title of 'Indrajit'. It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a punishment for his seduction of Ahalyā. He is also represented as being in constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending down nymphs to beguile their minds (see Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, gran- dson of Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that he and Kṛiṣna were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in spite of Indra's resistance. His wife is Indrāṇī, the daughter of the demon Pulo- man, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his achievements, e. g. वृत्रहन्, बलभिद्, पाकशासन, गोत्रभिद्, पुरंदर, शतक्रतु, जिष्णु, नमुचिसूदन &c. (see Ak.I.1.44.47). The Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvatī; his garden, Nandana; his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow, and his sword, Paranja.].
    -Comp. -अग्निः the fire produced from the contact of clouds; ˚धूमः frost, snow; ˚देवता the 16th lunar mansion.
    -अनुजः, -अवरजः an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Nārāyaṇa (उपेन्द्र); तस्थौ भ्रातृसमीपस्थः शक्रस्येन्द्रानुजो यथा Rām.6.91.4.
    -अरिः an Asura or demon.
    -अवसानः a desert.
    -अशनः 1 hemp (dried and chewed).
    -2 the shrub which bears the seed used in jeweller's weight, (गुंजावृक्ष).
    -आयुधम् Indra's weapon, the rainbow; इन्द्रा- युधद्योतिततोरणाङ्कम् R.7.4,12.79; K.127.
    (-ध) 1 N. of the horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapiñjala changed into a horse).
    -2 a horse marked with black about the eyes.
    -3 a diamond. (
    -धा) a kind of leech.
    -आसनम् 1 the throne of Indra.
    -2 a throne in general.
    -3 a foot of five short syllables.
    -इज्यः N. of बृहस्पति the preceptor of gods.
    -ईश्वरः one of the forms of Śiva-liṅga.
    -उत्सवः a festival honouring Indra.
    - ऋषभ a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an epithet of the earth. इन्द्रऋषभा द्रविणे नो दधातु Av.12.1.6.
    -कर्मन् m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra's deeds).
    -कान्तः A class of the four-storeyed buildings. (Mānasāra 21.6-68).
    -कीलः 1 N. of the mountain मन्दर.
    -2 a rock.
    (-लम्) 1 the banner of Indra.
    -2 A pin, nail, bolt फालका भाजनोर्ध्वे तु तदूर्ध्वे चेन्द्रकीलकम् (Mānasāra 12.126). cf. also Kau. A.2.3.
    -कुञ्जरः Indra's elephant, Airāvata.
    -कूटः N. of a mountain
    -कृष्ट a. 'ploughed by Indra', growing exuberantly or in a wild state. (
    -ष्टः) a kind of corn produced by rain-water.
    -केतुः Indra's banner.
    -कोशः, -षः, -षकः, -ष्ठः 1 a couch, sofa, which is generally made up of covering pieces of perforated wooden planks; cf. अट्टालक- प्रतोलीमध्ये त्रिधानुष्काधिष्ठानं-इन्द्रकोशं कारयेत् Kau. A.2.3.
    -2 a platform.
    -3 a projection of the roof of a house.
    -4 A pin or bracket projecting from the wall (नागदन्त). A projection of the roof of a house forming a kind of balcony; Kau. A.24.
    -गिरिः the महेन्द्र mountain.
    -गुरुः, -आचार्यः the teacher of Indra; i. e. बृहस्पति.
    -गोपः, -गोपकः [इन्द्रो गोपो रक्षको$स्य, वर्षाभवत्वात्तस्य] a kind of insect of red or white colour; Śukra.4.157; K.1.
    -चन्दनम् the white sandal wood.
    -चापम्, -धनुस् n.
    1 a rainbow; विद्युत्वन्तं ललितवनिताः सेन्द्रचापं सचित्राः Me.64; Śi.7.4.
    -2 the bow of Indra
    -चिर्भटा A mild variety of Colocynth. The leaf is tripartite, rough and wrinkled. (Mar. कंवडळ, applied often as इन्द्रावण in the sense of vile, malignant, dark and hateful.)
    -च्छदः A neck- lace of pearls having 18 strings.
    -च्छन्दस् n. [इन्द्र इव सहस्रनेत्रेण सहस्रगुच्छेन च्छाद्यते] a necklace consisting of 1 strings.
    -जः N. of Vālī.
    -जतु n. Bitumen (Mar. शिलाजित).
    -जननम् Indra's birth.
    -जननीय a. treating of Indra's birth (as a work).
    -जा a. Ved. born or arising from Indra. Av.4.3.7.
    -जालम् [इन्द्रस्य परमेश्वरस्य जालं मायेव]
    1 the net of Indra. तेनाह- मिन्द्रजालेनामूंस्तमसाभि दधामि सर्वान् Av.8.8.8.
    -2 a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war.
    -3 deception, cheating.
    -4 conjuring, jugglery, magical tricks; इन्द्रजालं च मायां वै कुहका वा$पि भीषणा Mb.5.16.55. स्वप्नेन्द्रजालसदृशः खलु जीवलोकः Śānti.2.2; K.15.
    -जालिक a. [इन्द्रजाल-ठन्] deceptive, unreal, delusive. (
    -कः) a juggler, conjurer.
    -जित् m. 'conqueror of Indra', N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda a son of Rāvaṇa. When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat, Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to Laṅkā. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release, and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, 'conqueror of Indra'; but the victor refused to release his prisoners unless he were promised immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is repre- sented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was engaged in a sacrifice]. ˚हन्तृ or विजयिन् m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa.
    -ज्येष्ठ a. Ved. led by Indra.
    -तापनः the thundering of clouds.
    -तूलम्, -तूलकम् a flock of cotton.
    -दमनः the son of Bāṇāsura.
    -दारुः the tree Pinus Devadāru.
    -द्युति Sandal
    -द्रुः, -द्रुमः 1 the plant Termi- nalia Arjuna (अर्जुन).
    -2 The plant कुटज.
    -द्वीपः, -पम् one of the 9 Dvīpas or Divisions of the continent (of India).
    -धनुः N. of Indra's bow, the rainbow; स एकव्रा- त्यो$भवत्स धनुरादत्त तदेवेन्द्रधनुः Av.15.1.6.
    -ध्वजः 1 a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra.
    -2 Indra's weapon; विस्रस्ताकल्पकेशस्रगिन्द्रध्वज इवापतत् Bhāg.1.44.22.
    -नक्षत्रम् Indra's lunar mansion फल्गुनी.
    -नेत्रम् 1 the eye of Indra.
    -2 the number one thousand.
    -नीलः [इन्द्र इव नीलः श्यामः] a sapphire; परीक्षाप्रत्ययैर्यैश्च पद्मरागः परीक्ष्यते । त एव प्रत्यया दृष्टा इन्द्रनीलमणेरपि ॥ Garuḍa. P.; R.13.54;16.69; Me.48,79.
    -नीलकः an emerald.
    -पत्नी 1 Indra's wife, शची.
    -पर्णी, -पुष्पा N. of a medicinal plant (Mar. कळलावी).
    -पर्वतः 1 the महेन्द्र mountain.
    -2 a blue mountain.
    -पुत्रा N. of अदिति.
    -पुरोगम, -पुरःसर, -श्रेष्ठ a. led or preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head.
    -पुरोहितः N. of बृहस्पति. (
    -ता) the asterism Puṣya.
    -प्रमतिः N. of the pupil of Paila and the author of some ṛiks of the Rv.
    -प्रस्थम् N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the Paṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi); इन्द्रप्रस्थगमस्तावत्कारि मा सन्तु चेदयः Śi.2.63.
    -प्रहरणम् Indra's weapon, the thunderbolt.
    -भगिनी N. of Pārvatī.
    -भेषजम् dried ginger.
    -मखः a sacrifice in honour of Indra.
    -महः 1 a festival in honour of Indra.
    -2 the rainy season; ˚कामुकः a dog.
    -मादन a. animating or delighting Indra; ये वायव इन्द्रमादनासः Rv.7.92.4.
    -मेदिन् a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra; इन्द्रमेदी सत्वनो नि ह्वयस्व Av.5.2-.8.
    -यज्ञः (See इन्द्रमह and इन्द्रमख) श्वो$स्माकं घोषस्योचित इन्द्रयज्ञो नामोत्सवः भविष्यति Bālacharita I.
    -यवः, -वम् seed of the Kutaja tree.
    -लुप्तः, -प्तम्, -लुप्तकम् 1 excessive bald- ness of the head.
    -2 loss of beard.
    -लोकः Indra's world, Svarga or Paradise.
    -लोकेशः 1 lord of Indra's world, i. e. Indra.
    -2 a guest (who, if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host).
    -वंशा, -वज्रा N. of two metres, see Appendix.
    -वल्लरी, -वल्ली N. of a plant (पारिजात) or of इन्द्रवारुणी.
    -वस्तिः [इन्द्रस्य आत्मनः वस्तिरिव] the calf (of the leg).
    -वाततम a. Ved. desired by Indra. अस्मे ऊतीरिन्द्रवाततमाः Rv.1.6.6.
    -वानकम् A variety of diamonds. Kau. A.2.11.
    -वायू (du.) Indra and Vāyu. इन्द्रवायू उभाविह सुहवेह हवामहे Av.3.2.6.
    -वारुणी, -वारुणिका Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd cucumis colocynthis. (Mar. मोठी कंवडळ) किमिन्द्रवारुणी राम सितया कटुकीयते Laghu Yoga- vāsiṣṭha-sāra X. सौवर्चलं हरिद्रा च पिप्पली चेन्द्रवारुणिः । मूत्र- कृच्छ्रे प्रशंसन्ति पिण्डो$यं वाजिनां हितः ॥ शालिहोत्र of भोज 33.
    -वाह् a. carrying Indra.
    -वृक्षः the Devadāru tree.
    -वृद्धा a kind of abscess.
    -वैडूर्यम् a kind of precious stone.
    -व्रतम् Indra's rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who is said to follow इन्द्रव्रत when he distri- butes benefits as Indra pours down rain); वार्षिकांश्चतुरो मासान् यथेन्द्रो$प्यभिवर्षति । तथाभिवर्षेत्स्वं राष्ट्रं कामैरिन्द्रव्रतं चरन् ॥ Ms.9.34.
    -शक्तिः f. Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified.
    -शत्रुः 1 an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on the last syllable), an epithet of प्रह्लाद; इन्द्रशत्रो विवर्धस्व मा चिरं जहि विद्विषम् Bhāg.6.9.12. बलिप्रदिष्टां श्रियमाददानं त्रैविक्रमं पादमिवेन्द्रशत्रुः R.7.35.
    -2 [इन्द्रः शत्रुः यस्य] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of वृत्र (when the accent is on the first syllable). (This refers to a legend in the Śat. Br., where it is said that Vṛitra's father intended his son to become the destroyer of Indra, and asked him to say इन्द्रशत्रुर्वधस्व &c. but who, through mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra; cf. Śik.52; मन्त्रो हीनः स्वरतो वर्णतो वा मिथ्याप्रयुक्तो न तमर्थमाह । स वाग्वज्रो यजमानं हिनस्ति यथेन्द्रशत्रुः स्वरतो$पराधात् ॥
    -शलभः a kind of insect (इन्द्रगोप).
    -संजयम् N. of a sāman. Arṣeya Br.
    -संधा connection or alliance with Indra. तयाहमिन्द्रसंधया सर्वान् देवानिह हुव Av.11.1.9.
    -सारथिः 1 N. of Mātali.
    -2 an epi- thet of Vāyu, driving in the same carriage with Indra; Rv.4.46.2.
    -सावर्णिः N. of the fourteenth Manu.
    -सुतः, -सूनुः 1 N. of (a) Jayanta; (b) Arjuna; (c) Vāli, the king of monkeys.
    -2 N. of the अर्जुन tree.
    -सुरसः, -सुरा a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications (निर्गुंडी).
    -सेनः N. of several men; of Bali; of a mountain; Bhāg.8.2.23.
    -सेना 1 Indra's missile or host.
    -2 Indra's army; Rv.1.12.2.
    -सेनानीः the leader of Indra's armies, epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -स्तुत् m.
    -स्तोमः 1 praise of Indra; N. of a particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies.
    -2 a sacrifice in honour of Indra.
    -हवः invocation of Indra; भद्रान् कृण्वन्निन्द्रहवान्त्सखिभ्य Rv.9.96.1.
    -हस्तः a kind of medicament.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > इन्द्रः _indrḥ

  • 56 विश्वामित्रः _viśvāmitrḥ

    विश्वामित्रः [विश्वं मित्रं यस्य, विश्वस्य मित्रं वा पूर्वपददीर्घः; P.VI.3.13] N. of a celebrated sage. [He was originally a Kṣatriya, being the king of Kānyakubja and son of Gādhi. One day while out hunting, he went to the hermitage of the great sage Vasiṣṭha, and seeing there the cow of plenty, offered him untold treasures in exchange for it, but being refused he tried to take it by force. A long contest thereupon ensued, in which king Viśvāmitra was signally defeated; and so great was his vexation, and withal so greatly was he impressed with the power inherent in Brāhman- ism that he devoted himself to the most rigorous austerities till he successively got the titles Rājarṣi, Riṣi, Maharṣi, and Brahmarṣi, but he was not con- tented till Vasiṣṭha himself called him by the name Brahmarṣi, which, however, took place after several thousands of years. Viśvāmitra several times tried to excite Vasiṣṭha -- for example by killing his one hund- red sons--but the great sage was not in the least perturbed. His power, even before he finally became a Brahmarśi, was very great, as was seen in his transporting Triśaṅku to the skies, in saving Sunah- śepa from the hands of Indra, in creating things after the style of Brahman &c. &c. He was the compa- nion and counsellor of young Rāma to whom he gave several miraculous missiles.]
    -Comp. -प्रियः Cocoanut (tree and fruit); L. D. B.
    -सृष्टिः the thing created by विश्वामित्र (these are several as Palmyra, buffalo, ass &c.).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > विश्वामित्रः _viśvāmitrḥ

  • 57 cat

    noun
    1) Katze, die

    she-cat — Kätzin, die; [weibliche] Katze

    tom-cat — Kater, der

    the [great] Cats — die Großkatzen

    let the cat out of the bag — (fig.) die Katze aus dem Sack lassen

    look like something the cat brought in — (fig.) aussehen wie unter die Räuber gefallen

    curiosity killed the cat — (fig.) sei nicht so neugierig

    [fight] like cat and dog — wie Hund und Katze [sein]

    a cat may look at a king — (prov.) das ist doch auch nur ein Mensch

    put the cat among the pigeons — (fig.) für Aufregung sorgen

    rain cats and dogs — in Strömen regnen

    no room to swing a cat — (fig.) kaum Platz zum Umdrehen

    2) see academic.ru/119670/cat-o%27-nine-tails">cat-o'-nine-tails
    * * *
    [kæt]
    1) (a small, four-legged, fur-covered animal often kept as a pet: a Siamese cat.) die Katze
    2) (a large wild animal of the same family (eg tiger, lion etc): the big cats.) die Raubkatze
    •
    - catty
    - catcall
    - catfish
    - catgut
    - catsuit
    - cattail
    - let the cat out of the bag
    * * *
    CAT1
    [kæt]
    n COMPUT abbrev of computer aided training computergestütztes Training
    CAT2
    [kæt]
    n COMPUT abbrev of computer aided testing computergestütztes Prüfen
    CAT3
    [kæt]
    * * *
    1) (AVIAT) abbr of clear air turbulence Turbulenzen pl bei klarer Sicht
    * * *
    cat1 [kæt]
    A s
    1. ZOOL Katze f:
    (domestic) cat Hauskatze;
    be (as) nervous as a cat furchtbar ängstlich sein; → room A 1
    2. pej Biest n
    3. → cat-o’-nine-tails
    4. SCHIFF Katt f
    5. umg → caterpillar 3
    6. umg, besonders US Kerl m, Typ m
    7. → hepcat
    B v/t
    1. (aus)peitschen
    2. SCHIFF den Anker katten
    C v/i Br sl kotzenBesondere Redewendungen: be like a cat on hot bricks (bes US on a hot tin roof) furchtbar nervös sein;
    when the cat is away the mice will play (Sprichwort) wenn die Katze aus dem Haus ist, tanzen die Mäuse (auf dem Tisch);
    all cats are gray (bes Br grey) in the dark (Sprichwort) in der Nacht sind alle Katzen grau;
    not have ( oder stand) a cat in hell’s chance umg nicht die Spur einer Chance haben ( against sb gegen jemanden; of getting sth etwas zu bekommen);
    has the cat got your tongue? umg hat es dir die Rede oder Sprache verschlagen?;
    let the cat out of the bag umg die Katze aus dem Sack lassen;
    a cat may look at a king schaut die Katz' den Kaiser an;
    look what the cat’s brought ( oder dragged) in! umg wie schaust denn du aus!;
    live like cat and dog umg wie Hund und Katze leben;
    it’s enough to make a cat laugh umg da lachen ja die Hühner!;
    play (a game of) cat and mouse with umg Katz und Maus spielen mit;
    put ( oder set) the cat among the pigeons Br für helle Aufregung sorgen;
    it is raining cats and dogs es gießt in Strömen;
    see which way the cat jumps umg sehen, wie der Hase läuft;
    wait for the cat to jump die Entwicklung der Ereignisse abwarten; → bell1 B
    cat2 [kæt] s AUTO umg Kat m (Katalysator):
    cat car Katwagen m
    * * *
    noun
    1) Katze, die

    she-cat — Kätzin, die; [weibliche] Katze

    tom-cat — Kater, der

    the [great] Cats — die Großkatzen

    let the cat out of the bag — (fig.) die Katze aus dem Sack lassen

    look like something the cat brought in — (fig.) aussehen wie unter die Räuber gefallen

    curiosity killed the cat — (fig.) sei nicht so neugierig

    [fight] like cat and dog — wie Hund und Katze [sein]

    a cat may look at a king — (prov.) das ist doch auch nur ein Mensch

    put the cat among the pigeons — (fig.) für Aufregung sorgen

    no room to swing a cat — (fig.) kaum Platz zum Umdrehen

    * * *
    n.
    Katze -n f.

    English-german dictionary > cat

  • 58 अर्जुन _arjuna

    अर्जुन a. [अर्ज्-उनन् णिलुक् च Uṇ.3.58] (
    -ना, -नी f.).
    1 White, clear, bright, of the colour of day; अहश्च कृष्णमहरर्जुनं च Rv.6.9.1; पिशङ्गमौञ्जीयुजमर्जुनच्छविम् Śi.1.6.
    -2 Silvery; यत्र वः प्रेङ्खा हरिता अर्जुना Av.4.37.5.
    -नः 1 The white colour.
    -2 A peacock.
    -3 A sort of cutaneous disease.
    -4 A tree (Mar. अर्जुनसादडा), with useful rind; Mb.3.64.3.
    -5 N. of the third Pāṇḍava who was a son of Kuntī by Indra and hence called ऐन्द्रि also. [Arjuna was so called because he was 'white' or 'pure in actions' (पृथिव्यां चतुरन्तायां वर्णो मे दुर्लभः समः । करोमि कर्म शुद्धं च तेन मामर्जनं विदुः). He was taught the use of arms by Droṇa and was his favourite pupil. By his skill in arms he won Draupadī at her Svayaṁvara (see Draupadī). For an involuntary transgression he went into temporary exile and during that time he learnt the science of arms from Paraśurāma. He married Ulūpī, a Nāga Princess, by whom he had a son named Irāvat, and also Chitrāṅgadā, daughter of the king of Maṇipura, who bore him a son named Babhruvāhana. During this exile he visited Dvārakā, and with the help and advice of Kṛiṣṇa succeeded in marrying Subhadrā. By her he had a son named Abhimanyu. Afterwards he obtained the bow (Gāṇḍiva from the god Agni whom he assisted in burning the Khāṇḍva forest. When Dharma, his eldest brother, lost the kingdom by gambling, and the five brothers went into exile, he went to the Himālayas to propitiate the gods and to obtain from them celestial weapons for use in the contemplated war against Kauravas. There he fought with Śiva who appeared in the disguise of a Kirāta; but when he discovered the true character of his adversary he worshipped him and Śiva gave him the Pāśupatāstra. Indra, Varuṇa, Yama and Kubera also presented him with their own weapons. In the 13th year of their exile, the Pāṇḍavas entered the service of the King of Virāṭa and he had to act the part of a eunuch, and music and dancing master. In the great war with the Kauravas Arjuna took a very distinguished part. He secured the assistance of Kṛiṣṇa who acted as his charioteer and related to him the Bhagavadgītā when on the first day of the battle he hesitated to bend his bow against his own kinsmen. In the course of the great struggle he slew or vanquished several redoubtable warriors on the side of the Kauravas, such as Jayadratha, Bhīṣma, Karṇa &c. After Yudhiṣṭhira had been installed sovereign of Hastināpura, he resolved to perform the Aśvamedha sacrifice, and a horse was let loose with Arjuna as its guardian. Arjuna followed it through many cities and Countries and fought with many kings. At the city of Maṇipura he had to fight with his own son Babhruvāhana and was killed; but he was restored to life by a charm supplied by his wife Ulūpī. He traversed the whole of Bharata- khaṇda and returned to Hastināpura, loaded with spoils and tributes, and the great horse-sacrifice was then duly performed. He was afterwards called by Kṛiṣna to Dvārakā amid the internecine struggles of the Yādavas and there he performed the funeral ceremonies of Vasudeva and Kṛiṣṇa. Soon after this the five Pāṅdavas repaired to heaven having installed Parīkṣit -the only surviving son of Abhimanyu-- on the throne of Hastināpura. Arjuna was the bravest of the Pāṇdavas, high-minded, generous, upright, handsome and the most prominent figure of all his brothers. He has several appellations, such a Pārtha, Gudākeśa, Savyasāchī, Dhanañjaya, Phālguna, Kirītin, Jīṣṇu, Śvetavāhana, Gāṇḍivin &c.] cf. अर्जनः फाल्गुनो जिष्णुः किरीटी श्वेतवाहनः । बीभत्सुर्विजयः कृष्णः सव्यसाची धनञ्जयः ॥
    -6 N. of Kārtavīrya, slain by Parasurāma See कार्तवीर्य.
    -7 N. of a country Bṛi. S.14. 25.
    -8 The only son of his mother.
    -9 N. of Indra.
    -1 N. of a tree, Jerminalia Arjuna (Mar. अईन). The tree is rarer in south India. The colour of its bark is white. It is a forest-tree bearing fragrant flowers appearing in panicles like those of the Mango-tree.
    -नी 1 A procuress, bawd.
    -2 A cow. तथार्जुनीनां कपिला वरिष्ठा Mb.13.73.42.
    -3 A kind of serpent; अर्जुनि पुनर्वोयन्तु˚ Av.2.24.7.
    -4 N. of Uṣhā, wife of Aniruddha.
    -5 N. of a river com- monly called करतोया.
    -6 (न्यौ, -न्यः dual and pl.) N. of the constellation Phalgunī. अघासु हन्यन्ते गावो$र्जुन्योः पर्युह्यते Rv.1.85.13.
    -नम् 1 Silver. वीरुद्भिष्टे अर्जुनं संविदानम् Av.5.28.5.
    -2 Gold.
    -3 Slight inflammation of the white of the eye.
    -4 Grass.
    -न<?> (Pl.) The descend- ants of Arjuna; cf. अर्जुनः ककुभे पार्थे कार्तवीर्यमयूरयोः । मातुरेकसुते वृक्षे धवले नयनामये । तृणभेदे गवि स्त्री स्यात्...Nm.
    -Comp. -अभ्रम N. of a medicament.
    -ईश्वरतीर्थम् N. of a holy place. Siva P.
    -उपमः the teak tree; also शाकद्रुम and महापत्राख्यवृक्ष.
    -काण्ड a. having a white stem or appendage. बभ्रोरर्जनकाण्डस्य यवस्य ते Av.2.8.3.
    -च्छवि a. white, of a white colour.
    -ध्वजः 'white- bannered', N. of Hanūmat.
    -पाकी N. of a plant and its fruits.
    -बदरः The fibre of the Arjuna plant; अर्जुन- बदरा मेखलाः क्रियन्ताभू । ŚB. on MS.9.4.25
    -मिश्रः Name of a commentator on the Mb.
    -सखिः (L.) Kriṣṇa.
    -सिंहः N. of a prince (Inscriptions).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > अर्जुन _arjuna

  • 59 दुर् _dur

    दुर् ind. (A prefix substituted for दुस् before words beginning with vowels or soft consonants in the sense of 'bad'. 'hard' or 'difficult to do a certain thing'; for compounds with दुस् as first member see दुस् s. v.).
    -Comp. -अक्ष a.
    1 weak-eyed.
    -2 evileyed.
    (-क्षः) 1 a loaded or false die.
    -2 dishonest gambling.
    -अक्षरम् an evil word; श्रुतिं ममाविश्य भवद्दुरक्षरं सृजत्यदः कीटकवदुत्कटा रुजः N.9.63.
    -अतिक्रम a. difficult to be overcome or conquered, unconquerable; सर्वं तु तपसा साध्यं तपो हि दुरति- क्रमम् Ms.11.2.38; स्वभावो दुरतिक्रमः 'nature cannot be changed'; स्वजातिर्दुरतिक्रमा Pt.1.
    -2 insurmountable, impassable; B. R.6.18-19.
    -3 inevitable. (
    -मः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -अत्यय a.
    1 difficult to be overcome; स्वर्गमार्गपरिघो दुरत्ययः R.11.88.
    -2 hard to be attained or fathomed; स एष आत्मा स्वपरेत्यबुद्धिभिर्दुरत्यया- नुक्रमणो निरूप्यते Bhāg.7.5.13.
    -अदृष्टम् ill-luck, misfortune.
    -अधिग, -अधिगम a.
    1 hard to reach or attain, unattainable; Bhāg.3.23.8; दुरधिगमः परभागो यावत्पुरुषेण पौरुषं न कृतम् Pt.1.33.
    -2 insurmountable.
    -3 hard to be studied or understood; इह दुरधिगमैः किञ्चि- देवागमैः Ki.5.18.
    -अधिष्ठित a. badly performed, managed, or executed. (
    -तम्) improper stay at a place.
    -अधीत a. badly learnt or read.
    -अध्यय a.
    1 difficult of attainment; सहस्रवर्त्मा चपलैर्दुरध्ययः Śi.12.11.
    -2 hard to be studied.
    -अध्यवसायः a foolish undertaking.
    -अध्वः a bad road; स्वयं दुरध्वार्णवनाविकाः कथं स्पृशन्तु विज्ञाय हृदापि तादृशीम् N.9.33.
    -अन्त a.
    1 whose end is difficult to be reached, endless, infinite; संकर्षणाय सूक्ष्माय दुरन्तायान्तकाय च Bhāg.
    -2 ending ill or in misery, unhappy; अहो दुरन्ता बलवद्विरोधिता Ki.1.23; नृत्यति युवति- जनेन समं सखि विरहिजनस्य दुरन्ते (वसन्ते) Gīt.1; इयमुदरदरी- दुरन्तधारा यदि न भवेदभिमानभङ्गभूमिः Udb.
    -3 hard to be understood or known.
    -4 insurmountable.
    -अन्तक a. = दुरन्त q. v. (
    -कः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -अन्वय a.
    1 difficult to be passed along; Mb.14.51.17.
    -2 hard to be carried out or followed.
    -3 difficult to be attained. or understood; बुद्धिश्च ते महाप्राज्ञ देवैरपि दुरन्वया Rām.3. 66.18.
    -4 not suitable, improper; वचो दुरन्वयं विप्रास्तूष्णी- मासन्भ्रमद्धियः Bhāg.1.84.14.
    (-यः) 1 a wrong conclusion, one wrongly inferred from given premisses.
    -2 (in gram.) a false agreement.
    -अपवादः ill report. slander.
    -अभिग्रह a. difficult to be caught.
    -अभि- मानिन् a. vain-glorious, disagreeably proud.
    - अवगम a. incomprehensible; Bhāg.5.13.26.
    -अवग्रह a.
    1 difficult to be restrained or subjugated; भक्ता भजस्व दुरवग्रह मा त्यजास्मान् Bhāg.1.29.31.
    -2 disagreeable.
    -अवग्राह a. difficult to be attained; Bhāg.7.1.19.
    -अवच्छद a. difficult to be hidden; हेतुभिर्लक्षयांचक्रुराप्रीतां दुरवच्छदैः Bhāg.1.62.28.
    -अवबोध a. unintelligible. Bhāg.1.49.29.
    -अवसित a. unfathomed, difficult to be ascertained, द्युपतिभिरजशक्रशंकराद्यैर्दुरवसितस्तवमच्युतं नतो$स्मि Bhāg.12.12.67.
    -अवस्थ a. ill off, badly or poorly circumstanced.
    -अवस्था, -स्थानम् a wretched or miser- able state; Bhāg.5.3.12.
    -अवाप a. difficult to be gained or fulfilled; Ś.1.
    -अवेक्षितम् an improper look.
    -अह्नः a bad day.
    -आकृति a. ugly, mis-shaped.
    -आक्रन्द a. crying bitterly or miserably; किं क्रन्दसि दुराक्रन्द स्वपक्ष- क्षयकारक Pt.4.29.
    -आक्रम a.
    1 invincible, unconquer- able.
    -2 difficult to be passed.
    -आक्रमणम् 1 unfair attack.
    -2 difficult approach.
    -आगमः improper or illegal acquisition.
    -आग्रहः foolish obstinacy, head- strongness, pertinacity; ममाहमित्यूढदुराग्रहाणां पुंसाम् Bhāg.3. 5.43.
    1 hard to be performed.
    -2 incurable (as a disease).
    -आचार a.
    1 ill-conducted, badly be- haved.
    -2 following bad practices, wicked, depraved; अपि चेत्सुदुराचारो भजते मामनन्यभाक् Bg.9.3. (
    -रः) bad practice, ill-conduct, wikedness.
    -आढ्य a. not rich, poor.
    -आत्मता vileness, baseness, wickedness.
    -आत्मन् a. evil-natured, low, wicked, vile, base, mean; ये च प्राहुर्दुरात्मानो दुराराध्या महीभुजः Pt.1.39. (-m.) a rascal, villain, scoundrel.
    - आधर a. difficult to be withstood or overpowered, irresistible.
    -आधर्ष a. hard to be approached or assailed, unassailable जगन्नाथो दुराधर्षो गङ्गां भागीरथीं प्रति Mb.
    -2 not to be attacked with impu- nity.
    -3 haughty. (
    -र्षः) white mustard.
    -आधारः an epithet of Śiva.
    -आधिः (m.)
    1 distress or anxiety of mind; निरस्तनारीसमया दुराधयः Ki.1.28.
    -2 indignation.
    -आधी a. Ved. malignant, thinking ill of.
    - आनम a. difficult to bend or draw; स विचिन्त्य धनुर्दुरानमम् R.11.38.
    -आप a.
    1 difficult to be obtained; श्रिया दुरापः कथमीप्सितो भवेत् Ś.3.13; R.1.72;6.62.
    -2 difficult to be ap- proached; Pt.1.67.
    -3 hard to be overcome.
    -आपादन a. difficult to be brought about; किं दुरापादनं तेषाम् Bhāg.3.23.42.
    -आपूर a. difficult to be filled or satisfied; Bhāg.7.6.8.
    -आबाध a. hard to be molested. (
    -धः) N. of Śiva.
    -आमोदः bad scent, stench; शवधूमदुरामोदः शालिभक्ते$त्र विद्यते Ks.82.22.
    -आराध्य a. difficult to be propitiated, hard to be won over or conciliated; दुराराध्याः श्रियो राज्ञां दुरापा दुष्परिग्रहाः Pt.1.38.
    -आरुह a. difficult to be mounted.
    (-हः) 1 the Bilva tree.
    -2 the cocoanut tree.
    -3 the date tree.
    -आरोप a. difficult to be strung (bow); दुरारोपमैन्दुशेखरं धनुर्दुर्निवारा रावणभुजदण्डाः B. R.1.46-47.
    -आरोह a. difficult of ascent.
    (-हः) 1 The cocoanut tree.
    -2 the palm tree.
    -3 the date tree.
    -आलापः 1 a curse, imprecation.
    -2 foul of abusive language.
    -आलोक a.
    1 difficult to be seen or perceived.
    -2 painfully bright, dazzling; दुरालोकः स समरे निदाघाम्बररत्नवत् K. P.1. (
    -कः) dazzling splendour.
    -आव(वा)र a.
    1 difficult to be covered or filled up; दुरावरं त्वदन्येन राज्यखण्डमिदं महत् Rām.2.15.5.
    -2 difficult to be restrained, shut in, kept back or stopped.
    -आवर्त a. difficult to be convinced or set up; भवन्ति सुदुरावर्ता हेतुमन्तो$पि पण्डिताः Mb.12.19.23.
    1 evil-minded, wicked, malicious, स्फुटनिर्भिन्नो दुराशयो$धमः Śi. उपेयिवान् मूलमशेषमूलं दुराशयः कामदुघाङ्घ्रिपस्य Bhāg.3.21.15.
    -2 having a bad place or rest. (-m.) the subtle body which is not destroyed by death (लिङ्गदेह); एतन्मे जन्म लोके$स्मिन्मुमुक्षूणां दुराशयात् Bhāg.3.24. 36.
    -आशा 1 a bad or wicked desire.
    -2 hoping against hope.
    -आस a. difficult to be abided or associated with; संघर्षिणा सह गुणाभ्यधिकैर्दुरासम् Śi.5.19.
    1 difficult to be approached or overtaken; स सभूव दुरासदः परैः R.3.66; 8.4; Mv.2.5; 4.15.
    -2 difficult to be found or met with.
    -3 unequalled, unparalleled.
    -4 hard to be borne, insupportable.
    -5 difficult to be conquered, unassailable, unconquerable; जहि शत्रुं महाबाहो कामरूपं दुरासदम् Bg.3.43. (
    -दः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -इत a.
    1 difficult.
    -2 sinful.
    (-तम्) 1 a bad course, evil, sin; दरिद्राणां दैन्यं दुरितमथ दुर्वासनहृदां द्रुतं दूरीकुर्वन् G. L.2; R.8.2; Amaru.2; Mv.3.43.
    -2 a difficulty, danger.
    -3 a calamity, evil; अपत्ये यत्तादृग्- दुरितमभवत् U.4.3.
    -इतिः f. Ved.
    1 a bad course.
    -2 difficulty.
    -इष्टम् 1 a curse, imprecation.
    -2 a spell or sacrificial rite performed to injure another person.
    -ईशः a bad lord or master.
    -ईषणा, -एषणा 1 a curse, an imprecation.
    -2 an evil eye.
    -उक्त a. harshly utter- ed; Pt.1.89.
    -उक्तम्, -उक्तिः f. offensive speech, reproach, abuse, censure; लक्ष्मि क्षमस्व वचनीयमिदं दुरुक्तम् Udb.
    -उच्छेद a. difficult to be destroyed.
    -उत्तर a.
    1 unanswerable.
    -2 difficult to be crossed; दुरुत्तरे पङ्क इवान्धकारे Bk.11.2; प्राप्तः पङ्को दुरुत्तरः Ki.15.17.
    - उदय a. appearing with difficulty, not easily manifested; यो$ नात्मनां दुरुदयो भगवान्प्रतीतः Bhāg.3.16.5.
    -उदर्क a. having bad or no consequences; N.5.41.
    -उदाहर a. diffi- cult to be pronounced or composed; अनुज्झितार्थसंबन्धः प्रबन्धो दुरुदाहरः Śi.2.73.
    -उद्वह a. burdensome, unbear- able.
    - उपसद a. difficult of approach; Ki.7.9.
    -उपसर्पिन् a. approaching incautiously; एकमेव दहत्यग्निर्नरं दुरुपसर्पिणम् Ms.7.9.
    -ऊह a. abstruse; जानीते जयदेव एव शरणः श्लाघ्ये दुरूहद्रुते Gīt.
    -एव a. Ved.
    1 having evil ways.
    -2 irresis- tible, unassailable. (
    -वः) a wicked person.
    -ओषस् a. Ved. slow, lazy.
    - ग 1 difficult of access, inaccessible, impervious, impassable; दुर्गस्त्वेष महापन्थाः Mb.12.3. 5; दुर्गं पथस्तत्कवयो वदन्ति Kaṭh.1.3.14.
    -2 unattain- able.
    -3 incomprehensible.
    -4 following wicked path, vicious; Rām.2.39.22.
    (-गः, -गम्) 1 a difficult or narrow passage through a wood or over a stream, mountain &c., a defile, narrow pass.
    -2 a citadel. fortress, castle; न दुर्गं दुर्गमित्येव दुर्गमं मन्यते जनः । तस्य दुर्गमता सैव यत्प्रभुस्तस्य दुर्गमः ॥ Śiva. B.16.61.
    -3 rough ground.
    -4 difficulty, adversity, calamity, distress, danger; निस्तारयतिं दुर्गाच्च Ms.3.98;11.43; मच्चित्तः सर्व- दुर्गाणि मत्प्रसादात्तरिष्यसि; Bg.18.58.
    (-गः) 1 bdellium.
    -2 the Supreme Being.
    -3 N. of an Asura slain by Durgā (thus receiving her name from him). ˚अध्यक्षः, ˚पतिः, ˚पालः the commandant or governor of a castle. ˚अन्तः The suburb of a fort; दुर्गान्ते सिद्धतापसाः Kau. A. 1.12. ˚कर्मन् n. fortification. ˚कारक a. making difficult. (
    -कः) the birch tree. ˚घ्नी N. of Durgā. ˚तरणी an epithet of Sāvitrī. सावित्री दुर्गतरणी वीणा सप्तविधा तथा Mb. ˚मार्गः a defile, gorge. ˚लङ्घनम् surmounting difficu- lties. (
    -नः) a camel. ˚संचरः
    1 a difficult passage as to a fort &c., a bridge &c. over a defile. ˚संस्कारः Repairs to the old forts; अतो दुर्गसंस्कार आरब्धव्ये किं कौमुदीमहोत्सवेन Mu. ˚सिंहः N. of the author of कलापपरिशिष्ट. ˚व्यसनम् a defect or weak point in a fortress. (
    -र्गा) an epithet of Pārvatī, wife of Śiva.
    -2 the female cuckoo
    -3 N. of several plants. ˚नवमी the 9th day of the bright half of कार्तिक. ˚पूजा the chief festival in honour of दुर्गा in Bengal in the month of Āśvina.
    -गत a.
    1 unfortunate, in bad circumstances; समाश्वसिमि केनाहं कथं प्राणिमि दुर्गतः Bk.18.1.
    -2 indigent, poor.
    -3 distressed, in trouble.
    -गतता ill-luck, poverty, misery; तावज्जन्मातिदुःखाय ततो दुर्गतता सदा Pt.1.265.
    -गतिः f.
    1 misfortune, poverty, want, trouble, indigence; न हि कल्याणकृत्कश्चिद् दुर्गतिं तात गच्छति Bg.6.4.
    -2 a difficult situation or path.
    -3 hell.
    -गन्ध a. ill-smelling.
    (-न्धः) 1 bad odour, stink
    -2 any ill-smelling substance.
    -3 an onion.
    -4 the mango tree. (
    -न्धम्) sochal salt.
    -गन्धि, -गन्धिन् a. ill-smelling.
    -गम a.
    1 impassable, inaccessible, impervious; कामिनीकायकान्तारे कुचपर्वतदुर्गमे Bh.1.86; Śi. 12.49.
    -2 unattainable, difficult of attainment.
    -3 hard to be understood. (
    -मम्) a difficult place like hill etc; भ्राम्यन्ते दुर्गमेष्वपि Pt.5.81.
    -गाढ, -गाध, -गाह्य a. difficult to be fathomed or investigated, unfathomable.
    -गुणितम् not properly studied; चिराम्यस्तपथं याति शास्त्रं दुर्गुणितं यथा Avimārakam.2.4.
    -गोष्ठी evil association; conspiracy. वृद्धो रक्कः कम्पनेशो दुर्गोष्ठीमध्यगो$भवत् Rāj. T.6. 17.
    -ग्रह a.
    1 difficult to be gained or accomplished.
    -2 difficult to be conquered or subjugated; दुर्गाणि दुर्ग्रहाण्यासन् तस्य रोद्धुरपि द्विषाम् R.17.52.
    -3 hard to be understood.
    (-हः) 1 a cramp, spasm.
    -2 obstinacy.
    -3 whim, monomania; कथं न वा दुर्ग्रहदोष एष ते हितेन सम्य- ग्गुरुणापि शम्यते N.9.41.
    -घट a.
    1 difficult. कार्याणि घटयन्नासीद् दुर्घटान्यपि हेलया Rāj. T.4.364.
    -2 impossible.
    -घण a.
    1 closely packed together, very compact.
    -घुरुटः An unbeliever; L. D. B.
    -घोषः 1 a harsh cry.
    -2 a bear.
    -जन a.
    1 wicked, bad, vile.
    -2 slanderous, malicious, mischievous; यथा स्त्रीणां तथा वाचां साधुत्वे दुर्जनो जनः U.1.6. (
    -नः) a bad or wicked person, a malicious or mischievous man, villain; दुर्जनः प्रियवादी च नैतद्विश्वास- कारणम् Chāṇ.24,25; शाम्येत्प्रत्यपकारेण नोपकारेण दुर्जनः Ku.2.4. (दुर्जनायते Den. Ā. to become wicked; स्वजनो$पि दरिद्राणां तत्क्षणाद् दुर्जनायते Pt.1.5.). (दुर्जनीकृ [च्वि] to make blameworthy; दुर्जनीकृतास्मि अनेन मां चित्रगतां दर्शयता Nāg.2).
    -जय a. invincible. (
    -यः) N. of Viṣṇu.
    -जर a.
    1 ever youthful; तस्मिन्स्तनं दुर्जरवीर्यमुल्बणं घोराङ्कमादाय शिशोर्दधावथ Bhāg.1.6.1.
    -2 hard (as food), indigestible.
    -3 difficult to be enjoyed; राजश्रीर्दुर्जरा तस्य नवत्वे भूभुजो$भवत् Rāj. T.5.19.
    -जात a.
    1 unhappy, wretched.
    -2 bad-tempered, bad, wicked; Rāj. T.3. 142.
    -3 false, not genuine. ˚जीयिन् a. one who is born in vain; यो न यातयते वैरमल्पसत्त्वोद्यमः पुमान् । अफलं जन्म तस्याहं मन्ये दुर्जातजायिनः ॥ Mb.
    (-तम्) 1 a misfortune, calamity, difficulty; त्वं तावद् दुर्जाते मे$त्यन्तसाहाय्यकारिणी भव M.3; दुर्जातबन्धुः R.13.72. 'a friend in need or adversity.'
    -2 impropriety.
    -जाति a.
    1 bad natured, vile, wicked; रुदितशरणा दुर्जातीनां सहस्व रुषां फलम् Amaru.96.
    -2 out- cast. (
    -तिः f.) misfortune, ill condition.
    -ज्ञान, -ज्ञेय a. difficult to be known, incomprehensible. उच्चावचेषु भुतेषु दुर्ज्ञेयामकृतात्मभिः Ms.6.73. (
    -यः) N. of Śiva.
    -णयः, -नयः, -नीतिः 1 bad conduct.
    -2 impropriety
    -3 in- justice.
    -णामन्, -नामन् a. having a bad name.
    -णीत a.
    1 ill-behaved.
    -2 impolitic.
    -3 forward. (
    -तम्) miscon- duct; दुर्णीतं किमिहास्ति किं सुचरितं कः स्थानलाभे गुणः H.
    -दम, -दमन, -दम्य a. difficult to be subdued, untamable, indomitable.
    -दर्श a.
    1 difficult to be seen.
    -2 dazzling; सुदुर्दर्शमिदं रूपं दृष्टवानसि यन्मन Bg.11.52.
    -दर्शन a. ugly, ill-looking; दुर्दर्शनेन घटतामियमप्यनेन Māl.2.8.
    -दशा a misfortune, calamity.
    -दान्त a.
    1 hard to be tamed or subdued, untamable; Śi.12.22.
    -2 intractable, proud, insolent; दुर्दान्तानां दमनविधयः क्षत्रियेष्वायतन्ते Mv.3.34.
    (-तः) 1 a calf.
    -2 a strife, quarrel.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -दिन a. cloudy, rainy.
    (-नम्) 1 a bad day in general; तद्दिनं दुर्दिनं मन्ये यत्र मित्रागमो हि न Subhāṣ.
    -2 a rainy or cloudy day, stormy or rainy weather; उन्नमत्यकालदुर्दिनम् Mk.5; Ku.6 43; Mv.4.57.
    -3 a shower (of any- thing); द्विषां विषह्य काकुत्स्थस्तत्र नाराचदुर्दिनम् ॥ सन्मङ्गलस्नात इव R.4.41,82;5.47; U.5.5.
    -4 thick darkness; जीमूतैश्च दिशः सर्वाश्चक्रे तिमिरदुर्दिनाः Mb. (दुर्दिनायते Den. Ā. to become cloudy.)
    -दिवसः a dark or rainy day; Pt.1.173.
    -दुरूटः, -ढः 1 an unbeliever
    -2 an abusive word.
    -दृश a.
    1 disagreeable to the sight, disgusting; दुर्दृशं तत्र राक्षसं घोररूपमपश्यत्सः Mb.1.2.298.
    -2 difficult to be seen; पादचारमिवादित्यं निष्पतन्तं सुदुर्दृशम् Rām.7.33.5.
    -दृष्ट a. ill- judged or seen, wrongly decided; Y.2.35.
    -दैवम् ill-luck, misfortune.
    -द्यूतम् an unfair game.
    -द्रुमः onion (green).
    -धर a.
    1 irresistible, difficult to be stopped.
    -2 difficult to be borne or suffered; दुर्धरेण मदनेन साद्यते Ghat.11; Ms.7.28.
    -3 difficult to be accomplished.
    -4 difficult to be kept in memory. (
    -रः) quicksilver.
    -धर्ष a.
    1 inviolable, unassailable.
    -2 inaccessible; संयोजयति विद्यैव नीचगापि नरं सरित् । समुद्रमिव दुर्धर्षं नृपं भाग्य- मतः परम् ॥ H. Pr.5.
    -3 fearful, dreadful.
    -4 haughty.
    -धी a. stupid, silly.
    -नयः 1 arrogance.
    -2 immorality.
    -3 evil strategy; उन्मूलयितुमीशो$हं त्रिवर्गमिव दुर्नयः Mu.5.22.
    -नामकः piles. ˚अरिः a kind of bulbous root (Mar. सुरण).
    -नामन् m. f. a cockle. (-n.) piles.
    -निग्रह a. irre- pressible, unruly; मनो दुर्निग्रहं चलम् Bg.6.35.
    -निमित a. carelessly put or placed on the ground; पदे पदे दुर्निमिते गलन्ती R.7.1.
    -निमित्तम् 1 a bad omen; R.14.5.
    -2 a bad pretext.
    -निवार, -निवार्य a. difficult to be check- ed or warded off, irresistible, invincible.
    -नीतम् 1 mis- conduct, bad policy, demerit, misbehaviour; दुर्णीतं किमि- हास्ति Pt.2.21; H.1.49.
    -2 ill-luck.
    -नीतिः f. mal- administration; दुर्नीतिं तव वीक्ष्य कोपदहनज्वालाजटालो$पि सन्; Bv.4.36.
    -नृपः a bad king; आसीत् पितृकुलं तस्य भक्ष्यं दुर्नृप- रक्षसः Rāj. T.5.417.
    -न्यस्त a. badly arranged; दुर्न्यस्त- पुष्परचितो$पि Māl.9.44.
    -बल a.
    1 weak, feeble.
    -2 enfeebled, spiritless; दुर्बलान्यङ्गकानि U.1.24.
    -3 thin, lean, emaciated; U.3.
    -4 small, scanty, little; स्वार्थोप- पत्तिं प्रति दुर्बलाशः R.5.12.
    -बाध a. Unrestrained (अनिवार); दुर्बाधो जनिदिवसान्मम प्रवृद्धः (आधिः); Mv.6.28.
    -बाल a.
    1 bald-headed.
    -2 void of prepuce.
    -3 having crook- ed hair.
    -बुद्धि a.
    1 silly, foolish, stupid.
    -2 perverse, evil-minded, wicked; धार्तराष्ट्रस्य दुर्बुद्धेर्युद्धे प्रियचिकीर्षवः (समा- गताः) Bg.1.23
    -बुध a. wicked-minded, silly; Mb. 11.4.18.
    -बोध a. unintelligible, unfathomable, inscru- table; निसर्गदुर्बोधमबोधविक्लवाः क्व भूपतीनां चरितं क्व जन्तवः Ki. 1.6.
    -भग a.
    1 unfortunate, unlucky; श्रीवल्लभं दुर्भगाः (निन्दन्ति) Pt.1.415.
    -2 not possessed of good features, ill-looking.
    -भगा 1 a wife disliked by her husband; दुर्भगाभरणप्रायो ज्ञानं भारः क्रियां विना H.1.17.
    -2 an ill-tempered woman, a shrew.
    -3 a widow;
    -भर a. insupportable, burdensome, heavily laden with (comp.); ततो राजाब्रवीदेतं बहुव्यसनदुर्भरः Ks.112.156.
    -भाग्य a. unfortunate, unlucky. (
    ग्यम्) ill-luck.
    -भावना 1 an evil thought.
    -2 a bad tendency.
    -भिक्षम् 1 scarcity of provisions, dearth, famine; Y.2.147; Ms.8.22; उत्सवे व्यसने चैव दुर्भिक्षे... यस्तिष्ठति स बान्धवः H.1.71; Pt.2.
    -2 want in general.
    -भिद, -भेद, -भेद्य a. firm; सुजनस्तु कनकघटवद् दुर्भेद्यश्चाशु संध्येयः Subhāṣ.
    -भृत्यः a bad servant.
    -भिषज्यम् incurability; Bṛi. Up.4.3.14.
    -भ्रातृ m. a bad brother.
    -मङ्कु a. obstinate, disobedient.
    -मति a.
    1 silly, stupid, foolish, ignorant.
    -2 wicked, evilminded; न सांपरायिकं तस्य दुर्मतेर्विद्यते फलम् Ms.11.3.
    -मद a. drun- ken, ferocious, maddened, infatuated; Bhāg.1.15.7.
    -दः foolish pride, arrogance.
    -दम् the generative organ; ग्रामकं नाम विषयं दुर्मदेन समन्वितः Bhāg.4.25.52.
    -मनस् a. troubled in mind, discouraged, disspirited, sad, malancholy; अद्य बार्हस्पतः श्रीमान् युक्तः पुष्येण राघवः । प्रोच्यतै ब्राह्मणैः प्राज्ञैः केन त्वमसि दुर्मनाः ॥ Rām. [दुर्मनायते Den. Ā. to be troubled in mind, be sad, meditate sorrowfully, to be disconso- late, become vexed or fretted; Māl.3].
    -मनुष्यः a bad or wicked man.
    -मन्त्रः, -मन्त्रितम्, -मन्त्रणा evil advice, bad counsel; दुर्मन्त्रान्नृपतिर्विनश्यति; Pt.1.169.
    -मरम् a hard or difficult death; Mb.14.61.9.
    -मरी a kind of दूर्वा grass.
    -मरणम् violent or unnatural death.
    -मर्ष a.
    1 unbearable; Bhāg.6.5.42.
    -2 obstinate, hostile.
    -मर्षणः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -मर्षित a. provocated, encouraged; एवं दुर्मर्षितो राजा स मात्रा बभ्रुवाहनः Mb.14. 79.13,
    -मर्याद a. immodest, wicked.
    -मल्लिका, -मल्ली a minor drama, comedy, farce; S. D.553.
    -मित्रः 1 a bad friend.
    -2 an enemy.
    -मुख a.
    1 having a bad face, hideous, ugly; Bh.1.9.
    -2 foul-mouthed, abusive, scurrilous; Bh.2.69.
    (-खः) 1 a horse.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 N. of a serpent king (Nm.)
    -4 N. of a monkey (Nm.)
    -5 N. of a year (29th year out of 6 years cycle).
    -मूल्य a. highly priced, dear.
    -मेधस् a. silly, foolish, dull-headed, dull; Pt.1. (-m.) a dunce, dull-headed man, blockhead; ग्रन्थानधीत्य व्याकर्तु- मिति दुर्मेधसो$प्यलम् Śi.2.26.
    -मैत्र a. unfriendly, hostile; Bhāg.7.5.27.
    -यशस् n. ill-repute, dishonour.
    -योगः 1 bad or clumsy contrivance.
    -2 a bad combi- nation.
    -योध, -योधन a. invincible, unconquerable. (
    -नः) the eldest of the 11 sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Gāndhārī. [From his early years he conceived a deep hatred for his cousins the Pāṇḍavas, but particularly Bhīma, and made every effort he could to compass their destruction. When his father pro- posed to make Yudhiṣṭhira heir-apparent, Duryodhana did not like the idea, as his father was the reigning sovereign, and prevailed upon his blind father to send the Pāṇḍavas away into exile. Vāraṇāvata was fixed upon as their abode, and under pretext of constructing a palatial building for their residence, Duryodhana caused a palace to be built mostly of lac, resin and other combustible materials, thereby hoping to see them all destroyed when they should enter it. But the Paṇḍavas were forewarned and they safely escaped. They then lived at Indraprastha, and Yudhiṣṭhira performed the Rājasuya sacrifice with great pomp and splendour. This event further excited the anger and jealousy of Duryodhana, who was already vexed to find that his plot for burning them up had signally failed, and he induced his father to invite the Pāṇḍavas to Hastināpura to play with dice (of which Yudhiṣṭhira was particularly fond). In that gambling-match, Duryodhana, who was ably assisted by his maternal uncle Śakuni, won from Yudhiṣṭhira everything that he staked, till the infatuated gambler staked himself, his brothers, and Draupadī herself, all of whom shared the same fate. Yudhiṣṭhira, as a condition of the wager, was forced to go to the forest with his wife and brothers, and to remain there for twelve years and to pass one addi- tional year incognito. But even this period, long as it was, expired, and after their return from exile both the Pāṇḍavas and Kauravas made great preparations for the inevitable struggle and the great Bhāratī war commenced. It lasted for eighteen days during which all the Kauravas, with most of their allies, were slain. It was on the last day of the war that Bhīma fought a duel with Duryodhana and smashed his thigh with his club.] मोघं तवेदं भुवि नामधेयं दुर्योधनेतीह कृतं पुरस्तात् न हीह दुर्योधनता तवास्ति पलायमानस्य रणं विहाय Mb.4.65.17.
    -योनि a. of a low birth, न कथंचन दुर्योनिः प्रकृतिं स्वां नियच्छति Ms.1.59.
    -लक्ष्य a. difficult to be seen or perceived, hardly visible.
    -क्ष्यम् bad aim; मनः प्रकृत्यैव चलं दुर्लक्ष्यं च तथापि मे Ratn.3.2.
    -लभ a.
    1 difficult to be attained, or accomplished; R.1.67;17.7; Ku.4.4;5.46,61; दुर्लभं भारते जन्म मानुष्यं तत्र दुर्लभम् Subhāṣ.
    -2 difficult to be found or met with, scarce, rare; शुद्धान्तदुर्लभम् Ś.1.17.
    -3 best, excellent, eminent.
    -ग्रामः a village situated close to a large village and inhabited by the free-holders (अग्र- हारोपजीविनः); Māna.1.79-8.
    -4 dear, beloved.
    -5 costly.
    -ललित a.
    1 spoilt by fondling, fondled too much, hard to please; हा मदङ्कदुर्ललित Ve.4; V.2.8; Māl.9.
    -2 (hence) wayward, naughty, illbred, unruly; स्पृहयामि खलु दुर्ललितायास्मै Ś.7. (
    -तम्) waywardness, rudeness.
    -लेख्यम् a forged document. Y.2.91.
    -वच a.
    1 difficult to be described, indescribable. अपि वागधिपस्य दुर्वचं वचनं तद् विदधीत विस्मयम् Ki.2.2.
    -2 not to be talked about.
    -3 speaking improperly, abusing. (
    -चम्) abuse, censure, foul language.
    -वचस् n. abuse, censure; असह्यं दुर्वचो ज्ञातेर्मेघा- न्तरितरौद्रवत् Udb.
    -वर्ण a. bad-coloured.
    -र्णः 1 bad colour.
    -2 impurity; यथा हेम्नि स्थितो वह्निर्दुवर्णं हन्ति धातु- जम् Bhāg.12.3.47.
    (-र्णम्) 1 silver. दुर्वर्णभित्तिरिह सान्द्रसुधासुवर्णा Śi.4.28.
    -2 a kind of leprosy.
    -वस a. difficult to be resided in.
    -वसतिः f. painful residence; R.8.94.
    -वह a. heavy, difficult to be borne; दुर्वहगर्भखिन्नसीता U.2.1; Ku.1.11.
    -वाच् a. speaking ill. (-f.)
    1 evil words, abuse.
    -2 inelegant language or speech.
    -वाच्य a.
    1 difficult to be spoken or uttered.
    -2 abusive, scurrilous.
    -3 harsh, cruel (as words).
    (-च्यम्) 1 censure, abuse.
    -2 scandal, ill-repute.
    -वातः a fart. ˚वातय Den. P. to break wind or fart; इत्येके विहसन्त्येनमेके दुर्वातयन्ति च Bhāg.11.23.4.
    -वादः slander, defamation, calumny.
    -वार, -वारण a. irresistible, unbearable; R.14.87; किं चायमरिदुर्वारः पाणौ पाशः प्रचेतसः Ku.2.21.
    -वासना 1 evil propensity, wicked desire; कः शत्रुर्वद खेददानकुशलो दुर्वासनासंचयः Bv. 1.86.
    -2 a chimera.
    -वासस् a.
    1 ill-dressed.
    -2 naked. (-m.) N. of a very irascible saint or Ṛiṣi, son of Atri and Anasūyā. (He was very hard to please, and he cursed many a male and female to suffer misery and degradation. His anger, like that of Jama- dagni, has become almost proverbial.)
    -वाहितम् a heavy burden; उरोजपूर्णकुम्भाङ्का सदुर्वाहितविभ्रमा Rāj. T.4.18.
    -विगाह, -विगाह्य a. difficult to be penetrated or fathomed, unfathomable.
    -विचिन्त्य inconcei- vable, inscrutable
    -विद a. difficult to be known or discovered; नूनं गतिः कृतान्तस्य प्राज्ञैरपि सुदुर्विदा Mb.7.78. 2.
    -विदग्ध 1 unskilled, raw, foolish, stupid, silly.
    -2 wholly ignorant.
    -3 foolishly puffed up, elated. vainly proud; वृथाशस्त्रग्रहणदुर्विदग्ध Ve.3; ज्ञानलवदुर्विदग्धं ब्रह्मापि नरं न रञ्जयति Bh.2.3.
    -विद्ध a. Badly perforated (a pearl); Kau. A.2.11.
    -विद्य a. uneducated; Rāj. T.1.354.
    -विध a.
    1 mean, base, low.
    -2 wicked, vile.
    -3 poor, indigent; विदधाते रुचिगर्वदुर्विधम् N.2.23.
    -4 stupid, foolish, silly; विविनक्ति न बुद्धिदुर्विधः Śi.16.39.
    -विनयः misconduct, imprudence.
    -विनीत a.
    1 (a) badly educated, ill-mannered; ill-behaved, wicked; शासितरि दुर्विनीतानाम् Ś.1.24. (b) rude, naughty, mis- chievous.
    -2 stubborn, obstinate.
    (-तः) 1 a restive or untrained horse.
    -2 a wayward person, reprobate.
    -विपाक a. producing bad fruit; श्रितासि चन्दनभ्रान्त्या दुर्विपाकं विषद्रुमम् U.1.46.
    (-कः) 1 bad result or conse- quence; U.1.4; किं नो विधिरिह वचने$प्यक्षमो दुर्विपाकः Mv. 6.7.
    -2 evil consequences of acts done either in this or in a former birth.
    -विभाव्य a. inconceivable; also दुर्विभाव; असद्वृत्तेरहो वृत्तं दुर्विभावं विधेरिव Ki.11.56.
    -विमर्श a. difficult to be tried or examined; यो दुर्विमर्शपथया निजमाययेदं सृष्ट्वा गुणान्विभजते तदनुप्रविष्टः Bhāg.1.49.29.
    -विलसितम् a wayward act, rudeness, naughtiness; डिम्भस्य दुर्विलसितानि मुदे गुरूणाम् B. R.4.6.
    -विलासः a bad or evil turn of fate; U.1.
    -विवाहः a censurable marriage; इतरेषु तु शिष्टेषु नृशंसानृतवादिनः । जायन्ते दुर्विवाहेषु ब्रह्मधर्मद्विषः सुताः ॥ Ms.3.41.
    -विष a. ill-natured, malignant. (
    -षः) N. of Śiva.
    -विषह a. unbearable, intolerable, irresistible. (
    -हः) N. of Śiva.
    -वृत्त a.
    1 vile, wicked, ill-behaved.
    -2 roguish. (
    -त्तम्) misconduct, ill-behaviour. दुर्वृत्तवृत्तशमनं तव देवि शीलम् Devīmāhātmya.
    -वृत्तिः f.
    1 misconduct.
    -2 misery, want, distress.
    -3 fraud.
    -वृष्टिः f. insufficient rain, drought.
    -वेद a. difficult to be known or ascertained.
    -व्यवहारः a wrong judgment in law.
    -व्यवहृतिः f. ill-report or rumour.
    -व्यसनम् 1 a fond pursuit or resolve; Mu.3.
    -2 bad propensity, vice; तेन दुर्व्यसनेनासीद्भोजने$पि कदर्थना Ks.73.73.
    -व्रत a. not conforming to rules, disobedient.
    -हुतम् a badly offered sacrifice.
    -हृद् a. wicked-hearted, ill-disposed, inimical; अकुर्वतोर्वां शुश्रूषां क्लिष्टयोर्दुर्हृदा भृशम् Bhāg.1.45.9. (-m.) an enemy.
    -हृदय a. evil-minded, evil-intention- ed, wicked.
    -हृषीक a. having defective organs of sense.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > दुर् _dur

  • 60 tout

    c black tout, toute [tu, tut]
    ━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━
    (masculine plural tous, feminine plural toutes)
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ► Lorsque tout fait partie d'une locution comme en tout cas, tout le temps, reportez-vous aussi à l'autre mot.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    1. <
       a. ( = entier)
       b. ( = unique) only
    • pour tout mobilier, il avait un lit et une table the only furniture he had was a bed and a table
       c. (indéfini)
    ► tout, toute + nom singulier ( = n'importe quel) any
    • pour tout renseignement, téléphoner... for information, ring...► à toute ! (inf) see you later!
    ► tous les, toutes les + nom pluriel ( = chaque) every ; ( = la totalité des) all the
    2. <
    • tout ce que je sais, c'est qu'il est parti all I know is that he's gone
    • l'organisation a tout d'une secte the organization is nothing less than a sect► à tout va (inf) [licencier, investir, recruter] like mad (inf) ; [libéralisme, communication, consommation] unbridled
    • à l'époque, on construisait à tout va at that time there were buildings going up everywhere► en tout ( = au total) in all
    • ça coûte 1 000 € en tout it costs 1,000 euros in all
    • avec les vacances et tout, je n'ai pas eu le temps what with the holidays and all (inf), I didn't have time
    • j'avais préparé le dîner, fait le ménage et tout et tout I'd made the dinner, done the housework and everything► c'est + tout
    • ce sera tout ? will that be all?
    • et ce n'est pas tout ! and that's not all!
    • c'est pas tout ça, mais il est tard (inf) all this is very nice, but it's getting late► ce n'est pas tout de
    • ce n'est pas tout de faire son métier, il faut le faire bien it's not enough just to do your job, you have to do it well
    • cette idée avait surpris et pour tout dire n'avait pas convaincu this idea surprised everybody and, to be honest, wasn't convincing
    c black   b. (pluriel) tous
    • toutes ( = l'ensemble des personnes) all
    • écoutez bien tous ! listen, all of you!
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    ✦ The final s of tous is pronounced only when it is a pronoun.
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    3. <
       a. ► tout + adjectif ( = très) very ; ( = entièrement) quite
    • toute petite, elle aimait la campagne as a very small child she liked the country► tout (+ en) + nom
    • je suis tout ouïe ! I'm all ears!
       b. ( = déjà) tout prêt
       c. ► tout en + participe présent
       d. (locutions)
    • vous êtes d'accord ? -- tout à fait ! do you agree? -- absolutely!► tout à l'heure ( = plus tard) later ; ( = peu avant) a short while ago
    • tout à l'heure tu as dit que... you said earlier that...
    • à tout à l'heure ! see you later!► tout de suite straightaway
    • ce n'est pas pour tout de suite ( = ce n'est pas près d'arriver) it won't happen overnight ; ( = c'est improbable) it's hardly likely to happen
    4. <
       a. ( = ensemble) whole
    • ce n'est pas le tout de s'amuser, il faut travailler there's more to life than enjoying yourself, people have got to work
       c. (locutions)
    • pas du tout ! not at all!
    * * *
    tu
    1.
    toute tut, mpl tous tu adj, tus pron, fpl toutes tut pronom indéfini
    1) tout ( chaque chose) everything; ( n'importe quoi) anything; ( l'ensemble) all

    en tout — ( au total) in all; ( entièrement) in every respect

    tout bien compté or pesé or considéré — all in all

    tout est là — fig that's the whole point

    et tout et tout — (colloq) and all that sort of thing

    ce n'est pas tout (que) de commencer un travail, il faut le finir — it's not enough ou it's all very well to start off a job, it's got to be finished

    2) tous tus, toutes ( la totalité des êtres ou choses) all; (la totalité des éléments d'une catégorie, d'un groupe) all of them/us/you

    toutes tant qu'elles sont — all of them, each and every one of them


    2.

    bois tout ton lait — drink all your milk, drink up your milk

    c'est tout un travail/événement — it's quite a job/an event

    3) (devant ce qui/que/dont) ( l'ensemble) all; ( toutes les choses) everything; ( sans discrimination) anything

    ‘tu en es sûr?’ - ‘tout ce qu'il y a de plus sûr’ — ‘are you sure?’ - ‘as sure as can be’

    4) ( n'importe quel) any

    à tout moment — ( n'importe quand) at any time; ( sans cesse) constantly

    5) ( total)

    en toute innocence/franchise — in all innocence/honesty

    6) (unique, seul)

    il a souri pour toute réponse — his only reply was a smile, he smiled by way of a reply

    en toutes choses — in all things, in everything

    toutes les pages sont déchirées — all the pages are torn, every page is torn

    nous irons tous les deux — both of us will go, we'll both go

    8) ( chaque) tous/toutes les every

    3.
    adverbe (normally invariable, but agrees in gender and in number with feminine adjective beginning with consonant or h-aspirate)
    1) (très, extrêmement) very, quite; ( entièrement) all

    tout étonnées/toutes honteuses — very surprised/ashamed

    tout enfant, elle aimait déjà dessiner — as a small child she already liked to draw

    être tout mouillé/sale — to be all wet/dirty

    c'est tout autre chose, c'est une tout autre histoire — it's a different matter altogether

    c'est tout l'inverse or le contraire — it's the very opposite

    avec toi, c'est tout l'un ou tout l'autre — you see everything in black and white

    tout à côté de/contre/en haut — right by/against/at the top

    ils étaient tout en sang/en sueur — they were covered in blood/bathed in sweat

    4) ( d'avance)
    5) ( en même temps) while; ( bien que) although
    6) (marquant la concession: quoique)

    tout malin/roi qu'il est, il... — he may be clever/a king, but he...

    je suis tout ouïe — hum I'm all ears


    4.
    du tout locution adverbiale

    (pas) du tout, (point) du tout — not at all


    5.
    nom masculin (pl touts)
    1) ( ensemble)

    former un tout — to make up ou form a whole

    mon tout — ( charade) my whole, my all

    2)

    le tout — ( la totalité) the whole lot, the lot; ( l'essentiel) the main thing

    le tout est de réussir — the main ou most important thing is to succeed

    ce n'est pas le tout! — (colloq) this is no good!


    6.
    Tout- (in compounds)

    le Tout-Paris/-Londres — the Paris/London smart set

    Phrasal Verbs:
    ••

    ••
    Quand tout fait partie d'une locution figée comme tous feux éteints, à tout hasard, de toute(s) part(s), tout compte fait, après tout etc, qu'il est fréquemment associé à un adjectif ou un adverbe donné comme tout nu, tout neuf, tout plein, tout simplement etc, la traduction sera donnée sous le terme principal
    1. Lorsque tout, adjectif singulier, exprime la totalité, plusieurs traductions sont possibles mais non toujours interchangeables. De manière générale
    On emploiera all lorsque le mot qualifié est non dénombrable: tout le vin/l'argent = all the wine/the money; tout ce bruit/leur talent = all that noise/their talent; c'est tout ce que je sais = that's all I know
    On emploiera the whole si tout peut être remplacé par entier: tout le gâteau/groupe = the whole cake/group
    tout un dans le sens de entier se traduit toujours par a whole: tout un livre = a whole book
    Mais: connaître tout Zola/le Japon = to know the whole of Zola/Japan; lire tout ‘Les Misérables’ = to read the whole of ‘Les Misérables’; pendant tout mon séjour = for the whole of my stay
    Avec certains mots, en particulier les mots désignant la durée ( journée, mois, saison, vie, vacances etc), les collectifs tels que famille, on pourra employer all ou the whole, la seconde traduction étant légèrement plus emphatique: toute ma vie = all my life, the whole of my life
    tout le pays/toute la ville = all the country/town ou = the whole country/town lorsque ces mots désignent la population; au sens géographique, seule la deuxième traduction convient
    2. throughout (ou all through) signifie du début à la fin, d'un bout à l'autre. On l'emploie souvent pour insister sur la durée ou l'étendue devant un terme singulier ou pluriel qui désigne l'espace de temps ou l'événement pendant lequel un fait a lieu, ou encore le territoire sur lequel il a lieu: pendant tout le match/tous ces mois = throughout the match/those months; la rumeur se répandit dans toute la province = the rumour [BrE] spread throughout the province; faire tout le trajet debout = to stand throughout the journey (ou for the whole journey); il neige sur toute la France = it's snowing throughout France (ou all over France)
    Au pluriel, tous, toutes se traduiront par all pour exprimer la totalité, par every pour insister sur les composants d'un ensemble, ou encore par any pour indiquer l'absence de discrimination. On notera que every and any sont suivis du singulier

    ••
    Quand tout fait partie d'une locution figée comme tous feux éteints, à tout hasard, de toute(s) part(s), tout compte fait, après tout etc, qu'il est fréquemment associé à un adjectif ou un adverbe donné comme tout nu, tout neuf, tout plein, tout simplement etc, la traduction sera donnée sous le terme principal
    1. Lorsque tout, adjectif singulier, exprime la totalité, plusieurs traductions sont possibles mais non toujours interchangeables. De manière générale
    On emploiera all lorsque le mot qualifié est non dénombrable: tout le vin/l'argent = all the wine/the money; tout ce bruit/leur talent = all that noise/their talent; c'est tout ce que je sais = that's all I know
    On emploiera the whole si tout peut être remplacé par entier: tout le gâteau/groupe = the whole cake/group
    tout un dans le sens de entier se traduit toujours par a whole: tout un livre = a whole book
    Mais: connaître tout Zola/le Japon = to know the whole of Zola/Japan; lire tout ‘Les Misérables’ = to read the whole of ‘Les Misérables’; pendant tout mon séjour = for the whole of my stay
    Avec certains mots, en particulier les mots désignant la durée ( journée, mois, saison, vie, vacances etc), les collectifs tels que famille, on pourra employer all ou the whole, la seconde traduction étant légèrement plus emphatique: toute ma vie = all my life, the whole of my life
    tout le pays/toute la ville = all the country/town ou = the whole country/town lorsque ces mots désignent la population; au sens géographique, seule la deuxième traduction convient
    2. throughout (ou all through) signifie du début à la fin, d'un bout à l'autre. On l'emploie souvent pour insister sur la durée ou l'étendue devant un terme singulier ou pluriel qui désigne l'espace de temps ou l'événement pendant lequel un fait a lieu, ou encore le territoire sur lequel il a lieu: pendant tout le match/tous ces mois = throughout the match/those months; la rumeur se répandit dans toute la province = the rumour [BrE] spread throughout the province; faire tout le trajet debout = to stand throughout the journey (ou for the whole journey); il neige sur toute la France = it's snowing throughout France (ou all over France)
    Au pluriel, tous, toutes se traduiront par all pour exprimer la totalité, par every pour insister sur les composants d'un ensemble, ou encore par any pour indiquer l'absence de discrimination. On notera que every and any sont suivis du singulier
    * * *
    tu, tut tout, -e tous mpl toutes fpl
    1. adj

    toute la nuit — all night, the whole night

    tout le temps — all the time, the whole time

    c'est toute une affaire; c'est toute une histoire — it's quite a business, it's a whole rigmarole

    2) (avec article pluriel) (= chaque) every, (idée d'intégralité) all

    toutes les deux semaines — every other week, every two weeks

    toutes les trois semaines — every three weeks, every third week

    tous les deux; Nous y sommes allés tous les deux. — We both went., Both of us went.

    Nous y sommes allés tous les trois. — All three of us went.

    Je les ai invités tous les trois. — I invited all three of them.

    3) (sans article) (= n'importe quel)

    à toute heure du jour ou de la nuit — at any time of the day or night, (= seul)

    pour toute nourriture, il avait... — his only food was..., (= chaque)

    de tous côtés; de toutes parts (= de partout) — from everywhere, from every side, (= partout) all around

    2. pron

    tous; toutes — all

    Il a tout fait. — He did everything.

    Il a tout organisé. — He organized everything.

    Je les vois tous. — I can see them all., I can see all of them.

    Je les connais tous. — I know them all., I know all of them.

    Nous y sommes tous allés. — We all went., All of us went.

    Nous y sommes toutes allées. — We all went., All of us went.

    tout de...; Elle a tout d'une mère. — She's a real mother., She's a true mother.

    en tout — all together, altogether

    tout ce que...; tout ce qu'il sait — all he knows

    C'était tout ce qu'il y a de plus chic. — It was the last word in chic., It was the ultimate in chic.

    3. nm

    Ceci forme un tout. — It forms a whole.

    Je prends le tout. — I'll take it all., I'll take the whole lot.

    le tout est de... — the main thing is to...

    4. adv
    1) (= très, complètement) very

    tout près; tout à côté — very near

    Elle habite tout près. — She lives very near.

    le tout premier; la toute première — the very first

    tout seul; toute seule — all alone

    Il est tout seul. — He's all alone.

    Elle est toute seule. — She's all alone.

    Il était tout rouge. — He was all red in the face.

    Elle était toute rouge. — She was all red in the face.

    tout de suite — immediately, straight away

    2)

    tout en... — while...

    Il a fait son travail tout en chantant. — He sang as he worked., He sang while he worked.

    tout à coup; tout d'un coup — suddenly

    tout court; Charles-Henri, pouvez-vous... — Je vous en prie, appelez-moi Charles tout court. — Charles-Henri, could you... — Please, just call me Charles.

    communication par internet, mais aussi communication tout court — communication via the internet, but also simply communication

    tout à l'heure (passé) — just now, a short while ago

    Je l'ai vu tout à l'heure. — I saw him just now., (futur) shortly, in a moment

    Je finirai ça tout à l'heure. — I'll finish it in a moment.

    * * *
    tout ⇒ Note d'usage, toute, mpl tous, fpl toutes
    A pron indéf
    1 tout ( chaque chose) everything; ( n'importe quoi) anything; ( l'ensemble) all; penser à tout to think of everything; tout est prêt everything is ready; le sucre, les graisses, le sel, tout me fait mal sugar, fat, salt, everything is bad for me; être tout pour qn to be everything to sb; tout peut arriver anything can happen; le chien mange (de) tout the dog will eat anything; tout est prétexte à querelle(s) any pretext will do to start a quarrel; tout n'est pas perdu all is not lost; tout ou rien all or nothing; tout ou partie de qch all or part of sth; tout va bien all's well, everything's fine; en tout ( au total) in all; ( entièrement) in every respect; en tout et pour tout all told; et tout ça parce que/pour and all because/for; tout bien compté or pesé or considéré all in all; tout est là fig that's the whole point; c'est tout dire I need say no more; et tout et tout○ and all that sort of thing; et ce n'est pas tout! and that's not all!; ce n'est pas tout (que) de commencer un travail, il faut le finir it's not enough ou it's all very well to start off a job, it's got to be finished; avoir tout d'un singe/assassin to look just like a monkey/murderer; ⇒ bien, monde, salaire, or;
    2 tous, toutes ( la totalité des êtres ou choses) all; (la totalité des éléments d'une catégorie, d'un groupe) all of them/us/you; nous sommes tous des pécheurs we are all sinners; le film n'est pas à la portée de tous the film is not accessible to all; merci à tous thank you all; tous ensemble all together; ce sont tous d'anciens soldats all of them are ou they are all former soldiers; il les a tous cassés he has broken all of them, he's broken them all; il l'a dit devant nous tous he said it in front of all of us; leurs enfants, tous musiciens de talent their children, all of them talented musicians; tous ne sont pas d'accord not all of them agree; toutes tant qu'elles sont all of them, each and every one of them; vous tous qui le connaissez all of you who know him; écoutez-moi tous listen to me, all of you; est-ce que ça conviendra à tous? will it suit everybody ou everyone?
    B adj
    1 ( exprimant la totalité) bois tout ton lait drink all your milk, drink up your milk; tout le reste est à jeter everything else is to be thrown away; manger tout un pain to eat a whole loaf; tout Pompéi a été enseveli the whole of Pompeii was buried; tout Nice se réjouit the whole of ou all Nice rejoiced; il a plu toute la journée it rained all day (long) ou the whole day; pendant toute une année for a whole year; la semaine se passa toute à attendre the whole ou entire week was spent waiting; j'ai passé tout mon dimanche à travailler I spent the whole of ou all Sunday working; je ne l'ai pas vu de tout l'été I haven't seen him all summer; cet enfant est toute ma vie this child is my whole life; c'est tout le plaisir que tu y trouves? is that all the pleasure ou the only pleasure it gives you?; tout le problème est là that's where the problem lies; tout cela ne compte pas none of that counts; le meilleur dentiste de toute la ville the best dentist in town; tout le monde everybody; ⇒ cœur, monde, temps;
    2 ( véritable) c'est tout un travail/événement it's quite a job/an event; il a fait toute une histoire he made a real ou big fuss, he made quite a fuss; c'est tout un art there's a whole art to it;
    3 tout ce qui/que/dont ( l'ensemble) all; ( toutes les choses) everything; ( sans discrimination) anything; tout ce qui compte all that matters; c'est tout ce que je fais that's all I do; tout ce dont j'ai besoin all I need; j'ai acheté tout ce qui était sur la liste I bought everything that was on the list; il dit tout ce qui lui passe par la tête he says anything that comes into his head; tout ce qu'il dit n'est pas vrai not all of what he says is true; tout ce que le village compte d'enfants, tout ce qu'il y a d'enfants dans le village all the children in the village; être tout ce qu'il y a de plus serviable to be most obliging; c'est tout ce qu'on fait de mieux it's the best there is; ‘tu en es sûr?’-‘tout ce qu'il y a de plus sûr’ ‘are you sure?’-‘as sure as can be’, ‘absolutely sure’;
    4 ( n'importe quel) any; à tout âge at any age; de toute nature of any kind; à toute heure du jour ou de la nuit at all times of the day or night; ‘service à toute heure’ ‘24 hour service’; à tout moment ( n'importe quand) at any time; ( sans cesse) constantly; tout prétexte leur est bon they'll jump at any excuse; toute personne qui anyone ou anybody who; toute autre solution serait rejetée any other solution would be rejected; tout autre que lui/toi aurait abandonné anybody else would have given up; toute publicité est interdite all advertising is prohibited; pour toute réclamation, s'adresser à… all complaints should be addressed to…; tout billet n'est pas valable not all tickets are valid; ⇒ vérité;
    5 (sans déterminant: total) en toute innocence/franchise in all innocence/honesty; en toute liberté with complete freedom; donner toute satisfaction to give complete satisfaction; c'est tout bénéfice it's all profit; il aurait tout intérêt à placer cet argent it would be in his best interests to invest this money; partir en toute hâte to leave in a great hurry; un jardin de toute beauté a most beautiful garden; être à toute extrémité to be close to death; ⇒ épreuve, hasard, prix, vitesse;
    6 (unique, seul) il a souri pour toute réponse his only reply was a smile, he smiled by way of a reply; on lui donne quelques légumes pour tous gages all that he gets in the way of wages is a few vegetables; elle a un chien pour toute compagnie the only company she has ou all she has for company is a dog;
    7 tous, toutes ( les uns et les autres sans distinction) all, every (+ v sg); ceci vaut pour tous les candidats this applies to all candidates ou to every candidate; en tous pays in all countries, in every country; en toutes choses in all things, in everything; toutes les pages sont déchirées all the pages are torn, every page is torn; les lettres ont toutes été signées the letters have all been signed; j'ai toutes les raisons de me plaindre I have every reason to complain; tous les hommes sont mortels all men are mortal; il a fait tous les métiers he's done all sorts of jobs; tous les prétextes leur sont bons they'll use any excuse (pour to); meubles tous budgets furniture to suit every pocket; tous deux se levèrent both of them got up, they both got up; nous irons tous les deux both of us will go, we'll both go; je les prends tous les trois/quatre etc I'm taking all three/four etc (of them);
    8 ( chaque) tous/toutes les every; à tous les coins de rue on every street corner; saisir toutes les occasions to seize every opportunity; tous les jours/mois/ans every day/month/year; tous les quarts d'heure/10 mètres every quarter of an hour/10 metres; un cachet toutes les quatre heures one tablet every four hours; tous les deux jours/mois every other day/month; tous les combien? how often?
    C adv (normally invariable, but agrees in gender and in number with feminine adjective beginning with consonant or h-aspirate)
    1 (très, extrêmement) very, quite; ( entièrement) all; tout doucement very gently; ils sont tout contents they are very happy; elles sont tout étonnées/toutes honteuses they are very surprised/ashamed; être tout excité to be very ou all excited; être tout jeune/petit to be very young/small; tout enfant, elle aimait déjà dessiner as a small child she already liked to draw; c'est tout naturel it's quite natural; des yeux tout ronds de surprise eyes wide with surprise; être tout mouillé/sale to be all wet/dirty; tout seul dans la vie all alone in life; faire qch tout seul to do sth all by oneself; c'est tout autre chose, c'est une tout autre histoire it's a different matter altogether;
    2 ( devant un nom) c'est tout le portrait de sa mère she's the spitting ou very image of her mother; c'est tout l'inverse or le contraire it's the very opposite; ça m'en a tout l'air it looks very much like it to me; tu as tout le temps d'y réfléchir you've got plenty of time to think it over; avec toi, c'est tout l'un ou tout l'autre you see everything in black and white;
    3 ( tout à fait) la toute dernière ligne the very last line; les tout premiers fruits de l'été the very first fruits of summer; j'habite tout près I live very close by ou very near; tout près de very close to, very near; tout à côté de/contre/en haut right by/against/at the top; il les a mangés tout crus he ate them raw; un gâteau tout entier a whole cake; j'en sais tout autant que lui I know just as much as he does; c'est tout aussi cher it's just as expensive; vêtue tout de noir, tout de noir vêtue dressed all in black; maison tout en longueur very long and narrow house; un jeu tout en finesse a very subtle game; une semaine toute de fatigue a very tiring week; une vie toute de soucis a life full of worry; ils étaient tout en sang/en sueur they were covered in blood/bathed in sweat; être tout en larmes to be in floods of tears; la colline est tout en fleurs the hill is a mass of flowers; elle est tout(e) à son travail she's totally absorbed in her work;
    4 ( d'avance) tout prêt ready-made; sauces/idées toutes faites ready-made sauces/ideas; des légumes tout épluchés ready-peeled vegetables; ⇒ cuit, vu;
    5 ( en même temps) while; ( bien que) although; il lisait tout en marchant he was reading as he walked; elle le défendait tout en le sachant coupable she defended him although she knew he was guilty; ⇒ en;
    6 (marquant la concession: quoique) tout aussi étrange que cela paraisse however strange it may seem; tout prudemment que l'on conduise however carefully one drives; tout malins qu'ils sont, ils… clever though they may be, they…, they may be clever, but they…; toute reine qu'elle est, elle ne peut pas faire ça she may be a queen, but she can't do that;
    7 ( rien d'autre que) être tout énergie/muscle to be all energy/muscle; être tout sourires to be all smiles; je suis tout ouïe hum I'm all ears; veste tout cuir/laine all leather/wool jacket; ⇒ feu, sucre.
    D du tout loc adv pas du tout, point du tout liter not at all; sans savoir du tout without knowing at all; je ne le vois plus du tout I don't see him at all now; il ne m'en reste plus du tout I have none left at all; crois-tu qu'il m'ait remercié? du tout! do you think he thanked me? not at all!
    E nm (pl touts)
    1 ( ensemble) former un tout to make up ou form a whole; mon tout ( charade) my whole, my all; du tout au tout completely;
    2 le tout ( la totalité) the whole lot, the lot; ( l'essentiel) the main thing; vendre le tout pour 200 euros to sell the (whole) lot for 200 euros; le tout est de réussir/qu'il réussisse the main ou most important thing is to succeed/that he should succeed; le Grand Tout Relig the Great Whole; ce n'est pas le tout○! this is no good!
    F tout- ( in compounds) le Tout-Paris/-Londres the Paris/London smart set.
    tout à coup suddenly; tout d'un coup ( soudain) suddenly; ( à la fois) all at once; tout à fait ( entièrement) quite, absolutely; ce n'est pas tout à fait vrai/pareil it's not quite true/the same thing; c'est tout à fait vrai it's quite ou absolutely true; ‘tu es d'accord?’-‘tout à fait’ ‘do you agree?’-‘absolutely’; il est tout à fait charmant he's absolutely ou perfectly charming; être tout à fait pour/contre to be totally for/against; tout à l'heure ( bientôt) in a moment; ( peu avant) a little while ago, just now; à tout à l'heure! see you later!; tout de même ( quand même) all the same, even so; ( indigné) tout de même! really!, honestly!; ( vraiment) quite; tu aurais tout de même pu faire attention! all the same ou even so you might have been careful!; c'est tout de même un peu fort! really ou honestly, it's a bit much!; c'est tout de même bizarre que it's quite strange that; tout de suite at once, straight away; ce n'est pas pour tout de suite ( ce n'est pas pressé) there's no rush; ( ce sera long) it's going to take some time.
    tout est bien qui finit bien all's well that ends well; être tout yeux tout oreilles to be very attentive.
    [tu, devant voyelle ou h muet tut ] ( féminin toute [tut], pluriel masculin tous [ adjectif tu, pronom tus], pluriel féminin toutes [tut]) adjectif qualificatif (au singulier)
    tout ceci/cela all (of) this/that
    j'ai tout mon temps I've plenty of time ou all the time in the world
    avec lui, c'est tout l'un ou tout l'autre with him, it's either (all) black or (all) white
    2. [devant un nom propre] all
    j'ai visité tout Paris en huit jours I saw all ou the whole of Paris in a week
    3. [devant un nom sans article]
    en toute franchise/simplicité in all sincerity/simplicity
    4. [avec une valeur emphatique]
    5. (comme adverbe) [entièrement] completely
    6. [unique, seul] only
    7. [suivi d'une relative]
    tout ce qui me gêne, c'est la différence d'âge the only thing ou all I'm worried about is the age difference
    ————————
    [tu, devant voyelle ou h muet tut ] ( féminin toute [tut], pluriel masculin tous [ adjectif tu, pronom tus], pluriel féminin toutes [tut]) déterminant (adjectif indéfini)
    A.[AU SINGULIER] [chaque, n'importe quel] any, all, every
    tout citoyen a des droits every citizen has rights, all citizens have rights
    pour tout renseignement, écrivez-nous for further information, write to us
    de tout temps since time immemorial, from the beginning of time
    en tout temps throughout ou all through history
    tout autre que lui aurait refusé anyone other than him ou anybody else would have refused
    B.[AU PLURIEL]
    1. [exprimant la totalité] all
    tous les hommes all men, the whole of mankind
    tous les gens everybody, everyone
    2. [devant un nom sans article]
    ils étaient 150 000, toutes disciplines/races confondues there were 150,000 of them, taking all disciplines/races together
    3. [exprimant la périodicité] every
    toutes les deux semaines every other week, every second week, every two weeks
    ————————
    [tu, devant voyelle ou h muet tut ] ( féminin toute [tut], pluriel masculin tous [ adjectif tu, pronom tus], pluriel féminin toutes [tut]) pronom indéfini
    A.[AU SINGULIER] everything, all
    [n'importe quoi] anything
    t'as tout compris! (familier) that's it!, that's right!
    ce sera tout? [dans un magasin] will be that all?, anything else?
    ce n'est pas tout de faire des enfants, il faut les élever ensuite having children is one thing, but then you've got to bring them up
    être tout pour quelqu'un to be everything for somebody, to mean everything to somebody
    on aura tout vu! now I've ou we've seen everything!
    a. [objets] that's everything
    b. [problème] that's the whole point ou the crux of the matter
    avec toi c'est tout ou rien with you, it's all or nothing ou one extreme or the other
    tout se passe comme si... it's as though...
    tout bien considéré, tout bien réfléchi all things considered
    B.[AU PLURIEL]
    1. [désignant ce dont on a parlé]
    il y a plusieurs points de vue, tous sont intéressants there are several points of view, they are all interesting
    2. [avec une valeur récapitulative] all
    Jean, Pierre, Jacques, tous voulaient la voir Jean, Pierre, Jacques, they all wanted to see her
    3. [tout le monde]
    à vous tous qui m'avez aidé, merci to all of you who helped me, thank you
    tous tant ou autant que nous sommes all of us, every (single) one of us
    tout ( féminin toute, pluriel féminin toutes) adverbe (s'accorde en genre et en nombre devant un adjectif féminin commençant par une consonne ou un h aspiré)
    1. [entièrement, tout à fait] quite, very, completely
    sa chevelure était toute hérissée his/her hair was all messy
    ses tout premiers mots his/her very first words
    tout mouillé wet ou soaked through, drenched
    tout simplement/autrement quite simply/differently
    téléphone-moi, tout simplement just phone me, that's the easiest (way)
    une toile tout coton a 100% cotton cloth, an all cotton material
    il est toute bonté/générosité he is goodness/generosity itself
    ça, c'est tout lui! that's typical of him ou just like him!
    2. [en intensif]
    tout en haut/bas right at the top/bottom
    3. [déjà]
    tout prêt ou préparé ready-made
    tout bébé, elle dansait déjà even as a baby, she was already dancing
    4. (avec un gérondif) [indiquant la simultanéité]
    [indiquant la concession]
    tout en avouant son ignorance dans ce domaine, il continuait à me contredire although he'd confessed his ignorance in that field, he kept on contradicting me
    tout nom masculin
    1. [ensemble] whole
    mon tout est un instrument de musique [dans une charade] my whole ou all is a musical instrument
    2. [l'essentiel]
    le tout the main ou the most important thing
    ce n'est pas le tout, mais je dois partir (familier) that's all very well, but I've got to go now
    ce n'est pas le tout de critiquer, il faut pouvoir proposer autre chose it's not enough to criticize, you've got to be able to suggest something else
    jouer ou risquer le tout pour le tout to risk (one's) all
    c'est un tout it's all the same, it makes no difference
    ————————
    du tout locution adverbiale
    je vous dérange? — du tout, du tout! am I disturbing you? — not at all ou not in the least!
    ————————
    en tout locution adverbiale
    1. [au total] in total, in all
    2. [exactement] exactly, entirely
    en tout et pour tout locution adverbiale
    en tout et pour tout, nous avons dépensé 300 euros all in all, we've spent 300 euros
    tout à coup locution adverbiale
    tout à fait locution adverbiale
    1. [complètement] quite, fully, absolutely
    2. [exactement] exactly
    c'est tout à fait ce que je cherche/le même it's exactly what I've been looking for/the same
    3. [oui] certainly
    ————————
    tout de même locution adverbiale
    1. [malgré tout] all the same, even so
    j'irai tout de même all the same, I'll still go
    2. [en intensif]
    tout de même, tu exagères! steady on!, that's a bit much!
    ————————
    tout de suite locution adverbiale
    1. [dans le temps] straight away, right away, at once
    2. [dans l'espace] immediately
    ————————
    tout... que locution conjonctive
    tout directeur qu'il est ou qu'il soit,... he may well be the boss,...

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > tout

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • The Great King — Directed by Veit Harlan Written by Veit Harlan Gerhard Menzel Hans Rehberg Starring Otto Gebühr Cinematography …   Wikipedia

  • King Sejong the Great class destroyer — The Sejong the Great class destroyers (Sejongdaewang Ham or Hangul: 세종대왕급 구축함), also known as KDX III, are guided missile destroyers of the Republic of Korea Navy. The lead ship was launched 25th May 2007, sponsored by Kwon Yang sook, the First… …   Wikipedia

  • The Assassin King — is the sixth book in the Elizabeth Haydon series, the Symphony of Ages, released December 26th, 2006.The Assassin King opens with the arrival by sea of a mysterious hunter who endlessly chants the names of demons that are his intended victims, as …   Wikipedia

  • The Lion King — This article is about Disney s 1994 film. For the franchise, see The Lion King (franchise). For the ferry, see MS Kongshavn. The Lion King …   Wikipedia

  • The Reluctant King — Infobox Book | name = The Reluctant King title orig = translator = image caption = first edition of The Reluctant King author = L. Sprague de Camp illustrator = cover artist = country = United States language = English series = Novarian series… …   Wikipedia

  • The Vagabond King — This article is about the operetta, for the films see: The Vagabond King (1930 film) and The Vagabond King (1956 film) Infobox Musical name= The Vagabond King subtitle= caption= music= Rudolf Friml lyrics= Brian Hooker W.H. Post book= Brian… …   Wikipedia

  • The Mad King — infobox Book | name = The Mad King orig title = translator = image caption = Dust jacket from the first edition of The Mad King author = Edgar Rice Burroughs cover artist = country = United States language = English series = genre = Ruritanian… …   Wikipedia

  • The High King — infobox Book | name = The High King title orig = translator = image caption = Dust jacket from the 1st edition author = Lloyd Alexander cover artist = Evaline Ness country = United States language = English series = The Chronicles of Prydain… …   Wikipedia

  • The Frost King — Infobox Short story name = The Frost King title orig = Autumn Leavescite web |last=Sullivan |first=Anne |authorlink=Anne Sullivan |title=Mis Sullivan s Account of the Frost King |work=The Story of My Life… …   Wikipedia

  • The Great Deceiver — Концертный …   Википедия

  • The Great Movie Ride — Localisation Parc : Disney s Hollywood Studios Zone : Hollywood Boulevard Lieu  …   Wikipédia en Français

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»